Family Medicine

Current Clinical Strate-
gies
Family Medicine
Year 2004 Edition
Paul D. Chan, MD
Christopher R. Winkle, MD
Peter J. Winkle, MD
Current Clinical Strategies

Publishing
www.ccspublishing.com/ccs
Digital Book and Updates
Purchasers of this book can download the Palm, Pocket
PC, Windows CE, Windows or Macintosh version and
updates at the Current Clinical Strategies Publishing web
site: www.ccspublishing.com/ccs/fm.htm.
Copyright © 2004 Current Clinical Strategies Publishing.

All rights reserved. This book, or any parts thereof, may
not be reproduced or stored in an information retrieval
network without the written permission of the publisher.
The reader is advised to consult the package insert and
other references before using any therapeutic agent. The
publisher disclaims any liability, loss, injury, or damage
incurred as a consequence, directly or indirectly, of the
use and application of any of the contents of this text.
Current Clinical Strategies Publishing

27071 Cabot Road
Laguna Hills, California 92653
Phone: 800-331-8227; 949-348-8404
Fax: 800-965-9420; 949-348-8405
Internet: www.ccspublishing.com/ccs
E-mail: [email protected]
Printed in USA ISBN 1929622-36-8

INTERNAL MEDICINE
Medical Documentation
History and Physical Examination
Identifying Data: Patient's name; age, race, sex. List the
patient’s significant medical problems. Name of infor-
mant (patient, relative).
Chief Compliant: Reason given by patient for seeking
medical care and the duration of the symptom. List all
of the patients medical problems.
History of Present Illness (HPI): Describe the course of
the patient's illness, including when it began, character
of the symptoms, location where the symptoms began;
aggravating or alleviating factors; pertinent positives
and negatives. Describe past illnesses or surgeries,
and past diagnostic testing.
Past Medical History (PMH): Past diseases, surgeries,
hospitalizations; medical problems; history of diabetes,
hypertension, peptic ulcer disease, asthma, myocardial
infarction, cancer. In children include birth history,
prenatal history, immunizations, and type of feedings.
Medications:
Allergies: Penicillin, codeine?
Family History: Medical problems in family, including the
patient's disorder. Asthma, coronary artery disease,
heart failure, cancer, tuberculosis.
Social History: Alcohol, smoking, drug usage. Marital
status, employment situation. Level of education.
Review of Systems (ROS):
General: Weight gain or loss, loss of appetite, fever,
chills, fatigue, night sweats.
Skin: Rashes, skin discolorations.
Head: Headaches, dizziness, masses, seizures.
Eyes: Visual changes, eye pain.
Ears: Tinnitus, vertigo, hearing loss.
Nose: Nose bleeds, discharge, sinus diseases.
Mouth and Throat: Dental disease, hoarseness,
throat pain.
Respiratory: Cough, shortness of breath, sputum
(color).
Cardiovascular: Chest pain, orthopnea, paroxysmal
nocturnal dyspnea; dyspnea on exertion, claudication,
edema, valvular disease.
Gastrointestinal: Dysphagia, abdominal pain,
nausea, vomiting, hematemesis, diarrhea, constipa-
tion, melena (black tarry stools), hematochezia (bright
red blood per rectum).
Genitourinary: Dysuria, frequency, hesitancy,
hematuria, discharge.
Gynecological: Gravida/para, abortions, last men-
strual period (frequency, duration), age of menarche,
menopause; dysmenorrhea, contraception, vaginal
bleeding, breast masses.
Endocrine: Polyuria, polydipsia, skin or hair changes,
heat intolerance.
Musculoskeletal: Joint pain or swelling, arthritis,
myalgias.
Skin and Lymphatics: Easy bruising,
lymphadenopathy.
Neuropsychiatric: Weakness, seizures, memory
changes, depression.
Physical Examination
General appearance: Note whether the patient appears
ill, well, or malnourished.
Vital Signs: Temperature, heart rate, respirations, blood
pressure.
Skin: Rashes, scars, moles, capillary refill (in seconds).
Lymph Nodes: Cervical, supraclavicular, axillary, ingui-
nal nodes; size, tenderness.
Head: Bruising, masses. Check fontanels in pediatric
patients.
Eyes: Pupils equal round and react to light and accom-
modation (PERRLA); extra ocular movements intact
(EOMI), and visual fields. Funduscopy (papilledema,
arteriovenous nicking, hemorrhages, exudates); scleral
icterus, ptosis.
Ears: Acuity, tympanic membranes (dull, shiny, intact,
injected, bulging).
Mouth and Throat: Mucus membrane color and mois-
ture; oral lesions, dentition, pharynx, tonsils.
Neck: Jugulovenous distention (JVD) at a 45 degree
incline, thyromegaly, lymphadenopathy, masses, bruits,
abdominojugular reflux.
Chest: Equal expansion, tactile fremitus, percussion,
auscultation, rhonchi, crackles, rubs, breath sounds,
egophony, whispered pectoriloquy.
Heart: Point of maximal impulse (PMI), thrills (palpable
turbulence); regular rate and rhythm (RRR), first and
second heart sounds (S1, S2); gallops (S3, S4),
murmurs (grade 1-6), pulses (graded 0-2+).
Breast: Dimpling, tenderness, masses, nipple discharge;
axillary masses.
Abdomen: Contour (flat, scaphoid, obese, distended);
scars, bowel sounds, bruits, tenderness, masses, liver
span by percussion; hepatomegaly, splenomegaly;
guarding, rebound, percussion note (tympanic),
costovertebral angle tenderness (CVAT), suprapubic
tenderness.
Genitourinary: Inguinal masses, hernias, scrotum,
testicles, varicoceles.
Pelvic Examination: Vaginal mucosa, cervical dis-
charge, uterine size, masses, adnexal masses, ova-
ries.
Extremities: Joint swelling, range of motion, edema
(grade 1-4+); cyanosis, clubbing, edema (CCE); pulses
(radial, ulnar, femoral, popliteal, posterior tibial, dorsalis
pedis; simultaneous palpation of radial and femoral
pulses).
Rectal Examination: Sphincter tone, masses, fissures;
test for occult blood, prostate (nodules, tenderness,
size).
Neurological: Mental status and affect; gait, strength
(graded 0-5); touch sensation, pressure, pain, position
and vibration; deep tendon reflexes (biceps, triceps,
patellar, ankle; graded 0-4+); Romberg test (ability to
stand erect with arms outstretched and eyes closed).
Cranial Nerve Examination:
I: Smell
II: Vision and visual fields
III, IV, VI: Pupil responses to light, extraocular eye
movements, ptosis
V: Facial sensation, ability to open jaw against resis-
tance, corneal reflex.
VII: Close eyes tightly, smile, show teeth
VIII: Hears watch tic; Weber test (lateralization of
sound when tuning fork is placed on top of head);
Rinne test (air conduction last longer than bone
conduction when tuning fork is placed on mastoid
process)
IX, X: Palette moves in midline when patient says
“ah,” speech
XI: Shoulder shrug and turns head against resistance
XII: Stick out tongue in midline
Labs: Electrolytes (sodium, potassium, bicarbonate,
chloride, BUN, creatinine), CBC (hemoglobin,
hematocrit, WBC count, platelets, differential); X-rays,
ECG, urine analysis (UA), liver function tests (LFTs).
Assessment (Impression): Assign a number to each
problem and discuss separately. Discuss differential
diagnosis and give reasons that support the working
diagnosis; give reasons for excluding other diagnoses.
Plan: Describe therapeutic plan for each numbered
problem, including testing, laboratory studies, medica-
tions, and antibiotics.
Admission Check List

1. Call and request old chart, ECG, and X-rays.
2. Stat labs: CBC, Chem 7, cardiac enzymes
(myoglobin, troponin, CPK), INR, PTT, C&S, ABG, UA.
3. Labs: Toxicology screens and drug levels.
4. Cultures: Blood culture x 2, urine and sputum culture
(before initiating antibiotics), sputum Gram stain,
urinalysis.
5. CXR, ECG, diagnostic studies.
6. Discuss case with resident, attending, and family.
Progress Notes
Daily progress notes should summarize developments in
a patient's hospital course, problems that remain
active, plans to treat those problems, and arrange-
ments for discharge. Progress notes should address
every element of the problem list.
Progress Note
Date/time:
Subjective: Any problems and symptoms of the
patient should be charted. Appetite, pain, head-
aches or insomnia may be included.
Objective:
General appearance.
Vitals, including highest temperature over past 24
hours. Fluid I/O (inputs and outputs), including
oral, parenteral, urine, and stool volumes.
Physical exam, including chest and abdomen, with
particular attention to active problems. Emphasize
changes from previous physical exams.
Labs: Include new test results and circle abnormal
values.
Current medications: List all medications and
dosages.
Assessment and Plan: This section should be
organized by problem. A separate assessment
and plan should be written for each problem.
Procedure Note
A procedure note should be written in the chart when a
procedure is performed. Procedure notes are brief
operative notes.
Procedure Note
Date and time:

Procedure:
Indications:
Patient Consent: Document that the indications
and risks were explained to the patient and that
the patient consented: “The patient understands
the risks of the procedure and consents in writ-
ing.”
Lab tests: Relevant labs, such as the INR and
CBC
Anesthesia: Local with 2% lidocaine
Description of Procedure: Briefly describe the
procedure, including sterile prep, anesthesia
method, patient position, devices used, anatomic
location of procedure, and outcome.
Complications and Estimated Blood Loss
(EBL):
Disposition: Describe how the patient tolerated
the procedure.
Specimens: Describe any specimens obtained
and labs tests which were ordered.
Discharge Note
The discharge note should be written in the patient’s
chart prior to discharge.
Discharge Note
Date/time:
Diagnoses:
Treatment: Briefly describe treatment provided
during hospitalization, including surgical proce-
dures and antibiotic therapy.
Studies Performed: Electrocardiograms, CT
scans.
Discharge Medications:
Follow-up Arrangements:
Discharge Summary
Patient's Name and Medical Record Number:
Date of Admission:
Date of Discharge:
Admitting Diagnosis:
Discharge Diagnosis:
Attending or Ward Team Responsible for Patient:
Surgical Procedures, Diagnostic Tests, Invasive
Procedures:
Brief History, Pertinent Physical Examination, and
Laboratory Data: Describe the course of the patient's
disease up until the time that the patient came to the
hospital, including physical exam and laboratory data.
Hospital Course: Describe the course of the patient's
illness while in the hospital, including evaluation,
treatment, medications, and outcome of treatment.
Discharged Condition: Describe improvement or
deterioration in the patient's condition, and describe
present status of the patient.
Disposition: Describe the situation to which the patient
will be discharged (home, nursing home), and indicate
who will take care of patient.
Discharged Medications: List medications and instruc-
tions for patient on taking the medications.
Discharged Instructions and Follow-up Care: Date of
return for follow-up care at clinic; diet, exercise.
Problem List: List all active and past problems.
Copies: Send copies to attending, clinic, consultants.
Prescription Writing
• Patient’s name:
• Date:
• Drug name, dosage form, dose, route, frequency
(include concentration for oral liquids or mg strength
for oral solids): Amoxicillin 125mg/5mL 5 mL PO tid
• Quantity to dispense: mL for oral liquids, # of oral
solids
• Refills: If appropriate
• Signature
Cardiovascular Disorders
ST-Segment Elevation Myocardial
Infarction
1. Admit to: Coronary care unit
2. Diagnosis: Rule out myocardial infarction
3 Condition:
4. Vital Signs: q1h. Call physician if pulse >90,<60; BP
>150/90, <90/60; R>25, <12; T >38.5/C.
5. Activity: Bed rest with bedside commode.
7. Nursing: Guaiac stools. If patient has chest pain,
obtain 12-lead ECG and call physician.
8. Diet: Cardiac diet, 1-2 gm sodium, low fat, low choles-
terol diet. No caffeine or temperature extremes.
9. IV Fluids: D5W at TKO
10. Special Medications:
-Oxygen 2-4 L/min by NC.
-Aspirin 325 mg PO, chew and swallow, then aspirin
EC 162 mg PO qd OR Clopidogrel (Plavix) 75 mg
PO qd (if allergic to aspirin).
-Nitroglycerine 10 mcg/min infusion (50 mg in 250-500
mL D5W, 100-200 mcg/mL). Titrate to control
symptoms in 5-10 mcg/min steps, up to 200-300
mcg/min; maintain systolic BP >90 OR
-Nitroglycerine SL, 0.4 mg (0.15-0.6 mg) SL q5min
until pain free (up to 3 tabs) OR
-Nitroglycerin spray (0.4 mg/aerosol spray)1-2 sprays
under the tongue q 5min; may repeat x 2.
-Heparin 60 U/kg IV push, then 12 U/kg/hr by continu-
ous IV infusion for 48 hours to maintain aPTT of
50-70 seconds. Check aPTTq6h x 4, then qd.
Repeat aPTT 6 hours after each heparin dosage
change.
Thrombolytic Therapy
Absolute Contraindications to Thrombolytics: Active
internal bleeding, suspected aortic dissection, known
intracranial neoplasm, previous intracranial hemor-
rhagic stroke at any time, other strokes or
cerebrovascular events within 1 year, head trauma,
pregnancy, recent non-compressible vascular punc-
ture, uncontrolled hypertension (>180/110 mmHg).
Relative Contraindications to Thrombolytics: Absence
of ST-segment elevation, severe hypertension,
cerebrovascular disease, recent surgery (within 2
weeks), cardiopulmonary resuscitation.
A. Alteplase (tPA, tissue plasminogen activator,
Activase):
1. 15 mg IV push over 2 min, followed by 0.75 mg/kg
(max 50 mg) IV infusion over 30 min, followed by
0.5 mg/kg (max 35 mg) IV infusion over 60 min
(max total dose 100 mg).
2. Labs: INR/PTT, CBC, fibrinogen.
B. Reteplase (Retavase):
1. 10 U IV push over 2 min; repeat second 10 U IV
push after 30 min.
2. Labs: INR, aPTT, CBC, fibrinogen.
C. Tenecteplase (TNKase):
<60 kg 30 mg IVP
60-69 kg 35 mg IVP
70-79 kg 40 mg IVP
80-89 kg 45 mg IVP
$90 kg 50 mg IVP
C. Streptokinase (Streptase):
1. 1.5 million IU in 100 mL NS IV over 60 min.
Pretreat with diphenhydramine (Benadryl) 50 mg IV
push AND
Methylprednisolone (Soln-Medrol) 250 mg IV push.
2. Check fibrinogen level now and q6h for 24h until
level >100 mg/dL.
3. No IM or arterial punctures, watch IV for bleeding.
Angiotensin Converting Enzyme Inhibitor:
-Lisinopril (Zestril, Prinivil) 2.5-5 mg PO qd; titrate to
10-20 mg qd.
Long-acting Nitrates:
-Nitroglycerin patch 0.2 mg/hr qd. Allow for nitrate-free
period to prevent tachyphylaxis.
-Isosorbide dinitrate (Isordil) 10-60 mg PO tid [5,10,20,
30,40 mg] OR
-Isosorbide mononitrate (Imdur) 30-60 mg PO qd.
Beta-Blockers: Contraindicated in cardiogenic shock.
-Metoprolol (Lopressor) 5 mg IV q2-5min x 3 doses;
then 25 mg PO q6h for 48h, then 100 mg PO q12h;
hold if heart rate <60/min or systolic BP <100
mmHg OR
-Atenolol (Tenormin), 5 mg IV, repeated in 5 minutes,
followed by 50-100 mg PO qd OR
-Esmolol hydrochloride (Brevibloc) 500 mcg/kg IV over
1 min, then 50 mcg/kg/min IV infusion, titrated to
heart rate >60 bpm (max 300 mcg/kg/min).
Statins:
-Atorvastatin (Lipitor) 10 mg PO qhs OR
-Pravastatin (Pravachol) 40 mg PO qhs OR
-Simvastatin (Zocor) 20 mg PO qhs OR
-Lovastatin (Mevacor) 20 mg PO qhs OR
-Fluvastatin (Lescol)10-20 mg PO qhs.
11. Symptomatic Medications:
-Morphine sulfate 2-4 mg IV push prn chest pain.
-Acetaminophen (Tylenol) 325-650 mg PO q4-6h prn
headache.
-Lorazepam (Ativan) 1-2 mg PO tid-qid prn anxiety
-Zolpidem (Ambien) 5-10 mg qhs prn insomnia.
-Docusate (Colace) 100 mg PO bid.
-Dimenhydrinate (Dramamine) 25-50 mg IV over 2-5
min q4-6h or 50 mg PO q4-6h prn nausea.
-Famotidine (Pepcid) 20 mg IV/PO bid.
12. Extras: ECG stat and in 12h and in AM, portable
CXR, impedance cardiography, echocardiogram.
Cardiology consult.
13. Labs: SMA7 and 12, magnesium. Cardiac enzymes:
CPK-MB, troponin T, myoglobin STAT and q6h for
24h. CBC, INR/PTT, UA.
Non-ST Segment Elevation Myocar-

dial Infarction (NSTEMI)
1. Admit to: Coronary care unit
2. Diagnosis: Unstable Angina
3 Condition:
4. Vital Signs: q1h. Call physician if pulse >90,<60; BP
>150/90, <90/60; R>25, <12; T >38.5/C.
7. Nursing: Guaiac stools. If patient has chest pain,
obtain 12-lead ECG and call physician.
8. Diet: Cardiac diet, 1-2 gm sodium, low fat, low choles-
terol diet. No caffeine or temperature extremes.
-Aspirin 325 mg PO, chew and swallow, then aspirin
EC 162 mg PO qd OR
-Clopidogrel (Plavix) 75 mg PO qd (if allergic to aspi-
rin).
-Nitroglycerine infusion 10 mcg/min infusion (50 mg in
250-500 mL D5W, 100-200 mcg/mL). Titrate to
control symptoms in 5-10 mcg/min steps, up to
200-300 mcg/min; maintain systolic BP >90 OR
-Nitroglycerine SL, 0.4 mg (0.15-0.6 mg) SL q5min
until pain free (up to 3 tabs) OR
-Nitroglycerin spray (0.4 mg/aerosol spray)1-2 sprays
under the tongue q 5min; MR x 2.
-Heparin 60 U/kg IV push, then 12 U/kg/hr by continu-
ous IV infusion for 48 hours to maintain aPTT of
50-70 seconds. Check aPTTq6h x 4, then qd.
Repeat aPTT 6 hours after each heparin dosage
change.
Glycoprotein IIb/IIIa Blockers:
-Eptifibatide (Integrilin) 180mcg/kg IVP, then 2
mcg/kg/min for 72 hours OR
-Tirofiban (Aggrastat) 0.4 mcg/kg/min for 30 min,
then 0.1 mcg/kg/min for 48-108 hours.
Glycoprotein IIb/IIIa blockers for Use With
Angioplasty:
-Abciximab (ReoPro) 0.25 mg/kg IVP, then 0.125
mcg/kg/min IV infusion for 12 hours OR
-Eptifibatide (Integrilin) 180 mcg/kg IVP, then 2
mcg/kg/min for 20-24 hours.
Angiotensin Converting Enzyme Inhibitor:
-Lisinopril (Zestril, Prinivil) 2.5-5 mg PO qd; titrate to
10-20 mg qd.
Long-acting Nitrates:
-Nitroglycerin patch 0.2 mg/hr qd. Allow for nitrate-free
period to prevent tachyphylaxis.
-Isosorbide dinitrate (Isordil) 10-60 mg PO tid [5,10,20,
30,40 mg] OR
-Isosorbide mononitrate (Imdur) 30-60 mg PO qd.
Beta-Blockers: Contraindicated in cardiogenic shock.
-Metoprolol (Lopressor) 5 mg IV q2-5min x 3 doses;
then 25 mg PO q6h for 48h, then 100 mg PO q12h;
keep HR <60/min, hold if systolic BP <100 mmHg
OR
-Atenolol (Tenormin), 5 mg IV, repeated in 5 minutes,
followed by 50-100 mg PO qd OR
-Esmolol (Brevibloc) 500 mcg/kg IV over 1 min, then
50 mcg/kg/min IV infusion, titrated to heart rate >60
bpm (max 300 mcg/kg/min).
Statins:
-Atorvastatin (Lipitor) 10 mg PO qhs OR
-Pravastatin (Pravachol) 40 mg PO qhs OR
-Simvastatin (Zocor) 20 mg PO qhs OR
-Lovastatin (Mevacor) 20 mg PO qhs OR
-Fluvastatin (Lescol)10-20 mg PO qhs.
-Morphine sulfate 2-4 mg IV push prn chest pain.
headache.
-Lorazepam (Ativan) 1-2 mg PO tid-qid prn anxiety.
-Docusate (Colace) 100 mg PO bid.
-Dimenhydrinate (Dramamine) 25-50 mg IV over 2-5
min q4-6h or 50 mg PO q4-6h prn nausea.
12. Extras: ECG stat and in 12h and in AM, portable
CXR, impedance cardiography, echocardiogram.
Cardiology consult.
13. Labs: SMA7 and 12, magnesium. Cardiac enzymes:
CPK-MB, troponin T, myoglobin STAT and q6h for
24h. CBC, INR/PTT, UA.
Congestive Heart Failure
1. Admit to:
2. Diagnosis: Congestive Heart Failure
3. Condition:
4. Vital Signs: q1h. Call physician if P >120; BP >150/-
100 <80/60; T >38.5°C; R >25, <10.
6. Nursing: Daily weights, measure inputs and outputs.
Head-of-bed at 45 degrees, legs elevated.
7. Diet: 1-2 gm salt, cardiac diet.
8. IV Fluids: Heparin lock with flush q shift.
Diuretics:
-Furosemide (Lasix) 10-160 mg IV qd-bid or 20-80 mg
PO qAM-bid [20,40,80 mg] or 10-40 mg/hr IV
infusion OR
-Torsemide (Demadex) 10-40 mg IV or PO qd; max
200 mg/day [5, 10, 20, 100 mg] OR
-Bumetanide (Bumex) 0.5-1 mg IV q2-3h until re-
sponse; then 0.5-1.0 mg IV q8-24h (max 10 mg/d);
or 0.5-2.0 mg PO qAM.
-Metolazone (Zaroxolyn) 2.5-10 mg PO qd, max 20
mg/d; 30 min before loop diuretic [2.5,5,10 mg].
ACE Inhibitors:
-Quinapril (Accupril) 5-10 mg PO qd x 1 dose, then 20-
80 mg PO qd in 1 to 2 divided doses [5,10,20,40 mg]
OR
-Lisinopril (Zestril, Prinivil) 5-40 mg PO qd [5,10,20,40
mg] OR
-Benazepril (Lotensin) 10-20 mg PO qd-bid, max 80
mg/d [5,10,20,40 mg] OR
-Fosinopril (Monopril) 10-40 mg PO qd, max 80 mg/d
[10,20 mg] OR
-Ramipril (Altace) 2.5-10 mg PO qd, max 20 mg/d
[1.25,2.5,5,10 mg].
-Captopril (Capoten) 6.25-50 mg PO q8h [12.5,
25,50,100 mg] OR
-Enalapril (Vasotec) 1.25-5 mg slow IV push q6h or
2.5-20 mg PO bid [5,10,20 mg] OR
-Moexipril (Univasc) 7.5 mg PO qd x 1 dose, then 7.5-
15 mg PO qd-bid [7.5, 15 mg tabs] OR
-Trandolapril (Mavik) 1 mg qd x 1 dose, then 2-4 mg
qd [1, 2, 4 mg tabs].
Angiotensin-II Receptor Blockers:
-Irbesartan (Avapro) 150 mg qd, max 300 mg qd [75,
150, 300 mg].
-Losartan (Cozaar) 25-50 mg bid [25, 50 mg].
-Valsartan (Diovan) 80 mg qd; max 320 mg qd [80, 160
mg].
-Candesartan (Atacand) 8-16 mg qd-bid [4, 8, 16, 32
mg].
-Telmisartan (Micardis) 40-80 mg qd [40, 80 mg].
Beta-blockers:
-Carvedilol (Coreg) 1.625-3.125 mg PO bid, then
slowly increase the dose every 2 weeks to target
dose of 25-50 mg bid [tab 3.125, 6.25, 12.5, 25 mg]
OR
-Metoprolol (Lopressor) start at 12.5 mg bid, then
slowly increase to target dose of 100 mg bid [50, 100
mg].
-Bisoprolol (Zebeta) start at 1.25 mg qd, then slowly
increase to target of 10 mg qd. [5,10 mg].
Digoxin: (Lanoxin) 0.125-0.5 mg PO or IV qd
[0.125,0.25, 0.5 mg].
Inotropic Agents:
-Dobutamine (Dobutrex) 2.5-10 mcg/kg/min IV, max of
14 mcg/kg/min (500 mg in 250 mL D5W, 2 mcg/mL)
OR
-Dopamine (Intropin) 3-15 mcg/kg/min IV (400 mg in
250 cc D5W, 1600 mcg/mL), titrate to CO >4, CI >2;
systolic >90 OR
-Milrinone (Primacor) 0.375 mcg/kg/min IV infusion (40
mg in 200 mL NS, 0.2 mg/mL); titrate to 0.75
m g c / k g / m i n ; a r r h yt h m o g e n i c ; m a y c a u s e
hypotension.
Vasodilators:
-Nitroglycerin 5 mcg/min IV infusion (50 mg in 250 mL
D5W). Titrate in increments of 5 mcg/min to control
symptoms and maintain systolic BP >90 mmHg.
-Nesiritide (Natrecor) 2 mcg/kg IV load over 1 min,
then 0.010 mcg/kg/min IV infusion. Titrate in incre-
ments of 0.005 mcg/kg/min q3h to max 0.03
mcg/kg/min IV infusion.
Potassium:
-KCL (Micro-K) 20-60 mEq PO qd if the patient is
taking loop diuretics.
Pacing:
-Synchronized biventricular pacing if ejection fraction
<40% and QRS duration >150 msec.
-Morphine sulfate 2-4 mg IV push prn dyspnea or
anxiety.
-Heparin 5000 U SQ q12h or enoxaparin (Lovenox) 1
mg/kg SC q12h.
-Docusate sodium (Colace) 100-200 mg PO qhs.
-Famotidine (Pepcid) 20 mg IV/PO q12h.
11. Extras: CXR PA and LAT, ECG now and repeat if
chest pain or palpitations, impedance cardiography,
echocardiogram.
12. Labs: SMA 7&12, CBC; B-type natriuretic peptide
(BNP), cardiac enzymes: CPK-MB, troponin T,
myoglobin STAT and q6h for 24h. Repeat SMA 7 in
AM. UA.
Supraventricular Tachycardia
1. Admit to:
2. Diagnosis: PSVT
3. Condition:
4. Vital Signs: q1h. Call physician if BP >160/90, <90/60;
apical pulse >130, <50; R >25, <10; T >38.5°C
5. Activity: Bedrest with bedside commode.
6. Nursing:
7. Diet: Low fat, low cholesterol, no caffeine.
8. IV Fluids: D5W at TKO.
Attempt vagal maneuvers (Valsalva maneuver) before
drug therapy.
Cardioversion (if unstable or refractory to drug therapy):
1. NPO for 6h, digoxin level must be less than 2.4 and
potassium and magnesium must be normal.
2. Midazolam (Versed) 2-5 mg IV push.
3. If stable, cardiovert with synchronized 10-50 J, and
increase by 50 J increments if necessary. If unsta-
ble, start with 75-100 J, then increase to 200 J and
360 J.
Pharmacologic Therapy of Supraventricular Tachy-
cardia:
-Adenosine (Adenocard) 6 mg rapid IV over 1-2 sec,
followed by saline flush, may repeat 12 mg IV after
2-3 min, up to max of 30 mg total OR
-Verapamil (Isoptin) 2.5-5 mg IV over 2-3min (may give
calcium gluconate 1 gm IV over 3-6 min prior to
verapamil); then 40-120 mg PO q8h [40, 80, 120
mg] or verapamil SR 120-240 mg PO qd [120, 180,
240 mg] OR
-Esmolol hydrochloride (Brevibloc) 500 mcg/kg IV over
1 min, then 50 mcg/kg/min IV infusion titrated to HR
of <80 (max of 300 mcg/kg/min) OR
-Diltiazem (Cardizem) 0.25 mg/kg IV over 2-5 minutes,
followed by 5 mg/h IV infusion. Titrate to max 15
mg/h; then diltiazem-CD (Cardizem-CD)120-240
mg PO qd OR
-Metoprolol (Lopressor) 5 mg IVP q4-6h; then 50-100
mg PO bid, or metoprolol XL (Toprol-XL) 50-100 mg
PO qd OR
-Digoxin (Lanoxin) 0.25 mg q4h as needed; up to 1.0-
1.5 mg; then 0.125-0.25 mg PO qd.
-Lorazepam (Ativan) 1-2 mg PO tid prn anxiety.
11. Extras: Portable CXR, ECG; repeat if chest pain.
Cardiology consult.
12. Labs: CBC, SMA 7&12, Mg, thyroid panel. UA.
Ventricular Arrhythmias
1. Ventricular Fibrillation and Tachycardia:
-If unstable (see ACLS protocol): Defibrillate with
unsynchronized 200 J, then 300 J.
-Oxygen 100% by mask.
-Lidocaine (Xylocaine) loading dose 75-100 mg IV,
then 2-4 mg/min IV OR
-Amiodarone (Cordarone) 300 mg in 100 mL of D5W,
IV infusion over 10 min, then 900 mg in 500 mL of
D5W, at 1 mg/min for 6 hrs, then at 0.5 mg/min
thereafter; or 400 mg PO q8h x 14 days, then 200-
400 mg qd.
-Also see "other antiarrhythmics" below.
2. Torsades De Pointes Ventricular Tachycardia:
-Correct underlying cause and consider discontinuing
quinidine, procainamide, disopyramide, moricizine,
amiodarone, sotalol, Ibutilide, phenothiazine,
haloperidol, tricyclic and tetracyclic antidepres-
sants, ketoconazole, itraconazole, bepridil,
hypokalemia, and hypomagnesemia.
-Magnesium sulfate 1-4 gm in IV bolus over 5-15 min
or infuse 3-20 mg/min for 7-48h until QTc interval
<440 msec.
-Isoproterenol (Isuprel), 2-20 mcg/min (2 mg in 500 mL
D5W, 4 mcg/mL).
-Consider ventricular pacing and/or cardioversion.
3. Other Antiarrhythmics:
Class I:
-Moricizine (Ethmozine) 200-300 mg PO q8h, max 900
mg/d [200, 250, 300 mg].
Class Ia:
-Quinidine gluconate (Quinaglute) 324-648 mg PO q8-
12h [324 mg].
-Procainamide (Procan, Procanbid)
IV: 15 mg/kg IV loading dose at 20 mg/min, fol-
lowed by 2-4 mg/min continuous IV infusion.
PO: 500 mg (nonsustained release) PO q2h x 2
doses, then Procanbid 1-2 gm PO q12h [500, 1000
mg].
-Disopyramide (Nor-pace, Norpace CR) 100-300 mg
PO q6-8h [100, 150, mg] or disopyramide CR 100-
150 mg PO bid [100, 150 mg].
Class Ib:
-Lidocaine (Xylocaine) 75-100 mg IV, then 2-4 mg/min
IV
-Mexiletine (Mexitil) 100-200 mg PO q8h, max 1200
mg/d [150, 200, 250 mg].
-Tocainide (Tonocard) loading 400-600 mg PO, then
400-600 mg PO q8-12h (1200-1800 mg/d) PO in
divided doses q8-12h [400, 600 mg].
-Phenytoin (Dilantin), loading dose 100-300 mg IV
given as 50 mg in NS over 10 min IV q5min, then
100 mg IV q5min prn.
Class Ic:
-Flecainide (Tambocor) 50-100 mg PO q12h, max 400
mg/d [50, 100, 150 mg].
-Propafenone (Rythmol) 150-300 mg PO q8h, max
1200 mg/d [150, 225, 300 mg].
Class II:
-Propranolol (Inderal) 1-3 mg IV in NS (max 0.15
mg/kg) or 20-80 mg PO tid-qid [10, 20, 40, 60, 80
mg]; propranolol-LA (Inderal-LA), 80-120 mg PO qd
[60, 80, 120, 160 mg]
-Esmolol (Brevibloc) loading dose 500 mcg/kg over 1
min, then 50-200 mcg/kg/min IV infusion
-Atenolol (Tenormin) 50-100 mg/d PO [25, 50, 100
mg].
-Nadolol (Corgard) 40-100 mg PO qd-bid [20, 40, 80,
120, 160 mg].
-Metoprolol (Lopressor) 50-100 mg PO bid-tid [50, 100
mg], or metoprolol XL (Toprol-XL) 50-200 mg PO
qd [50, 100, 200 mg].
Class III:
-Amiodarone (Cordarone), PO loading 400-1200 mg/d
in divided doses for 2-4 weeks, then 200-400 mg
PO qd (5-10 mg/kg) [200 mg] or amiodarone
(Cordarone) 300 mg in 100 mL of D5W, IV infusion
over 10-20 min, then 900 mg in 500 mL of D5W, at
1 mg/min for 6 hrs, then at 0.5 mg/min thereafter.
-Sotalol (Betapace) 40-80 mg PO bid, max 320 mg/d
in 2-3 divided doses [80, 160 mg].
4. Extras: CXR, ECG, Holter monitor, signal averaged
ECG, cardiology consult.
5. Labs: SMA 7&12, Mg, calcium, CBC, drug levels. UA.
Hypertensive Emergency
1. Admit to:
2. Diagnosis: Hypertensive emergency
3. Condition:
4. Vital Signs: q30min until BP controlled, then q4h.
5. Activity: Bed rest
6. Nursing: Intra-arterial BP monitoring, daily weights,
inputs and outputs.
7. Diet: Clear liquids.
-Nitroprusside sodium 0.25-10 mcg/kg/min IV (50 mg
in 250 mL of D5W), titrate to desired BP
-Labetalol (Trandate, Normodyne) 20 mg IV bolus
(0.25 mg/kg), then 20-80 mg boluses IV q10-15min
titrate to desired BP or continuous IV infusion of
1.0-2.0 mg/min titrate to desired BP. Ideal in pa-
tients with an aortic aneurysm.
-Fenoldopam (Corlopam) 0.01mcg/kg/min IV infusion.
Adjust dose by 0.025-0.05 mcg/kg/min q15min to
max 0.3 mcg/kg/min. [10 mg in 250 mL D5W].
-Nicardipine (Cardene IV) 5 mg/hr IV infusion, increase
rate by 2.5 mg/hr every 15 min up to 15 mg/hr (25
mg in D5W 250 mL).
-Enalaprilat (Vasotec IV) 1.25- 5.0 mg IV q6h. Do not
use in presence of AMI.
-Esmolol (Brevibloc) 500 mcg/kg/min IV infusion for 1
minute, then 50 mcg/kg/min; titrate by 50
mcg/kg/min increments to 300 mcg/kg/min (2.5 gm
in D5W 250 mL).
-Clonidine (Catapres), initial 0.1-0.2 mg PO followed
by 0.05-0.1 mg per hour until DBP <115 (max total
dose of 0.8 mg).
-Phentolamine (pheochromocytoma), 5-10 mg IV,
repeated as needed up to 20 mg.
-Trimethaphan camsylate (Arfonad)(dissecting aneu-
rysm) 2-4 mg/min IV infusion (500 mg in 500 mL of
D5W).
headache.
11. Extras: Portable CXR, ECG, impedance cardiogra-
phy, echocardiogram.
12. Labs: CBC, SMA 7, UA with micro. TSH, free T4, 24h
urine for metanephrine. Plasma catecholamines, urine
drug screen.
Hypertension
I. Initial Diagnostic Evaluation of Hypertension
A. 15 Lead electrocardiography may document
evidence of ischemic heart disease, rhythm and
conduction disturbances, or left ventricular hyper-
trophy.
B. Screening labs include a complete blood count,
glucose, potassium, calcium, creatinine, BUN, uric
acid, and fasting lipid panel.
C. Urinalysis. Dipstick testing should include glucose,
protein, and hemoglobin.
D. Selected patients may require plasma renin activity,
24 hour urine catecholamines, or renal function
testing (glomerular filtration rate and blood flow).
II. Antihypertensive Drugs
A. Thiazide Diuretics
1. Hydrochlorothiazide (HCTZ, HydroDiuril),
12.5-25 mg qd [25 mg].
2. Chlorothiazide (Diuril) 250 mg qd [250, 500
mg].
3. Thiazide/Potassium Sparing Diuretic Combi-
nations
a. Maxzide (hydrochlorothiazide 50/triamterene
75 mg) 1 tab qd.
b. Moduretic (hyd r o c h l o r othiazide 50
mg/amiloride 5 mg) 1 tab qd.
c. D y a z i d e ( h y d r o c h l o r o t h i a z i d e 2 5
mg/triamterene 37.5) 1 cap qd.
B. Beta-Adrenergic Blockers
1. Cardioselective Beta-Blockers
a. Atenolol (Tenormin) initial dose 50 mg qd,
then 50-100 mg qd, max 200 mg/d [25, 50,
100 mg].
b. Metoprolol XL (Toprol XL) 100-200 mg qd
[50, 100, 200 mg tab ER].
c. Bisoprolol (Zebeta) 2.5-10 mg qd; max 20
mg qd [5,10 mg].
2. Non-Cardioselective Beta-Blockers
a. Propranolol LA (Inderal LA), 80-160 mg qd
[60, 80, 120, 160 mg].
b. Nadolol (Corgard) 40-80 mg qd, max 320
mg/d [20, 40, 80, 120, 160 mg].
c. Pindolol (Visken) 5-20 mg qd, max 60 mg/d
[5, 10 mg].
d. Carteolol (Cartrol) 2.5-10 mg qd [2.5, 5 mg].
C. Angiotensin-Converting Enzyme (ACE) Inhibi-
tors
1. Ramipril (Altace) 2.5-10 mg qd, max 20 mg/day
[1.25, 2.5, 5, 10 mg].
2. Quinapril (Accupril) 20-80 mg qd [5, 10, 20, 40
mg].
3. Lisinopril (Zestril, Prinivil) 10-40 mg qd [2.5, 5,
10, 20, 40 mg].
4. Benazepril (Lotensin) 10-40 mg qd, max 80
mg/day [5, 10, 20, 40 mg].
5. Fosinopril (Monopril) 10-40 mg qd [10, 20 mg].
6. Enalapril (Vasotec) 5-40 mg qd, max 40 mg/day
[2.5, 5, 10, 20 mg].
7. Moexipril (Univasc) 7.5-15 mg qd [7.5 mg].
D. Angiotensin Receptor Blockers
1. Losartan (Cozaar) 25-50 mg bid [25, 50 mg].
2. Valsartan (Diovan) 80-160 mg qd; max 320 mg
qd [80, 160 mg].
3. Irbesartan (Avapro) 150 mg qd; max 300 mg qd
[75, 150, 300 mg].
4. Candesartan (Atacand) 8-16 mg qd-bid [4, 8,
16, 32 mg].
5. Telmisartan (Micardis) 40-80 mg qd [40, 80
mg].
E. Calcium Entry Blockers
1. Diltiazem SR (Cardizem SR) 60-120 mg bid
[60, 90, 120 mg] or Cardizem CD 180-360 mg
qd [120, 180, 240, 300 mg].
2. Nifedipine XL (Procardia-XL, Adalat-CC) 30-
90 mg qd [30, 60, 90 mg].
3. Verapamil SR (Calan SR, Covera-HS) 120-240
mg qd [120, 180, 240 mg].
4. Amlodipine (Norvasc) 2.5-10 mg qd [2.5, 5, 10
mg].
5. Felodipine (Plendil) 5-10 mg qd [2.5, 5, 10 mg].
Syncope
1. Admit to: Monitored ward
2. Diagnosis: Syncope
3. Condition:
4. Vital Signs: q1h, postural BP and pulse q12h. Call
physician if BP >160/90, <90/60; P >120, <50; R>25,
<10
5. Activity: Bed rest.
6. Nursing: Fingerstick glucose.
7. Diet: Regular
8. IV Fluids: Normal saline at TKO.
9. Special medications:
High-grade AV Block with Syncope:
-Atropine 1 mg IV x 2.
-Isoproterenol 0.5-1 mcg/min initially, then slowly titrate
to 10 mcg/min IV infusion (1 mg in 250 mL NS).
-Transthoracic pacing.
Drug-induced Syncope:
-Discontinue vasodilators, centrally acting hypotensive
agents, tranquilizers, antidepressants, and alcohol
use.
Vasovagal Syncope:
-Scopolamine 1.5 mg transdermal patch q3 days.
Postural Syncope:
-Midodrine (ProAmatine) 2.5 mg PO tid, then increase
to 5-10 mg PO tid [2.5, 5 mg]; contraindicated in
coronary artery disease.
-Fludrocortisone 0.1-1.0 mg PO qd.
headache.
11. Extras: CXR, ECG, 24h Holter monitor,
electrophysiologic study, tilt test, CT/MRI, EEG, imped-
ance cardiography, echocardiogram.
12. Labs: CBC, SMA 7&12, CK-MB, troponin T, Mg,
calcium, drug levels. UA, urine drug screen.
Pulmonary Disorders
Asthma
1. Admit to:
2. Diagnosis: Exacerbation of asthma
3. Condition:
4. Vital Signs: q6h. Call physician if P >140; R >30, <10;
T >38.5°C; pulse oximeter <90%
5. Activity: Up as tolerated.
6. Nursing: Pulse oximeter, bedside peak flow rate
before and after bronchodilator treatments.
7. Diet: Regular, no caffeine.
8. IV Fluids: D5 ½ NS at 125 cc/h.
-Oxygen 2 L/min by NC. Keep O2 sat >90%.
Beta Agonists, Acute Treatment:
-Albuterol (Ventolin) 0.5 mg and ipratropium (Atrovent)
0.5 mg in 2.5 mL NS q1-2h until peak flow meter
$200-250 L/min and sat $90%, then q4h OR
-Albuterol (Ventolin) MDI 3-8 puffs, then 2 puffs q3-6h
prn, or powder 200 mcg/capsule inhaled qid.
-Albuterol/Ipratropium (Combivent) 2-4 puffs qid.
Systemic Corticosteroids:
-Methylprednisolone (Solu-Medrol) 60-125 mg IV q6h;
then 30-60 mg PO qd. OR
-Prednisone 20-60 mg PO qAM.
Aminophylline and Theophylline (second-line ther-
apy):
-Aminophylline load dose: 5.6 mg/kg total body weight
in 100 mL D5W IV over 20min. Maintenance of 0.5-
0.6 mg/kg ideal body weight/h (500 mg in 250 mL
D5W); reduce if elderly, heart/liver failure (0.2-0.4
mg/kg/hr). Reduce load 50-75% if taking theophyl-
line (1 mg/kg of aminophylline will raise levels 2
mcg/mL) OR
-Theophylline IV solution loading dose 4.5 mg/kg total
body weight, then 0.4-0.5 mg/kg ideal body
weight/hr.
-Theophylline (Theo-Dur) 100-400 mg PO bid (3 mg/kg
q8h); 80% of total daily IV aminophylline in 2-3
doses.
Inhaled Corticosteroids (adjunct therapy):
-Beclomethasone (Beclovent) MDI 4-8 puffs bid, with
spacer 5 min after bronchodilator, followed by
gargling with water
-Triamcinolone (Azmacort) MDI 2 puffs tid-qid or 4
puffs bid.
-Flunisolide (AeroBid) MDI 2-4 puffs bid.
-Fluticasone (Flovent) 2-4 puffs bid (44 or 110
mcg/puff); requires 1-2 weeks for full effect.
Maintenance Treatment:
-Salmeterol (Serevent) 2 puffs bid; not effective for
acute asthma because of delayed onset of action.
-Pirbuterol (Maxair) MDI 2 puffs q4-6h prn.
-Bitolterol (Tornalate) MDI 2-3 puffs q1-3min, then 2-3
puffs q4-8h prn.
-Fenoterol (Berotec) MDI 3 puffs, then 2 bid-qid.
-Ipratropium (Atrovent) MDI 2-3 puffs tid-qid.
Prevention and Prophylaxis:
-Cromolyn (Intal) 2-4 puffs tid-qid.
-Nedocromil (Tilade) 2-4 puffs bid-qid.
-Montelukast (Singulair) 10 mg PO qd.
-Zafirlukast (Accolate) 20 mg PO bid.
-Zileuton (Zyflo) 600 mg PO qid.
Acute Bronchitis
-Ampicillin/sulbactam (Unasyn) 1.5 gm IV q6h OR
-Cefuroxime (Zinacef) 750 mg IV q8h OR
-Cefuroxime axetil (Ceftin) 250-500 mg PO bid OR
-Trimethoprim/sulfamethoxazole (Bactrim DS), 1 tab
PO bid OR
-Levofloxacin (Levaquin) 500 mg PO/IV PO qd [250,
500 mg].
-Amoxicillin 875 mg/clavulanate 125 mg (Augmentin
875) 1 tab PO bid.
-Docusate sodium (Colace) 100 mg PO qhs.
headache.
11. Extras: Portable CXR, ECG, pulmonary function tests
before and after bronchodilators; pulmonary rehabilitation;
impedance cardiography, echocardiogram.
12. Labs: ABG, CBC with eosinophil count, SMA7, B-type
natriuretic peptide (BNP). Theophylline level stat and after
24h of infusion. Sputum Gram stain, C&S.
Chronic Obstructive Pulmonary

Disease
1. Admit to:
2. Diagnosis: Exacerbation of COPD
3. Condition:
4. Vital Signs: q4h. Call physician if P >130; R >30, <10;
T >38.5°C; O2 Sat <90%.
5. Activity: Up as tolerated; bedside commode.
6. Nursing: Pulse oximeter. Measure peak flow with
portable peak flow meter bid and chart with vital signs.
No sedatives.
7. Diet: No added salt, no caffeine. Push fluids.
8. IV Fluids: D5 ½ NS with 20 mEq KCL/L at 125 cc/h.
-Oxygen 1-2 L/min by NC or 24-35% by Venturi mask,
keep O2 saturation 90-91%.
Beta-Agonists, Acute Treatment:
-Albuterol (Ventolin) 0.5 mg and ipratropium (Atrovent)
0.5 mg in 2.5 mL NS q1-2h until peak flow meter
$200-250 L/min, then q4h OR
-Albuterol (Ventolin) MDI 2-4 puffs q4-6h.
-Albuterol/Ipratropium (Combivent) 2-4 puffs qid.
Corticosteroids and Anticholinergics:
-Methylprednisolone (Solu-Medrol) 60-125 mg IV
q6h or 30-60 mg PO qd. Followed by:
-Prednisone 20-60 mg PO qd.
-Triamcinolone (Azmacort) MDI 2 puffs qid or 4 puffs
bid.
-Beclomethasone (Beclovent) MDI 4-8 puffs bid with
spacer, followed by gargling with water OR
-Flunisolide (AeroBid) MDI 2-4 puffs bid OR
-Ipratropium (Atrovent) MDI 2 puffs tid-qid OR
-Fluticasone (Flovent) 2-4 puffs bid (44 or 110
mcg/puff.
Aminophylline and Theophylline (second line ther-
apy):
-Aminophylline loading dose, 5.6 mg/kg total body
weight over 20 min (if not already on theophylline);
then 0.5-0.6 mg/kg ideal body weight/hr (500 mg in
250 mL of D5W); reduce if elderly, or heart or liver
disease (0.2-0.4 mg/kg/hr). Reduce loading to 50-
75% if already taking theophylline (1 mg/kg of
aminophylline will raise levels by 2 mcg/mL) OR
-Theophylline IV solution loading dose, 4.5 mg/kg total
body weight, then 0.4-0.5 mg/kg ideal body
weight/hr.
-Theophylline long acting (Theo-Dur) 100-400 mg PO
bid-tid (3 mg/kg q8h); 80% of daily IV aminophylline
in 2-3 doses.
Acute Bronchitis
-Ampicillin 1 gm IV q6h or 500 mg PO qid OR
-Trimethoprim/sulfamethoxazole (Septra DS) 160/800
mg PO bid or 160/800 mg IV q12h (10-15 mL in 100
cc D5W tid) OR
-Cefuroxime (Zinacef) 750 mg IV q8h OR
-Ampicillin/sulbactam (Unasyn) 1.5 gm IV q6h OR
-Doxycycline (Vibra-tabs) 100 mg PO/IV bid
-Azithromycin (Zithromax) 500 mg x 1, then 250 mg
PO qd x 4 or 500 mg IV q24h OR
-Clarithromycin (Biaxin) 250-500 mg PO bid OR
-Levofloxacin (Levaquin) 500 mg PO/IV qd [250, 500
mg] OR
-Sparfloxacin (Zagam) 400 mg PO x 1, then 200 mg
PO qd [200 mg].
headache.
11. Extras: Portable CXR, PFT's with bronchodilators,
ECG, impedance cardiography, echocardiogram.
12. Labs: ABG, CBC, SMA7, UA. Theophylline level stat
and after 12-24h of infusion. Sputum Gram stain and
C&S, alpha 1 antitrypsin level.
Hemoptysis
1. Admit to: Intensive care unit
2. Diagnosis: Hemoptysis
3. Condition:
4. Vital Signs: q1-6h. Orthostatic BP and pulse bid. Call
physician if BP >160/90, <90/60; P >130, <50; R>25,
<10; T >38.5°C; O2 sat <90%.
5. Activity: Bed rest with bedside commode. Keep pat-
ient in lateral decubitus, Trendelenburg’s position,
bleeding side down.
6. Nursing: Quantify all sputum and expectorated blood,
suction prn. O2 at 100% by mask, pulse oximeter. Dis-
continue narcotics and sedatives. Have double lumen
endotracheal tube available for use.
7. Diet:
8. IV Fluids: 1 L of NS wide open ($6 gauge), then
transfuse PRBC, Foley to gravity.
-Transfuse 2-4 U PRBC wide open.
-Promethazine/codeine (Phenergan with codeine) 5 cc
PO q4-6h prn cough. Contraindicated in massive
hemoptysis.
-Initiate empiric antibiotics if bronchitis or infection is
present.
10. Extras: CXR PA, LAT, ECG, VQ scan, contrast CT,
bronchoscopy. PPD, pulmonary and thoracic surgery con-
sults.
11. Labs: Type and cross 2-4 U PRBC. ABG, CBC,
platelets, SMA7 and 12, ESR. Anti-glomerular basement
antibody, rheumatoid factor, complement, anti-nuclear
cytoplasmic antibody. Sputum Gram stain, C&S, AFB,
fungal culture, and cytology qAM for 3 days. UA,
INR/PTT, von Willebrand Factor. Repeat CBC q6h.
Anaphylaxis
1. Admit to:
2. Diagnosis: Anaphylaxis
3. Condition:
4. Vital Signs: q1-4h; call physician if BP systolic >160,
<90; diastolic >90, <60; P >120, <50; R>25, <10; T
>38.5°C
5. Activity: Bedrest
6. Nursing: O2 at 6 L/min by NC or mask. Keep patient
in Trendelenburg's position, No. 4 or 5 endotracheal
tube at bedside.
7. Diet: NPO
8. IV Fluids: 2 IV lines. Normal saline or LR 1 L over 1-
2h, then D5 ½ NS at 125 cc/h. Foley to closed drain-
age.
Gastrointestinal Decontamination:
-Gastric lavage if indicated for recent oral ingestion.
-Activated charcoal 50-100 gm, followed by cathartic.
Bronchodilators:
-Epinephrine (1:1000) 0.3-0.5 mL SQ or IM q10min or
1-4 mcg/min IV OR in severe life threatening reac-
tions, give 0.5 mg (5.0 mL of 1: 10,000 sln) IV q5-
10min prn. Epinephrine, 0.3 mg of 1:1000 sln may
be injected SQ at site of allergen injection OR
-Albuterol (Ventolin) 0.5%, 0.5 mL in 2.5 mL NS
q30min by nebulizer prn OR
-Aerosolized 2% racemic epinephrine 0.5-0.75 mL.
Corticosteroids:
-Methylprednisolone (Solu-Medrol) 250 mg IV x 1, then
125 mg IV q6h OR
-Hydrocortisone sodium succinate 200 mg IV x 1, then
100 mg q6h, followed by oral prednisone 60 mg PO
qd, tapered over 5 days.
Antihistamines:
-Diphenhydramine (Benadryl) 25-50 mg IV q4-6h OR
-Hydroxyzine (Vistaril) 25-50 mg IM or PO q2-4h.
Pressors and other Agents:
-Norepinephrine (Levophed) 8-12 mcg/min IV, titrate to
systolic 100 mmHg (8 mg in 500 mL D5W) OR
-Dopamine (Intropin) 5-20 mcg/kg/min IV.
10. Extras: Portable CXR, ECG, allergy consult.
11. Labs: CBC, SMA 7&12.
Pleural Effusion
1. Admit to:
2. Diagnosis: Pleural effusion
3. Condition:
4. Vital Signs: q shift. Call physician if BP >160/90,
<90/60; P>120, <50; R>25, <10; T >38.5°C
5. Activity:
6. Diet: Regular.
8. Extras: CXR PA and LAT, repeat after thoracentesis;
left and right lateral decubitus x-rays, ECG, ultrasound,
PPD; pulmonary consult.
9. Labs: CBC, SMA 7&12, protein, albumin, amylase,
ANA, ESR, INR/PTT, UA. Cryptococcal antigen,
histoplasma antigen, fungal culture.
Thoracentesis:
Tube 1: LDH, protein, amylase, triglyceride, glucose
(10 mL).
Tube 2: Gram stain, C&S, AFB, fungal C&S (20-60
mL, heparinized).
Tube 3: Cell count and differential (5-10 mL, EDTA).
Syringe: pH (2 mL collected anaerobically,
heparinized on ice).
Bag or Bottle: Cytology.
Hematologic Disorders
Anticoagulant Overdose
Unfractionated Heparin Overdose:
1. Discontinue heparin infusion.
2. Protamine sulfate, 1 mg IV for every 100 units of
heparin infused in preceding hour, dilute in 25 mL
fluid IV over 10 min (max 50 mg in 10 min period).
Low Molecular Weight Heparin (Enoxaparin) Over-
dose:
-Protamine sulfate 1 mg IV for each 1 mg of enoxaparin
given. Repeat protamine 0.5 mg IV for each 1 mg of
enoxaparin, if bleeding continues
after 2-4 hours. Measure factor Xa.
Warfarin (Coumadin) Overdose:
-Gastric lavage and activated charcoal if recent oral
ingestion. Discontinue Coumadin and heparin,
and monitor hematocrit q2h.
Partial Reversal:
-Vitamin K (Phytonadione), 0.5-1.0 mg IV/SQ. Check
INR in 24 hours, and repeat vitamin K dose if INR
remains elevated.
Minor Bleeds:
-Vitamin K (Phytonadione), 5-10 mg IV/SQ q12h,
titrated to desired INR.
Serious Bleeds:
-Vitamin K (Phytonadione), 10-20 mg in 50-100 mL
fluid IV over 30-60 min (check INR q6h until
corrected) AND
-Fresh frozen plasma 2-4 units x 1.
-Type and cross match for 2 units of PRBC, and
transfuse wide open.
-Cryoprecipitate 10 U x 1 if fibrinogen is less than100
mg/dL.
Labs: CBC, platelets, PTT, INR.
Deep Venous Thrombosis

1. Admit to:
2. Diagnosis: Deep vein thrombosis
3. Condition:
4. Vital Signs: q shift. Call physician if BP systolic >160,
<90 diastolic, >90, <60; P >120, <50; R>25, <10; T
>38.5°C.
5. Activity: Bed rest with legs elevated.
6. Nursing: Guaiac stools, warm packs to leg prn; mea-
sure calf and thigh circumference qd; no intramuscular
injections.
7. Diet: Regular
Anticoagulation:
-Heparin (unfractionated) IV bolus 5000-10,000 Units
(100 U/kg) IVP, then 1000-1500 U/h IV infusion (20
U/kg/h) [25,000 U in 500 mL D5W (50 U/mL)]. Check
PTT 6 hours after initial bolus; adjust q6h until PTT
1.5-2.0 times control (50-80 sec). Overlap heparin
and warfarin (Coumadin) for at least 4 days and
discontinue heparin when INR has been 2.0-3.0 for
two consecutive days.
-Enoxaparin (Lovenox) 1 mg/kg SQ q12h or 1.5 mg/kg
SQ q24 h for DVT without pulmonary embolism.
Overlap enoxaparin and warfarin as outlined above.
-Warfarin (Coumadin) 5-10 mg PO qd x 2-3 d; maintain
INR 2.0-3.0. Coumadin is initiated on the first or
second day only if the PTT is 1.5-2.0 times control
[tab 1, 2, 2.5, 3, 4, 5, 6, 7.5, 10 mg].
-Propoxyphene/acetaminophen (Darvocet N100) 1-2
tab PO q3-4h prn pain OR
-Hydrocodone/acetaminophen (Vicodin), 1-2 tab q4-6h
PO prn pain.
11. Extras: CXR PA and LAT, ECG; Doppler scan of
legs. V/Q scan, chest CT scan.
12. Labs: CBC, INR/PTT, SMA 7. Protein C, protein S,
antithrombin III, anticardiolipin antibody. UA with dipstick
for blood. PTT 6h after bolus and q4-6h until PTT 1.5-2.0
x control then qd. INR at initiation of warfarin and qd.
Pulmonary Embolism
1. Admit to:
2. Diagnosis: Pulmonary embolism
3. Condition:
4. Vital Signs: q1-4h. Call physician if BP >160/90,
<90/60; P >120, <50; R >30, <10; T >38.5°C; O2 sat <
90%
5. Activity: Bedrest with bedside commode
6. Nursing: Pulse oximeter, guaiac stools, O2 at 2 L by
NC. Antiembolism stockings. No intramuscular injec-
tions.
7. Diet: Regular
Anticoagulation:
-Heparin IV bolus 5000-10,000 Units (100 U/kg) IVP,
then 1000-1500 U/h IV infusion (20 U/kg/h) [25,000
U in 500 mL D5W (50 U/mL)]. Check PTT 6 hours
after initial bolus; adjust q6h until PTT 1.5-2 times
control (60-80 sec). Overlap heparin and Coumadin
for at least 4 days and discontinue heparin when INR
has been 2.0-3.0 for two consecutive days.
-Enoxaparin (Lovenox) 1 mg/kg sq q12h for 5 days for
uncomplicated pulmonary embolism. Overlap warfa-
rin as outlined above.
-Warfarin (Coumadin) 5-10 mg PO qd for 2-3 d, then 2-
5 mg PO qd. Maintain INR of 2.0-3.0. Coumadin is
initiated on second day if the PTT is 1.5-2.0 times
control. Check INR at initiation of warfarin and qd
[tab 1, 2, 2.5, 3, 4, 5, 6, 7.5, 10 mg].
Thrombolytics (indicated if hemodynamic compro-
mise):
Baseline Labs: CBC, INR/PTT, fibrinogen q6h.
Alteplase (recombinant tissue plasminogen activa-
tor, Activase): 100 mg IV infusion over 2 hours,
followed by heparin infusion at 15 U/kg/h to maintain
PTT 1.5-2.5 x control OR
Streptokinase (Streptase): P r e t reat with
methylprednisolone 250 mg IV push and
diphenhydramine (Benadryl) 50 mg IV push. Then
give streptokinase, 250,000 units IV over 30 min,
then 100,000 units/h for 24-72 hours. Initiate heparin
infusion at 10 U/kg/hour; maintain PTT 1.5-2.5 x
control.
-Meperidine (Demerol) 25-100 mg IV prn pain.
11. Extras: CXR PA and LAT, ECG, VQ scan; chest CT
scan, pulmonary angiography; Doppler scan of lower
extremities, impedance cardiography.
12. Labs: CBC, INR/PTT, SMA7, ABG, cardiac enzymes.
Protein C, protein S, antithrombin III, anticardiolipin
antibody. UA . PTT 6 hours after bolus and q4-6h. INR at
initiation of warfarin and qd.
Sickle Cell Crisis

1. Admit to:
2. Diagnosis: Sickle Cell Crisis
3. Condition:
4. Vital Signs: q shift.
6. Nursing:
7. Diet: Regular diet, push oral fluids.
8. IV Fluids: D5 ½ NS at 100-125 mL/h.
-Oxygen 2 L/min by NC or 30-100% by mask.
-Meperidine (Demerol) 50-150 mg IM/IV q4-6h prn
pain.
-Hydroxyzine (Vistaril) 25-100 mg IM/IV/PO q3-4h prn
pain.
-Morphine sulfate 10 mg IV/IM/SC q2-4h prn pain OR
-Ketorolac (Toradol) 30-60 mg IV/IM then 15-30 mg
IV/IM q6h prn pain (maximum of 5 days).
-Acetaminophen/codeine (Tylenol 3) 1-2 tabs PO q4-6h
prn.
-Folic acid 1 mg PO qd.
-Penicillin V (prophylaxis), 250 mg PO qid [tabs
125,250,500 mg].
-Ondansetron (Zofran) 4 mg PO/IV q4-6h prn nausea
or vomiting.
Vaccination:
-Pneumovax before discharge 0.5 cc IM x 1 dose.
-Influenza vaccine (Fluogen) 0.5 cc IM once a year in
the Fall.
11. Extras: CXR.
12. Labs: CBC, SMA 7, blood C&S, reticulocyte count,
blood type and screen, parvovirus titers. UA.
Infectious Diseases
Meningitis
1. Admit to:
2. Diagnosis: Meningitis.
3. Condition:
4. Vital Signs: q1h. Call physician if BP systolic >160/90,
<90/60; P >120, <50; R>25, <10; T >39°C or less than
36°C
6. Nursing: Respiratory isolation, inputs and outputs,
lumbar puncture tray at bedside.
7. Diet: NPO
8. IV Fluids: D5 ½ NS at 125 cc/h with KCL 20 mEq/L.
Empiric Therapy 15-50 years old:
-Vancomycin 1 gm IV q12h AND EITHER
-Ceftriaxone (Rocephin) 2 gm IV q12h (max 4 gm/d)
OR
Cefotaxime (Claforan) 2 gm IV q4h.
Empiric Therapy >50 years old, Alcoholic, Cor-
ticosteroids or Hematologic Malignancy or other
Debilitating Condition:
-Ampicillin 2 gm IV q4h AND EITHER
-Cefotaxime (Claforan) 2 gm IV q6h OR
Ceftriaxone (Rocephin) 2 gm IV q12h OR
Ceftazidime (Fortaz) 2 gm IV q8h.
-Use Vancomycin 1 gm IV q12h in place of ampicillin if
drug-resistant pneumococcus is suspected.
-Heparin 5000 U SC q12h or pneumatic compression
stockings.
-Acetaminophen (Tylenol) 650 mg PO/PR q4-6h prn
temp >39/C.
-Docusate sodium 100-200 mg PO qhs.
11. Extras: CXR, ECG, PPD, CT scan.
12. Labs: CBC, SMA 7&12. Blood C&S x 2. UA with
micro, urine C&S. Antibiotic levels peak and trough after
3rd dose, VDRL.
Lumbar Puncture:
CSF Tube 1: Gram stain, C&S for bacteria (1-4 mL).
CSF Tube 2: Glucose, protein (1-2 mL).
CSF Tube 3: Cell count and differential (1-2 mL).
CSF Tube 4: Latex agglutination or counterimmunoel-
ectrophoresis antigen tests for S. pneumoniae, H.
influenzae (type B), N. meningitides, E. coli, group B
strep, VDRL, cryptococcal antigen, toxoplasma
titers. India ink, fungal cultures, AFB (8-10 mL).
Infective Endocarditis
1. Admit to:
2. Diagnosis: Infective endocarditis
3. Condition:
<90/60; P >120, <50; R>25, <10; T >38.5°C
5. Activity: Up ad lib
6. Diet: Regular
Subacute Bacterial Endocarditis Empiric Therapy:
-Penicillin G 3-5 million U IV q4h or ampicillin 2 gm IV
q4h AND
Gentamicin 1-1.5/mg/kg IV q8h.
Acute Bacterial Endocarditis Empiric Therapy
-Gentamicin 2 mg/kg IV; then 1-1.5 mg/kg IV q8h AND
Nafcillin or oxacillin 2 gm IV q4h OR
Vancomycin 1 gm IV q12h (1 gm in 250 mL of D5W
over 1h).
Streptococci viridans/bovis:
-Penicillin G 3-5 million U IV q4h for 4 weeks OR
Vancomycin 1 gm IV q12h for 4 weeks AND
Gentamicin 1 mg/kg q8h for first 2 weeks.
Enterococcus:
-Gentamicin 1 mg/kg IV q8h for 4-6 weeks AND
Ampicillin 2 gm IV q4h for 4-6 weeks OR
Vancomycin 1 gm IV q12h for 4-6 weeks.
Staphylococcus aureus (methicillin sensitive, native
valve):
-Nafcillin or Oxacillin 2 gm IV q4h for 4-6 weeks OR
Vancomycin 1 gm IV q12h for 4-6 weeks AND
Gentamicin 1 mg/kg IV q8h for first 3-5 days.
Methicillin resistant Staphylococcus aureus (native
valve):
-Vancomycin 1 gm IV q12h (1 gm in 250 mL D5W over
1h) for 4-6 weeks AND
Gentamicin 1 mg/kg IV q8h for 3-5 days.
Methicillin resistant Staph aureus or epidermidis
(prosthetic valve):
-Vancomycin 1 gm IV q12h for 6 weeks AND
Rifampin 600 mg PO q8h for 6 weeks AND
Gentamicin 1 mg/kg IV q8h for 2 weeks.
Culture Negative Endocarditis:
-Penicillin G 3-5 million U IV q4h for 4-6 weeks OR
Ampicillin 2 gm IV q4h for 4-6 weeks AND
Gentamicin 1.5 mg/kg q8h for 2 weeks (or nafcillin, 2
gm IV q4h, and gentamicin if Staph aureus sus-
pected in drug abuser or prosthetic valve).
Fungal Endocarditis:
-Amphotericin B 0.5 mg/kg/d IV plus flucytosine (5-FC)
150 mg/kg/d PO.
temp >39N C.
10. Extras: CXR PA and LAT, echocardiogram, ECG.
11. Labs: CBC with differential, SMA 7&12. Blood C&S
x 3-4 over 24h, serum cidal titers, minimum inhibitory
concentration, minimum bactericidal concentration.
Repeat C&S in 48h, then once a week. Antibiotic levels
peak and trough at 3rd dose. UA, urine C&S.
Pneumonia
1. Admit to:
2. Diagnosis: Pneumonia
3. Condition:
<90/60; P >120, <50; R>25, <10; T >38.5°C or O2
saturation <90%.
5. Activity:
6. Nursing: Pulse oximeter, inputs and outputs,
nasotracheal suctioning prn, incentive spirometry.
7. Diet: Regular.
8. IV Fluids: IV D5 ½ NS at 125 cc/hr.
-Oxygen by NC at 2-4 L/min, or 24-50% by Ventimask,
or 100% by non-rebreather (reservoir) to maintain O2
saturation >90%.
Moderately ill Patients Without Underlying Lung
Disease from the Community:
-Cefuroxime (Zinacef) 0.75-1.5 gm IV q8h OR
Ampicillin/sulbactam (Unasyn) 1.5 gm IV q6h AND
EITHER
-Erythromycin 500 mg IV/PO q6h OR
Clarithromycin (Biaxin) 500 mg PO bid OR
Azithromycin (Zithromax) 500 mg PO x 1, then 250 mg
PO qd x 4 OR
Doxycycline (Vibramycin) 100 mg IV/PO q12h.
Moderately ill Patients With Recent Hospitalization or
Debilitated Nursing Home Patient:
-Ceftazidime (Fortaz) 1-2 gm IV q8h OR
Cefepime (Maxipime) 1-2 gm IV q12h AND EITHER
Gentamicin 1.5-2 mg/kg IV, then 1.0-1.5 mg/kg IV q8h
or 7 mg/kg in 50 mL of D5W over 60 min IV q24h OR
-Ciprofloxacin (Cipro) 400 mg IV q12h or 500 mg PO
q12h.
Critically ill Patients:
-Initial treatment should consist of a macrolide with 2
antipseudomonal agents for synergistic activity:
-Erythromycin 0.5-1.0 gm IV q6h AND EITHER
-Ceftazidime 1-2 gm q8h OR
Piperacillin/tazobactam (Zosyn) 3.75-4.50 gm IV q6h
OR
Ticarcillin/clavulanate (Timentin) 3.1 gm IV q6h OR
Imipenem/cilastatin (Primaxin) 0.5-1.0 gm IV q6h AND
EITHER
-Levofloxacin (Levaquin) 500 mg IV q24h OR
Ciprofloxacin (Cipro) 400 mg IV q12h OR
Tobramycin 2.0 mg/kg IV, then 1.5 mg/kg IV q8h or 7
mg/kg IV q24h.
Aspiration Pneumonia (community acquired):
-Clindamycin (Cleocin) 600-900 mg IV q8h (with or
without gentamicin or 3rd gen cephalosporin) OR
-Ampicillin/sulbactam (Unasyn) 1.5-3 gm IV q6h (with
or without gentamicin or 3rd gen cephalosporin)
Aspiration Pneumonia (nosocomial):
-Tobramycin 2 mg/kg IV then 1.5 mg/kg IV q8h or 7
mg/kg in 50 mL of D5W over 60 min IV q24h OR
Ceftazidime (Fortaz) 1-2 gm IV q8h AND EITHER
-Clindamycin (Cleocin) 600-900 mg IV q8h OR
Ampicillin/sulbactam or ticarcillin/clavulanate, or
piperacillin/tazobactam or imipenem/cilastatin (see
above) OR
Metronidazole (Flagyl) 500 mg IV q8h.
-Acetaminophen (Tylenol) 650 mg 2 tab PO q4-6h prn
temp >38/C or pain.
-Heparin 5000 U SQ q12h or pneumatic compression
stockings.
11. Extras: CXR PA and LAT, ECG, PPD.
12. Labs: CBC with differential, SMA 7&12, ABG. Blood
C&S x 2. Sputum Gram stain, C&S. Methenamine
silver sputum stain (PCP); AFB smear/culture.
Aminoglycoside levels peak and trough at 3rd dose.
UA, urine culture.
Specific Therapy for Pneumonia

Pneumococcus:
-Ceftriaxone (Rocephin) 2 gm IV q12h OR
-Cefotaxime (Claforan) 2 gm IV q6h OR
-Erythromycin 500 mg IV q6h OR
-Vancomycin 1 gm IV q12h if drug resistance.
Staphylococcus aureus:
-Nafcillin 2 gm IV q4h OR
-Oxacillin 2 gm IV q4h.
Klebsiella pneumoniae:
-Gentamicin 1.5-2 mg/kg IV, then 1.0-1.5 mg/kg IV q8h
or 7 mg/kg in 50 mL of D5W over 60 min IV q24h OR
Ceftizoxime (Cefizox) 1-2 gm IV q8h OR
Cefotaxime (Claforan) 1-2 gm IV q6h.
Methicillin-resistant staphylococcus aureus (MRSA):
-Vancomycin 1 gm IV q12h.
Vancomycin-Resistant Enterococcus:
-Linezolid (Zyvox) 600 mg IV/PO q12h; active against
MRSA as well OR
-Quinupristin/dalfopristin (Synercid) 7.5 mg/kg IV q8h;
does not cover E faecalis.
Haemophilus influenzae:
-Ampicillin 1-2 gm IV q6h (beta-lactamase negative)
OR
-Ampicillin/sulbactam (Unasyn) 1.5-3.0 gm q6h OR
-Cefuroxime (Zinacef) 1.5 gm IV q8h (beta-lactamase
pos) OR
-Ceftizoxime (Cefizox) 1-2 gm IV q8h OR
-Ciprofloxacin (Cipro) 400 mg IV q12h OR
-Ofloxacin (Floxin) 400 mg IV q12h.
-Levofloxacin (Levaquin) 500 mg IV q24h.
Pseudomonas aeruginosa:
-Tobramycin 1.5-2.0 mg/kg IV, then 1.5-2.0 mg/kg IV
q8h or 7 mg/kg in 50 mL of D5W over 60 min IV
q24h AND EITHER
Piperacillin, Ticarcillin, Mezlocillin or Azlocillin 3 gm IV
q4h OR
Ceftazidime 1-2 gm IV q8h.
Enterobacter Aerogenes or Cloacae:
-Gentamicin 2.0 mg/kg IV, then 1.5 mg/kg IV q8h AND
EITHER
Meropenem (Merrem) 1 gm IV q8h OR
Imipenem/cilastatin (Primaxin) 0.5-1.0 gm IV q6h.
Serratia Marcescens:
-Ceftizoxime (Cefizox) 1-2 gm IV q8h OR
-Aztreonam (Azactam) 1-2 gm IV q6h OR
-Imipenem/cilastatin (Primaxin) 0.5-1.0 gm IV q6h OR
-Meropenem (Merrem) 1 gm IV q8h.
Mycoplasma pneumoniae:
-Clarithromycin (Biaxin) 500 mg PO bid OR
-Azithromycin (Zithromax) 500 mg PO x 1, then 250 mg
PO qd for 4 days OR
-Erythromycin 500 mg PO or IV q6h OR
-Doxycycline (Vibramycin) 100 mg PO/IV q12h OR
-Levofloxacin (Levaquin) 500 mg PO/IV q24h.
Legionella pneumoniae:
-Erythromycin 1.0 gm IV q6h OR
-Rifampin 600 mg PO qd may be added to
erythromycin or levofloxacin.
Moraxella catarrhalis:
-Trimethoprim/sulfamethoxazole (Bactrim, Septra) one
DS tab PO bid or 10 mL IV q12h OR
-Ampicillin/sulbactam (Unasyn) 1.5-3 gm IV q6h OR
-Cefuroxime (Zinacef) 0.75-1.5 gm IV q8h OR
-Erythromycin 500 mg IV q6h OR
Anaerobic Pneumonia:
-Penicillin G 2 MU IV q4h OR
-Clindamycin (Cleocin) 900 mg IV q8h OR
-Metronidazole (Flagyl) 500 mg IV q8h.
Pneumocystis Carinii Pneumonia

and HIV
1. Admit to:
2. Diagnosis: PCP pneumonia
3. Condition:
<90/60; P >120, <50; R>25, <10; T >38.5°C; O2 sat
<90%
5. Activity:
6. Nursing: Pulse oximeter.
7. Diet: Regular, encourage fluids.
Pneumocystis Carinii Pneumonia:
-Oxygen at 2-4 L/min by NC or by mask.
-Trimethoprim/sulfamethoxazole (Bactrim, Septra) 15
mg of TMP/kg/day (20 mL in 250 mL of D5W IVPB
q8h) for 21 days [inj: 80/400 mg per 5 mL].
-If severe PCP (PaO2 <70 mmHg): add prednisone 40
mg PO bid for 5 days, then 40 mg qd for 5 days,
t h e n 2 0 m g o n c e d a i ly fo r 1 1 d a ys O R
Methylprednisolone (Solu-Medrol) 30 mg IV q12h for
5 days, then 30 mg IV qd for 5 days, then 15 mg IV
qd for 11 days.
-Pentamidine (Pentam) 4 mg/kg IV qd for 21 days, with
prednisone as above. Pentamidine is an alternative
if inadequate response or intolerant to TMP-SMX.
Pneumocystis Carinii Prophylaxis (previous PCP or
CD4 <200, or constitutional symptoms):
-Trimethoprim/SMX DS (160/800 mg) PO qd OR
-Pentamidine, 300 mg in 6 mL sterile water via
Respirgard II nebulizer over 20-30 min q4 weeks OR
-Dapsone (DDS) 50 mg PO bid or 100 mg twice a
week; contraindicated in G-6-PD deficiency.
Antiretroviral Therapy:
A. Combination therapy with 3 agents (two nucleoside
analogs and a protease inhibitor) is recommended
as initial therapy. Nucleotide analogs are similar to
nucleosides and may be used interchangeably.
B. Nucleoside Analogs
1. Abacavir (Ziagen) 300 mg PO bid [300 mg, 20
mg/mL].
2. Didanosine (Videx, ddI) 200 mg bid for patients
>60 kg; or 125 mg bid for patients <60
kg.[chewable tabs: 25, 50, 100, 150 mg; pwd
100, 167, 250 mg packets].
3. Lamivudine (Epivir, 3TC) 150 mg twice daily [150
mg].
4. Stavudine (Zerit, D4T) 40 mg bid [15-mg, 20-mg,
30-mg and 40-mg capsules].
5. Zalcitabine (Hivid, ddC) 0.75 mg tid [0.375, 0.75].
6. Zidovudine (Retrovir, AZT) 200 mg tid (100, 200
mg caps, 50 mg/5 mL syrup).
C. Protease Inhibitors
1. Amprenavir (Agenerase) 1200 mg bid [50, 150
mg].
2. Indinavir (Crixivan) 800 mg tid [200, 400 mg].
3. Lopinavir/ritonavir (Kaletra) 400 mg/100 mg PO
bid.
4. Nelfinavir (Viracept) 750 mg PO tid [250 mg].
5. Ritonavir (Norvir) 600 mg bid [100 mg, 80 mg/dL]
6. Saquinavir (Invirase) 600 mg tid with a meal [cap
200 mg].
D. Non-Nucleoside Reverse Transcriptase Inhibi-
tors
1. Delavirdine (U-90) 400 mg tid.
2. Efavirenz (Sustiva) 600 mg PO qd [50, 100, 200
mg].
3. Nevirapine (Viramune) 200 mg qd for 2 weeks,
then bid [200 mg].
E. Nucleotide Analogs
1. Tenofovir (Viread) 300 mg PO qd with food.
Postexposure HIV Prophylaxis
A. The injury should be immediately washed and
scrubbed with soap and water.
B. Zidovudine 200 mg PO tid and lamivudine (3TC)
150 mg PO bid, plus indinavir (Crixivan) 800 mg PO
tid for highest risk exposures. Treatment is contin-
ued for one month.
Zidovudine-Induced Neutropenia/Ganciclovir-Induced
Leucopenia
-Recombinant human granulocyte colony-stimulating
factor (G-CSF, Filgrastim, Neupogen) 1-2 mcg/kg
SQ qd until absolute neutrophil count 500-1000;
indicated only if the patient’s endogenous erythro-
poietin level is low.
headache.
10. Extras: CXR PA and LAT.
11. Labs: ABG, CBC, SMA 7&12. Blood C&S x 2.
Sputum f o r G r a m s t a i n , C & S , A F B . Giemsa
immunofluorescence for Pneumocystis. CD4 count, HIV
RNA, VDRL, serum cryptococcal antigen, UA.
Opportunistic Infections in HIV-

Infected Patients
Oral Candidiasis:
-Fluconazole (Diflucan) acute: 100-200 mg PO qd OR
-Ketoconazole (Nizoral), acute: 400 mg PO qd OR
-Itraconazole (Sporanox) 200 mg PO qd OR
-Clotrimazole (Mycelex) troches 10 mg dissolved
slowly in mouth 5 times/d.
Candida Esophagitis:
-Fluconazole (Diflucan) 200-400 mg PO qd for 14-21
days OR
-Ketoconazole (Nizoral) 200 mg PO bid.
-Itraconazole (Sporanox) 200 mg PO qd for 2 weeks.
Primary or Recurrent Mucocutaneous HSV
-Acyclovir (Zovirax), 200-400 mg PO 5 times a day for
10 days, or 5 mg/kg IV q8h OR in cases of acyclovir
resistance, foscarnet, 40 mg/kg IV q8h for 21 days.
Herpes Simplex Encephalitis (or visceral disease):
-Acyclovir (Zovirax) 10 mg/kg IV q8h for 10-21 days.
Herpes Varicella Zoster
-Acyclovir (Zovirax) 10 mg/kg IV over 60 min q8h for 7-
14 days OR 800 mg PO 5 times/d for 7-10 days OR
-Famciclovir (Famvir) 500 mg PO q8h for 7 days [500
mg] OR
-Valacyclovir (Valtrex) 1000 mg PO q8h for 7 days
[500 mg] OR
-Foscarnet (Foscavir) 40 mg/kg IV q8h.
Cytomegalovirus Retinitis:
-Ganciclovir (Cytovene) 5 mg/kg IV (dilute in 100 mL
D5W over 60 min) q12h for 14-21 days OR
-Foscarnet (Foscavir) 60 mg/kg IV q8h for 2-3 weeks
OR
-Cidofovir (Vistide) 5 mg/kg IV over 60 min q week for
2 weeks. Administer probenecid, 2 g PO 3 hours
prior to cidofovir, 1 g PO 2 hours after, and 1 g PO
8 hours after.
Suppressive Treatment for Cytomegalovirus Retinitis:
-Ganciclovir (Cytovene) 5 mg/kg qd.
-Foscarnet (Foscavir) 90-120 mg IV qd OR
-Cidofovir (Vistide) 5 mg/kg IV over 60 min every 2
weeks with probenecid.
Acute Toxoplasmosis:
-Pyrimethamine 200 mg, then 50-75 mg qd, plus
sulfadiazine 1.0-1.5 gm PO q6h, plus folinic acid 10
mg PO qd OR
-Atovaquone (Mepron) 750 mg PO tid.
Suppressive Treatment for Toxoplasmosis:
-Pyrimethamine 25-50 mg PO qd plus sulfadiazine 0.5-
1.0 gm PO q6h plus folinic acid 5 mg PO qd OR
-Pyrimethamine 50 mg PO qd, plus clindamycin 300
mg PO qid, plus folinic acid 5 mg PO qd.
Cryptococcus Neoformans Meningitis:
-Amphotericin B 0.7-1.0 mg/kg/d IV; total dosage of 2
g, with or without 5-flucytosine 100 mg/kg PO qd in
divided doses, followed by fluconazole (Diflucan)
400 mg PO qd or itraconazole (Sporanox) 200 mg
PO bid 6-8 weeks
OR
-Amphotericin B liposomal (Abelcet) 5 mg/kg IV q24h
OR
-Fluconazole (Diflucan) 400-800 mg PO qd for 8-12
weeks
Suppressive Treatment of Cryptococcus:
-Fluconazole (Diflucan) 200 mg PO qd indefinitely.
Active Tuberculosis:
-Isoniazid (INH) 300 mg PO qd; and rifampin 600 mg
PO qd; and pyrazinamide 15-25 mg/kg PO qd (500
mg bid-tid); and ethambutol 15-25 mg/kg PO qd
(400 mg bid-tid).
-All four drugs are continued for 2 months; isoniazid
and rifampin are continued for a period of at least 9
months and at least 6 months after the last negative
cultures.
-Pyridoxine (Vitamin B6) 50 mg PO qd concurrent with
INH.
Prophylaxis for Inactive Tuberculosis:
-Isoniazid 300 mg PO qd; and pyridoxine 50 mg PO qd
for 12 months.
Disseminated Mycobacterium Avium Complex (MAC):
-Clarithromycin (Biaxin) 500 mg PO bid AND
Ethambutol 800-1000 mg qd; with or without rifabutin
450 mg qd.
Prophylaxis against Mycobacterium Avium Complex:
-Azithromycin (Zithromax) 1200 mg once a week.
Disseminated Coccidioidomycosis:
-Amphotericin (Fungizone) B 0.5-0.8 mg/kg IV qd, to a
total dose 2.0 gm OR
OR
-Fluconazole (Diflucan) 400-800 mg PO or IV qd.
Disseminated Histoplasmosis:
-Amphotericin B (Fungizone) 0.5-0.8 mg/kg IV qd, to a
total dose 15 mg/kg OR
OR
-Fluconazole (Diflucan) 400 mg PO qd. OR
-Itraconazole (Sporanox) 300 mg PO bid for 3 days,
then 200 mg PO bid.
Suppressive Treatment for Histoplasmosis:
-Fluconazole (Diflucan) 400 mg PO qd OR
-Itraconazole (Sporanox) 200 mg PO bid.
Septic Arthritis
1. Admit to:
2. Diagnosis: Septic arthritis
3. Condition:
4. Vital Signs: q shift
5. Activity: Up in chair as tolerated. Bedside commode
with assistance.
6. Nursing: Warm compresses prn, keep joint immobi-
lized. Passive range of motion exercises of the af-
fected joint bid.
7. Diet: Regular diet.
8. IV Fluids: Heparin lock
Empiric Therapy for Adults without Gonorrhea Con-
tact:
-Nafcillin or oxacillin 2 gm IV q4h AND
Ceftizoxime (Cefizox) 1 gm IV q8h or ceftazidime 1
gm IV q8h or ciprofloxacin 400 mg IV q12h if Gram
stain indicates presence of Gram negative organ-
isms.
Empiric Therapy for Adults with Gonorrhea:
-Ceftriaxone (Rocephin) 1 gm IV q12h OR
-Ceftizoxime (Cefizox) 1 gm IV q8h OR
-Ciprofloxacin (Cipro) 400 mg IV q12h.
-Complete course of therapy with cefuroxime axetil
(Ceftin) 400 mg PO bid.
-Acetaminophen and codeine (Tylenol 3) 1-2 PO q4-6h
prn pain.
-Heparin 5000 U SQ bid.
11. Extras: X-ray views of joint (AP and lateral), CXR.
Synovial fluid culture. Physical therapy consult for exer-
cise program.
12. Labs: CBC, SMA 7&12, blood C&S x 2, VDRL, UA.
Gonorrhea cultures of urethra, cervix, urine, throat,
sputum, skin, rectum. Antibiotic levels. Blood cultures x 2
for gonorrhea.
Synovial fluid:
Tube 1 - Glucose, protein, lactate, pH.
Tube 2 - Gram stain, C&S.
Tube 3 - Cell count.
Septic Shock
1. Admit to:
2. Diagnosis: Sepsis
3. Condition:
4. Vital Signs: q1h; Call physician if BP >160/90, <90/60;
P >120, <50; R>25, <10; T >38.5°C; urine output < 25
cc/hr for 4h, O2 saturation <90%.
6. Nursing: Inputs and outputs, pulse oximeter. Foley
catheter to closed drainage.
7. Diet: NPO
8. IV Fluids: 1 liter of normal saline wide open, then D5
½ NS at 125 cc/h
-Oxygen at 2-5 L/min by NC or mask.
Antibiotic Therapy
A. Initial treatment of life-threatening sepsis should
include a third-generation cephalosporin
(ce f t a z i d i m e , c e f o t a xi m e , c eftiz oxime or
ceftriaxone), or piperacillin/tazobactam, or
ticarcillin/clavulanic acid or imipenem, each with an
aminoglycoside (gentamicin, tobramycin or
amikacin). If Enterobacter aerogenes or cloacae is
s u s pecte d , t r e a t m e n t s h o u l d b e g i n wi t h
meropenem, or imipenem with an aminoglycoside.
B. Intra-abdominal or pelvic infections, likely to
involve anaerobes, should be treated with ampicillin,
gentamicin and metronidaz ole; or either
ticarcillin/clavulanic acid, ampicillin/sulbactam,
piperacillin/tazobactam, imipenem, cefoxitin or
cefotetan, each with an aminoglycoside.
C. Febrile neutropenic patients with neutrophil
counts <500/mm 3 should be treated with
vancomycin and ceftazidime, or
piperacillin/tazobactam and tobramycin or imipenem
and tobramycin.
D. Dosages for Antibiotics Used in Sepsis
-Ampicillin 1-2 gm IV q4h.
-Cefotaxime (Claforan) 2 gm q4-6h.
-Ceftizoxime (Cefizox) 1-2 gm IV q8h.
-Ceftriaxone (Rocephin) 1-2 gm IV q12h (max 4
gm/d).
-Cefoxitin (Mefoxin) 1-2 gm q6h.
-Cefotetan (Cefotan) 1-2 gm IV q12h.
-Ceftazidime (Fortaz) 1-2 g IV q8h.
-Ticarcillin/clavulanate (Timentin) 3.1 gm IV q4-6h
(200-300 mg/kg/d).
-Ampicillin/sulbactam (Unasyn) 1.5-3.0 gm IV q6h.
-Piperacillin/tazobactam (Zosyn) 3.375-4.5 gm IV
q6h.
-Piperacillin or ticarcillin 3 gm IV q4-6h.
-Imipenem/cilastatin (Primaxin) 1.0 gm IV q6h.
-Meropenem (Merrem) 05-1.0 gm IV q8h.
-Gentamicin, tobramycin 100-120 mg (1.5 mg/kg)
IV, then 80 mg IV q8h (1 mg/kg) or 7 mg/kg in 50
mL of D5W over 60 min IV q24h.
-Amikacin (Amikin) 7.5 mg/kg IV loading dose; then
5 mg/kg IV q8h.
-Vancomycin 1 gm IV q12h.
-Metronidazole (Flagyl) 500 mg (7.5 mg/kg) IV q6-
8h.
-Clindamycin (Cleocin) 900 mg IV q8h.
-Aztreonam (Azactam) 1-2 gm IV q6-8h; max 8
g/day.
Nosocomial sepsis with IV catheter or IV drug abuse
-Nafcillin or oxacillin 2 gm IV q4h OR
-Vancomycin 1 gm q12h (1 gm in 250 cc D5W over 60
min) AND
Gentamicin or tobramycin as above AND EITHER
Ceftazidime (Fortaz) or ceftizoxime 1-2 gm IV q8h OR
Piperacillin, ticarcillin or mezlocillin 3 gm IV q4-6h.
Recombinant human activated protein C
-Drotrecogin alfa, (Xigris), 24 mg/kg/h IV infusion for 96
hours.
Blood Pressure Support
-Dopamine 4-20 mcg/kg/min (400 mg in 250 cc D5W,
1600 mcg/mL).
-Norepinephrine 2-8 mcg/min IV infusion (8 mg in 250
mL D5W).
-Albumin 25 gm IV (100 mL of 25% sln) OR
-Hetastarch (Hespan) 500-1000 cc over 30-60 min
(max 1500 cc/d).
-Dobutamine 5 mcg/kg/min, and titrate to bp keep
systolic BP >90 mmHg; max 10 mcg/kg/min.
-Acetaminophen (Tylenol) 650 mg PR q4-6h prn temp
>39°C.
-Heparin 5000 U SQ q12h or pneumatic compression
stockings.
11. Extras: CXR, KUB, ECG. Ultrasound, lumbar punc-
ture.
12. Labs: CBC with differential, SMA 7&12, blood C&S x
3, T&C for 3-6 units PRBC, INR/PTT, drug levels peak
and trough at 3rd dose. UA. Cultures of urine, sputum,
wound, IV catheters, decubitus ulcers, pleural fluid.
Peritonitis
1. Admit to:
2. Diagnosis: Peritonitis
3. Condition:
4. Vital Signs: q1-6h. Call physician if BP >160/90, <90-
/60; P >120, <50; R>25, <10; T >38.5°C.
6. Nursing: Guaiac stools.
7. Diet: NPO
Primary Bacterial Peritonitis -- Spontaneous:
Option 1:
-Ampicillin 1-2 gm IV q 4-6h (vancomycin 1 gm IV
q12h if penicillin allergic) AND EITHER
Cefotaxime (Claforan) 1-2 gm IV q6h OR
Ceftizoxime (Cefizox) 1-2 gm IV q8h OR
Gentamicin or tobramycin 1.5 mg/kg IV, then 1 mg/kg
q24h.
Option 2:
-Ticarcillin/clavulanate (Timentin) 3.1 gm IV q6h OR
-Piperacillin/tazobactam (Zosyn) 3.375 gm IV q6h OR
-Imipenem/cilastatin (Primaxin) 0.5-1.0 gm IV q6h OR
-Meropenem (Merrem) 500-1000 mg IV q8h.
Secondary Bacterial Peritonitis – Abdominal Perfora-
tion or Rupture:
Option 1:
-Ampicillin 1-2 gm IV q4-6h AND
Gentamicin or tobramycin as above AND
Metronidazole (Flagyl) 500 mg IV q8h OR
Cefoxitin (Mefoxin) 1-2 gm IV q6h OR
Cefotetan (Cefotan) 1-2 gm IV q12h.
Option 2:
(200-300 mg/kg/d) with an aminoglycoside as
above OR
-Piperacillin/tazobactam (Zosyn) 3.375 gm IV q6h with
an aminoglycoside as above OR
-Ampicillin/sulbactam (Unasyn) 1.5-3.0 gm IV q6h with
aminoglycoside as above OR
-Imipenem/cilastatin (Primaxin) 0.5-1.0 gm IV q6-8h
OR
-Meropenem (Merrem) 500-1000 mg IV q8h.
Fungal Peritonitis:
-Amphotericin B peritoneal dialysis, 2 mg/L of dialysis
fluid over the first 24 hours, then 1.5 mg in each
liter OR
-Fluconazole (Diflucan) 200 mg IV x 1, then 100 mg IV
qd.
temp >38.5°C.
-Heparin 5000 U SQ q12h.
11. Extras: Plain film, upright abdomen, lateral decubitus,
CXR PA and LAT; surgery consult; ECG, abdominal ultra-
sound. CT scan.
12. Labs: CBC with differential, SMA 7&12, amylase,
lactate, INR/PTT, UA with micro, C&S; drug levels peak
and trough 3rd dose.
Paracentesis Tube 1: Cell count and differential (1-2 mL,
EDTA purple top tube)
Tube 2: Gram stain of sediment; inject 10-20 mL into an-
aerobic and aerobic culture bottle; AFB, fungal C&S
(3-4 mL).
Tube 3: Glucose, protein, albumin, LDH, triglycerides,
specific gravity, bilirubin, amylase (2-3 mL, red top
tube).
Syringe: pH, lactate (3 mL).
Diverticulitis
1. Admit to:
2. Diagnosis: Diverticulitis
3. Condition:
4. Vital Signs: qid. Call physician if BP systolic >160/90,
<90/60; P >120, <50; R>25, <10; T >38.5°C
5. Activity: Up ad lib.
6. Nursing: Inputs and outputs.
7. Diet: NPO. Advance to clear liquids as tolerated.
8. IV Fluids: 0.5-2 L NS over 1-2 hr then, D5 ½ NS at
125 cc/hr. NG tube at low intermittent suction (if
obstructed).
Regimen 1:
-Gentamicin or tobramycin 100-120 mg IV (1.5-2
mg/kg), then 80 mg IV q8h (5 mg/kg/d) or 7 mg/kg
in 50 mL of D5W over 60 min IV q24h AND EI-
THER
Cefoxitin (Mefoxin) 2 gm IV q6-8h OR
Clindamycin (Cleocin) 600-900 mg IV q8h.
Regimen 2:
-Metronidazole (Flagyl) 500 mg q8h AND
Ciprofloxacin (Cipro) 250-500 mg PO bid or 200-300
mg IV q12h.
Outpatient Regimen:
-Metronidazole (Flagyl) 500 mg PO q6h AND EITHER
Ciprofloxacin (Cipro) 500 mg PO bid OR
Trimethoprim/SMX (Bactrim) 1 DS tab PO bid.
-Meperidine (Demerol) 50-100 mg IM or IV q3-4h prn
pain.
11. Extras: Acute abdomen series, CXR PA and LAT,
ECG, CT scan of abdomen, ultrasound, surgery and GI
consults.
12. Labs: CBC with differential, SMA 7&12, amylase,
lipase, blood cultures x 2, drug levels peak and trough 3rd
dose. UA, C&S.
Lower Urinary Tract Infection

1. Admit to:
2. Diagnosis: UTI.
3. Condition:
4. Vital Signs: q shift. Call physician if BP <90/60; >160-
/90; R >30, <10; P >120, <50; T >38.5°C
6. Nursing:
7. Diet: Regular
8. IV Fluids:
Lower Urinary Tract Infection (treat for 3-7 days):
-Trimethoprim-sulfamethoxazole (Septra) 1 double
strength tab (160/800 mg) PO bid.
-Norfloxacin (Noroxin) 400 mg PO bid.
-Ciprofloxacin (Cipro) 250 mg PO bid.
-Levofloxacin (Levaquin) 500 mg IV/PO q24h.
-Lomefloxacin (Maxaquin) 400 mg PO qd.
-Enoxacin (Penetrex) 200-400 mg PO q12h; 1h before
or 2h after meals.
-Cefpodoxime (Vantin) 100 mg PO bid.
-Cephalexin (Keflex) 500 mg PO q6h.
-Cefixime (Suprax) 200 mg PO q12h or 400 mg PO qd.
-Cefazolin (Ancef) 1-2 gm IV q8h.
Complicated or Catheter-Associated Urinary Tract
Infection:
-Ceftizoxime (Cefizox) 1 gm IV q8h.
-Gentamicin 2 mg/kg, then 1.5/kg q8h or 7 mg/kg in 50
mL of D5W over 60 min IV q24h.
-Ciprofloxacin (Cipro) 500 mg PO bid.
-Levofloxacin (Levaquin) 500 mg IV/PO q24h.
Prophylaxis ($3 episodes/yr):
-Trimethoprim/SMX single strength tab PO qhs.
Candida Cystitis
-Fluconazole (Diflucan) 100 mg PO or IV x 1 dose,
then 50 mg PO or IV qd for 5 days OR
-Amphotericin B continuous bladder irrigation, 50
mg/1000 mL sterile water via 3-way Foley catheter
at 1 L/d for 5 days.
-Phenazopyridine (Pyridium) 100 mg PO tid.
temp >39N C.
11. Extras: Renal ultrasound.
12. Labs: CBC, SMA 7. UA with micro, urine Gram stain,
C&S.
Pyelonephritis
1. Admit to:
2. Diagnosis: Pyelonephritis
3. Condition:
4. Vital Signs: tid. Call physician if BP <90/60; >160/90;
R >30, <10; P >120, <50; T >38.5°C
5. Activity:
7. Diet: Regular
-Trimethoprim-sulfamethoxazole (Septra) 160/800 mg
(10 mL in 100 mL D5W IV over 2 hours) q12h or 1
double strength tab PO bid.
-Ciprofloxacin (Cipro) 500 mg PO bid or 400 mg IV
q12h.
-Norfloxacin (Noroxin) 400 mg PO bid
-Ofloxacin (Floxin) 400 mg PO or IV bid.
-In more severely ill patients, treatment with an IV
third-generation cephalosporin, or
ticarcillin/clavulanic acid, or piperacillin/tazobactam
or imipenem is recommended with an
aminoglycoside.
-Ceftizoxime (Cefizox) 1 gm IV q8h.
-Ceftazidime (Fortaz) 1 gm IV q8h.
-Ticarcillin/clavulanate (Timentin) 3.1 gm IV q6h.
-Piperacillin/tazobactam (Zosyn) 3.375 gm IV/PB q6h.
-Imipenem/cilastatin (Primaxin) 0.5-1.0 gm IV q6-8h.
-Gentamicin or tobramycin, 2 mg/kg IV, then 1.5 mg/kg
q24h.
-Phenazopyridine (Pyridium) 100 mg PO tid.
-Meperidine (Demerol) 50-100 mg IM q4-6h prn pain.
temp >39N C.
11. Extras: Renal ultrasound, KUB.
12. Labs: CBC with differential, SMA 7. UA with micro,
urine Gram stain, C&S; blood C&S x 2. Drug levels peak
and trough third dose third dose.
Osteomyelitis
1. Admit to:
2. Diagnosis: Osteomyelitis
3. Condition:
4. Vital Signs: qid. Call physician if BP <90/60; T
>38.5°C
5. Activity: Bed rest with bathroom privileges.
6. Nursing: Keep involved extremity elevated. Range of
motion exercises tid.
7. Diet: Regular, high fiber.
Adult Empiric Therapy:
-Nafcillin or oxacillin 2 gm IV q4h OR
-Cefazolin (Ancef) 1-2 gm IV q8h OR
-Vancomycin 1 gm IV q12h (1 gm in 250 cc D5W over
1h).
-Add 3rd generation cephalosporin if gram negative
bacilli on Gram stain. Treat for 4-6 weeks.
Post-Operative or Post-Trauma:
-Vancomycin 1 gm IV q12h AND ceftazidime (Fortaz)
1-2 gm IV q8h.
-Imipenem/cilastatin (Primaxin)(single-drug treat-
ment) 0.5-1.0 gm IV q6-8h.
-Ticarcillin/clavulanate (Timentin)(single-drug treat-
ment) 3.1 gm IV q4-6h.
-Ciprofloxacin (Cipro) 500-750 mg PO bid or 400 mg IV
q12h AND
Rifampin 600 mg PO qd.
Osteomyelitis with Decubitus Ulcer:
-Cefoxitin (Mefoxin), 2 gm IV q6-8h.
-Ciprofloxacin (Cipro) and metronidazole 500 mg IV
q8h.
-Imipenem/cilastatin (Primaxin), see dosage above.
-Nafcillin, gentamicin and clindamycin; see dosage
above.
-Heparin 5000 U SQ bid.
11. Extras: Technetium/gallium bone scans, multiple X-
ray views, CT/MRI.
12. Labs: CBC with differential, SMA 7, blood C&S x 3,
MIC, MBC, UA with micro, C&S. Needle biopsy of bone
for C&S. Trough antibiotic levels.
Active Pulmonary Tuberculosis

1. Admit to:
2. Diagnosis: Active Pulmonary Tuberculosis
3. Condition:
4. Vital Signs: q shift
5. Activity: Up ad lib in room.
6. Nursing: Respiratory isolation.
7. Diet: Regular
-Isoniazid 300 mg PO qd (5 mg/kg/d, max 300 mg/d)
AND
Rifampin 600 mg PO qd (10 mg/kg/d, 600 mg/d max)
AND
Pyrazinamide 500 mg PO bid-tid (15-30 mg/kg/d, max
2.5 gm) AND
Ethambutol 400 mg PO bid-tid (15-25 mg/kg/d, 2.5
gm/d max).
-Empiric treatment consists of a 4-drug combination of
isoniazid (INH), rifampin, pyrazinamide (PZA), and
either ethambutol or streptomycin. A modified
regimen is recommended for patients known to
have INH-resistant TB. Treat for 8 weeks with the
four-drug regimen, followed by 18 weeks of INH and
rifampin.
-Pyridoxine 50 mg PO qd with INH.
Prophylaxis
-Isoniazid 300 mg PO qd (5 mg/kg/d) x 6-9 months.
9. Extras: CXR PA, LAT, ECG.
10. Labs: CBC with differential, SMA7 and 12, LFTs, HIV
serology. First AM sputum for AFB x 3 samples.
Cellulitis
1. Admit to:
2. Diagnosis: Cellulitis
3. Condition:
4. Vital Signs: tid. Call physician if BP <90/60; T >38.5°C
6. Nursing: Keep affected extremity elevated; warm com-
presses prn.
7. Diet: Regular, encourage fluids.
Empiric Therapy Cellulitis
-Nafcillin or oxacillin 1-2 gm IV q4-6h OR
-Cefazolin (Ancef) 1-2 gm IV q8h OR
-Vancomycin 1 gm q12h (1 gm in 250 cc D5W over 1h)
OR
-Erythromycin 500 IV/PO q6h OR
-Dicloxacillin 500 mg PO qid; may add penicillin VK,
500 mg PO qid, to increase coverage for strepto-
coccus OR
-Cephalexin (Keflex) 500 mg PO qid.
Immunosuppressed, Diabetic Patients, or Ulcerated
Lesions:
-Nafcillin or cefazolin and gentamicin or aztreonam.
Add clindamycin or metronidazole if septic.
-Cefazolin (Ancef) 1-2 gm IV q8h.
-Cefoxitin (Mefoxin) 1-2 gm IV q6-8h.
-Gentamicin 2 mg/kg, then 1.5 mg/kg IV q8h or 7
mg/kg in 50 mL of D5W over 60 min IV q24h OR
aztreonam (Azactam) 1-2 gm IV q6h PLUS
-Metronidazole (Flagyl) 500 mg IV q8h or clindamycin
900 mg IV q8h.
-Ticarcillin/clavulanate (Timentin) (single-drug treat-
ment) 3.1 gm IV q4-6h.
-Ampicillin/Sulbactam (Unasyn) (single-drug therapy)
1.5-3.0 gm IV q6h.
-Imipenem/cilastatin (Primaxin) (single-drug therapy)
0.5-1 mg IV q6-8h.
-Acetaminophen/codeine (Tylenol #3) 1-2 PO q4-6h
prn pain.
temp >39N C.
11. Extras: Technetium/Gallium scans, Doppler study
(ankle-brachial indices).
12. Labs: CBC, SMA 7, blood C&S x 2. Leading edge
aspirate for Gram stain, C&S; UA, antibiotic levels.
Pelvic Inflammatory Disease
1. Admit to:
2. Diagnosis: Pelvic Inflammatory Disease
3. Condition:
P >120, <50; R>25, <10; T >38.5°C
5. Activity:
7. Diet: Regular
8. IV Fluids: D5 ½ NS at 100-125 cc/hr.
-Cefoxitin (Mefoxin) 2 gm IV q6h OR cefotetan
(Cefotan) 1-2 gm IV q12h; AND doxycycline
(Vibramycin) 100 mg IV q12h (IV for 4 days and
48h after afebrile, then complete 10-14 days of
doxycycline 100 mg PO bid) OR
-Clindamycin 900 mg IV q8h AND Gentamicin 2
mg/kg IV, then 1.5 mg/kg IV q8h or 7 mg/kg in 50
mL of D5W over 60 min IV q24h, then complete 10-
14 d of Clindamycin 300 mg PO qid or Doxycycline
100 mg PO bid OR
-Ceftriaxone (Rocephin) 250 mg IM x 1 and
doxycycline 100 mg PO bid for 14 days OR
-Ofloxacin (Floxin) 400 mg PO bid for 14 days.
AND EITHER
-Clindamycin 300 mg PO qid for 14 days OR
-Metronidazole (Flagyl) 500 mg PO bid for 14 days.
-Acetaminophen (Tylenol) 1-2 tabs PO q4-6h prn pain
or temperature >38.5°C.
-Zolpidem (Ambien) 10 mg PO qhs prn insomnia.
11. Labs: CBC, SMA 7&12, ESR. GC culture, chlamydia
direct fluorescent antibody stain. UA with micro, C&S,
VDRL, HIV, blood cultures x 2. Pelvic ultrasound.
Gastrointestinal Disorders
Gastroesophageal Reflux Disease
1. Admit to:
2. Diagnosis: Gastroesophageal reflux disease.
3. Condition:
P >120, <50; T >38.5°C
5. Activity: Up ad lib. Elevate the head of the bed by 6 to
8 inches.
7. Diet: Low-fat diet; no cola, citrus juices, or tomato
products; avoid the supine position after meals; no
eating within 3 hours of bedtime.
8. IV Fluids: D5 ½ NS with 20 mEq KCL at TKO.
-Pantoprazole (Protonix) 40 mg PO/IV q24h OR
-Nizatidine (Axid) 300 mg PO qhs OR
-Omeprazole (Prilosec) 20 mg PO bid (30 minutes
prior to meals) OR
-Lansoprazole (Prevacid) 15-30 mg PO qd prior to
breakfast [15, 30 mg caps] OR
-Esomeprazole (Nexium) 20 or 40 mg PO qd OR
-Rabeprazole (Aciphex) 20 mg delayed-release tablet
PO qd OR
-Ranitidine (Zantac) 50 mg IV bolus, then continuous
infusion at 12.5 mg/h (300 mg in 250 mL D5W at 11
mL/h over 24h) or 50 mg IV q8h OR
-Cimetidine (Tagamet) 300 mg IV bolus, then continu-
ous infusion at 50 mg/h (1200 mg in 250 mL D5W
over 24h) or 300 mg IV q6-8h OR
-Famotidine (Pepcid) 20 mg IV q12h.
-Trimethobenzamide (Tigan) 100-250 mg PO or 100-
200 mg IM/PR q6h prn nausea OR
-Prochlorperazine (Compazine) 5-10 mg IM/IV/PO q4-
6h or 25 mg PR q4-6h prn nausea.
11. Extras: Upright abdomen, KUB, CXR, ECG, endos-
copy. GI consult, surgery consult.
12. Labs: CBC, SMA 7&12, amylase, lipase, LDH. UA.
Peptic Ulcer Disease

1. Admit to:
2. Diagnosis: Peptic ulcer disease.
3. Condition:
P >120, <50; T >38.5°C
7. Diet: NPO 48h, then regular, no caffeine.
8. IV Fluids: D5 ½ NS with 20 mEq KCL at 125 cc/h. NG
tube at low intermittent suction (if obstructed).
infusion at 12.5 mg/h (300 mg in 250 mL D5W at 11
mL/h over 24h) or 50 mg IV q8h OR
-Cimetidine (Tagamet) 300 mg IV bolus, then continu-
ous infusion at 50 mg/h (1200 mg in 250 mL D5W
over 24h) or 300 mg IV q6-8h OR
-Famotidine (Pepcid) 20 mg IV q12h OR
-Pantoprazole (Protonix) 40 mg PO/IV q24h OR
-Nizatidine (Axid) 300 mg PO qhs OR
-Omeprazole (Prilosec) 20 mg PO bid (30 minutes
prior to meals) OR
-Lansoprazole (Prevacid) 15-30 mg PO qd prior to
breakfast [15, 30 mg caps].
Eradication of Helicobacter pylori
A. Bismuth, Metronidazole, Tetracycline,
Ranitidine
1. 14 day therapy.
2. Bismuth (Pepto Bismol) 2 tablets PO qid.
3. Metronidazole (Flagyl) 250 mg PO qid (tid if
cannot tolerate the qid dosing).
4. Tetracycline 500 mg PO qid.
5. Ranitidine (Zantac) 150 mg PO bid.
6. Efficacy is greater than 90%.
B. Amoxicillin, Omeprazole, Clarithromycin (AOC)
1. 10 days of therapy.
2. Amoxicillin 1 gm PO bid.
3. Omeprazole (Prilosec) 20 mg PO bid.
4. Clarithromycin (Biaxin) 500 mg PO bid.
C. Metronidazole, Omeprazole, Clarithromycin
(MOC)
1. 10 days of therapy
2. Metronidazole 500 mg PO bid.
3. Omeprazole (Prilosec) 20 mg PO bid.
4. Clarithromycin (Biaxin) 500 mg PO bid.
5. Efficacy is >80%
6. Expensive, usually well tolerated.
D. Omeprazole, Clarithromycin (OC)
2. Omeprazole (Prilosec) 40 mg PO qd for 14 days,
then 20 mg qd for an additional 14 days of
therapy.
3. Clarithromycin (Biaxin) 500 mg PO tid.
E. Ranitidine-Bismuth-Citrate, Clarithromycin
(RBC-C)
2. Ranitidine-bismuth-citrate (Tritec) 400 mg PO
bid for 28 days.
3. Clarithromycin (Biaxin) 500 mg PO tid for 14
days.
4. Efficacy is 70-80%; expensive
-Trimethobenzamide (Tigan) 100-250 mg PO or 100-
200 mg IM/PR q6h prn nausea OR
-Prochlorperazine (Compazine) 5-10 mg IM/IV/PO q4-
6h or 25 mg PR q4-6h prn nausea.
11. Extras: Upright abdomen, KUB, CXR, ECG, endos-
copy. GI consult, surgery consult.
12. Labs: CBC, SMA 7&12, amylase, lipase, LDH. UA,
Helicobacter pylori serology. Fasting serum gastrin qAM
for 3 days. Urea breath test for H pylori.
Gastrointestinal Bleeding
1. Admit to:
2. Diagnosis: Upper/lower GI bleed
3. Condition:
4. Vital Signs: q30min. Call physician if BP >160/90,
<90/60; P >120, <50; R>25, <10; T >38.5°C; urine
output <15 mL/hr for 4h.
6. Nursing: Place nasogastric tube, then lavage with 2 L
of room temperature normal saline, then connect to
low intermittent suction. Repeat lavage q1h. Record
volume and character of lavage. Foley to closed drain-
age; inputs and outputs.
7. Diet: NPO
8. IV Fluids: Two 16 gauge IV lines. 1-2 L NS wide open;
transfuse 2-6 units PRBC to run as fast as possible,
then repeat CBC.
-Oxygen 2 L by NC.
infusion at 12.5 mg/h [300 mg in 250 mL D5W over
24h (11 cc/h)], or 50 mg IV q6-8h OR
-Famotidine (Pepcid) 20 mg IV q12h.
-Vitamin K (Phytonadione) 10 mg IV/SQ qd for 3 days
(if INR is elevated).
Esophageal Variceal Bleeds:
-Somatostatin (Octreotide) 50 mcg IV bolus, followed
by 25-50 mcg/h IV infusion (1200 mcg in 250 mL of
D5W at 11 mL/h).
Vasopressin/Nitroglycerine Paste Therapy:
-Vasopressin (Pitressin) 20 U IV over 20-30 min-
utes, then 0.2-0.3 U/min [100 U in 250 mL of
D5W (0.4 U/mL)] for 30 min, followed by in-
creases of 0.2 U/min until bleeding stops or max
of 0.9 U/min. If bleeding stops, taper over 24-
48h AND
-Nitroglycerine paste 1 inch q6h OR nitroglycerin IV
at 10-30 mcg/min continuous infusion (50 mg in
250 mL of D5W).
10. Extras: Portable CXR, upright abdomen, ECG.
Surgery and GI consults.
Upper GI Bleeds: Esophagogastroduodenoscopy with
coagulation or sclerotherapy; Linton-Nachlas tube for
tamponade of esophageal varices.
Lower GI Bleeds: Sigmoidoscopy/colonoscopy (after a
GoLytely purge 6-8 L over 4-6h), technetium 99m RBC
scan, angiography with embolization.
11. Labs: Repeat hematocrit q2h; CBC with platelets
q12-24h. Repeat INR in 6 hours. SMA 7&12, ALT, AST,
alkaline phosphatase, INR/PTT, type and cross for 3-6 U
PRBC and 2-4 U FFP.
Cirrhotic Ascites and Edema

1. Admit to:
2. Diagnosis: Cirrhotic ascites and edema
3. Condition:
4. Vital Signs: Vitals q4-6 hours. Call physician if BP
>160/90, <90/60; P >120, <50; T >38.5°C; urine output
< 25 cc/hr for 4h.
5. Activity: Bed rest with legs elevated.
6. Nursing: Inputs and outputs, daily weights, measure
abdominal girth qd, guaiac all stools.
7. Diet: 2500 calories, 100 gm protein; 500 mg sodium
restriction; fluid restriction to 1-1.5 L/d (if hyponatremia,
Na <130).
-Diurese to reduce weight by 0.5-1 kg/d (if edema) or
0.25 kg/d (if no edema).
-Spironolactone (Aldactone) 25-50 mg PO qid or 200
mg PO qAM, increase by 100 mg/d to max of 400
mg/d.
-Furosemide (Lasix)(refractory ascites) 40-120 mg PO
or IV qd-bid. Add KCL 20-40 mEq PO qAM if renal
function is normal OR
-Torsemide (Demadex) 20-40 mg PO/IV qd-bid.
-Metolazone (Zaroxolyn) 5-10 mg PO qd (max 20
mg/d).
-Vitamin K 10 mg SQ qd for 3d.
-Thiamine 100 mg PO qd.
-Multivitamin PO qd.
Paracentesis: Remove up to 5 L of ascites if periph-
eral edema, tense ascites, or decreased diaphrag-
matic excursion. If large volume paracentesis
without peripheral edema or with renal insufficiency,
give salt-poor albumin, 12.5 gm for each 2 liters of
fluid removed (50 mL of 25% solution); infuse 25
mL before paracentesis and 25 mL 6h after.
-Lactulose 30 mL PO bid-qid prn constipation.
headache.
11. Extras: KUB, CXR, abdominal ultrasound, liver-
spleen scan, GI consult.
12. Labs: Ammonia, CBC, SMA 7&12, LFTs, albumin,
amylase, lipase, INR/PTT. Urine creatinine, Na, K.
HBsAg, anti-HBs, hepatitis C virus antibody, alpha-1-
antitrypsin.
Paracentesis Ascitic Fluid
Tube 1: Protein, albumin, specific gravity, glucose, bili-
rubin, amylase, lipase, triglyceride, LDH (3-5 mL,
red top tube).
Tube 2: Cell count and differential (3-5 mL, purple top
tube).
Tube 3: C&S, Gram stain, AFB, fungal (5-20 mL);
inject 20 mL into bottle of blood culture at bedside.
Tube 4: Cytology (>20 mL).
Syringe: pH (2 mL).
Viral Hepatitis
1. Admit to:
2. Diagnosis: Hepatitis
3. Condition:
4. Vital Signs: qid. Call physician if BP <90/60; T
>38.5°C
5. Activity:
6. Nursing: Stool isolation.
7. Diet: Clear liquid (if nausea), low fat (if diarrhea).
-Vitamin K 10 mg SQ qd for 3d.
-Multivitamin PO qd.
-Trimethobenzamide (Tigan) 250 mg PO q6-8h prn
pruritus or nausea q6-8h prn.
-Hydroxyzine (Vistaril) 25 mg IM/PO q4-6h prn pruritus
or nausea.
-Diphenhydramine (Benadryl) 25-50 mg PO/IV q4-6h
prn pruritus.
10. Extras: Ultrasound, GI consult.
11. Labs: CBC, SMA 7&12, GGT, LDH, amylase, lipase,
INR/PTT, IgM anti-HAV, IgM anti-HBc, HBsAg, anti-HCV;
alpha-1-antitrypsin, ANA, ferritin, ceruloplasmin, urine
copper.
Cholecystitis and Cholangitis

1. Admit to:
2. Diagnosis: Bacterial cholangitis
3. Condition:
4. Vital Signs: q4h. Call physician if BP systolic >160,
<90; diastolic. >90, <60; P >120, <50; R>25, <10; T
>38.5°C
6. Nursing: Inputs and outputs
7. Diet: NPO
8. IV Fluids: 0.5-1 L LR over 1h, then D5 ½ NS with 20
mEq KCL/L at 125 cc/h. NG tube at low constant
suction. Foley to closed drainage.
-Ticarcillin or piperacillin 3 gm IV q4-6h, and either
metronidazole (Flagyl) 500 mg q8h or cefoxitin
(Mefoxin) 1-2 gm IV q6h.
-Ampicillin 1-2 gm IV q4-6h and gentamicin 100 mg
(1.5-2 mg/kg), then 80 mg IV q8h (3-5 mg/kg/d) and
metronidazole 500 mg IV q8h.
-Imipenem/cilastatin (Primaxin) 1.0 gm IV q6h (single
agent).
-Ampicillin/sulbactam (Unasyn) 1.5-3.0 gm IV q6h
(single-agent).
-Meperidine (Demerol) 50-100 mg IV/IM q4-6h prn
pain.
-Hydroxyzine (Vistaril) 25-50 mg IV/IM q4-6h prn with
meperidine.
-Omeprazole (Prilosec) 20 mg PO bid.
11. Extras: CXR, ECG, RUQ ultrasound, HIDA scan,
acute abdomen series. GI consult, surgical consult.
12. Labs: CBC, SMA 7&12, GGT, amylase, lipase, blood
C&S x 2. UA, INR/PTT.
Acute Pancreatitis
1. Admit to:
2. Diagnosis: Acute pancreatitis
3. Condition:
4. Vital Signs: q1-4h, call physician if BP >160/90,
<90/60; P >120, <50; R>25, <10; T >38.5°C; urine
output < 25 cc/hr for more than 4 hours.
6. Nursing: Inputs and outputs, fingerstick glucose qid,
guaiac stools. Foley to closed drainage.
7. Diet: NPO
8. IV Fluids: 1-4 L NS over 1-3h, then D5 ½ NS with 20
mEq KCL/L at 125 cc/hr. NG tube at low constant
suction (if obstruction).
-Ranitidine (Zantac) 6.25 mg/h (150 mg in 250 mL
D5W at 11 mL/h) IV or 50 mg IV q6-8h OR
Famotidine (Pepcid) 20 mg IV q12h.
-Ticarcillin/clavulanate (Timentin) 3.1 gm IV, or
ampicillin/sulbactam (Unasyn) 3.0 gm IV q6h or
imipenem (Primaxin) 0.5-1.0 gm IV q6h.
-Antibiotics are indicated for infected pancreatic
pseudocysts or for abscess. Uncomplicated pancre-
atitis does not require antibiotics.
-Total parenteral nutrition should be provided until the
amylase and lipase are normal and symptoms have
resolved.
-Meperidine 50-100 mg IM/IV q3-4h prn pain.
11. Extras: Upright abdomen, portable CXR, ECG, ultra-
sound, CT with contrast. Surgery and GI consults.
12. Labs: CBC, platelets, SMA 7&12, calcium, triglycer-
ides, amylase, lipase, LDH, AST, ALT; blood C&S x 2,
hepatitis B surface antigen, INR/PTT, type and hold 4-6
U PRBC and 2-4 U FFP. UA.
Acute Diarrhea
1. Admit to:
2. Diagnosis: Acute Diarrhea
3. Condition:
4. Vital Signs: q6h; call physician if BP >160/90, <80/60;
P >120; R>25; T >38.5°C
6. Nursing: Daily weights, inputs and outputs.
7. Diet: NPO except ice chips for 24h, then low residual
elemental diet; no milk products.
8. IV Fluids: 1-2 L NS over 1-2 hours; then D5 ½ NS with
40 mEq KCL/L at 125 cc/h.
Febrile or gross blood in stool or neutrophils on
microscopic exam or prior travel:
-Ciprofloxacin (Cipro) 500 mg PO bid OR
-Levofloxacin (Levaquin) 500 mg PO qd OR
-Trimethoprim/SMX (Bactrim DS) (160/800 mg) one
DS tab PO bid.
11. Extras: Upright abdomen. GI consult.
12. Labs: SMA7 and 12, CBC with differential, UA, blood
culture x 2.
Stool studies: Wright's stain for fecal leukocytes, ova
and parasites x 3, clostridium difficile toxin, culture for
enteric pathogens, E coli 0157:H7 culture.
Specific Treatment of Acute Diar-

rhea
Shigella:
-Trimethoprim/SMX, (Bactrim) one DS tab PO bid for
5 days OR
-Ciprofloxacin (Cipro) 500 mg PO bid for 5 days OR
PO qd x 4.
Salmonella (bacteremia):
-Ofloxacin (Floxin) 400 mg IV/PO q12h for 14 days OR
-Ciprofloxacin (Cipro) 400 mg IV q12h or 750 mg PO
q12h for 14 days OR
-Trimethoprim/SMX (Bactrim) one DS tab PO bid for
14 days OR
-Ceftriaxone (Rocephin) 2 gm IV q12h for 14 days.
Campylobacter jejuni:
-Erythromycin 250 mg PO qid for 5-10 days OR
PO qd x 4 OR
-Ciprofloxacin (Cipro) 500 mg PO bid for 5 days.
Enterotoxic/Enteroinvasive E coli (Travelers Diar-
rhea):
-Ciprofloxacin (Cipro) 500 mg PO bid for 5-7 days OR
-Trimethoprim/SMX (Bactrim), one DS tab PO bid for
5-7 days.
Antibiotic-Associated and Pseudomembranous
Colitis (Clostridium difficile):
-Metronidazole (Flagyl) 250 mg PO or IV qid for 10-14
days OR
-Vancomycin 125 mg PO qid for 10 days (500 PO qid
for 10-14 days, if recurrent).
Yersinia Enterocolitica (sepsis):
-Trimethoprim/SMX (Bactrim), one DS tab PO bid for
5-7 days OR
-Ciprofloxacin (Cipro) 500 mg PO bid for 5-7 days OR
-Ofloxacin (Floxin) 400 mg PO bid OR
-Ceftriaxone (Rocephin) 1 gm IV q12h.
Entamoeba Histolytica (Amebiasis):
Mild to Moderate Intestinal Disease:
-Metronidazole (Flagyl) 750 mg PO tid for 10 days
OR
-Tinidazole 2 gm per day PO for 3 days Followed
By:
-Iodoquinol 650 mg PO tid for 20 days OR
-Paromomycin 25-30 mg/kg/d PO tid for 7 days.
Severe Intestinal Disease:
-Metronidazole (Flagyl)750 mg PO tid for 10 days
OR
-Tinidazole 600 mg PO bid for 5 days Followed By:
-Iodoquinol 650 mg PO tid for 20 days OR
-Paromomycin 25-30 mg/kg/d PO tid for 7 days.
Giardia Lamblia:
-Quinacrine 100 mg PO tid for 5d OR
-Metronidazole 250 mg PO tid for 7 days.
Cryptosporidium:
-Paromomycin 500 mg PO qid for 7-10 days [250
mg].
Crohn’s Disease
1. Admit to:
2. Diagnosis: Crohn’s disease.
3. Condition:
P >120, <50; R>25, <10; T >38.5°C
6. Nursing: Inputs and outputs. NG at low intermittent
suction (if obstruction).
7. Diet: NPO except for ice chips and medications for
48h, then low residue or elemental diet, no milk pro-
ducts.
mEq KCL/L at 125 cc/hr.
-Mesalamine (Asacol) 400-800 mg PO tid or
mesalamine (Pentasa) 1000 mg (four 250 mg tabs)
PO qid OR
-Sulfasalazine (Azulfidine) 0.5-1 gm PO bid; increase
over 10 days to 0.5-1 gm PO qid OR
-Olsalazine (Dipentum) 500 mg PO bid.
-Infliximab (Remicade) 5 mg/kg IV over 2 hours; MR at
2 and 6 weeks
-Prednisone 40-60 mg/d PO in divided doses OR
-Hydrocortisone 50-100 mg IV q6h OR
-Methylprednisolone (Solu-Medrol) 10-20 mg IV q6h.
-Metronidazole (Flagyl) 250-500 mg PO q6h.
-Vitamin B12, 100 mcg IM for 5d then 100-200 mcg IM
q month.
-Multivitamin PO qAM or 1 ampule IV qAM.
10. Extras: Abdominal x-ray series, CXR, colonoscopy.
GI consult.
11. Labs: CBC, SMA 7&12, Mg, ionized calcium, blood
C&S x 2; stool Wright's stain, stool culture, C difficile
antigen assay, stool ova and parasites x 3.
Ulcerative Colitis
1. Admit to:
2. Diagnosis: Ulcerative colitis
3. Condition:
<90/60; P >120, <50; R>25, <10; T >38.5°C
7. Diet: NPO except for ice chips for 48h, then low
residue or elemental diet, no milk products.
mEq KCL/L at 125 cc/hr.
-Mesalamine (Asacol) 400-800 mg PO tid OR
-5-aminosalicylate (Mesalamine) 400-800 mg PO tid or
1 gm PO qid or enema 4 gm/60 mL PR qhs OR
-Sulfasalazine (Azulfidine) 0.5-1 gm PO bid, increase
over 10 days as tolerated to 0.5-1.0 gm PO qid OR
-Olsalazine (Dipentum) 500 mg PO bid OR
-Hydrocortisone retention enema, 100 mg in 120 mL
saline bid.
-Methylprednisolone (Solu-Medrol) 10-20 mg IV q6h
OR
-Hydrocortisone 100 mg IV q6h OR
-Prednisone 40-60 mg/d PO in divided doses.
-B12, 100 mcg IM for 5d then 100-200 mcg IM q
month.
-Folate 1 mg PO qd.
-Loperamide (Imodium) 2-4 mg PO tid-qid prn, max 16
mg/d OR
-Kaopectate 60-90 mL PO qid prn.
11. Extras: Upright abdomen. CXR, colonoscopy, GI
consult.
12. Labs: CBC, SMA 7&12, Mg, ionized calcium, liver
panel, blood C&S x 2; stool Wright's stain, stool for ova
and parasites x 3, culture for enteric pathogens;
Clostridium difficile antigen assay, UA.
Parenteral Nutrition
General Considerations: Daily weights, inputs and
outputs. Finger stick glucose q6h.
Central Parenteral Nutrition:
-Infuse 40-50 mL/h of amino acid-dextrose solution in
the first 24h; increase daily by 40 mL/hr increments
until providing 1.3-2 x basal energy requirement
and 1.2-1.7 gm protein/kg/d (see formula page 97).
Standard solution:
Amino acid sln (Aminosyn) 7-10% . . . . 500 mL
Dextrose 40-70% . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 500 mL
Sodium . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 35 mEq
Potassium . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 36 mEq
Chloride . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 35 mEq
Calcium . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4.5 mEq
Phosphate . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9 mmol
Magnesium . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8.0 mEq
Acetate . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 82-104 mEq
Multi-trace element formula . . . . . . . . . 1 mL/d
(zinc, copper, manganese, chromium)
Regular insulin (if indicated) . . . . . . . . . 10-60 U/L
Multivitamin(12)(2 amp) . . . . . . . . . . . . 10 mL/d
Vitamin K (in solution, SQ, IM) . . . . . . . 10 mg/week
Vitamin B12 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1000 mcg/week
Selenium (after 20 days of continuous T PN)
80 mcg/d
Intralipid 20%, 500 mL/d IVPB; infuse in parallel with
standard solution at 1 mL/min for 15 min; if no ad-
verse reactions, increase to 100 mL/hr once daily or
20 mg/hr continuously. Obtain serum triglyceride 6h
after end of infusion (maintain <250 mg/dL).
Cyclic Total Parenteral Nutrition:
-12h night schedule; taper continuous infusion in
morning by reducing rate to half of original rate
for 1 hour. Further reduce rate by half for an
additional hour, then discontinue. Finger stick
glucose q4-6h; restart TPN in afternoon. Taper at
beginning and end of cycle. Final rate of 185
mL/hr for 9-10 h and 2 hours of taper at each end
for total of 2000 mL.
Peripheral Parenteral Supplementation:
-3% amino acid sln (ProCalamine) up to 3 L/d at 125
cc/h OR
-Combine 500 mL amino acid solution 7% or 10%
(Aminosyn) and 500 mL 20% dextrose and
electrolyte additive. Infuse at up to 100 cc/hr in
parallel with:
-Intralipid 10% or 20% at 1 mL/min for 15 min (test
dose); if no adverse reactions, infuse 500 mL/d at
21 mL/h over 24h, or up to 100 mL/h over 5 hours
daily.
-Draw triglyceride level 6h after end of Intralipid infu-
sion.
-Famotidine 20 mg IV q12h or 40 mg/day in TPN OR
-Ranitidine (Zantac) 50 mg IV q8h or 150 mg/day in
TPN.
8. Extras: Nutrition consult.
9. Labs:
Daily labs: SMA7, osmolality, CBC, cholesterol,
triglyceride, urine glucose and specific gravity.
Twice weekly Labs: Calcium, phosphate, SMA-12,
magnesium
Weekly Labs: Serum albumin and protein, pre-albu-
min, ferritin, INR/PTT, zinc, copper, B12, folate,
24h urine nitrogen and creatinine.
Enteral Nutrition
General Considerations: Daily weights, inputs and
outputs, nasoduodenal feeding tube. Head-of-bed at 30°
while enteral feeding and 2 hours after completion.
Enteral Bolus Feeding: Give 50-100 mL of enteral
solution (Pulmocare, Jevity, Vivonex, Osmolite, Vital
HN) q3h. Increase amount in 50 mL steps to max of
250-300 mL q3-4h; 30 kcal of nonprotein calories/kg/d
and 1.5 gm protein/kg/d. Before each feeding measure
residual volume, and delay feeding by 1h if >100 mL.
Flush tube with 100 cc of water after each bolus.
Continuous enteral infusion: Initial enteral solution
(Pulmocare, Jevity, Vivonex, Osmolite) 30 mL/hr.
Measure residual volume q1h for 12h then tid; hold
feeding for 1h if >100 mL. Increase rate by 25-50
mL/hr at 24 hr intervals as tolerated until final rate of
50-100 mL/hr. Three tablespoonfuls of protein powder
(Promix) may be added to each 500 cc of solution.
Flush tube with 100 cc water q8h.
Special Medications:
-Metoclopramide (Reglan) 10-20 mg IV/NG OR
-Erythromycin 125 mg IV or via nasogastric tube q8h.
-Famotidine (Pepcid) 20 mg IV/PO q12h OR
-Ranitidine (Zantac 150 mg NG bid.
Symptomatic Medications:
-Loperamide (Imodium) 2-4 mg NG/J-tube q6h prn,
max 16 mg/d OR
-Diphenoxylate/atropine (Lomotil) 1-2 tabs or 5-10 mL
(2.5 mg/5 mL) PO/J-tube q4-6h prn, max 12
tabs/d OR
-Kaopectate 30 cc NG or in J-tube q8h.
Extras: CXR, plain abdominal x-ray for tube placement,
nutrition consult.
Labs:
Daily labs: SMA7, osmolality, CBC, cholesterol,
triglyceride. SMA-12
Weekly labs when indicated: Protein, Mg, INR/PTT,
24h urine nitrogen and creatinine. Pre-albumin,
retinol-binding protein.
Hepatic Encephalopathy
1. Admit to:
2. Diagnosis: Hepatic encephalopathy
3. Condition:
4. Vital Signs: q1-4h, neurochecks q4h. Call physician if
BP >160/90,<90/60; P >120,<50; R>25,<10; T
>38.5°C.
5. Allergies: Avoid sedatives, NSAIDS or hepatotoxic
drugs.
7. Nursing: Keep head-of-bed at 40 degrees, guaiac
stools; turn patient q2h while awake, chart stools.
Seizure precautions, egg crate mattress, soft restraints
prn. Record inputs and outputs.
8. Diet: NPO for 8 hours, then low-protein nasogastric
enteral feedings (Hepatic-Aid II) at 30 mL/hr. Increase
rate by 25-50 mL/hr at 24 hr intervals as tolerated until
final rate of 50-100 mL/hr as tolerated.
9. IV Fluids: D5W at TKO, Foley to closed drainage.
10.Special Medications:
-Sorbitol 70% solution, 30-60 gm PO now.
-Lactulose 30-45 mL PO q1h for 3 doses, then 15-45
mL PO bid-qid, titrate to produce 3 soft stools/d OR
-Lactulose enema 300 mL added to 700 mL of tap wa-
ter; instill 200-250 mL per rectal tube bid-qid AND
-Neomycin 1 gm PO q6h (4-12 g/d) OR
-Metronidazole (Flagyl) 250 mg PO q6h.
-Ranitidine (Zantac) 50 mg IV q8h or 150 mg PO bid
OR
-Flumazenil (Romazicon) 0.2 mg (2 mL) IV over 30
seconds q1min until a total dose of 3 mg; if a partial
response occurs, continue 0.5 mg doses until a total
of 5 mg. Flumazenil may help reverse hepatic
encephalopathy, even in the absence of benzodiaz-
epine use.
-Folic acid 1 mg PO/IV qd.
-Thiamine 100 mg PO/IV qd.
-Vitamin K 10 mg SQ qd for 3 days if elevated INR.
11. Extras: CXR, ECG; GI and dietetics consults.
12. Labs: Ammonia, CBC, platelets, SMA 7&12, AST,
ALT, GGT, LDH, alkaline phosphatase, protein, albumin,
bilirubin, INR/PTT, ABG, blood C&S x 2, hepatitis B
surface antibody. UA.
Alcohol Withdrawal
1. Admit to:
2. Diagnosis: Alcohol withdrawals/delirium tremens.
3. Condition:
/60; P >130, <50; R>25, <10; T >38.5°C; or increase in
agitation.
5. Activity:
6. Nursing: Seizure precautions. Soft restraints prn.
7. Diet: Regular, push fluids.
8. IV Fluids: Heparin lock or D5 ½ NS at 100-125 cc/h.
Withdrawal syndrome:
-Chlordiazepoxide (Librium) 50-100 mg PO/IV q6h for
3 days OR
-Lorazepam (Ativan) 1 mg PO tid-qid.
Delirium tremens:
-Chlordiazepoxide (Librium) 100 mg slow IV push or
PO, repeat q4-6h prn agitation or tremor for 24h;
max 500 mg/d. Then give 50-100 mg PO q6h prn
agitation or tremor OR
-Diazepam (Valium) 5 mg slow IV push, repeat q6h
until calm, then 5-10 mg PO q4-6h.
Seizures:
-Thiamine 100 mg IV push AND
-Dextrose water 50%, 50 mL IV push.
-Lorazepam (Ativan) 0.1 mg/kg IV at 2 mg/min; may
repeat x 1 if seizures continue.
Wernicke-Korsakoff Syndrome:
-Thiamine 100 mg IV stat, then 100 mg IV qd.
-Multivitamin 1 amp IV, then 1 tab PO qd.
-Folate 1 mg PO qd.
-Thiamine 100 mg PO qd.
-Acetaminophen (Tylenol) 1-2 PO q4-6h prn headache.
11. Extras: CXR, ECG. Alcohol rehabilitation and social
work consult.
12. Labs: CBC, SMA 7&12, Mg, amylase, lipase, liver
panel, urine drug screen. UA, INR/PTT.
Toxicology
Poisoning and Drug Overdose
Decontamination:
-Gastric Lavage: Place patient left side down, place
nasogastric tube, and check position by injecting air
and auscultating. Lavage with normal saline until
clear fluid, then leave activated charcoal or other
antidote. Gastric lavage is contraindicated for corro-
sives.
-Cathartics:
-Magnesium citrate 6% sln 150-300 mL PO
-Magnesium sulfate 10% solution 150-300 mL PO.
-Activated Charcoal: 50 gm PO (first dose should be
given using product containing sorbitol). Repeat q2-
6h for large ingestions.
-Hemodialysis is indicated for isopropanol, methanol,
ethylene glycol, severe salicylate intoxication (>100
mg/dL), lithium, or theophylline (if neurotoxicity,
seizures, or coma).
Antidotes:
Narcotic Overdose:
-Naloxone (Narcan) 0.4 mg IV/ET/IM/SC, may
repeat q2min.
Methanol Ingestion:
-Ethanol (10% in D5W) 7.5 mL/kg load, then 1.4
mL/kg/hr IV infusion until methanol level <20
mg/dL. Maintain ethanol level of 100-150 mg/100
mL.
Ethylene Glycol Ingestion:
-Fomepizole (Antizol) 15 mg/kg IV over 30 min, then
10 mg/kg IV q12h x 4 doses, then 15 mg/kg IV
q12h until ethylene glycol level is less than 20
mg/dL AND
-Pyridoxine 100 mg IV q6h for 2 days and thiamine
100 mg IV q6h for 2 days.
Carbon Monoxide Intoxication:
-Hyperbaric oxygen therapy or 100% oxygen by
mask if hyperbaric oxygen not available.
Tricyclic Antidepressants Overdose:
-Gastric lavage
-Magnesium citrate 300 mg PO/NG x1
-Activated charcoal premixed with sorbitol 50 gm
NG q4-6h until level is less than the toxic range.
Benzodiazepine Overdose:
-Flumazenil (Romazicon) 0.2 mg (2 mL) IV over 30
seconds q1min until a total dose of 3 mg; if a
partial response occurs, repeat 0.5 mg doses
until a total of 5 mg. If sedation persists, repeat
the above regimen or start a continuous IV infu-
sion of 0.1-0.5 mg/h.
Labs: Drug screen (serum, gastric, urine); blood levels,
SMA 7, fingerstick glucose, CBC, LFTs, ECG.
Acetaminophen Overdose
1. Admit to: Medical intensive care unit.
2. Diagnosis: Acetaminophen overdose
3. Condition:
4. Vital Signs: q1h with neurochecks. Call physician if
BP >160/90, <90/60; P >130, <50 <50; R>25, <10;
urine output <20 cc/h for 3 hours.
6. Nursing: Inputs and outputs, aspiration and seizure
precautions. Place large bore (Ewald) NG tube, then
lavage with 2 L of NS.
7. Diet: NPO
8. IV Fluids:
-Activated charcoal 30-100 gm doses, remove via NG
suction prior to acetylcysteine.
-Acetylcysteine (Mucomyst, NAC) 5% solution loading
dose 140 mg/kg via NG tube, then 70 mg/kg via NG
tube q4h x 17 doses OR acetylcysteine 150 mg/kg
IV in 200 mL D5W over 15 min, followed by 50
mg/kg in 500 mL D5W, infused over 4h, followed by
100 mg/kg in 1000 mL of D5W over next 16h.
Complete all NAC doses even if acetaminophen
levels fall below toxic range.
-Phytonadione 5 mg IV/IM/SQ (if INR increased).
-Fresh frozen plasma 2-4 U (if INR is unresponsive to
phytonadione).
-Trimethobenzamide (Tigan) 100-200 mg IM/PR q6h
prn nausea
10. Extras: ECG. Nephrology consult for hemodialysis or
charcoal hemoperfusion.
11. Labs: CBC, SMA 7&12, LFTs, INR/PTT, acet-
aminophen level now and in 4h. UA.
Theophylline Overdose
2. Diagnosis: Theophylline overdose
3. Condition:
4. Vital Signs: Neurochecks q2h. Call physician if BP
>160/90, <90/60; P >130; <50; R >25, <10.
6. Nursing: ECG monitoring until level <20 mcg/mL,
aspiration and seizure precautions. Insert single lumen
NG tube and lavage with normal saline if recent
ingestion.
7. Diet: NPO
8. IV Fluids: D5 ½ NS at 125 cc/h
-Activated charcoal 50 gm PO q4-6h, with sorbitol
cathartic, until theophylline level <20 mcg/mL.
Maintain head-of-bed at 30-45 degrees to prevent
aspiration of charcoal.
-Charcoal hemoperfusion is indicated if the serum level
is >60 mcg/mL or if signs of neurotoxicity, seizure,
coma are present.
-Seizure: Lorazepam (Ativan) 0.1 mg/kg IV at 2
mg/min; may repeat x 1 if seizures continue.
10. Extras: ECG.
11. Labs: CBC, SMA 7&12, theophylline level now and in
q6-8h; INR/PTT, liver panel. UA.
Tricyclic Antidepressant Overdose

2. Diagnosis: TCA Overdose
3. Condition:
4. Vital Signs: Neurochecks q1h.
5. Activity: Bedrest.
6. Nursing: Continuous suicide observation. ECG
monitoring, measure QRS width hourly, inputs and
outputs, aspiration and seizure precautions. Place
single-lumen nasogastric tube and lavage with 2 liters
of normal saline if recent ingestion.
7. Diet: NPO
8. IV Fluids: NS at 100-150 cc/hr.
-Activated charcoal premixed with sorbitol 50 gm via
NG tube q4-6h until the TCA level decreases to
therapeutic range. Maintain head-of-bed at 30-45
degree angle to prevent charcoal aspiration.
-Magnesium citrate 300 mL via nasogastric tube x 1
dose.
10. Cardiac Toxicity:
-If mechanical ventilation is necessary, hyperventilate
to maintain pH 7.50-7.55.
-Administer sodium bicarbonate 50-100 mEq (1-2
amps or 1-2 mEq/kg) IV over 5-10 min, followed by
infusion of sodium bicarbonate (2 amps in D5W 1 L)
at 100-150 cc/h. Adjust rate to maintain pH 7.50-
7.55.
11. Extras: ECG.
12. Labs: Urine toxicology screen, serum TCA levels,
liver panel, CBC, SMA-7 and 12, UA.
Neurologic Disorders
Ischemic Stroke
1. Admit to:
2. Diagnosis: Ischemic stroke
3. Condition:
4. Vital Signs: Vital signs and neurochecks q30minutes
for 6 hours, then q60 minutes for 12 hours. Call physi-
cian if BP >185/105, <110/60; P >120, <50; R>24, <10;
T >38.5°C; or change in neurologic status.
6. Nursing: Head-of-bed at 30 degrees, turn q2h when
awake, range of motion exercises qid. Foley catheter,
eggcrate mattress. Guaiac stools, inputs and outputs's.
Bleeding precautions: check puncture sites for bleed-
ing or hematomas. Apply digital pressure or pressure
dressing to active compressible bleeding sites.
7. Diet: NPO except medications for 24 hours, then
dysphagia ground diet with thickened liquids.
8. IV Fluids and Oxygen: 0.45% normal saline at 100
cc/h. Oxygen at 2 L per minute by nasal cannula.
Ischemic Stroke < 3 hours:
a. Tissue plasminogen activator (t-PA, Alteplase) is
indicated if the patient presents within 3 hours of
onset of symptoms and the stroke is non-hemor-
rhagic; 0.9 mg/kg (max 90 mg) over 60 min, with
10% of the total dose given as an initial bolus over
1 minute.
b. Repeat CT scan or MRI 24 hours after completion of
tPA. Begin heparin if results of scan are negative for
hemorrhage.
c. Heparin 12 U/kg/h continuous IV infusion, without a
bolus. Check aPTT q6h to maintain 1.2-1.5 x con-
trol.
Completed Ischemic Stroke >3 hours:
-Aspirin enteric coated 325 mg PO qd OR
-Clopidogrel (Plavix) 75 mg PO qd OR
-Aspirin 25 mg/dipyridamole 200 mg (Aggrenox) 1 tab
PO bid.
-Omeprazole (Prilosec) 20 mg PO bid or qhs.
-Docusate sodium (Colace) 100 mg PO qhs
-Bisacodyl (Dulcolax) 10-15 mg PO qhs or 10 mg PR
prn.
temp >38/C or headache.
11. Extras: CXR, ECG, CT without contrast or MRI with
gadolinium contrast; carotid duplex scan; echo-
cardiogram, 24-hour Holter monitor; swallowing studies.
Physical therapy consult for range of motion exercises;
neurology, rehabilitation medicine consults.
12. Labs: CBC, glucose, SMA 7&12, fasting lipid profile,
VDRL, ESR; drug levels, INR/PTT, UA. Lupus anticoagu-
lant, anticardiolipin antibody.
Transient Ischemic Attack

1. Admit to:
2. Diagnosis: Transient ischemic attack
3. Condition:
BP >160/90, <90/60; P >120, <50; R>25, <10; T
>38.5°C; or change in neurologic status.
5. Activity: Up as tolerated.
7. Diet: Dysphagia ground with thickened liquids or
regular diet.
-Aspirin 325 mg PO qd OR
-Clopidogrel (Plavix) 75 mg PO qd OR
-Aspirin 25 mg/dipyridamole 200 mg (Aggrenox) 1 tab
PO bid.
-Heparin (only if recurrent TIAs or cardiogenic or
vertebrobasilar source for emboli) 700-800 U/h (12
U/kg/h) IV infusion without a bolus (25,000 U in 500
mL D5W); adjust q6-12h until PTT 1.2-1.5 x control.
-Warfarin (Coumadin) 5.0-7.5 mg PO qd for 3d, then 2-
4 mg PO qd. Titrate to INR of 2.0-2.5.
-Milk of magnesia 30 mL PO qd prn constipation.
11. Extras: CXR, ECG, CT without contrast; carotid
duplex scan, echocardiogram, 24-hour Holter monitor.
Physical therapy, neurology consults.
12. Labs: CBC, glucose, SMA 7&12, fasting lipid profile,
VDRL, drug levels, INR/PTT, UA.
Subarachnoid Hemorrhage
1. Admit to:
2. Diagnosis: Subarachnoid hemorrhage
3. Condition:
4. Vital Signs: Vital signs and neurochecks q1-6h. Call
physician if BP >185/105, <110/60; P >120, <50;
R>24, <10; T >38.5°C; or change in neurologic status.
6. Nursing: Head-of-bed at 30 degrees, turn q2h when
awake. Foley catheter, eggcrate mattress. Guaiac
stools, inputs and outputs's.
Bleeding precautions: check puncture sites for bleed-
ing or hematomas. Apply digital pressure or pressure
dressing to active compressible bleeding sites.
7. Diet: NPO except medications.
8. IV Fluids and Oxygen: 0.45% normal saline at 100
cc/h. Oxygen at 2 L per minute by nasal cannula.
-Keep room dark and quiet; strict bedrest. Neurologic
checks q1h for 12 hours, then q2h for 12 hours, then
q4h. Call physician if abrupt change in neurologic
status.
-Restrict total fluids to 1000 mL/day; diet as tolerated.
-Nimodipine (Nimotop) 60 mg PO or via NG tube q4h
for 21d, must start within 96 hours.
-Phenytoin (seizures) load 15 mg/kg IV in NS (infuse at
max 50 mg/min), then 300 mg PO/IV qAM (4-6
mg/kg/d).
Hypertension:
-Nitroprusside sodium, 0.1-0.5 mcg/kg/min (50 mg in
250 mL NS), titrate to control blood pressure.
10. Extras: CXR, ECG, CT without contrast; MRI an-
giogram; cerebral angiogram. Neurology, neurosurgery
consults.
11. Labs: CBC, SMA 7&12, VDRL, UA.
Seizure and Status Epilepticus

1. Admit to:
2. Diagnosis: Seizure
3. Condition:
BP >160/90, <90/60; P >120, <50; R>25, <10; T
>38.5°C; or any change in neurological status.
6. Nursing: Finger stick glucose. Seizure precautions
with bed rails up; padded tongue blade at bedside.
EEG monitoring.
7. Diet: NPO for 24h, then regular diet if alert.
8. IV Fluids: D5 ½ NS at 100 cc/hr; change to heparin
lock when taking PO.
Status Epilepticus:
1. Maintain airway.
2. Position the patient laterally with the head down.
The head and extremities should be cushioned to
prevent injury.
3. A bite block or other soft object may be inserted into
the mouth to prevent injury to the tongue.
4. 100% O2 by mask, obtain brief history, and a
fingerstick glucose.
5. Secure IV access and draw blood for glucose
analysis. Give thiamine 100 mg IV push, then
dextrose 50% 50 mL IV push.
6. Initial Control:
Lorazepam (Ativan) 6-8 mg (0.1 mg/kg; not to
exceed 2 mg/min) IV at 1-2 mg/min. May repeat
6-8 mg q5-10min (max 80 mg/24h) OR
Diazepam (Valium), 5-10 mg slow IV at 1-2
mg/min. Repeat 5-10 mg q5-10 min prn (max 100
mg/24h).
Phenytoin (Dilantin) 15-20 mg/kg load in NS at 50
mg/min. Repeat 100-150 mg IV q30min, max 1.5
gm; monitor BP.
Fosphenytoin (Cerebyx) 20 mg/kg IV/IM (at 150
mg/min), then 4-6 mg/kg/day in 2 or 3 doses (150
mg IV/IM q8h). Fosphenytoin is metabolized to
phenytoin; fosphenytoin may be given IM.
If Seizures Persist, Administer Phenobarbital 20
mg/kg IV at 50 mg/min, repeat 2 mg/kg q15min;
additional phenobarbital may be given, up to max
of 30-60 mg/kg.
7. If Seizures Persist, Intubate the Patient and Give:
- Midazolam (Versed) 0.2 mg/kg IV push, then 0.045
mg/kg/hr; titrate up to 0.6 mg/kg/hr OR
-Propofol (Diprivan) 2 mg/kg IV push, then 2 mg/kg/hr;
titrate up to 10 mg/kg/hr OR
-Phenobarbital as above.
-Induction of coma with pentobarbital 10-15 mg/kg IV
over 1-2h, then 1-1.5 mg/kg/h continuous infusion.
Initiate continuous EEG monitoring.
8. Consider Intubation and General Anesthesia
Maintenance Therapy for Epilepsy:
Primary Generalized Seizures – First-Line Therapy:
-Carbamazepine (Tegretol) 200-400 mg PO tid [100,
200 mg]. Monitor CBC.
-Phenytoin (Dilantin) loading dose of 400 mg PO
followed by 300 mg PO q4h for 2 doses (total of 1
g), then 300 mg PO qd or 100 mg tid or 200 mg bid
[30, 50, 100 mg].
-Divalproex (Depakote) 250-500 mg PO tid-qid with
meals [125, 250, 500 mg].
-Valproic acid (Depakene) 250-500 mg PO tid-qid with
meals [250 mg].
Primary Generalized Seizures -- Second Line Therapy:
-Phenobarbital 30-120 mg PO bid [8, 16, 32, 65, 100
mg].
-Primidone (Mysoline) 250-500 mg PO tid [50, 250
mg]; metabolized to phenobarbital.
-Felbamate (Felbatol) 1200-2400 mg PO qd in 3-4
divided doses, max 3600 mg/d [400, 600 mg; 600
mg/5 mL susp]; adjunct therapy; aplastic anemia,
hepatotoxicity.
-Gabapentin (Neurontin), 300-400 mg PO bid-tid; max
1800 mg/day [100, 300, 400 mg]; adjunct therapy.
-Lamotrigine (Lamictal) 50 mg PO qd, then increase to
50-250 mg PO bid [25, 100, 150, 200 mg]; adjunct
therapy .
Partial Seizure:
-Carbamazepine (Tegretol) 200-400 mg PO tid [100,
200 mg].
-Divalproex (Depakote) 250-500 mg PO tid with meals
[125, 250, 500 mg].
-Valproic acid (Depakene) 250-500 mg PO tid-qid with
meals [250 mg].
-Phenytoin (Dilantin) 300 mg PO qd or 200 mg PO bid
[30, 50, 100].
-Phenobarbital 30-120 mg PO tid or qd [8, 16, 32, 65,
100 mg].
-Primidone (Mysoline) 250-500 mg PO tid [50, 250
mg]; metabolized to phenobarbital.
-Felbamate (Felbatol) 1200-2400 mg PO qd in 3-4
divided doses, max 3600 mg/d [400,600 mg; 600
mg/5 mL susp]; adjunct therapy; aplastic anemia,
hepatotoxicity.
-Gabapentin (Neurontin), 300-400 mg PO bid-tid; max
1800 mg/day [100, 300, 400 mg]; adjunct therapy.
therapy.
-Topiramate (Topamax) 25 mg PO bid; titrate to max
200 mg PO bid [tab 25, 100, 200 mg]; adjunctive
therapy.
Absence Seizure:
-Divalproex (Depakote) 250-500 mg PO tid-qid [125,
250, 500 mg].
-Clonazepam (Klonopin) 0.5-5 mg PO bid-qid [0.5, 1,
2 mg].
therapy.
10. Extras: MRI with and without gadolinium or CT with
contrast; EEG (with photic stimulation, hyperventilation,
sleep deprivation, awake and asleep tracings); portable
CXR, ECG.
11. Labs: CBC, SMA 7, glucose, Mg, calcium, phos-
phate, liver panel, VDRL, anticonvulsant levels. UA, drug
screen.
Endocrinologic Disorders
Diabetic Ketoacidosis
1. Admit to:
2. Diagnosis: Diabetic ketoacidosis
3. Condition:
4. Vital Signs: q1-4h, postural BP and pulse. Call
physician if BP >160/90, <90/60; P >140, <50; R >30,
<10; T >38.5°C; or urine output < 20 mL/hr for more
than 2 hours.
6. Nursing: Inputs and outputs. Foley to closed drainage.
Record labs on flow sheet.
7. Diet: NPO for 12 hours, then clear liquids as tolerated.
8. IV Fluids:
1-2 L NS over 1-3h ($16 gauge), infuse at 400-1000 mL/h
until hemodynamically stable, then change to 0.45%
saline at 125-150 cc/hr; keep urine output >30-60
mL/h.
Add KCL when serum potassium is <5.0 mEq/L.
Concentration.......20-40 mEq KCL/L
May use K phosphate, 20-40 mEq/L, in place of KCL if
hypophosphatemic.
Change to 5% dextrose in 0.45% saline with 20-40 mEq
KCL/liter when blood glucose 250-300 mg/dL.
-Oxygen at 2 L/min by NC.
-Insulin regular (Humulin) 7-10 units (0.1 U/kg) IV
bolus, then 7-10 U/h IV infusion (0.1 U/kg/h); 50 U
in 250 mL of 0.9% saline; flush IV tubing with 20 mL
of insulin sln before starting infusion. Adjust insulin
infusion to decrease serum glucose by 100 mg/dL
or less per hour. When bicarbonate level is >16
mEq/L and anion gap is <16 mEq/L, decrease
insulin infusion rate by half.
-When the glucose level reaches 250 mg/dL, 5%
dextrose should be added to the replacement fluids
with KCL 20-40 mEq/L.
-Use 10% glucose at 50-100 mL/h if anion gap persists
and serum glucose has decreased to less than 100
mg/dL while on insulin infusion.
-Change to subcutaneous insulin when anion gap
cleared; discontinue insulin infusion 1-2h after
subcutaneous dose.
headache.
11. Extras: Portable CXR, ECG.
12. Labs: Fingerstick glucose q1-2h. SMA 7 q4-6h. SMA
12, pH, bicarbonate, phosphate, amylase, lipase, hemo-
globin A1c; CBC. UA, serum pregnancy test.
Nonketotic Hyperosmolar Syn-

drome
1. Admit to:
2. Diagnosis: Nonketotic hyperosmolar syndrome
3. Condition:
P >140, <50; R>25, <10; T >38.5° C; or urine output
<20 cc/hr for more than 4 hours.
6. Nursing: Input and output measurement. Foley to
closed drainage. Record labs on flow sheet.
7. Diet: NPO.
8. IV Fluids: 1-2 L NS over 1h ($16 gauge IV catheter),
then give 0.45% saline at 125 cc/hr. Maintain urine
output $50 mL/h.
-Add 20-40 mEq/L KCL when urine output adequate.
-Insulin regular 2-3 U/h IV infusion (50 U in 250 mL of
0.9% saline).
10. Extras: Portable CXR, ECG.
11. Labs: Fingerstick glucose q1-2h x 6h, then q6h. SMA
7, osmolality. SMA 12, phosphate, ketones, hemoglobin
A1C, CBC. UA.
Thyroid Storm and Hyperthyroid-

ism
1. Admit to:
2. Diagnosis: Thyroid Storm
3. Condition:
<90/60; P >130, <50; R>25, <10; T >38.5°C
6. Nursing: Cooling blanket prn temp >39°C, inputs and
outputs. Oxygen 2 L/min by nasal canula.
7. Diet: Regular
8. IV Fluids: D5 ½ NS at 125 mL/h.
Thyroid Storm and Hyperthyroidism:
-Methimazole (Tapazole) 30-60 mg PO, then mainte-
nance of 15 mg PO qd-bid OR
-Propylthiouracil (PTU) 1000 mg PO, then 50-250 mg
PO q4-8h, up to 1200 mg/d; usual maintenance
dose 50 mg PO tid AND
-Iodide solution (Lugol’s solution), 3-6 drops tid; one
hour after propylthiouracil AND
-Dexamethasone (Decadron) 2 mg IV q6h AND
-Propranolol 40-160 mg PO q6h or 5-10 mg/h, max 2-5
mg IV q4h or propranolol-LA (Inderal-LA), 80-120
mg PO qd [60, 80, 120, 160 mg].
-Acetaminophen (Tylenol) 1-2 tabs PO q4-6h prn temp
>38°C.
-Zolpidem (Ambien) 10 mg PO qhs prn insomnia OR
-Lorazepam (Ativan) 1-2 mg IV/IM/PO q4-8h prn
anxiety.
10. Extras: CXR PA and LAT, ECG, endocrine consult.
11. Labs: CBC, SMA 7&12; sensitive TSH, free T4. UA.
Myxedema Coma and Hypothyroid-

ism
1. Admit to:
2. Diagnosis: Myxedema Coma
3. Condition:
<90/60; P >130, <50; R>25, <10; T >38.5°C
6. Nursing: Triple blankets prn temp <36°C, inputs and
outputs, aspiration precautions.
7. Diet: NPO
8. IV Fluids: IV D5 NS TKO.
Myxedema Coma and Hypothyroidism:
-Volume replacement with NS 1 L rapid IV, then 125
mL/h.
-Levothyroxine (Synthroid, Levoxine) 300-500 mcg IV,
then 100 mcg PO or IV qd.
-Hydrocortisone 100 mg IV loading dose, then 50-100
mg IV q8h.
Hypothyroidism in Medically Stable Patient:
-Levothyroxine (Synthroid, T4) 50-75 mcg PO qd,
increase by 25 mcg PO qd at 2-4 week intervals to
75-150 mcg qd until TSH normalized.
11. Extras: ECG, endocrine consult.
12. Labs: CBC, SMA 7&12; sensitive TSH, free T4. UA,
rheumatoid factor, ANA.
Nephrologic Disorders
Renal Failure
1. Admit to:
2. Diagnosis: Renal failure
3. Condition:
4. Vital Signs: q8h. Call physician if QRS complex >0.14
sec; urine output <20 cc/hr; BP >160/90, <90/60; P
>120, <50; R>25, <10; T >38.5°C
5. Allergies: Avoid magnesium containing antacids, salt
substitutes, NSAIDS. Discontinue phosphate or
potassium supplements.
7. Nursing: Daily weights, inputs and outputs, chart urine
output. If no urine output for 4h, in-and-out catheterize.
Guaiac stools.
8. Diet: Renal diet of high biologic value protein of 0.6-
0.8 g/kg, sodium 2 g, potassium 1 mEq/kg, and at least
35 kcal/kg of nonprotein calories. In oliguric patients,
daily fluid intake should be restricted to less than 1 L
after volume has been normalized.
-Consider fluid challenge (to rule out pre-renal azo-
temia if not fluid overloaded) with 500-1000 mL NS
IV over 30 min. In acute renal failure, in-and-out
catheterize and check postvoid residual to rule out
obstruction.
-Furosemide (Lasix) 80-320 mg IV bolus over 10-60
min, double the dose if no response after 2 hours to
total max 1000 mg/24h, or furosemide 1000 mg in
250 mL D5W at 20-40 mg/hr continuous IV infusion
OR
-Torsemide (Demadex) 20-40 mg IV bolus over 5-10
min, double the dose up to max 200 mg/day OR
-Bumetanide (Bumex) 1-2 mg IV bolus over 1-20 min;
double the dose if no response in 1-2 h to total max
10 mg/day.
-Metolazone (Zaroxolyn) 5-10 mg PO (max 20 mg/24h)
30 min before a loop diuretic.
-Dopamine (Intropin) 1-3 mcg/kg per minute IV.
-Hyperkalemia is treated with sodium polystyrene
sulfonate (Kayexalate), 15-30 gm PO/NG/PR q4-6h.
-Hyperphosphatemia is controlled with calcium acetate
(PhosLo), 2-3 tabs with meals.
-Metabolic acidosis is treated with sodium bicarbonate
to maintain the serum pH >7.2 and the bicarbonate
level >20 mEq/L. 1-2 amps (50-100 mEq) IV push,
followed by infusion of 2-3 amps in 1000 mL of D5W
at 150 mL/hr.
-Adjust all medications to creatinine clearance, and
remove potassium phosphate and magnesium from
IV. Avoid NSAIDs and nephrotoxic drugs.
11. Extras: CXR, ECG, renal ultrasound, nephrology and
dietetics consults.
12. Labs: CBC, platelets, SMA 7&12, creatinine, BUN,
potassium, magnesium, phosphate, calcium, uric acid,
osmolality, ESR, INR/PTT, ANA.
Urine specific gravity, UA with micro, urine C&S; 1st AM
spot urine electrolytes, eosinophils, creatinine, pH,
osmolality; Wright's stain, urine electrophoresis. 24h urine
protein, creatinine, sodium.
Nephrolithiasis
1. Admit to:
2. Diagnosis: Nephrolithiasis
3. Condition:
4. Vital Signs: q8h. Call physician if urine output <30
cc/hr; BP >160/90, <90/60; T >38.5°C
6. Nursing: Strain urine, measure inputs and outputs.
Place Foley if no urine for 4 hours.
7. Diet: Regular, push oral fluids.
8. IV Fluids: IV D5 ½ NS at 100-125 cc/hr (maintain
urine output of 80 mL/h).
-Cefazolin (Ancef) 1-2 gm IV q8h
-Meperidine (Demerol) 75-100 mg and hydroxyzine 25
mg IM/IV q2-4h prn pain OR
-Butorphanol (Stadol) 0.5-2 mg IV q3-4h.
PO prn pain OR
-Oxycodone/acetaminophen (Percocet) 1 tab q6h prn
pain OR
-Acetaminophen with codeine (Tylenol 3) 1-2 tabs PO
q3-4h prn pain.
-Ketorolac (Toradol) 10 mg PO q4-6h prn pain, or 30-
60 mg IV/IM then 15-30 mg IV/IM q6h (max 5 days).
-Zolpidem (Ambien) 10 mg PO qhs prn insomnia.
11. Extras: Intravenous pyelogram, KUB, CXR, ECG.
12. Labs: CBC, SMA 6 and 12, calcium, uric acid,
phosphorous, UA with micro, urine C&S, urine pH,
INR/PTT. Urine cystine (nitroprusside test), send stones
for X-ray crystallography. 24 hour urine collection for uric
acid, calcium, creatinine.
Hypercalcemia
1. Admit to:
2. Diagnosis: Hypercalcemia
3. Condition:
P >120, <50; R>25, <10; T >38.5°C; or tetany or any
abnormal mental status.
5. Activity: Encourage ambulation; up in chair at other
times.
6. Nursing: Seizure precautions, measure inputs and
outputs.
7. Diet: Restrict dietary calcium to 400 mg/d, push PO
fluids.
-1-2 L of 0.9% saline over 1-4 hours until no longer
hypotensive, then saline diuresis with 0.9% saline
infused at 125 cc/h AND
-Furosemide (Lasix) 20-80 mg IV q4-12h. Maintain
urine output of 200 mL/h; monitor serum sodium,
potassium, magnesium.
-Calcitonin (Calcimar) 4-8 IV kg IM q12h or SQ q6-
12h.
-Etidronate (Didronel) 7.5 mg/kg/day in 250 mL of
normal saline IV infusion over 2 hours. Repeat on 3
days.
-Pamidronate (Aredia) 60 mg in 1 liter of NS infused
over 4 hours or 90 mg in 1 liter of NS infused over
24 hours x one dose.
9. Extras: CXR, ECG, mammogram.
10. Labs: Total and ionized calcium, parathyroid hor-
mone, SMA 7&12, phosphate, Mg, alkaline phosphatase,
prostate specific antigen and carcinoembryonic antigen.
24h urine calcium, phosphate.
Hypocalcemia
1. Admit to:
2. Diagnosis: Hypocalcemia
3. Condition:
P >120, <50; R>25, <10; T >38.5°C; or any abnormal
mental status.
6. Nursing: I and O.
7. Diet: No added salt diet.
Symptomatic Hypocalcemia:
-Calcium chloride, 10% (270 mg calcium/10 mL vial)
give 5-10 mL slowly over 10 min or dilute in 50-100
mL of D5W and infuse over 20 min, repeat q20-30
min if symptomatic, or hourly if asymptomatic.
Correct hyperphosphatemia before hypocalcemia
OR
-Calcium gluconate, 20 mL of 10% solution IV (2
vials)(90 mg elemental calcium/10 mL vial) infused
over 10-15 min, followed by infusion of 60 mL of
calcium gluconate in 500 cc of D5W (1 mg/mL) at
0.5-2.0 mg/kg/h.
Chronic Hypocalcemia:
-Calcium carbonate with vitamin D (Oscal-D) 1-2 tab
PO tid OR
-Calcium carbonate (Oscal) 1-2 tab PO tid OR
-Calcium citrate (Citracal) 1 tab PO q8h or Extra
strength Tums 1-2 PO with meals.
-Vitamin D2 (Ergocalciferol) 1 tab PO qd.
-Calcitriol (Rocaltrol) 0.25 mcg PO qd, titrate up to 0.5-
2.0 mcg qid.
-Docusate sodium (Colace) 1 tab PO bid.
9. Extras: CXR, ECG.
10. Labs: SMA 7&12, phosphate, Mg. 24h urine calcium,
potassium, phosphate, magnesium.
Hyperkalemia
1. Admit to:
2. Diagnosis: Hyperkalemia
3. Condition:
4. Vital Signs: q4h. Call physician if QRS complex >0.14
sec or BP >160/90, <90/60; P >120, <50; R>25, <10;
T >38.5°C.
5. Activity: Bed rest; up in chair as tolerated.
6. Nursing: Inputs and outputs. Chart QRS complex
width q1h.
7. Diet: Regular, no salt substitutes.
8. IV Fluids: D5NS at 125 cc/h
-Consider discontinuing ACE inhibitors, angiotensin II
receptor blockers, beta-blockers, potassium sparing
diuretics.
-Calcium gluconate (10% sln) 10-30 mL IV over 2-5
min; second dose may be given in 5 min. Contrain-
dicated if digoxin toxicity is suspected. Keep 10 mL
vial of calcium gluconate at bedside for emergent
use.
-Sodium bicarbonate 1 amp (50 mEq) IV over 5 min
(give after calcium in separate IV).
-Regular insulin 10 units IV push with 1 ampule of 50%
glucose IV push.
-Kayexalate 30-45 gm premixed in sorbitol solution
PO/NG/PR now and in q3-4h prn.
-Furosemide 40-80 mg IV, repeat prn.
-Consider emergent dialysis if cardiac complications or
renal failure.
10. Extras: ECG.
11. Labs: CBC, platelets, SMA7, magnesium, calcium,
SMA-12. UA, urine specific gravity, urine sodium, pH, 24h
urine potassium, creatinine.
Hypokalemia
1. Admit to:
2. Diagnosis: Hypokalemia
3. Condition:
4. Vital Signs: Vitals, urine output q4h. Call physician if
BP >160/90, <90/60; P>120, <50; R>25, <10; T
>38.5°C.
7. Diet: Regular
Acute Therapy:
-KCL 20-40 mEq in 100 cc saline infused IVPB over 2
hours; or add 40-80 mEq to 1 liter of IV fluid and
infuse over 4-8 hours.
-KCL elixir 40 mEq PO tid (in addition to IV); max total
dose 100-200 mEq/d (3 mEq/kg/d).
Chronic Therapy:
-Micro-K 10 mEq tabs 2-3 tabs PO tid after meals (40-
100 mEq/d) OR
-K-Dur 20 mEq tabs 1 PO bid-tid.
Hypokalemia with metabolic acidosis:
-Potassium citrate 15-30 mL in juice PO qid after
meals (1 mEq/mL).
-Potassium gluconate 15 mL in juice PO qid after
meals (20 mEq/15 mL).
9. Extras: ECG, dietetics consult.
10. Labs: CBC, magnesium, SMA 7&12. UA, urine Na,
pH, 24h urine for K, creatinine.
Hypermagnesemia
1. Admit to:
2. Diagnosis: Hypermagnesemia
3. Condition:
4. Vital Signs: q6h. Call physician if QRS >0.14 sec.
6. Nursing: Inputs and outputs, daily weights.
7. Diet: Regular
-Saline diuresis 0.9% saline infused at 100-200 cc/h to
replace urine loss AND
-Calcium chloride, 1-3 gm added to saline (10% sln; 1
gm per 10 mL amp) to run at 1 gm/hr AND
-Furosemide (Lasix) 20-40 mg IV q4-6h as needed.
-Magnesium of >9.0 requires stat hemodialysis be-
cause of risk of respiratory failure.
9. Extras: ECG
10. Labs: Magnesium, calcium, SMA 7&12, creatinine. 24
hour urine magnesium, creatinine.
Hypomagnesemia
1. Admit to:
2. Diagnosis: Hypomagnesemia
3. Condition:
4. Vital Signs: q6h
6. Diet: Regular
-Magnesium sulfate 4-6 gm in 500 mL D5W IV at 1
gm/hr. Hold if no patellar reflex. (Estimation of Mg
deficit = 0.2 x kg weight x desired increase in Mg
concentration; give deficit over 2-3d) OR
-Magnesium sulfate (severe hypomagnesemia <1.0) 1-
2 gm (2-4 mL of 50% sln) IV over 15 min, OR
-Magnesium chloride (Slow-Mag) 65-130 mg (1-2 tabs)
PO tid-qid (64 mg or 5.3 mEq/tab) OR
-Milk of magnesia 5 mL PO qd-qid.
8. Extras: ECG
9. Labs: Magnesium, calcium, SMA 7&12. Urine Mg,
electrolytes, 24h urine magnesium, creatinine.
Hypernatremia
1. Admit to:
2. Diagnosis: Hypernatremia
3. Condition:
0/50; P >140, <50; R>25, <10; T >38.5°C.
7. Diet: No added salt.
Hypernatremia with Hypovolemia:
If volume depleted, give 1-2 L NS IV over 1-3 hours
until not orthostatic, then give D5W IV or PO to
replace half of body water deficit over first
24hours (attempt to correct sodium at 1 mEq/L/h),
then remaining deficit over next 1-2 days.
Body water deficit (L) = 0.6(weight kg)([Na serum]-
140)
140
Hypernatremia with ECF Volume Excess:
-Furosemide 40-80 mg IV or PO qd-bid.
-Salt poor albumin (25%) 50-100 mL bid-tid x 48-72 h.
Hypernatremia with Diabetes Insipidus:
-D5W to correct body water deficit (see above).
-Pitressin 5-10 U IM/IV q6h or desmopressin
(DDAVP) 4 mcg IV/SQ q12h; keep urine specific
gravity >1.010.
9. Extras: CXR, ECG.
10. Labs: SMA 7&12, serum osmolality, liver panel, ADH,
plasma renin activity. UA, urine specific gravity. Urine
osmolality, Na, 24h urine K, creatinine.
Hyponatremia
1. Admit to:
2. Diagnosis: Hyponatremia
3. Condition:
P >140, <50; R>25, <10; T >38.5°C.
5. Activity: Up in chair as tolerated.
Hyponatremia with Hypervolemia and Edema (low
osmolality <280, UNa <10 mmol/L: nephrosis, heart
failure, cirrhosis):
-Water restrict to 0.5-1.0 L/d.
-Furosemide 40-80 mg IV or PO qd-bid.
Hyponatremia with Normal Volume Status (low
osmolality <280, UNa <10 mmol: water intoxication;
UNa >20: SIADH, diuretic-induced):
-Water restrict to 0.5-1.5 L/d.
Hyponatremia with Hypovolemia (low osmolality <280)
UNa <10 mmol/L: vomiting, diarrhea, third
space/respiratory/skin loss; UNa >20 mmol/L: diuretics,
renal injury, RTA, adrenal insufficiency, partial obstruc-
tion, salt wasting:
-If volume depleted, give 0.5-2 L of 0.9% saline over 1-
2 hours until no longer hypotensive, then 0.9%
saline at 125 mL/h or 100-500 mL 3% hypertonic
saline over 4h.
Severe Symptomatic Hyponatremia:
If volume depleted, give 1-2 L of 0.9% saline (154
mEq/L) over 1-2 hours until no longer orthostatic.
Determine volume of 3% hypertonic saline (513
mEq/L) to be infused:
Na (mEq) deficit = 0.6 x (wt kg)x(desired [Na] - actual
[Na])
Volume of sln (L) = Sodium to be infused (mEq)

Number of hrs (mEq/L in sln) x Number of hrs
-Correct half of sodium deficit intravenously over 24
hours until serum sodium is 120 mEq/L; increase
sodium by 12-20 mEq/L over 24 hours (1 mEq/L/h).
-Alternative Method: 3% saline 100-300 mL over 4-6h,
repeated as needed.
9. Extras: CXR, ECG, head/chest CT scan.
10. Labs: SMA 7&12, osmolality, triglyceride, liver panel.
UA, urine specific gravity. Urine osmolality, Na.
Hyperphosphatemia
1. Admit to:
2. Diagnosis: Hyperphosphatemia
3. Condition:
4. Vital Signs: qid
7. Diet: Low phosphorus diet with 0.7-1 gm/d
Moderate Hyperphosphatemia:
-Restrict dietary phosphate to 0.7-1.0 gm/d.
-Calcium acetate (PhosLo) 1-3 tabs PO tid with meals,
OR
-Aluminum hydroxide (Amphojel) 5-10 mL or 1-2
tablets PO before meals tid.
Severe Hyperphosphatemia:
-Volume expansion with 0.9% saline 1-2 L over 1-2h.
-Acetazolamide (Diamox) 500 mg PO or IV q6h.
-Consider dialysis.
9. Extras: CXR PA and LAT, ECG.
10. Labs: Phosphate, SMA 7&12, magnesium, calcium.
UA, parathyroid hormone.
Hypophosphatemia
1. Admit to:
2. Diagnosis: Hypophosphatemia
3. Condition:
4. Vital Signs: qid
Mild to Moderate Hypophosphatemia (1.0-2.2 mg/dL):
-Sodium or potassium phosphate 0.25 mMoles/kg in
150-250 mL of NS or D5W at 10 mMoles/h.
-Neutral phosphate (Nutra-Phos), 2 tab PO bid (250
mg elemental phosphorus/tab) OR
-Phospho-Soda 5 mL (129 mg phosphorus) PO bid-tid.
Severe Hypophosphatemia (<1.0 mg/dL):
-Na or K phosphate 0.5 mMoles/kg in 250 mL D5W or
NS, IV infusion at 10 mMoles/hr OR
-Add potassium phosphate to IV solution in place of
maintenance KCL; max IV dose 7.5 mg phospho-
rus/kg/6h.
9. Extras: CXR PA and LAT, ECG.
10. Labs: Phosphate, SMA 7&12, Mg, calcium, UA.
Rheumatologic Disorders
Systemic Lupus Erythematosus
1. Admit to:
2. Diagnosis: Systemic Lupus Erythematosus
3. Condition:
4. Vital Signs: tid
5. Allergies:
6. Activity: Up as tolerated with bathroom privileges
7. Nursing:
8. Diet: No added salt, low psoralen diet.
-Ibuprofen (Motrin) 400 mg PO qid (max 2.4 g/d) OR
-Indomethacin (Indocin) 25-50 mg tid-qid.
-Hydroxychloroquine (Plaquenil) 200-600 mg/d PO
-Prednisone 60-100 mg PO qd, may increase to 200-
300 mg/d. Maintenance 10-20 mg PO qd or 20-40
mg PO qOD OR
-Methylprednisolone (pulse therapy) 500 mg IV over
30 min q12h for 3-5d, then prednisone 50 mg PO
qd.
-Betamethasone dipropionate (Diprolene) 0.05%
ointment applied bid.
10. Extras: CXR PA, LAT, ECG. Rheumatology consult.
11. Labs: CBC, platelets, SMA 7&12, INR/PTT, ESR,
complement CH-50, C3, C4, C-reactive protein, LE prep,
Coombs test, VDRL, rheumatoid factor, ANA, DNA
binding, lupus anticoagulant, anticardiolipin, antinuclear
cytoplasmic antibody. UA.
Acute Gout Attack

1. Admit to:
2. Diagnosis: Acute gout attack
3. Condition:
4. Vital Signs: tid
5. Activity: Bed rest with bedside commode
6. Nursing: Keep foot elevated; support sheets over foot;
guaiac stools.
7. Diet: Low purine diet.
-Ibuprofen (Motrin) 800 mg, then 400-800 mg PO q4-
6h OR
-Diclofenac (Voltaren) 25-75 mg tid-qid with food OR
-Indomethacin (Indocin) 25-50 mg PO q6h for 2d, then
50 mg tid for 2 days, then 25 mg PO tid OR
-Ketorolac (Toradol) 30-60 mg IV/IM, then 15-30 mg
IV/IM q6h or 10 mg PO tid-qid OR
-Naproxen sodium (Anaprox, Anaprox-DS) 550 mg PO
bid OR
-Methylprednisolone (SoluMedrol) 125 mg IV x 1 dose
THEN
-Prednisone 60 mg PO qd for 5 days, followed by
tapering.
-Colchicine 2 tablets (0.5 mg or 0.6 mg), followed by 1
tablet q1h until relief, max dose of 9.6 mg/24h.
Maintenance colchicine: 0.5-0.6 mg PO qd-bid.
Hypouricemic Therapy:
-Probenecid (Benemid), 250 mg bid. Increase the
dosage to 500 mg bid after 1 week, then increase
by 500-mg increments every 4 weeks until the uric
acid level is below 6.5 mg/dL. Max dose 2 g/d.
Contraindicated during acute attack.
-Allopurinol (Zyloprim) 300 mg PO qd, may increase by
100-300 mg q2weeks. Usually initiated after the
acute attack.
-Meperidine (Demerol) 50-100 mg IM/IV q4-6h prn
pain OR
PO prn pain.
headache.
10. Labs: CBC, SMA 7, uric acid. UA with micro. Synovial
fluid for light and polarizing micrography for crystals; C&S,
Gram stain, glucose, protein, cell count. X-ray views of
joint. 24 hour urine for uric acid.
PEDIATRICS
General Pediatrics
Pediatric History and Physical Exam-
ination
History
Identifying Data: Patient's name; age, sex. List the

patient’s significant medical problems. Name and relation-
ship to child of informant (patient, parent).
Chief Compliant: Reason given for seeking medical care
and the duration of the symptom(s).
History of Present Illness (HPI): Describe the course of
the patient's illness, including when it began, character of
the symptom(s); aggravating or alleviating factors;
pertinent positives and negatives. Past diagnostic testing.
Past Medical History (PMH): Past diseases, surgeries,
hospitalizations; medical problems; history of asthma.
Birth History: Gestational age at birth, preterm, obstetri-
cal problems.
Developmental History: Motor skills, language develop-
ment, self-care skills.
Medications: Include prescription and OTC drugs,
vitamins, herbal products, natural remedies, nutritional
supplements.
Feedings: Diet, volume of formula per day.
Immunizations: Up-to-date?
Drug Allergies: Penicillin, codeine?
Food Allergies:
Family History: Medical problems in family, including the
patient's disorder. Asthma, cancer, tuberculosis, allergies.
Social History: Family situation, alcohol, smoking, drugs.
Level of education.
General: Weight loss, fever, chills, fatigue, night
sweats.
Skin: Rashes, skin discolorations.
Head: Headaches, dizziness, seizures.
Eyes: Visual changes.
Ears: Tinnitus, vertigo, hearing loss.
Nose: Nose bleeds, discharge.
Mouth and Throat: Dental disease, hoarseness,
throat pain.
Respiratory: Cough, shortness of breath, sputum
(color and consistency).
Cardiovascular: Dyspnea on exertion, edema,
valvular disease.
Gastrointestinal: Abdominal pain, vomiting, diarrhea,
constipation.
Genitourinary: Dysuria, frequency, hematuria.
Gynecological: Last menstrual period (frequency,
duration), age of menarche; dysmenorrhea, contracep-
tion, vaginal bleeding, breast masses.
Endocrine: Polyuria, polydipsia.
Musculoskeletal: Joint pain or swelling, arthritis,
myalgias.
S k i n a n d L ym p h a t i c s : E a s y b r u i s i n g ,
lymphadenopathy.
Neuropsychiatric: Weakness, seizures.
Pain: quality (sharp/stabbing, aching, pressure),
location, duration
Physical Examination
General appearance: Note whether the patient looks “ill,”

well, or malnourished.
Physical Measurements: weight, height, head circumfer-
ence (plot on growth charts).
Vital Signs: Temperature, heart rate, respiratory rate,
blood pressure.
Skin: Rashes, scars, moles, skin turgor, capillary refill (in
seconds).
Lymph Nodes: Cervical, axillary, inguinal nodes: size,
tenderness.
Head: Bruising, masses, fontanels.
Eyes: Pupils: equal, round, and reactive to light and
accommodation (PERRLA); extra ocular movements
intact (EOMI). Funduscopy (papilledema, hemorrhages,
exudates).
Ears: Acuity, tympanic membranes (dull, shiny, intact,
infected, bulging).
Mouth and Throat: Mucus membrane color and mois-
ture; oral lesions, dentition, pharynx, tonsils.
Neck: Thyromegaly, lymphadenopathy, masses.
Chest: Equal expansion, rhonchi, crackles, rubs, breath
sounds.
Heart: Regular rate and rhythm (RRR), first and second
heart sounds (S1, S2); gallops (S3, S4), murmurs (grade
1-6), pulses (graded 0-2+).
Breast: Discharge, masses; axillary masses.
Abdomen: Bowel sounds, bruits, tenderness, masses;
hepatomegaly, splenomegaly; guarding, rebound, percus-
sion note (tympanic), suprapubic tenderness.
Genitourinary: Inguinal masses, hernias, scrotum,
testicles.
Pelvic Examination: Vaginal mucosa, cervical dis-
charge, uterine size, masses, adnexal masses, ovaries.
Extremities: Joint swelling, range of motion, edema
(grade 1-4+); cyanosis, clubbing, edema (CCE); pulses.
Rectal Examination: Sphincter tone, masses, fissures;
test for occult blood
Neurological: Mental status and affect; gait, strength
(graded 0-5), sensation, deep tendon reflexes (biceps,
triceps, patellar, ankle; graded 0-4+).
Labs: Electrolytes (sodium, potassium, bicarbonate,
chloride, BUN, creatinine), CBC (hemoglobin, hematocrit,
WBC count, platelets, differential); x-rays, ECG, urine
analysis (UA), liver function tests (LFTs).
Assessment (Impression): Assign a number to each
problem and discuss separately. Discuss differential
diagnosis and give reasons that support the working
diagnosis; give reasons for excluding other diagnoses.
Plan: Describe therapeutic plan for each numbered
problem, including testing, laboratory studies, medica-
tions.
Progress Notes
Daily progress notes should summarize developments in
a patient's hospital course, problems that remain active,
plans to treat those problems, and arrangements for
discharge. Progress notes should address every element
of the problem list.
Example Progress Note
Date/time:
Identify Discipline and Level of Education: e.g.
Pediatric resident PL-3
Subjective: Any problems and symptoms of the
patient should be charted. Appetite, pain, or fussi-
ness may be included.
Objective:
General appearance.
Vitals, including highest temperature (Tmax) over
past 24 hours. Feedings, fluid inputs and out-
puts (I/O), including oral and parenteral intake
and urine and stool volume output.
Physical exam, including chest and abdomen,
with particular attention to active problems. Em-
phasize changes from previous physical exams.
Labs: Include new test results and flag abnormal
values.
Current Medications: List all medications and
dosages.
Assessment and Plan: This section should be
organized by problem. A separate assessment and
plan should be written for each problem.
Discharge Note
The discharge note should be written in the patient’s chart
prior to discharge.
Discharge Note
Date/time:
Diagnoses:
during hospitalization, including surgical procedures
and antibiotic therapy.
scans.
Prescription Writing
• Patient’s name:
• Date:
• Drug name, dosage form, dose, route, frequency
(include concentration for oral liquids or mg strength for
oral solids): Amoxicillin 125mg/5mL 5 mL PO tid
• Quantity to dispense: mL for oral liquids, # of oral
solids
• Refills: If appropriate
• Signature
Procedure Note
A procedure note should be written in the chart after a
procedure is performed (e.g. lumbar puncture).
Procedure Note
Date and time:

Procedure:
Indications:
Patient Consent: Document that the indications, risks and
alternatives to the procedure were explained to the parents
and patient. Note that the parents and the patient were
given the opportunity to ask questions and that the parents
consented to the procedure in writing.
Lab tests: Relevant labs, such as the CBC
Description of Procedure: Briefly describe the procedure,
including sterile prep, anesthesia method, patient position,
devices used, anatomic location of procedure, and out-
come.
Complications and Estimated Blood Loss (EBL):
Disposition: Describe how the patient tolerated the proce-
dure.
Specimens: Describe any specimens obtained and labs
tests which were ordered.
Developmental Milestones
Age Milestones
1 month Raises head slightly when prone; alerts to

sound; regards face, moves extremities
equally.
2-3 months Smiles, holds head up, coos, reaches for

familiar objects, recognizes parent.
4-5 months Rolls front to back and back to front; sits

well when propped; laughs, orients to
voice; enjoys looking around; grasps rattle,
bears some weight on legs.
6 months Sits unsupported; passes cube hand to

hand; babbles; uses raking grasp; feeds
self crackers.
8-9 months Crawls, cruises; pulls to stand; pincer

grasp; plays pat-a-cake; feeds self with
bottle; sits without support; explores envi-
ronment.
12 months Walking, talking a few words; understands

"no"; says "mama/dada" discriminantly;
throws objects; imitates actions, marks
with crayon, drinks from a cup.
15-18 Comes when called; scribbles; walks back-

months ward; uses 4-20 words; builds tower of 2
blocks.
24-30 Removes shoes; follows 2 step command;

months jumps with both feet; holds pencil, knows
first and last name; knows pronouns. Par-
allel play; points to body parts, runs, spoon
feeds self, copies parents.
3 years Dresses and undresses; walks up and

down steps; draws a circle; uses 3-4 word
sentences; takes turns; shares. Group
play.
4 years Hops, skips, catches ball; memorizes

songs; plays cooperatively; knows colors;
copies a circle; uses plurals.
5 years Jumps over objects; prints first name;

knows address and mother's name; fol-
lows game rules; draws three part man;
hops on one foot.
Immunizations
Immunization Schedule for Infants and Children
Age Immuniza- Comments
tions
Birth - 2 HBV If mother is HbsAg positive

mo or unknown status, the
first dose of HBV should
be given within 12 hours of
birth along with hepatitis B
immune globulin 0.5 mL.
1-4 mo HBV The second HBV dose

should be given at least
one month after the first
dose. For infants of HbsAg
positive or unknown status
mothers, the second dose
should be given at 1-2
months of age.
2 mo DTaP, Hib, DTP and Hib are available

IPV, PCV combined as Tetramune.
The pneumococcal vac-
cine recommendation is
new for 2001.
tions
4 mo DTaP, Hib,
IPV, PCV
6 mo DTaP, (Hib), Dose 3 of Hib is not indi-

PCV cated if the product for
doses 1 and 2 was
PedvaxHIB.
6-18 mo HBV, IPV The third HBV dose

should be administered at
least 4 months after the
first dose and at least 2
months after the second
dose. For infants of HbsAg
positive or unknown status
mothers, the third dose
should be given at 6
months of age.
12-15 Hib, PCV, Tuberculin testing may be

mo MMR done at the same visit if
12-18 VAR indicated. Varicella vac-
mo cine is recommended in
children who do not have a
reliable history of having
had the clinical disease.
15-18 DTaP The 4th dose of DTaP

mo should be given 6-12 mo
after the third dose of
DTaP and may be given
as early as 12 mo, pro-
vided that the interval
between doses 3 and 4 is
at least 6 mo.
4-6 yr DTaP, IPV, DTaP and IPV should be

MMR given at or before school
entry. DTaP should not be
given after the 7th birthday
11-12 yr MMR Omit if MMR dose was

given at age 4-6 years.
14-16 yr Td Repeat every 10 yrs

throughout life
HBV = Hepatitis B virus vaccine; DTaP = diphtheria and

tetanus toxoids and acellular pertussis vaccine; Hib =
Haemophilus influenzae type b conjugate vaccine; IPV =
inactivated polio vaccine; MMR = live measles, mumps,
and rubella viruses vaccine; PCV = pneumococcal conju-
gate vaccine (Prevnar); Td = adult tetanus toxoid (full dose)
and diphtheria toxoid (reduced dose), for children >7 yr and
adults; VAR = varicella virus vaccine
Recommended Schedule for Children Younger

than 7 Years Not Immunized in the First Year of
Life

tions
First visit DTaP, (Hib), If indicated, tuberculin

HBV, MMR, testing may be done at
IPV, (PCV), the same visit.
VAR If child is >5 years, Hib
is not indicated. PCV
recommended for all
children < 2 yrs or 24-59
months of age and at
high risk for invasive
pneumococcal disease
(e.g. sickle cell anemia,
HIV,
immunocompromised).
Varicella vaccine if child
has not had varicella
disease.
Interval
after
1st visit DTaP, HBV Second dose of Hib is
1 month indicated only if first
DTaP, Hib, dose was received when
2 months IPV, (PCV) <15 months. Second
DTaP, HBV, dose of PCV 6-8 weeks
>8 months IPV after first dose (if criteria
met above).
4-6 years DTaP, IPV, DTaP is not necessary if

(at or be- MMR the fourth dose was
fore given after the fourth
school birthday. IPV is not nec-
entry) essary if the third dose
was given after the
fourth birthday.
11-12 yr MMR MMR should be given at

entry to middle school or
junior high school if it
wasn’t given at age 4-6
years.
10 yr later Td Repeat every 10 yrs

Recommended Schedule for Children >7 Years

Who Were Not Immunized Previously

tions
First visit HBV, IPV, Varicella vaccine if

MMR, Td, VAR child has not had
varicella disease.
Interval
after First
visit HBV, IPV, Td, If child is >13 years
2 months VAR, MMR old, a second varicella
HBV, Td, IPV vaccine dose is
8-14 needed 4-8 weeks af-
months ter the first dose.
11-12 yrs MMR Omit if MMR dose was

old given at age 4-6 years.
10 yr later Td Repeat every 10 years

Haemophilus Immunization
H influenzae type b Vaccination in Children
Immunized Beginning at 2 to 6 Months of Age
Vaccine Total Regimens

Product Number
of Doses
PedvaxHIB 3 2 doses two months apart

(PRP- plus booster at 12-15
OMP) months which must be at
least two months after pre-
vious dose. Any vaccine
may be used for the
booster.
HibTITER 4 3 doses two months apart

(HbOC), plus booster at 12-15
ActHIB months which must be at
(PRP-T), least two months after pre-
OmniHIB vious dose. Any vaccine
(PRP-T) may be used for the
booster.
H influenzae type b Vaccination When the Initial

Vaccination was Delayed Until 7 Months of Age
or Older
Age at Vaccine Total Regimens

Initiation Product Doses
7-11 mo any vac- 3 2 doses at 2-

cine month inter-
(PedvaxHI vals plus
B or booster at 12-
HibTITER 18 months (at
or ActHIB least 2
or months after
OmniHIB) previous
dose)
12-14 mo any vac- 2 2 doses 2

cine months apart
15-59 mo any vac- 1 Single dose

cine of any prod-
uct
>5 years Any vac- 1 Only recom-

cine mended for
children with
chronic illness
known to be
associated
with an in-
creased risk
for H flu dis-
ease.
Varicella Immunization
Indications for Varicella Immunization:
A. Age 12 to 18 months: One dose of varicella vaccine
is recommended for universal immunization for all
healthy children who lack a reliable history of
varicella.
B. Age 19 months to the 13th birthday: Vaccination of
susceptible children is recommended and may be
given any time during childhood but before the 13th
birthday because of the potential increased severity
of natural varicella after this age. Susceptible is
defined by either lack of proof of either varicella
vaccination or a reliable history of varicella. One
dose is recommended.
C. Healthy adolescents and young adults: Healthy
adolescents past their 13th birthday who have not
been immunized previously and have no history of
varicella infection should be immunized against
varicella by administration of two doses of vaccine
4 to 8 weeks apart. Longer intervals between doses
do not necessitate a third dose, but may leave the
individual unprotected during the intervening
months.
D. All susceptible children aged 1 year to 18 years old
who are in direct contact with people at high risk for
varicella related complications (eg,
immunocompromised individuals) and who have
not had a documented case of varicella.
Influenza Immunization
Indications for Influenza Vaccination
A. Targeted high-risk children and adolescents (eg,
chronic pulmonary disease including asthma, sickle
cell anemia, HIV infection).
B. Other high-risk children and adolescents (eg,
diabetes mellitus, chronic renal disease, chronic
metabolic disease).
C. Close contacts of high risk patients.
D. Foreign travel if exposure is likely.
Vaccine Administration. Administer in the Fall, usually
October 1 - November 15, before the start of the influ-
enza season.
Influenza Immunization Administration
Age Vaccine Dosage Number

Type (mL) of Doses
6-35 Split virus 0.25 1-2*

months only
3-8 yrs Split virus 0.5 1-2*

only
9-12 yrs Split virus 0.5 1

only
> 12 yrs Whole or 0.5 1

split virus
*Two doses administered at least one month apart

are recommended for children who are receiving
influenza vaccine for the first time.
Pediatric Symptomatic
Care
Antipyretics
Analgesics/Antipyretics:
-Acetaminophen (Tylenol) 10-20 mg/kg/dose PO/PR q4-
6h, max 5 doses/day or 80 mg/kg/day or 4 gm/day
(whichever is smaller) OR
-Acetaminophen dose by age (if weight appropriate for
age):
Age: mg/dose PO/PR q4-
6h prn:
0-3 mo 40 mg/dose
4-11 mo 80 mg/dose
1-2 yr 120 mg/dose
2-3 yr 160 mg/dose
4-5 yr 240 mg/dose
6-8 yr 320 mg/dose
9-10 yr 400 mg/dose
11-12 yr 480 mg/dose
>12 yr 325-650 mg/dose
-Preparations: caplets: 160, 500 mg; caplet, ER: 650 mg;
drops: 80 mg/0.8 mL; elixir: 80 mg/2.5 mL, 80 mg/5
mL, 120 mg/5 mL, 160 mg/5 mL, 325 mg/5 mL, 500
mg/15 mL; suppositories: 80, 120, 325, 650 mg; tabs:
325, 500 mg; tabs, chewable: 80, 120, 160 mg.
-Ibuprofen (Motrin, Advil, Nuprin, Medipren, Children's
Motrin)
Analgesic: 4-10 mg/kg/dose PO q6-8h prn
Antipyretic: 5-10 mg/kg/dose PO q6-8h.
-Preparations: cap: 200 mg; caplet: 100 mg; oral drops:
40 mg/mL; susp: 100 mg/5 mL; tabs: 100, 200, 300,
400, 600, 800 mg; tabs, chewable: 50, 100 mg.
May cause GI distress, bleeding.
Antitussives, Decongestants, Ex-

pectorants, and Antihistamines
Antihistamines:
-Brompheniramine (Dimetane) [elixir: 2 mg/5 mL; tab:
4, 8, 12 mg; tab, SR: 8, 12 mg]
< 6 yr: 0.5 mg/kg/day PO q6h prn (max 8 mg/day)
6-11 yr: 2-4 mg PO q6-8h
>12 yr: 4-8 mg PO q4-6h or 8 mg SR PO q8-12h or
12 mg SR PO q12h (max 24 mg/day).
-Chlorpheniramine (Chlor-Trimeton) [cap, SR: 8, 12
mg; syrup 2mg/5mL; tabs: 4, 8, 12 mg; tab, chew: 2
mg; tab, SR: 8, 12 mg]
2-5 yr: 1 mg PO q4-6h prn
6-11 yr: 2 mg PO q4-6h prn
> 12 yr: 4 mg PO q4-6h prn or 8-12 mg SR PO q8-
12h
Antitussives (Pure) - Dextromethorphan:
-Benylin DM Cough Syrup [syrup: 10 mg/5mL]
-Benylin Pediatric [syrup: 37.5mg/5mL]
-Robitussin Pediatric [syrup: 7.5 mg/5mL]
-Vick’s Formula 44 Pediatric Formula [syrup: 3
mg/5mL]
2-5 yr: 2.5-5 mg PO q4h prn or 7.5 mg PO q6-8h prn
6-11 yr 5-10 mg PO q4h prn or 15 mg PO q6-8h prn
>12 yr: 10-20 mg PO q4h prn or 30 mg PO q6-8h
prn.
Expectorants:
-Guaifenesin (Robitussin) [syrup: 100 mg/5 mL]
<2 yr: 12 mg/kg/day PO q4-6h prn
2-5 yr: 50-100 mg PO q4h prn (max 600 mg/day)
6-11 yr: 100-200 mg PO q4h prn (max 1.2
gm/day)
>12 yr: 100-400 mg PO q4h prn (max 2.4 gm/day)
May irritate gastric mucosa; take with large quan-
tities of fluids.
Decongestants:
-Pseudoephedrine (Sudafed, Novafed): [cap: 60 mg;
cap, SR: 120, 240 mg; drops: 7.5 mg/0.8 mL;
syrup: 15 mg/5 mL, 30 mg/5 mL; tabs: 30, 60 mg].
<2 yr: 4 mg/kg/day PO q6h.
2-5 yr: 15 mg po q6h
6-11 yr: 30 mg po q6h
>12 yr: 30-60 mg/dose PO q6h or sustained
release 120 mg PO q12h or sustained release
240 mg PO q24h.
-Phenylephrine (Neo-synephrine) [nasal drops: 1/4,
1/2, 1%; nasal spray: 1/4, 1/2, 1%].
Children: Use 1/4 % spray or drops, 1-2
drops/spray in each nostril q3-4h.
Adults: Use 1/4-1/2% drops/spray, 1-2
drops/sprays in each nostril q3-4h
Discontinue use after 3 days to avoid rebound
congestion.
Combination Products:
-Actifed [per cap or tab or 10 mL syrup: Triprolidine
2.5 mg, Pseudoephedrine 60 mg].
4 mth-2 yr: 1.25 mL PO q6-8h
2-4 yr: 2.5 mL PO q6-8h
4-6 yr: 3.75 mL PO q6-8h
6-11y: 5 mL or ½ tab PO q6-8h
>12 yr: 10 mL or 1 cap/tab PO q6-8h OR
4 mg pseudoephedrine/kg/day PO tid-qid
-Actifed with Codeine cough syrup [syrup/5 mL: Co-
deine 10 mg, Triprolidine 1.25 mg,
Pseudoephedrine 30 mg].
4 mth-2 yr: 1.25 mL PO q6-8h
2-4 yr: 2.5 mL PO q6-8h
4-6 yr: 3.75 mL PO q6-8h
6-11y: 5 mL PO q6-8h
>12 yr: 10 mL PO q6-8h OR
4 mg pseudoephedrine/kg/day PO tid-qid.
-Dimetane Decongestant [cap/cplt or 10 mL:
Brompheniramine 4 mg, Phenylephrine 5 mg].
6-11 yr: 5 mL or ½ cap/caplet PO q4-6h prn
> 12 yr: 10 mL or 1 cap/caplet PO q4-6h prn
-Dimetane DX [syrup per 5 mL: Brompheniramine 2
mg, Dextromethorphan 10 mg, Pseudoephedrine
30 mg].
2-5 yrs: 2.5 mL PO q4-6h prn
6-11 yrs: 5 mL PO q4-6h prn
> 12 yrs: 10 mL PO q4-6h prn
-PediaCare Cough-Cold Chewable Tablets: [tab,
chew: Pseudoephedrine 15 mg,
Chlorpheniramine 1 mg, Dextromethorphan 5
mg].
3-5 yr: 1 tab PO q4-6h prn (max 4 tabs/day)
6-11 yr: 2 tabs PO q4-6h (max 8 tabs/day)
>12 yr: 4 tabs PO q4-6h (max 16 tabs/day)
-PediaCare Cough-Cold Liquid [liquid per 5 mL:
Pseudoephedrine 15 mg, Chlorpheniramine 1 mg,
Dextromethorphan 5 mg].
3-5 yr: 5 mL PO q6-8h prn
>12 yr: 20 mL PO q6-8h prn
-PediaCare Night Rest Cough-Cold Liquid [liquid per
5 mL: Pseudoephedrine 15 mg, Chlorpheniramine
1 mg, Dextromethorphan 7.5 mg].
-Phenergan VC [syrup per 5 mL: Phenylephrine 5 mg,
Promethazine 6.25 mg].
2-5 yr: 1.25 mL PO q4-6h prn
6-11 yr: 2.5 mL PO q4-6h prn
-Phenergan VC with Codeine [per 5 mL:
Promethazine 6.25 mg, Codeine 10 mg,
Phenylephrine 5 mg].
2-5 yr: 1.25 mL PO q4-6h prn
6-11 yr: 2.5 mL PO q4-6h prn
Adults: 5-10 mL q4-6h prn (max 120 mg codeine
per day)
-Phenergan with Codeine [syrup per 5 mL:
Promethazine 6.25 mg, Codeine 10 mg].
2-5 yr: 1.25 mL PO q4-6h prn
6-11 yr: 2.5 mL PO q4-6h prn
Adults: 5-10 mL q4-6h prn (max 120 mg codeine
per day)
-Phenergan with Dextromethorphan [syrup per 5 mL:
Promethazine 6.25 mg, Dextromethorphan 15
mg].
2-5 yr: 1.25 mL PO q4-6h prn
6-11 yr: 2.5 mL PO q4-6h prn
-Robitussin AC [syrup per 5 mL: Guaifenesin 100 mg,
Codeine 10 mg].
6 mos-2 yr: 1.25-2.5 mL PO q4h prn
2-5 yrs: 2.5 mL PO q4h prn
6-11 yrs: 5 mL PO q4h prn
>12 yrs: 10 mL PO q4-6h prn.
-Robitussin-DAC [syrup per 5 mL: Codeine 10mg,
Guaifenesin 100 mg, Pseudoephedrine 30 mg].
2-5 yrs: 1-1.5 mg/kg/day of codeine PO q4-6h prn
(max 30 mg/day)
6-11 yrs: 5 mL PO q4-6h prn
>12 yrs: 10 mL PO q4-6h prn
-Robitussin DM [syrup per 5 mL: Guaifenesin 100 mg,
2-5 yr: 2.5 mL PO q4h prn, max 10 mL/day
6-11 yr: 5 mL PO q4h prn, max 20 mL/day
>12 yr: 10 mL PO q4h prn, max 40 mL/day
-Robitussin Pediatric Cough and Cold [syrup per 5
mL: Dextromethorphan 7.5mg, Pseudoephedrine
15 mg].
>12 yr: 15 mL po q4-6h prn
Maximum four doses daily.
-Rondec drops [drops per 1 mL: Carbinoxamine
maleate 2 mg, Pseudoephedrine 25 mg].
4-5 mg pseudoephedrine/kg/day PO q6h prn OR
1-3 m: 1/4 dropperful (1/4 mL) PO q6h prn
6-9 m: 3/4 dropperful (0.75 mL) PO q6h prn
9-18 m: 1 dropperful (1 mL) PO q6h prn.
-Rondec syrup [syrup per 5 mL: Pseudoephedrine 60
mg, Carbinoxamine maleate 4 mg].
4-5 mg pseudoephedrine/kg/day PO q6h prn.
-Rondec DM drops [drops per mL: Carbinoxamine
maleate 2 mg, Pseudoephedrine 25 mg,
4-5 mg pseudoephedrine/kg/day PO q6h prn OR
6-9 m: 3/4 dropperful (0.75 mL) PO q6h prn
9-18 m: 1 dropperful (1 mL) PO q6h prn.
-Rondec DM syrup [syrup per 5 mL: Carbinoxamine
maleate 4 mg, Pseudoephedrine 60 mg,
4-5 mg pseudoephedrine/kg/day PO q6h prn.
-Tylenol Cold Multi-Symptom Plus Cough Liquid,
Children’s [liquid per 5 mL: Acetaminophen 160
mg, Chlorpheniramine 1 mg, Pseudoephedrine 15
mg].
2-5 yr: 5 mL PO q4h prn
6-11 yr: 10 mL PO q4h prn
>12 yr: 20 mL po q4h prn
-Tylenol Cold Plus Cough Chewable Tablet, Children’s
[tab, chew: Acetaminophen 80 mg,
Chlorpheniramine 0.5 mg, Dextromethorphan 2.5
mg, Pseudoephedrine 7.5 mg].
2-5 yr: 2 tabs PO q4h prn
6-11 yr: 4 tabs PO q4h prn
>12 yr: 4 tabs PO q4h prn
Analgesia and Sedation

Analgesics/Anesthetic Agents:
-Acetaminophen (Tylenol) 10-15 mg/kg PO/PR q4-6h
prn (see page 92 for detailed list of available
products)
-Acetaminophen/Codeine [per 5 mL: Acetaminophen
120 mg, Codeine 12 mg; tabs: Tylenol #2: 15 mg
codeine/300 mg acetaminophen; #3: 30 mg
codeine/300 mg acetaminophen; #4: 60 mg
codeine/300 mg acetaminophen]
0.5-1.0 mg codeine/kg/dose PO q4h prn.
-Acetaminophen/Hydrocodone [elixir per 5 mL:
hydrocodone 2.5 mg, acetaminophen 167 mg]
Tab:
Lortab 2.5/500: Hydrocodone 2.5 mg,
acetaminophen 500 mg
Lortab 5/500 and Vicodin: Hydrocodone 5 mg,
Lortab 7.5/500: Hydrocodone 7.5 mg,
Vicodin ES: Hydrocodone 7.5 mg, acetaminophen
750 mg
L o r t a b 1 0 / 5 0 0 : Hyd ro co d o n e 1 0 m g ,
L o r t a b 1 0 / 6 5 0 : Hydrocodone 10 mg ,
Children: 0.6 mg hydrocodone/kg/day PO q6-8h prn
<2 yr: do not exceed 1.25 mg/dose
2-12 yr: do not exceed 5 mg/dose
>12 yr: do not exceed 10 mg/dose
-ELAMax [lidocaine 4% cream (liposomal): 5, 30 gm]
Apply 10-60 minutes prior to procedure. Occlusive
dressing is optional. Available OTC.
-EMLA cream (eutectic mixture of local anesthetics) [
cream: 2.5% lidocaine and 2.5% prilocaine: 5, 30
gm; transdermal disc]. Apply and cover with
occlusive dressing at least 1 hour (max 4 hours)
prior to procedure.
-Fentanyl 1-2 mcg/kg IV q1-2h prn or 1-3 mcg/kg/hr
continuous IV infusion.
-Hydromorphone (Dilaudid) 0.015 mg/kg IV/IM/SC q3-
4h or
0.0075 mg/kg/hr continuous IV infusion titrated as
necessary for pain relief or 0.03-0.08 mg/kg PO
q6h prn.
-Ketamine 4 mg/kg IM or 0.5-1 mg/kg IV. Onset for IV
administration is 30 seconds, duration is 5-15
minutes.
-Lidocaine, buffered: Add sodium bicarbonate 1
mEq/mL 1 part to 9 parts lidocaine 1% for local
infiltration (eg, 2 mL lidocaine 1% and 0.22 mL
sodium bicarbonate 1 mEq/mL) to raise the pH of
the lidocaine to neutral and decrease the “sting”
of subcutaneous lidocaine.
-Meperidine (Demerol) 1 mg/kg IV/IM q2-3h prn pain.
-Morphine 0.05-0.1 mg/kg IV q2-4h prn or 0.02-0.06
mg/kg/hr continuous IV infusion or 0.1-0.15 mg/kg
IM/SC q3-4h or 0.2-0.5 mg/kg PO q4-6h.
Sedation:
Fentanyl and Midazolam Sedation:
-Fentanyl 1 mcg/kg IV slowly, may repeat to total of 3
mcg/kg AND
-Midazolam (Versed) 0.05-0.1 mg/kg slow IV [inj: 1
mg/mL, 5 mg/mL].
Have reversal agents available: naloxone 0.1 mg/kg
(usual max 2 mg) IM/IV
for fentanyl reversal and flumazenil 0.01 mg/kg (usual
max 5 mg) IM/IV for
midazolam reversal.
Benzodiazepines:
-Diazepam (Valium) 0.2-0.5 mg/kg/dose PO/PR or
0.05-0.2 mg/kg/dose IM/IV, max 10 mg.
-Lorazepam (Ativan) 0.05-0.1 mg/kg/dose IM/IV/PO,
max 4 mg.
-Midazolam (Versed) 0.08-0.2 mg/kg/dose IM/IV over
10-20 min, max 5 mg; or 0.2-0.4 mg/kg/dose PO
x 1, max 15 mg, 30-45 min prior to procedure; or
0.2 mg/kg intranasal (using 5 mg/mL injectable
solution, insert into nares with needleless tubercu-
lin syringe.)
Phenothiazines:
-Promethazine (Phenergan) 0.5-1 mg/kg/dose IM or
slow IV over 20 min, max 50 mg/dose.
-Chlorpromazine (Thorazine) 0.5-1 mg/kg/dose IM or
slow IV over 20min, max 50 mg/dose.
Antihistamines:
-Diphenhydramine (Benadryl) 1 mg/kg/dose IV/IM/PO,
max 50 mg.
-Hydroxyzine (Vistaril) 0.5-1 mg/kg/dose IM/PO, max
50 mg.
Barbiturates:
-Methohexital (Brevital)
IM: 5-10 mg/kg
IV: 1-2 mg/kg
PR: 25 mg/kg (max 500 mg/dose)
-Thiopental (Pentothal): Sedation, rectal: 5-10 mg/kg;
seizures, IV: 2-3 mg/kg
Other Sedatives:
-Chloral hydrate 25-100 mg/kg/dose PO/PR (max 1.5
gm/dose), allow 30 min for absorption.
Nonsteroidal Anti-inflammatory Drugs:
-Ibuprofen (Motrin, Advil, Nuprin, Medipren, Children's
Motrin)
Anti-inflammatory: 30-50 mg/kg/day PO q6h, max
2400 mg/day.
[cap: 200 mg; caplet: 100 mg; oral drops: 40
mg/mL; susp: 100 mg/5 mL; tabs: 100, 200, 300,
400, 600, 800 mg; tabs, chewable: 50, 100 mg].
-Ketorolac (Toradol)
Single dose: 0.4-1 mg/kg IV/IM (max 30 mg/dose
IV, 60 mg/dose IM)
Multiple doses: 0.4-0.5 mg/kg IV/IM q6h prn (max
30 mg/dose)
[inj: 15 mg/mL, 30 mg/mL].
Do not use for more than three days because of
risk of GI bleed.
-Naproxen (Naprosyn)
Analgesia: 5-7 mg/kg/dose PO q8-12h
Inflammatory disease: 10-15 mg/kg/day PO q12h,
max 1000 mg/day
[susp: 125 mg/5mL; tab: 250, 375, 500 mg; tab,
DR: 375, 500 mg
-Naproxen sodium (Aleve, Anaprox, Naprelan)
Analgesia: 5-7 mg/kg/dose PO q8-12h
Inflammatory disease: 10-15 mg/kg/day PO q12h,
max 1000 mg/day
[tab: 220, 275, 550 mg; tab, ER: 375, 500, 750
mg]. Naproxen sodium 220 mg = 200 mg base.
Antiemetics
-Chlorpromazine (Thorazine)
0.25-1 mg/kg/dose slow IV over 20 min/IM/PO q4-8h
prn, max 50 mg/dose
[inj: 25 mg/mL,; oral concentrate 30 mg/mL; supp:
25,100 mg; syrup: 10 mg/5 mL; tabs: 10, 25, 50,
100, 200 mg].
-Diphenhydramine (Benadryl)
1 mg/kg/dose IM/IV/PO q6h prn, max 50 mg/dose
[caps: 25, 50 mg; inj: 10 mg/mL, 50 mg/mL; liquid:
12.5 mg/5 mL; tabs: 25, 50 mg].
-Dimenhydrinate (Dramamine)
>12 yrs: 5 mg/kg/day IM/IV/PO q6h prn, max 300
mg/day
Not recommended in <12y due to high incidence of
extrapyramidal side effects.
[cap: 50 mg; inj: 50 mg/mL; liquid 12.5 mg/4 mL; tab:
50 mg; tab, chew: 50mg].
-Prochlorperazine (Compazine)
>12 yrs: 0.1-0.15 mg/kg/dose IM, max 10 mg/dose
or 5-10 mg PO q6-8h, max 40 mg/day OR 5-25 mg
PR q12h, max 50 mg/day
Not recommended in <12y due to high incidence of
extrapyramidal side effects
[caps, SR: 10, 15, 30 mg; inj: 5 mg/mL; supp: 2.5, 5,
25 mg; syrup: 5 mg/5 mL; tabs: 5, 10, 25 mg].
-Promethazine (Phenergan)
0.25-1 mg/kg/dose PO/IM/IV over 20 min or PR q4-
6h prn, max 50 mg/dose
[inj: 25,50 mg/mL; supp: 12.5, 25, 50 mg;syrup 6.25
mg/5 mL, 25 mg/5 mL; tabs: 12.5, 25, 50 mg].
-Trimethobenzamide (Tigan)
15 mg/kg/day IM/PO/PR q6-8h, max 100 mg/dose if
<13.6 kg or 200 mg/dose if 13.6-41kg.
[caps: 100, 250 mg; inj: 100 mg/mL; supp: 100, 200
mg].
Post-Operative Nausea and Vomiting:
-Ondansetron (Zofran) 0.1 mg/kg IV x 1, max 4 mg.
-Droperidol (Inapsine) 0.01-0.05 mg/kg IV/IM q4-6h
prn, max 5 mg [inj: 2.5 mg/mL].
Chemotherapy-Induced Nausea:
-Dexamethasone
10 mg/m2/dose (max 20 mg) IV x 1, then 5
mg/m2/dose (max 10 mg) IV q6h prn
[inj: 4 mg/mL, 10 mg/mL]
-Dronabinol (Marinol)
5 mg/m2/dose PO 1-3 hrs prior to chemotherapy,
then q4h prn afterwards. May titrate up in 2.5
mg/m2/dose increments to max of 15 mg/m2/dose.
[cap: 2.5, 5, 10 mg]
-Granisetron (Kytril)
10-20 mcg/kg IV given just prior to chemotherapy
(single dose) [inj: 1 mg/mL]
Adults (oral) 1 mg PO bid or 2 mg PO qd [tab: 1 mg]
-Metoclopramide (Reglan)
0.5-1 mg/kg/dose IV q6h prn.
Pretreatment with diphenhydramine 1 mg/kg IV is
recommended to decrease the risk of extrapyramidal
reactions.
[inj: 5 mg/mL]
-Ondansetron (Zofran)
0.15 mg/kg/dose IV 30 minutes before chemother-
apy and repeated 4 hr and 8 hr later (total of 3
doses) OR
0.3 mg/kg/dose IV x 1 30 minutes before chemother-
apy OR
0.45 mg/kg/day as a continuous IV infusion OR
Oral:
<0.3 m2: 1 mg PO three times daily
0.3-0.6 m2: 2 mg PO three times daily
0.6-1 m2: 3 mg PO three times daily
>1 m2: 4 mg PO three times daily OR
4-11 yr: 4 mg PO three times daily
>11 yr: 8 mg PO three times daily
[inj: 2 mg/mL; oral soln: 4mg/5 mL; tab: 4, 8, 24 mg;
tab, orally disintegrating: 4, 8 mg]
Cardiovascular Disorders
Pediatric Advanced Life Support
I. Cardiopulmonary assessment
A.Airway (A) assessment. The airway should be
assessed and cleared.
B.Breathing (B) assessment determines the respira-
tory rate, respiratory effort, breath sounds (air entry)
and skin color. A respiratory rate of less than 10 or
greater than 60 is a sign of impending respiratory
failure.
C.Circulation (C) assessment should quantify the
heart rate and pulse. In infants, chest compressions
should be initiated if the heart rate is less than 80
beats/minute (bpm). In children, chest compressions
should be initiated if the heart rate is less than 60
bpm.
II. Respiratory failure
A.An open airway should be established. Bag-valve-
mask ventilation should be initiated if the respiratory
rate is less than 10. Intubation is performed if pro-
longed ventilation is required. Matching the
endotracheal tube to the size of the nares or fifth
finger provides an estimate of tube size.
Intubation
Age ETT Laryngo- NG Tube

scope Blade Size
Premature 2.0-2.5 0 8
Newborn 3.0-3.5 1 10
>2 kg 3.5-4.0 1 10
Infant 4.0-4.5 1.5 12
12 mo 4.5-5.0 2 12-14
36 mo 5.0-5.5 2 14-16
6 yr 6.0-6.5 2 16-18
10 yr .0-7.5 3 18-20
Adolescent 7.5-8.0 3 20
Adult
Uncuffed ET tube in children <8 yrs.

Straight laryngoscope blade if <6-10 yrs; curved blade if
older.
B. Vascular access should be obtained. Gastric

decompression with a nasogastric or oral gastric
tube is necessary in endotracheally intubated
children and in children receiving bag-valve-mask
ventilation.
III. Shock
A. If the child is in shock, oxygen administration and
monitoring are followed by initiation of vascular
access. Crystalloid (normal saline or lactated
Ringer's) solutions are used for rapid fluid boluses
of 20 mL/kg over less than 20 minutes until the
shock is resolved.
B. Shock secondary to traumatic blood loss may
require blood replacement if perfusion parameters
have not normalized after a total of 40 to 60 mL/kg
of crystalloid has been administered.
C. Children in septic shock and cardiogenic shock
should initially receive crystalloid solution (boluses
of 20 mL/kg). Epinephrine should be considered
if septic or cardiogenic shock persists after intra-
venous volume has been repleted (repletion
requires 40 to 60 mL/kg of crystalloid).
IV. Cardiopulmonary failure
A. Oxygen is delivered at a concentration of 100%.
B. Intubation and foreign body removal are com-
pleted. If signs of shock persist, crystalloid re-
placement is initiated with boluses of 20 mL/kg
over less than 20 minutes. Inotropic agents are
added if indicated.
Inotropic Agents Used in Resuscitation of Chil-

dren
Intravenous
Agent dosage Indications
Epineph- 0.1 to 1.0 Symptomatic bradycardia,

rine µg/kg/minute shock (cardiogenic, septic,
(continuous infu- anaphylactic), hypotension
sion)
Dopa- 2 to 5 Low dose: improve renal

mine µg/kg/minute and splanchnic blood flow
(continuous infu-
sion) High dose: useful in the
10 to 20 treatment of hypotension
µg/kg/minute and shock in the presence
(continuous infu- of adequate intravascular
sion) volume
Dobut- 2 to 20 Normotensive cardiogenic

amine µg/kg/minute shock
(continuous infu-
sion)
V. Dysrhythmias
A. Bradycardia
1. Bradycardia is the most common dysrhythmia in
children. Initial management is ventilation and
oxygenation. Chest compressions should be
initiated if the heart rate is <60 bpm in a child or
<80 bpm in an infant.
2. If these measures do not restore the heart rate,
epinephrine is administered. Intravenous or
intraosseous epinephrine is given in a dose of
0.1 mL/kg of the 1:10,000 concentration (0.01
mg/kg). Endotracheal tube epinephrine is given
as a dose of 0.1 mL/kg of the 1:1,000 concen-
tration (0.1 mg/kg) diluted to a final volume of 3-
5 mL in normal saline. This dose may be re-
peated every three to five minutes.
3. Atropine may be tried if multiple doses of epi-
nephrine are unsuccessful. Atropine is given in
a dose of 0.2 mL/kg IV/IO/ET of the 1:10,000
concentration (0.02 mg/kg. The minimum dose
is 0.1 mg; the maximum single dose is 0.5 mg
for a child and 1 mg for an adolescent.
Endotracheal tube administration of atropine
should be further diluted to a final volume of 3-5
mL in normal saline.
4. Pacing may be attempted if drug therapy has
failed.
B. Asystole
1. Epinephrine is the drug of choice for asystole.
The initial dose of intravenous or intraosseous
epinephrine is given in a dose of 0.1 mL/kg of
the 1:10,000 concentration of epinephrine (0.01
mg/kg). Endotracheal tube administration of
epinephrine is given as a dose of 0.1 mL/kg of
the 1:1,000 concentration of epinephrine (0.1
mg/kg), further diluted to a final volume of 3-5
mL in normal saline.
2. Subsequent doses of epinephrine are adminis-
tered every three to five minutes at 0.1 mL/kg
IV/IO/ET of the 1:1,000 concentration (0.1
mg/kg).
C. Supraventricular tachycardia
1. Supraventricular tachycardia presents with a
heart rate >220 beats/minute in infants and
>180 beats/minute in children. Supraventricular
tachycardia is the most common dysrhythmia in
the first year of life.
2. Stable children with no signs of respiratory
compromise or shock and a normal blood
pressure
a. Initiate 100% oxygen and cardiac monitoring,
and obtain pediatric cardiology consultation.
b. Administer adenosine 0.1 mg/kg (max 6 mg)
by rapid intravenous push. The dose of
adenosine may be doubled to 0.2 mg/kg
(max 12 mg) and repeated if supraventricular
tachycardia is not converted.
c. Verapamil (Calan) may be used; however, it
is contraindicated under one year; in conges-
tive heart failure or myocardial depression; in
children receiving beta- adrenergic blockers;
and in the presence of a possible bypass
tract (ie, Wolff-Parkinson-White syndrome).
Dose is 0.1-0.3 mg/kg/dose (max 5 mg) IV;
may repeat dose in 30 minutes prn (max 10
mg).
3. Supraventricular tachycardia in unstable
child with signs of shock: Administer synchro-
nized cardioversion at 0.5 joules (J)/kg. If
supraventricular tachycardia persists, cardiover-
sion is repeated at double the dose: 1.0 J/kg.
D. Ventricular tachycardia with palpable pulse
1. A palpable pulse with heart rate >120 bpm with
a wide QRS (>0.08 seconds) is present. Initiate
cardiac monitoring, administer oxygen and
ventilate.
2. If vascular access is available, administer a
lidocaine bolus of 1 mg/kg; if successful, begin
lidocaine infusion at 20-50 µg/kg/minute.
3. If ventricular tachycardia persists, perform
synchronized cardioversion using 0.5 J/kg.
4. If ventricular tachycardia persists, repeat syn-
chronized cardioversion using 1.0 J/kg.
5. If ventricular tachycardia persists, administer a
lidocaine bolus of 1.0 mg/kg, and begin
lidocaine infusion at 20-50 µg/kg/min.
6. Repeat synchronized cardioversion as indi-
cated.
E. Ventricular fibrillation and pulseless ventricular
tachycardia
1. Apply cardiac monitor, administer oxygen, and
ventilate.
2. Perform defibrillation using 2 J/kg. Do not delay
defibrillation.
3. If ventricular fibrillation persists, perform
defibrillation using 4 J/kg.
intubation, continue CPR, and obtain vascular
access. Administer epinephrine, 0.1 mL/kg of
1:10,000 IV or IO (0.01 mg/kg); or 0.1 mL/kg of
1:1000 ET (0.1 mg/kg).
7. If ventricular fibrillation persists, administer
lidocaine 1 mg/kg IV or IO, or 2 mg/kg ET.
9. If ventricular fibrillation persists, continue epi-
nephrine, 0.1 mg/kg IV/IO/ET, 0.1 mL/kg of
1:1,000; administer every 3 to 5 minutes.
10. If ventricular fibrillation persists, alternate
defibrillation (4 J/kg) with lidocaine and epi-
nephrine. Consider bretylium 5 mg/kg IV first
dose, 10 mg/kg IV second dose.
F. Pulseless electrical activity is uncommon in
children. It usually occurs secondary to hypoxemia,
hypovolemia, hypothermia, hypoglycemia,
hyperkalemia, cardiac tamponade, tension
pneumothorax, severe acidosis or drug overdose.
Successful resuscitation depends on treatment of
the underlying etiology.
1. The initial dose of IV or IO epinephrine is given
in a dose of 0.1 mL/kg of the 1:10,000 concen-
tration (0.01 mg/kg). Endotracheal epinephrine
is given as a dose of 0.1 mL/kg of the 1:1,000
concentration (0.1 mg/kg) diluted to a final
volume of 3-5 mL in normal saline.
2. Subsequent doses are administered every three
to five minutes as 0.1 mL/kg of the 1:1,000
concentration IV/IO/ET (0.1 mg/kg).
VI. Serum glucose concentration should be determined
in all children undergoing resuscitation. Glucose
replacement is provided with 25% dextrose in water,
2 to 4 mL/kg (0.5 to 1 g/kg) IV over 20 to 30 minutes
for hypoglycemia. In neonates, 10% dextrose in water,
5 to 10 mL/kg (0.5 to 1 g/kg), is recommended.
Congestive Heart Failure

1. Admit to:
2. Diagnosis: Congestive Heart Failure
3. Condition:
4. Vital signs: Call MD if:
5. Activity:
6. Nursing: Daily weights, inputs and outputs
7. Diet: Low salt diet
8. IV Fluids:
-Furosemide (Lasix) 1 mg/kg/dose IV/IM/PO q6-12h
prn, max 80 mg PO, 40 mg IV; may increase to 2
mg/kg/dose IV/IM/PO
[inj: 10 mg/mL; oral liquid: 10 mg/mL, 40 mg/5 mL;
tabs: 20, 40, 80 mg] OR
-Bumetanide (Bumex) 0.015-0.1 mg/kg PO/IV/IM q12-
24h, max 10 mg/day [ inj: 0.25 mg/mL; tabs: 0.5, 1,
2 mg].
Digoxin:
-Obtain a baseline ECG, serum electrolytes (potas-
sium), and serum creatinine before administration.
Initial digitalization is given over 24 hours in three
divided doses: ½ total digitalizing dose (TDD) at
time 0 hours, 1/4 TDD at 8-12 hours, and 1/4 TDD
8-12 hours later.
Maintenance therapy is then started.
Total Digitalizing Dose
POIV
Premature infant 20-30 mcg/kg10-30
mcg/kg
Full term newborn (0-2 weeks) 30 mcg/kg20-25 mcg/kg
2 wks-2 yr 40-50 mcg/kg30-40
mcg/kg
2-10 yr 30-40 mcg/kg25-30
mcg/kg
>10 yr 0.75-1.5 mg10 mcg/kg
(max 1 mg)
Maintenance digoxin dose
PO IV
Preterm neonate 4-10 mcg/kg/day4-9
mcg/kg/day
Term neonate (0-2 wks) 6-10 mcg/kg/day 6-8
mcg/kg/day
2 weeks - 2 yr 10-12 mcg/kg/day8-10
mcg/kg/day
2-10 yr 8-10 mcg/kg/day 6-8
mcg/kg/day
>10 yr 5 mcg/kg/day 2-3
mcg/kg/day
Adult 0.125-0.5 mg/day 0.1-0.4 mg/day
Divide bid if <10 yrs or qd if >10 yrs.
[caps: 50, 100, 200 mcg; elixir: 50 mcg/mL; inj: 100
mcg/mL, 250 mcg/mL; tabs: 0.125, 0.25, 0.5 mg].
Other Agents:
-Dopamine (Intropin) 2-20 mcg/kg/min continuous IV
infusion, titrate cardiac output and BP.
-Dobutamine (Dobutrex) 2-20 mcg/kg/min continuous
IV infusion, max of 40 mcg/kg/min.
-Nitroglycerin 0.5 mcg/kg/min continuous IV infusion,
may increase by 1 mcg/kg q20min; usual max 5
mcg/kg/min.
-Captopril (Capoten)
Neonates: 0.05-0.1 mg/kg/dose PO q6-8h
Infants: 0.15-0.3 mg/kg/dose PO q8h.
Children: 0.5 mg/kg/dose PO q6-12h. Titrate as
needed up to max of 6 mg/kg/day
[tabs: 12.5, 25, 50,100 mg]. Tablets can be crushed
and made into extemporaneous suspension.
-KCl 1-4 mEq/kg/day PO q6-24h.
10. Extras and X-rays: CXR PA and LAT, ECG,
echocardiogram.
11. Labs: ABG, SMA 7, Mg, Ca, CBC, iron studies,
digoxin level, UA.
Hypertensive Emergencies
1. Admit to:
2. Diagnosis: Hypertensive Emergency
3. Condition:
4. Vital signs: Call MD if systolic BP >150 mmHg,
diastolic bp >90 mmHg, MAP > 120 mmHg.
5. Activity:
6. Nursing: BP q1h, ECG, daily weights, inputs and
outputs.
7. Diet:
8. IV Fluids:
-Nitroprusside (Nipride) 0.5-10 mcg/kg/min continuous
IV infusion. Titrate to desired blood pressure.
Cyanide and thiocyanate toxicity may develop with
prolonged use or in renal impairment.
-Labetalol (Trandate) 0.2 mg/kg (max 20 mg) IV over
2 min or 0.4-1 mg/kg/hr continuous infusion.
-Enalaprilat (Vasotec IV) 5-10 mcg/kg/dose IV q8-24h
prn.
-Nifedipine (Adalat, Procardia): 0.25-0.5 mg/kg/dose
PO (max 10 mg/dose) q4h prn [trade name cap-
sules: 10 mg/0.34 mL, 20 mg/0.45 mL; may punc-
ture capsule with tuberculin syringe and draw up
partial oral dosages].
10.Extras and X-rays: CXR, ECG, renal Doppler and
ultrasound. Hypertensive intravenous pyelography.
11. Labs: CBC, SMA 7, BUN, creatinine, UA with micro.
Urine specific gravity, thyroid panel, 24h urine for me-
tanephrines; ANA, complement, ASO titer; toxicology
screen.
Pulmonary Disorders
Asthma
1. Admit to:
2. Diagnosis: Exacerbation of asthma
3. Condition:
5. Activity:
6. Nursing: Pulse oximeter, measure peak flow rate in
older patients.
7. Diet:
8. IV Fluids: D5 1/4 NS or D5 ½ NS at maintenance
rate.
-Oxygen humidified prn, 1-6 L/min by NC or 25-80%
by mask, keep sat >92%.
Aerosolized and Nebulized Beta 2 Agonists:
-Albuterol (Ventolin) (using 0.5% = 5 mg/mL soln)
nebulized 0.2-0.5 mL in 2 mL NS q1-4h and
prn; may also be given by continuous aerosol.
[soln for inhalation: 0.83 mg/3 mL unit dose; 5
mg/mL 20 mL multidose bulk bottle]
-Albuterol (Ventolin, Proventil) 2 puffs q1-6h prn with
spacer and mask.
[capsule for inhalation (Rotacaps) using Rotahaler
inhalation device: 200 mcg; MDI: 90 mcg/puff, 200
puffs/17 gm]
-Levalbuterol (Xopenex)
2-11 yrs: 0.16-1.25 mg nebulized
>12 yrs: 0.63-1.25mg nebulized q6-8h
[soln for inhalation: 0.63 mg/3 mL, 1.25 mg/3 mL].
Levalbuterol 0.63 mg is comparable to albuterol
2.5 mg.
-Salmeterol (Serevent) > 4 yrs: 2 puffs bid. Not indi-
cated for acute treatment. [Serevent Diskus: 50
mcg/puff; MDI: 21 mcg/puff, 60 puffs/6.5gm or 120
puffs/13 gm]
-Formoterol (Foradil): >5 yrs: 12 mcg capsule aerosol-
ized using dry powder inhaler bid. [capsule for
aerosolization: 12 mcg]
-Metaproterenol (Alupent, Metaprel)
> 12 yrs: 2-3 puffs q3-4h prn, max 12 puffs/24 hrs.
[MDI: 0.65 mg/puff]
-Racemic epinephrine (2.25% sln) 0.05 mL/kg/dose
(max 0.5 mL) in 2-3 mL saline nebulized q1-6h.
Intravenous Beta-2 Agonist:
-Terbutaline (Brethaire, Brethine, Bricanyl)
Loading dose: 2-10 mcg/kg IV
Maintenance continuous IV infusion: 0.08-6
mcg/kg/min
Monitor heart rate and blood pressure closely.
[inj: 1 mg/mL]
Corticosteroid (systemic) Pulse Therapy:
-Prednisolone 1-2 mg/kg/day PO q12-24h x 3-5
days
[syrup: 5 mg/5 mL; Orapred 20.2 mg/5mL; Prelone
15 mg/5 mL] OR
-Prednisone 1-2 mg/kg/day PO q12-24h x 3-5 days
[oral solution: 1 mg/mL, 5 mg/mL; tabs: 1, 2, 5, 10,
20, 50 mg] OR
-Methylprednisolone (Solu-Medrol) 2 mg/kg/dose
IV/IM q6h x 1-4 doses, then 0.5-1 mg/kg/dose
IV/IM q6h x 3-5 days.
Aminophylline and theophylline:
-Therapeutic range 10-20 mcg/mL. Concomitant
drugs (e.g. erythromycin or carbamazepine) may
increase serum theophylline levels by decreasing
drug metabolism.
-Aminophylline loading dose 5-6 mg/kg total body
weight IV over 20-30 min [1 mg/kg of amino-
phylline will raise serum level by 2 mcg/mL].
-Aminophylline maintenance as continuous IV infusion
(based on ideal body weight)
1-6 mth: 0.5 mg/kg/hr
6-12 mth: 0.6-0.75 mg/kg/hr
1-10 yr: 1.0 mg/kg/hr
10-16 yr: 0.75-0.9 mg/kg/hr
>16 yr: 0.7 mg/kg/hr OR
-Theophylline PO maintenance
80% of total daily maintenance IV aminophylline
dose in 2-4 doses/day OR
1-6 mth: 9.6 mg/kg/day.
6-12 mth: 11.5-14.4 mg/kg/day.
1-10 yr: 19.2 mg/kg/day.
10-16 yr: 14.4-17.3 mg/kg/day.
>16 yr: 10 mg/kg/day.
-Give theophylline as sustained release theophylline
preparation: q8-12h or liquid immediate release:
q6h.
-Slo-Phyllin Gyrocaps, may open caps and sprinkle on
food [60, 125, 250 mg caps] q8-12h
-Slobid Gyrocaps, may open caps and sprinkle on
food [50, 75, 100, 125, 200, 300 mg caps] q8-12h
-Theophylline oral liquid: 80 mg/15 mL, 10 mg/mL] q6-
8h.
-Theo-Dur [100, 200, 300, 450 mg tabs; scored, may
cut in half, but do not crush] q8-12h.
-Theophylline Products
Cap: 100, 200 mg
Cap, SR: 50, 60, 65, 75, 100, 125, 130, 200, 250,
260, 300 mg
Liquid: 80 mg/15 mL, 10 mg/mL
Tab: 100, 125, 200, 250, 300 mg
Tab, SR: 50, 75, 100, 125, 130, 200, 250, 260,
300, 400, 450, 500 mg
Corticosteroid metered dose inhalers or nebulized
solution:
-Beclomethasone (Beclovent, Vanceril) MDI 1-4 puffs
bid-qid with spacer and mask, followed by gargling
with water. [42 mcg/puff].
-Beclomethasone (Vanceril Double Strength) MDI 2
puffs bid [84 mcg/puff]
-Budesonide (Pulmicort Turbohaler) MDI 1-2 puffs bid
[200 mcg/puff]
-Budesonide (Pulmicort) 0.25-0.5 mg nebulized bid
[0.25 mg/2mL, 0.5 mg/2mL]
-Flunisolide (Aerobid) MDI 2-4 puffs bid [250 mcg/puff]
-Fluticasone (Flovent) MDI 1-2 puffs bid [44, 110, 220
mcg/actuation]
-Triamcinolone (Azmacort) MDI 1-4 puffs bid-qid [100
mcg/puff]
Cromolyn/nedocromil:
-Cromolyn sodium (Intal) MDI 2-4 puffs qid [800
mcg/puff] or nebulized 20 mg bid-qid [10 mg/mL 2
mL unit dose ampules]
-Nedocromil (Tilade) MDI 2 puffs bid-qid [1.75 mg/puff]
Oral beta-2 agonists:
-Albuterol (Proventil)
2-6 years: 0.1-0.2 mg/kg/dose PO q6-8h
6-12 years: 2 mg PO tid-qid
>12 years: 2-4 mg PO tid-qid or 4-8 mg ER tab PO
bid
[soln: 2 mg/5 mL; tab: 2, 4 mg; tab, ER: 4, 8 mg]
-Metaproterenol (Alupent, Metaprel)
< 2 yrs: 0.4 mg/kg/dose PO tid-qid
2-6 yrs: 1.3-2.6 mg PO q6-8h
6-9 yrs: 10 mg PO q6-8h
[syrup: 10 mg/5mL; tabs: 10, 20 mg]
Leukotriene receptor antagonists:
-Montelukast (Singulair)
2-5 yr: 4 mg PO qPM
6-14 yr: 5 mg PO qPM
> 14 yr: 10 mg PO qPM
[tab: 10 mg; tab, chew : 4, 5 mg]
-Zafirlukast (Accolate)
7-11 yr: 10 mg PO bid
>12 yr: 20 mg PO bid
[tabs: 10, 20 mg]
-Zileuton (Zyflo)
>12 yr: 600 mg PO qid (with meals and at bed-
time)
[tab: 600 mg]
10. Extras and X-rays: CXR, pulmonary function test,
peak flow rates.
11. Labs: CBC, CBG/ABG. Urine antigen screen, UA,
theophylline level.
Allergic Rhinitis and Conjunctivitis

Antihistamines:
-Astemizole (Hismanal):
6-12 yr: 5 mg/day PO qd
>12 yr: 10 mg PO qd
[tab: 10 mg].
-Loratadine (Claritin)
>3 yrs and < 30 kg: 5 mg PO qd
>30 kg: 10 mg PO qd.
[syrup: 1mg/mL; tab: 10 mg; tab, rapidly disintegrat-
ing: 10 mg]
-etirizine (Zyrtec)
12 y: 5-10 mg qd
6-11 y: 5-10 mg qd
[tabs: 5, 10 mg Syrup: 5 mg/5 mL]
-Fexofenadine (Allegra), 12 y: 60 mg bid [60 mg]
-Actifed [per cap or tab or 10 mL syrup: triprolidine 2.5
mg, pseudoephedrine 60 mg]
4 mg pseudoephedrine/kg/day PO tid-qid OR
4 m-2 yr: 1.25 mL PO q6-8h
2-4 yr: 2.5 mL PO q6-8h
4-6 yr: 3.75 mL PO q6-8h
6-11y: 5 mL or ½ tab PO q6-8h
>12 yr: 10 mL or 1 cap/tab PO q6-8h.
-Chlorpheniramine maleate (Chlor-Trimeton):
0.35 mg/kg/day PO q4-6h OR
2-5 yr: 1 mg PO q4-6h (max 4 mg/day)
6-11y: 2 mg PO q4-6h (max 12 mg/day)
>12y: 4 mg PO q4-6h or 8-12 mg SR q8-12h (max 24
mg/day).
[cap, SR: 8,12 mg; soln: 2 mg/5 mL; tab: 4, 8, 12 mg;
tab, chew: 2 mg; tab, SR: 8, 12 mg]
-Diphenhydramine (Benadryl)
1 mg/kg/dose PO q6h prn, max 50 mg/dose
[elixir/liquid: 12.5 mg/5 mL; tab, cap: 25, 50 mg].
Intranasal Therapy:
-Azelastine (Astelin)
3-12 yr: 1 spray in each nostril bid
> 12 yr: 2 sprays in each nostril bid
[nasal soln: 1 mg/mL, 17 mL (137 mcg/spray)]
-Beclomethasone (Beconase, Vancenase)
6-11 yrs: 1 spray into each nostril tid
>12 yrs: 1 spray into each nostril bid-qid
[42 mcg/actuation]
-Beclomethasone aqueous (Beconase AQ)
6-11 yrs: 1-2 sprays into each nostril bid
>12 yrs: 1-2 sprays into each nostril bid
[42 mcg/actuation]
-Beclomethasone Double Strength (Vancenase AQ)
6-11 yrs: 1-2 puffs into each nostril qd
>12 yrs: 1-2 sprays into each nostril qd
[84 mcg/actuation]
-Budesonide (Rhinocort)
6-11 yrs: 2 sprays into each nostril bid or 4 sprays
into each nostril qAM
>12 yrs: 2 sprays into each nostril bid or 4 sprays into
each nostril qAM
[32 mcg/actuation]
-Budesonide aqueous(Rhinocort AQ)
6-11 yrs: 1-2 sprays into each nostril bid
>12 yrs: 1 sprays into each nostril qd, may increase
up to 4 sprays into each nostril qAM
[32 mcg/actuation]
-Cromolyn (Nasalcrom)
1 puff into each nostril q3-4h
[40 mg/mL 13 mL].
-Flunisolide (Nasalide, Nasarel)
6-11 yrs: 1 spray into each nostril tid or 2 sprays into
each nostril bid
>12 yrs: 2 sprays into each nostril bid-tid
[25 mcg/actuation].
-Fluticasone (Flonase)
4-6 yrs: 1-2 sprays into each nostril qd
6-11 yrs: 1-2 sprays into each nostril qd
> 12 yrs: 1 spray into each nostril bid or 2 sprays into
each nostril qd
[50 mcg/actuation]
-Mometasone (Nasonex)
4-6 yrs: 1 spray into each nostril qd
6-11 yrs: 1 spray into each nostril qd
>12 yrs: 2 sprays into each nostril qd
[50 mcg/actuation]
-Triamcinolone (Nasacort)
6-11 yr: 2 sprays into each nostril qd
>12 yr: 2 sprays into each nostril qd.
[55 mcg/actuation]
-Triamcinolone aqueous (Nasacort AQ)
6-11 yr: 2 spray into each nostril qd
>12 yr: 2 sprays into each nostril qd.
[55 mcg/actuation]
Allergic Conjunctivitis Therapy:
-Azelastine (Optivar)
>3 yr: instill 1 drop into affected eye(s) bid
[ophth soln: 0.05% 6 mL]
-Cromolyn ophthalmic (Crolom, Opticrom)
Instill 2 drops into each affected eye(s) q4-6h
[ophth soln: 4% 2.5, 10 mL].Decongestants:
-Pseudoephedrine (Sudafed, Novafed)
<12 yr: 4 mg/kg/day PO q6h.
>12 yr and adults: 30-60 mg/dose PO q6-8h or
sustained release 120 mg PO q12h or sustained
release 240 mg PO q24h
[cap/cplt, SR: 120, 240 mg; drops: 7.5 mg/0.8mL;
syrup: 15 mg/5mL, 30 mg/5mL; tabs: 30, 60 mg]
Anaphylaxis
1. Admit to:
2. Diagnosis: Anaphylaxis
3. Condition:
5. Activity:
6. Nursing: Inputs and outputs, ECG monitoring, pulse
oximeter.
7. Diet:
8. IV Fluids: 2 IV lines. Normal saline or LR 10-20 mL/kg
rapidly over 1h, then D5 ½ NS at 1-1.5 times mainte-
nance.
-O2 at 4 L/min by NC or mask.
-Epinephrine, 0.01 mg/kg [0.01 mL/kg of 1 mg/mL =
1:1000] (maximum 0.5 mL) subcutaneously, repeat
every 15-20 minutes prn. Usual dose for infants is
0.05-0.1mL, for children 0.1-0.3 mL, and for ado-
lescents 0.3-0.5 mL. If anaphylaxis is caused by an
insect sting or intramuscular injection, inject an
additional 0.1 mL of epinephrine at the site to slow
antigen absorption.
-Epinephrine racemic (if stridor is present), 2.25%
nebulized, 0.25-0.5 mL in 2.5 mL NS over 15 min
q30 min-4h.
-Albuterol (Ventolin) (0.5%, 5 mg/mL sln) nebulized
0.01-0.03 mL/kg (max 1 mL) in 2 mL NS q1-2h and
prn; may be used in addition to epinephrine if
necessary.
Corticosteroids:
-For severe symptoms, give hydrocortisone 5 mg/kg IV
q8h until stable, then change to oral prednisone. If
symptoms are mild, give prednisone: initially 2
mg/kg/day (max 40 mg) PO q12h, then taper the
dose over 4-5 days.
Antihistamines:
-Diphenhydramine (Benadryl) 1 mg/kg/dose
IV/IM/IO/PO q6h, max 50 mg/dose; antihistamines
are not a substitute for epinephrine OR
-Hydroxyzine (Vistaril) 0.5-1 mg/kg/dose IM/IV/PO q4-
6h, max 50 mg/dose.
10. Extras and X-rays: Portable CXR.
11. Labs: CBC, SMA 7, ABG.
Pleural Effusion
1. Admit to:
2. Diagnosis: Pleural effusion
3. Condition:
5. Activity:
6. Diet:
7. IV Fluids:
8. Extras and X-rays: CXR PA and LAT, lateral de-
cubitus, ultrasound, sputum AFB. Pulmonary consult.
9. Labs: CBC with differential, SMA 7, protein, albumin,
ESR, UA.
Pleural fluid:
Tube 1 - LDH, protein, amylase, triglycerides, glucose,
specific gravity (10 mL red top).
Tube 2 - Gram stain, culture and sensitivity, AFB,
fungal culture (20-60 mL).
Tube 3 - Cell count and differential (5-10 mL, EDTA
purple top).
Tube 4 - Cytology (25-50 mL, heparinized).
Syringe - pH (2 mL, heparinized).
Evaluation of Thoracentesis Fluid
Transudate Exudate
Specific gravity <1.016 >1.016
Protein ratio <0.5 >0.5

pleural
fluid/serum
Protein (gm/100 <3.0 >3.0

mL)
LDH ratio pleu- <0.6 >0.6

ral fluid/serum
WBC <1,000/mm3 >1,000/mm3
Glucose Equivalent to Less than serum

serum
Infectious Diseases
Suspected Sepsis
1. Admit to:
2. Diagnosis: Suspected sepsis
3. Condition:
5. Activity:
6. Nursing: Inputs and outputs, daily weights, cooling
measures prn temp >38°C, consent for lumbar punc-
ture.
7. Diet:
8. IV Fluids: Correct hypovolemia if present; NS 10-20
mL/kg IV bolus, then IV fluids at 1-1.5 times mainte-
nance.
Term newborns <1 month old (Group B strep, E coli,
G r o u p D s t r e p , g r a m n e g a t i ve s , L i s t e r i a
monocytogenes): Ampicillin and gentamicin or
cefotaxime.
-Ampicillin IV/IM: <7d: 150 mg/kg/day q8h; >7d: 200
mg/kg/day q6h.
-Cefotaxime (Claforan) IV/IM: <7 days: 100 mg/kg/day
q12h; >7 days: 150 mg/kg/day q8h.
-Gentamicin (Garamycin) IV/IM: 5 mg/kg/day q12h.
-Also see page 155.
Infant 1-2 months old (H. flu, strep pneumonia, N
meningitidis, Group B strep):
-Ampicillin 100 mg/kg/day IV/IM q6h AND EITHER
-Cefotaxime (Claforan) 100 mg/kg/day IV/IM q6h OR
-Ceftriaxone (Rocephin) 50-75 mg/kg/day IV/IM q12-
24h OR
-Gentamicin (Garamycin) 7.5 mg/kg/day IV/IM q8h
Children 2 months to 18 years old (S pneumonia, H
flu, N. meningitidis):
-Cefotaxime (Claforan) 100 mg/kg/day IV/IM q6h, max
12 gm/day OR
-Ceftriaxone (Rocephin) 50-75 mg/kg/day IV/IM q 12-
24h, max 4 gm/day.
Immunocompromised Patients (Gram negative
bacilli, Pseudomonas, Staph, Strep viridans):
-Ticarcillin (Ticar) 200-300 mg/kg/day IV/IM q6h, max
24 gm/day
-Ticarcillin/clavulanate (Timentin) 200-300 mg/kg/day
of ticarcillin IV/IM q6-8h, max 24gm/day OR
-Piperacillin (Pipracil) 200-300 mg/kg/day IV/IM q6h,
max 24 gm/day OR
-Piperacillin/tazobactam (Zosyn) 240 mg/kg/day of
piperacillin IV/IM q6-8h, max 12 gm/day OR
-Ceftazidime (Fortaz) 100-150 mg/kg/day IV/IM q8h,
max 12 gm/day AND
-Tobramycin (Nebcin) or Gentamicin (Garamycin)
(normal renal function):
<5 yr (except neonates): 7.5 mg/kg/day IV/IM q8h.
5-10 yr: 6.0 mg/kg/day IV/IM q8h.
>10 yr: 5.0 mg/kg/day IV/IM q8h AND (if gram
positive infection strongly suspected)
-Vancomycin (Vancocin) (central line infection) 40-60
mg/kg/day IV q6-8h, max 4 gm/day
-Ibuprofen (Advil) 5-10 mg/kg/dose PO q6h-8h prn
temp >38°C OR
prn temp >38°C or pain.
11. Extras and X-rays: CXR.
12. Labs: CBC, SMA 7. Blood culture and sensitivity x 2.
UA, urine culture and sensitivity; antibiotic levels. Stool
for Wright stain if diarrhea. Nasopharyngeal washings
for direct fluorescent antibody (RSV, chlamydia).
CSF Tube 1 - Gram stain, culture and sensitivity for
bacteria, antigen screen (1-2 mL).
CSF Tube 2 - Glucose, protein (1-2 mL).
CSF Tube 3 - Cell count and differential (1-2 mL).
Meningitis
1. Admit to:
2. Diagnosis: Meningitis.
3. Condition: Guarded.
5. Activity:
6. Nursing: Strict isolation precautions. Inputs and
outputs, daily weights; cooling measures prn temp
>38°C; consent for lumbar puncture. Monitor for signs
of increased intracranial pressure.
7. Diet:
8. IV Fluids: Isotonic fluids at maintenance rate.
Term Newborns <1 months old (Group B strep, E
coli, gram negatives, Listeria):
-Ampicillin, 0-7 d: 150 mg/kg/day IV/IM q8h; >7d: 200
mg/kg/day IV/IM q6h AND
-Cefotaxime (Claforan): <7d: 100 mg/kg/day IV/IM
q12h; >7 days: 150 mg/kg/day q8h IV/IM.
Infants 1-3 months old (H. flu, strep pneumonia, N.
Meningitidis, group B strep, E coli):
-Ceftriaxone (Rocephin) 100 mg/kg/day IV/IM q12-24h
AND
-Vancomycin (Vancocin) 40-60 mg/kg/day IV q6h.
-Dexamethasone 0.6 mg/kg/day IV q6h x 4 days.
Initiate before or with the first dose of parenteral
antibiotic.
Children 3 months to 18 years old (S pneumonia, H
flu, N. meningitidis):
12 gm/day or ceftriaxone (Rocephin) 100
mg/kg/day IV/IM q12-24h, max 4 gm/day AND
-Vancomycin (Vancocin) 60 mg/kg/day IV q6h, max
4gm/day.
-Dexamethasone 0.6 mg/kg/day IV q6h x 4 days.
Initiate before or with the first dose of parenteral
antibiotic.
-Ibuprofen (Advil) 5-10 mg/kg/dose PO q6-8h prn OR
-Acetaminophen (Tylenol) 15 mg/kg PO/PR q4h prn
temp >38°C or pain.
11. Extras and X-rays: CXR, MRI.
12. Labs: CBC, SMA 7. Blood culture and sensitivity x 2.
UA, urine culture and sensitivity; urine specific gravity.
Antibiotic levels. Urine and blood antigen testing.
Lumbar Puncture:
CSF Tube 1 - Gram stain, culture and sensitivity, bact-
erial antigen screen (1-2 mL).
CSF Tube 2 - Glucose, protein (1-2 mL).
Specific Treatment of Meningitis and

Encephalitis
Dexamethasone (0.6 mg/kg/day IV q6h x 4 days) given
before the first dose of antibiotics decreases hearing
deficits and possibly other neurologic sequelae in
Haemophilus influenzae meningitis.
Streptococcus pneumoniae:
Until sensitivities are available, combination therapy with
vancomycin and cefotaxime/ceftriaxone is recom-
mended. For children with severe hypersensitivity to
beta-lactams, the combination of vancomycin and
rifampin is recommended.
-Penicillin G 250,000-400,000 U/kg/day IV/IM q4-6h,
max 24 MU/day
-Cefotaxime (Claforan) 200-300 mg/kg/day IV/IM q6h,
max 12 gm/day
-Ceftriaxone (Rocephin) 100 mg/kg/day IV/IM q12-
24h, max 4 gm/day
-Vancomycin (Vancocin) 60 mg/kg/day IV q6h, max 4
gm/day
-Rifampin 20 mg/kg/day IV q12h, max 600 mg/day
-Meropenem (Merrem) 120 mg/kg/day IV q8h, max 6
gm/day
-Chloramphenicol (Chloromycetin) 75-100 mg/kg/day
IV q6h, max 4 gm/day
Neisseria meningitidis:
Penicillin is the drug of choice. Cefotaxime and
ceftriaxone are acceptable alternatives.
-Penicillin G 250,000-400,000 U/kg/day IV/IM q4h x 7-
10d, max 24 MU/d.
max 12 gm/day
24h, max 4 gm/day
Meningococcal exposure prophylaxis (see H flu
prophylaxis below):
-Ceftriaxone (Rocephin) IM x 1 dose; <12y: 125 mg;
>12y: 250 mg OR
-Rifampin, <1 mth: 5 mg/kg/dose PO bid x 2 days; >1
mth: 10 mg/kg/dose (max 600 mg/dose) PO q12h
x 2 days [caps: 150 mg, 300 mg; extemporaneous
suspension] OR
-Ciprofloxacin (Cipro) 500 mg PO x 1 for adults (>18
yr).
Haemophilus influenzae
Ampicillin should not be used alone as initial therapy until
sensitivities are available as 10-40% of isolates are
ampicillin-resistant.
max 12 gm/day OR
24h, max 4 gm/day OR
-Ampicillin (beta-lactamase negative) 200-400
mg/kg/day IV/IM q4-6h, max 12 gm/day.
H influenzae type B exposure prophylaxis and
eradication of nasopharyngeal carriage:
-Rifampin <1 month: 10 mg/kg/day PO q24h x 4 days;
>1 month: 20 mg/kg/day PO qd x 4 doses (max
600 mg/dose). [caps: 150, 300 mg; extemporane-
ous suspension].
Group A or non-enterococcal Group D Streptococ-
cus:
-Penicillin G 250,000 U/kg/day IV/IM q4-6h, max 24
MU/d.
Listeria monocytogenes or Group B Streptococcus:
-Ampicillin 200 mg/kg/day IV/IM q6h, max 12 gm/day
AND
-Gentamicin (Garamycin) or Tobramycin (Nebcin)
>10 yr: 5.0 mg/kg/day IV/IM q8h
-Nafcillin (Nafcil) or Oxacillin (Bactocill,
Prostaphlin)150-200 mg/kg/day IV/IM q4-6h, max
12 gm/day OR
-Vancomycin (Vancocin) 40-60 mg/kg/day IV q6h,
max 4 gm/day (may require concomitant intrathecal
therapy).
Herpes Simplex Encephalitis:
-Acyclovir (Zovirax) 1500 mg/m2/day or 30 mg/kg/day
IV over 1h q8h x 14-21 days
Infective Endocarditis
1. Admit to:
2. Diagnosis: Infective endocarditis
3. Condition:
5. Activity:
6. Diet:
7. IV Fluids:
Subacute Bacterial Endocarditis Empiric Therapy:
-Penicillin G 250,000 U/kg/day IV/IM q4-6, max 24
MU/day AND
-Gentamicin (Garamycin) or Tobramycin (Nebcin)
>10 yr: 5.0 mg/kg/day IV/IM q8h
Acute Bacterial Endocarditis Empiric Therapy (in-
cluding IV drug user):
-Gentamicin (Garamycin) or Tobramycin (Nebcin), see
above for dose AND EITHER
-Nafcillin (Nafcil) or oxacillin (Bactocill, Prostaphlin)
150 mg/kg/day IV/IM q6h, max 12 gm/day OR
-Vancomycin (Vancocin) 40-60 mg/kg/day IV q6-8h,
max 4 gm/day
Streptococci viridans/bovis:
-Penicillin G 150,000 u/kg/day IV/IM q4-6h, max 24
MU/day OR
max 4 gm/day.
Staphylococcus aureus (methicillin sensitive):
150 mg/kg/day IV/IM q6h, max 12 gm/day AND
above for dose.
Methicillin-resistant Staphylococcus aureus:
-Vancomycin (Vancocin) 40-60 mg/kg/day IV q6h,
max 4 gm/day.
Staphylococcus epidermidis:
-Vancomycin (Vancocin) 40-60 mg/kg/day IV q6h max
4 gm/day AND
above for dose.
9. Extras and X-rays: CXR PA and LAT,
echocardiogram, ECG. Cardiology and infectious
disease consultation.
10. Labs: CBC, ESR. Bacterial culture and sensitivity
x 3-4 over 24h, MBC. Antibiotic levels. UA, urine
culture and sensitivity.
Endocarditis Prophylaxis
Prophylactic Regimens for Dental, Oral, Respi-
ratory Tract, or Esophageal Procedures
Situation Drug Regimen Maximum
Dose
Standard Amoxicillin 50 mg/kg 2000 mg
general PO as a
prophylaxis single dose
1 hr before
procedure
Unable to Ampicillin 50 mg/kg 2000 mg
take oral IV/IM within
medication 30 minutes
before pro-
cedure
Allergic to Clindamy- 20 mg/kg 600 mg
penicillin cin PO as a
or single dose
1 hour be-
fore
procedure
Cephalexin 50 mg/kg 2000 mg
(Keflex) or PO as a
cefadroxil single dose
(Duricef) 1 hour be-
or fore
procedure
Azithromyci 15 mg/kg 500 mg
n PO as a
(Zithromax) single dose
or 1 hour be-
clarithromy fore proce-
cin (Biaxin) dure
Allergic to Clindamyci 20 mg/kg 600 mg
penicillin n IV 30 min-
and unable utes before
to take oral or procedure
medica-
tions Cefazolin 25 mg/kg 1000 mg
(Ancef) IV/IM within
30 minutes
before pro-
cedure
Prophylactic Regimens for Genitouri-
nary/Gastrointestinal Procedures
Situation Drug Regimen Maximum
Dose
High-risk Ampicillin 50 mg/kg 2000 mg

patients plus IV/IM
Gentamicin 1.5 mg/kg 120 mg

IV/IM
within 30
followed by minutes
before
starting
procedure
Ampicillin 25 mg/kg 1000 mg

or IV/IM 1000 mg
Amoxicillin 25 mg/kg
PO
six hours
later
High-risk Vancomyci 20 mg/kg 1000 mg

patients n IV over 1-2
allergic to plus hours
penicillin
Gentamicin 1.5 mg/kg 120 mg
IV/IM to be
completed
within 30
minutes
before
starting
procedure
Moderate- Amoxicillin 50 mg/kg 2000 mg

risk Pa- or PO one
tients hour before
procedure
Ampicillin 50 mg/kg 2000 mg

IV/IM within
30 minutes
of starting
procedure
Moderate- Vancomyci 20 mg/kg 1000 mg

risk pa- n IV over 1-2
tients aller- hours, com-
gic to peni- pleted with-
cillin in 30 min-
utes of
starting the
procedure
Pneumonia
1. Admit to:
2. Diagnosis: Pneumonia
3. Condition:
5. Activity:
6. Nursing: Pulse oximeter, inputs and outputs. Bron-
chial clearance techniques, vibrating vest.
7. Diet:
8. IV Fluids:
-Humidified O2 by NC at 2-4 L/min or 25-100% by
mask, adjust to keep saturation >92%
Term Neonates <1 month:
-Ampicillin 100 mg/kg/day IV/IM q6h AND
-Cefotaxime (Claforan) <1 wk: 100 mg/kg/day IV/IM
q12h; >1 wk: 150 mg/kg/day IV/IM q8h OR
-Gentamicin (Garamycin) 5 mg/kg/day IV/IM q12h.
Children 1 month-5 years old:
-Cefuroxime (Zinacef) 100-150 mg/kg/day IV/IM q8h
OR
-Ampicillin 100 mg/kg/day IV/IM q6h AND
-Gentamicin (Garamycin) or Tobramycin (Nebcin):
7.5 mg/kg/day IV/IM q8h (normal renal function).
-If chlamydia is strongly suspected, add erythromycin
40 mg/kg/day IV q6h.
Oral Therapy:
-Cefuroxime axetil (Ceftin)
tab: child: 125-250 mg PO bid; adult: 250-500 mg
PO bid
susp: 30 mg/kg/day PO q12h, max 1000 mg/day
[susp: 125 mg/5 mL; tabs: 125, 250,500 mg] OR
-Loracarbef (Lorabid)
30 mg/kg/day PO q12h, max 800 mg/day
[cap: 200, 400 mg; susp: 100 mg/5 mL, 200
mg/5mL]
-Cefpodoxime (Vantin)
[susp: 50 mg/5 mL, 100 mg/5 mL; tabs: 100, 200
mg]
-Cefprozil (Cefzil)
mg].
-Cefixime (Suprax)
8 mg/kg/day PO qd-bid, max 400 mg/day
[susp: 100 mg/5 mL; tabs: 200, 400 mg].
-Clarithromycin (Biaxin)
15-30 mg/kg/day PO bid, max 1000 mg/day
mg].
-Azithromycin (Zithromax)
Children >2 yrs: 12 mg/kg/day PO qd x 5 days, max
500 mg/day
>16 yrs: 500 mg PO on day 1, 250 mg PO qd on
days 2-5
[cap: 250 mg; susp: 100 mg/5mL, 200 mg/5mL;
tabs: 250, 600 mg]
-Amoxicillin/clavulanate (Augmentin)
30-40 mg/kg/day of amoxicillin PO q8h , max 500
mg/dose
[elixir 125 mg/5 mL, 250 mg/5 mL; tabs: 250, 500
mg; tabs, chew: 125, 250 mg;]
-Amoxicillin/clavulanate (Augmentin BID)
30-40 mg/kg/day PO q12h, max 875 mg
(amoxicillin)/dose
[susp 200 mg/5 mL, 400 mg/5 mL; tab: 875 mg;
tabs, chew: 200, 400 mg]
Community Acquired Pneumonia 5-18 years old
(viral, Mycoplasma pneumoniae, chlamydia
pneumoniae, pneumococcus, legionella):
-Cefuroxime (Zinacef) 100-150 mg/kg/day IV/IM q8h,
max 9 gm/day OR
-Erythromycin estolate (Ilosone) 30-50 mg/kg/day PO
q8-12h, max 2 gm/day
[caps: 125, 250 mg; drops: 100 mg/mL; susp: 125
mg/5 mL, 250 mg/5 mL; tab: 500 mg; tabs, chew:
125,250 mg]
-Erythromycin ethylsuccinate (EryPed, EES)
30-50 mg/kg/day PO q6-8h, max 2gm/day
[susp: 200 mg/5 mL, 400 mg/5 mL; tab: 400 mg;
tab, chew: 200 mg]
-Erythromycin base (E-mycin, Ery-Tab, Eryc)
[cap, DR: 250 mg; tabs: 250, 333, 500 mg]
-Erythromycin lactobionate
20-40 mg/kg/day IV q6h, max 4 gm/day
[inj: 500 mg, 1 gm]
15-30 mg/kg/day PO bid, max 1000 mg/day
mg]
Immunosuppressed, Neutropenic Pneumonia (S.
pneumoniae, group A strep, H flu, gram neg enterics,
Klebsiella, Mycoplasma Pneumonia, Legionella,
Chlamydia pneumoniae, S aureus):
-Tobramycin (Nebcin) (normal renal function):
>10 yr: 5.0 mg/kg/day IV/IM q8h OR
-Ceftazidime (Fortaz)150 mg/kg/day IV/IM q8h, max
12 gm/day AND
of ticarcillin IV q6-8h, max 24 gm/day OR
gm/day.
Cystic Fibrosis Exacerbation (Pseudomonas
aeruginosa):
of ticarcillin IV q6-8h, max 24 gm/day OR
-Piperacillin/tazobactam (Zosyn) 300 mg/kg/day of
piperacillin IV q6-8h, max 12 gm/day OR
-Piperacillin (Pipracil) 200-300 mg/kg/day IV/IM q4-6h,
max 24 gm/day AND
-Tobramycin (Nebcin):
-Ceftazidime (Fortaz) 150 mg/kg/day IV/IM q8h, max
12 gm/day OR
-Aztreonam (Azactam) 150-200 mg/kg/day IV/IM q6-
8h, max 8 gm/day OR
-Imipenem/Cilastatin (Primaxin) 60-100 mg/kg/day
imipenem component IV q6-8h, max 4 gm/day OR
-Meropenem (Merrem) 60-120 mg/kg/day IV q8h, max
6gm/day.
-Acetaminophen (Tylenol) 10-15 mg/kg PO/PR q4h
prn temp >38°C or pain.
11. Extras and X-rays: CXR PA and LAT, PPD.
12. Labs: CBC, ABG, blood culture and sensitivity x 2.
Sputum gram stain, culture and sensitivity, AFB. Anti-
biotic levels. Nasopharyngeal washings for direct
fluorescent antibody (RSV, adenovirus, parainfluenza,
influenza virus, chlamydia) and cultures for respiratory
viruses. UA.
Specific Therapy for Pneumonia
Pneumococcal pneumonia:
-Erythromycin estolate (Ilosone)
30-50 mg/kg/day PO q8-12h, max 2 gm/day
125,250 mg]
tab, chew: 200 mg]
-Erythromycin base (E-Mycin, Ery-Tab, Eryc)
[tab: 250, 333, 500 mg]
-Erythromycin lactobionate
[inj: 500 mg, 1 g m] OR
gm/day OR
max 12 gm/day OR
-Penicillin G 150,000 U/kg/day IV/IM q4-6h, max 24
MU/day.
-Oxacillin (Bactocill, Prostaphlin) or Nafcillin (Nafcil)
150-200 mg/kg/day IV/IM q4-6h, max 12 gm/day
OR
gm/day
Haemophilus influenzae (<5 yr of age):
max 12 gm/day OR
(beta-lactamase pos), max 9 gm/day OR
-Ampicillin 100-200 mg/kg/day IV/IM q6h (beta-lactam-
ase negative), max 12 gm/day
Pseudomonas aeruginosa:
-Tobramycin (Nebcin):
>10 yr: 5.0 mg/kg/day IV/IM q8h AND
-Piperacillin (Pipracil) or ticarcillin (Ticar) 200-300
mg/kg/day IV/IM q4-6h, max 24 gm/day OR
12 gm/day.
Mycoplasma pneumoniae:
-Clarithromycin (Biaxin) 15-30 mg/kg/day PO q12h,
max 1 gm/day
mg].
125,250 mg]
tab, chew: 200 mg]
[cap, DR: 250 mg; tabs: 250, 333, 500 mg]
-Erythromycin lactobionate (Erythrocin)
[inj: 500 mg, 1 gm]
-Tetracycline (Achromycin)
>8 yrs only
25-50 mg/kg/day PO q6h, max 2 gm/day
[caps: 100, 250, 500 mg; susp: 125 mg/5 mL; tabs:
250, 500 mg]
Moraxella catarrhalis:
15 mg/kg/day PO q12h, max 1 gm/day
mg] OR
max 9 gm/day OR
125,250 mg]
tab, chew: 200 mg]
[cap, DR: 250 mg; tabs: 250, 333, 500 mg]
[inj: 500 mg, 1 gm] OR
-Trimethoprim/Sulfamethoxazole (Bactrim, Septra)
6-12 mg TMP/kg/day PO/IV q12h, max 320 mg
TMP/day
[inj per mL: TMP 16 mg/SMX 80 mg; susp per 5
mL: TMP 40 mg/SMX 200 mg; tab DS: TMP 160
mg/SMX 800 mg; tab SS: TMP 80mg/SMX 400 mg]
Chlamydia pneumoniae (TWAR), psittaci, tracho-
matous:
125,250 mg]
tab, chew: 200 mg]
[cap, DR: 250 mg; tabs: 250, 333, 500 mg]
[inj: 500 mg, 1 gm ] OR
children >2 yrs: 12 mg/kg/day PO qd x 5 days, max
500 mg/day
>16 yrs: 500 mg PO on day one, then 250 mg PO
qd on days 2-5
tabs: 250, 600 mg]
Influenza Virus:
-Oseltamivir (Tamiflu)
>1 yr and <15 kg: 30 mg PO bid
15-23 kg: 45 mg PO bid
>23 - 40 kg: 60 mg PO bid
>40 kg: 75 mg PO bid
[cap: 75 mg; susp: 12 mg/mL]
Approved for treatment of uncomplicated influenza
A or B when patient has been symptomatic no
longer than 48 hrs. OR
-Rimantadine (Flumadine)
<10 yr: 5 mg/kg/day PO qd, max 150 mg/day
[syrup: 50 mg/5 mL; tab: 100 mg].
Approved for treatment or prophylaxis of Influenza
A. Not effective against Influenza B. OR
-Amantadine (Symmetrel)
1-9 yr: 5 mg/kg/day PO qd-bid, max 150 mg/day
>9 yr: 5 mg/kg/day PO qd-bid, max 200 mg/day
[cap: 100 mg; syr: 50 mg/5 mL].
A. Not effective against Influenza B.
Bronchiolitis
1. Admit to:
2. Diagnosis: Bronchiolitis
3. Condition:
5. Activity:
6. Nursing: Pulse oximeter, peak flow rate. Respiratory
isolation.
7. Diet:
8. IV Fluids:
-Oxygen, humidified 1-4 L/min by NC or 40-60% by
mask, keep sat >92%.
Nebulized Beta 2 Agonists:
-Albuterol (Ventolin, Proventil) (5 mg/mL sln) nebu-
lized 0.2-0.5 mL in 2 mL NS (0.10-0.15 mg/kg) q1-
4h prn.
Treatment of Respiratory Syncytial Virus (severe lung
disease or underlying cardiopulmonary disease):
-Ribavirin (Virazole) therapy should be considered in
high risk children <2 yrs with bronchopulmonary
dysplasia or with history of premature birth less
than 35 weeks gestational age. Ribavirin is admin-
istered as a 6 gm vial, aerosolized by SPAG
nebulizer over 18-20h qd x 3-5 days or 2 gm over
2 hrs q8h x 3-5 days.
Prophylaxis Against Respiratory Syncytial Virus:
-Recommended use in high risk children <2 yrs with
BPD who required medical management within the
past six months, or with history of premature birth
less than or equal to 28 weeks gestational age who
are less than one year of age at start of RSV
season, or with history of premature birth 29-32
weeks gestational age who are less than six
months of age at start of RSV season.
-Palivizumab (Synagis) 15 mg/kg IM once a month
throughout RSV season (usually October-March)
-RSV-IVIG (RespiGam) 750 mg/kg IV once a month
throughout RSV season (usually from October to
March).
Influenza A:
-Oseltamivir (Tamiflu)
>1 yr and <15 kg: 30 mg PO bid
15-23 kg: 45 mg PO bid
>23 - 40 kg: 60 mg PO bid
>40 kg: 75 mg PO bid
[cap: 75 mg; susp: 12 mg/mL]
Approved for treatment of uncomplicated influenza
A or B when patient has been symptomatic no
longer than 48 hrs. OR
-Rimantadine (Flumadine)
<10 yr: 5 mg/kg/day PO qd, max 150 mg/day
[syrup: 50 mg/5 mL; tab: 100 mg].
A. Not effective against Influenza B. OR
-Amantadine (Symmetrel)
1-9 yr: 5 mg/kg/day PO qd-bid, max 150 mg/day
>9 yr: 5 mg/kg/day PO qd-bid, max 200 mg/day
[cap: 100 mg; syr: 50 mg/5 mL].
A. Not effective against Influenza B.
Pertussis:
The estolate salt is preferred due to greater penetration.
-Erythromycin estolate 50 mg/kg/day PO q8-12h, max
2 gm/day
125,250 mg]
-Erythromycin lactobionate (Erythrocin) 20-40
mg/kg/day IV q6h, max 4 gm/day
[inj: 500 mg, 1 gm].
Oral Beta 2 Agonists and Acetaminophen:
-Albuterol liquid (Proventil, Ventolin)
2-6 years: 0.1-0.2 mg/kg/dose PO q6-8h
6-12 years: 2 mg PO tid-qid
>12 years: 2-4 mg PO tid-qid
[soln: 2 mg/5 mL; tabs: 2,4 mg; tabs, SR: 4, 8 mg]
prn temp >38°.
11. Labs: CBC, SMA 7, CBG/ABG, UA. Urine antigen
screen. Nasopharyngeal washings for direct fluorescent
antibody (RSV, adenovirus, parainfluenza, influenza
virus, chlamydia), viral culture.
Viral Laryngotracheitis (Croup)

1. Admit to:
2. Diagnosis: Croup
3. Condition:
5. Activity:
6. Nursing: Pulse oximeter, laryngoscope and
endotracheal tube at bedside. Respiratory isolation,
inputs and outputs.
7. Diet:
8. IV Fluids:
-Oxygen, cool mist, 1-2 L/min by NC or 40-60% by
mask, keep sat >92%.
-Racemic epinephrine (2.25% sln) 0.05 mL/kg/dose
(max 0.5 mL) in 2-3 mL saline nebulized q1-6h.
-Dexamethasone (Decadron) 0.25-0.5 mg/kg/dose
IM/IV q6h prn, max dose 10 mg OR
-Prednisone 1-2 mg/kg/day PO q12-24h x 3-5 days
[syr: 1mg/mL, 5 mg/mL;
tabs: 1, 2.5, 5, 10, 20, 50 mg]
-Prednisolone 1-2 mg/kg/day PO q12-24h x 3-5 days
[5 mg/5 mL, Orapred 20.2mg/5mL, Prelone 15
mg/5 mL].
10. Extras and X-rays: CXR PA and LAT,
posteroanterior x-ray of neck.
11. Labs: CBC, CBG/ABG, blood culture and sensitivity;
UA, culture and sensitivity. Urine antigen screen.
Varicella Zoster Infections

Immunocompetent Patient
A. Therapy with oral acyclovir is not recommended
routinely for the treatment of uncomplicated
varicella in the otherwise healthy child <12 years of
age.
B. Oral acyclovir may be given within 24 hours of the
onset of rash. Administration results in a modest
decrease in the duration and magnitude of fever
and a decrease in the number and duration of skin
lesions.
C. Acyclovir (Zovirax) 80 mg/kg/day PO q6h for five
days, max 3200 mg/day [cap: 200 mg; susp: 200
mg/5 mL; tabs: 400, 800 mg]
Immunocompromised Patient
A. Intravenous acyclovir should be initiated early in the
course of the illness. Therapy within 24 hours of
rash onset maximizes efficacy. Oral acyclovir
should not be used because of unreliable oral
bioavailability.
Dose: 500 mg/m2/dose IV q8h x 7-10 days
B. Varicella zoster immune globulin (VZIG) may be
given shortly after exposure to prevent or modify
the course of the disease. It is not effective once
disease is established.
Dose: 125 U per 10 kg body weight, round up to
nearest vial size to max of 625 U [vial: 125
U/1.25ml]. Must be administered IM.
Pneumocystis Carinii Pneumonia

1. Admit to:
2. Diagnosis:
3. Condition:
5. Activity:
6. Nursing: Daily weights.
7. Diet:
8. IV Fluids:
Pneumocystis Carinii Pneumonia (PCP) Treatment:
-Oxygen prn for hypoxia.
-Trimethoprim/Sulfamethoxazole (Bactrim, Septra) 15-
20 mg TMP/kg/day IV/PO q6h x 14-21 days [inj per
mL: TMP 16 mg/SMX 80 mg; susp per 5 mL: TMP
40 mg/SMX 200 mg; tab DS: TMP 160 mg/SMX
800 mg; tab SS: TMP 80mg/SMX 400 mg] x 14-21
days
Oral therapy is reserved for patients with mild
disease who do not have malabsorption or diarrhea
OR
-Pentamidine isethionate (Pentam) 4 mg/kg/day IV
over 1-2h for 14-21days
-Prednisone:
<13 yrs: 2mg/kg/day PO qd x 7-10 days, then taper
over the next 10-14 days.
>13 yrs old with hypoxia: 40 mg PO bid x 5 days,
then 40 mg PO qd x 5 days, then 20 mg PO qd x
11 days.
Pneumocystis Carinii Pneumonia Prophylaxis:
150 mg/m2 trimethoprim/kg/day PO bid three days
per week. [inj per mL: TMP 16 mg/SMX 80 mg;
susp per 5 mL: TMP 40 mg/SMX 200 mg; tab DS:
TMP 160 mg/SMX 800 mg; tab SS: TMP 80/SMX
400 mg] OR
-Dapsone (Avlosulfon) (>1 mo) 2 mg/kg/day PO q24h,
max 100 mg/day or 4 mg/kg/dose PO q week, max
200 mg/dose [tabs: 25,100 mg] OR
-Aerosolized Pentamidine (NebuPent) (if >5 yrs): 300
mg nebulized monthly
-Atovaquone (Mepron)
1-3 months and >24 months: 45 mg/kg/day PO qd
4-24 months: 30 mg/kg/day PO qd
[liquid: 750 mg/5mL]
10. Extras and X-rays: CXR PA and LAT, PPD.
11. Labs: CBC, SMA 7, LDH. Blood culture and sensitiv-
ity x 2. Sputum Gram stain, culture and sensitivity.
Sputum stain for Pneumocystis, AFB. CD4 count, HIV
RNA PCR, UA.
Septic Arthritis
1. Admit to:
2. Diagnosis: Septic arthritis
3. Condition:
5. Activity: No weight bearing on infected joint.
6. Nursing: Warm compresses prn. Consent for
arthrocentesis. Age appropriate pain scale.
7. Diet:
8. IV Fluids:
Empiric Therapy for Infants 1-6 months (strep, staph,
gram neg, gonococcus):
100 mg/kg/day IV/IM q6h AND
-Gentamicin (Garamycin) or tobramycin (Nebcin)
(normal renal function): 7.5 mg/kg/day IV/IM q8h.
Empiric Therapy for Patients Age 6 months-4 yr (H
influenzae, streptococci, staphylococcus):
(preferred for H flu coverage until culture results
available) AND/OR
-Nafcillin (Nafcil) or oxacillin (Bactocill) 100-200
mg/kg/day IV/IM q6h.
Empiric Therapy for Children Older than 4 Years
(staph, strep):
-Vancomycin (Vancocin) (MRSA) 40-60 mg/kg/day IV
q6-8h, max 4 gm/day.
-Acetaminophen and codeine 0.5-1 mg co-
deine/kg/dose PO q4-6h prn pain [elixir per 5 mL:
codeine 12 mg, acetaminophen 120 mg].
-Ibuprofen (Children’s Advil) 5-10 mg/kg/dose PO q6-
8 hrs prn fever.
11. Extras and X-rays: X-ray views of joint, CXR.
Orthopedics and infectious disease consults. CT
scan.
12. Labs: CBC, blood culture and sensitivity x 2, PPD,
ESR, UA. Antibiotic levels. Urine antigen screen (H
flu).
Synovial fluid:
Tube 1 - Gram stain, culture and sensitivity.
Tube 2 - Glucose, protein, pH.
Tube 3 - Cell count.
Lower Urinary Tract Infection

1. Admit to:
2. Diagnosis: UTI
3. Condition:
5. Activity:
7. Diet:
8. IV Fluids:
Lower Urinary Tract Infection:
-Trimethoprim/sulfamethoxazole (Bactrim, Septra) 6-
10 mg/kg/day TMP PO q12h, max 320 mg TMP/day
[susp per 5 mL: TMP 40 mg, SMX 200 mg; tab, SS:
80 mg/400 mg; tab, DS: 160 mg/800 mg] OR
-Cefpodoxime (Vantin) 10 mg/kg/day PO q12h, max
800 mg/day [susp: 50 mg/5 mL, 100 mg/5 mL; tabs:
100, 200 mg] OR
-Cefprozil (Cefzil) 30 mg/kg/day PO q12h, max 1
gm/day [susp: 125 mg/5 mL, 250 mg/5 mL; tabs:
250, 500 mg] OR
Prophylactic Therapy:
-Trimethoprim/Sulfamethoxazole (Bactrim, Septra) 2
mg TMP/kg/day and 10 mg SMX/kg/day PO qhs [
susp per 5 mL: TMP 40 mg/SMX 200 mg; tab DS:
TMP 160 mg/SMX 800 mg; tab SS: TMP
80mg/SMX 400 mg] OR
-Sulfisoxazole (Gantrisin) 10-20 mg/kg/day PO q12h
[syr: 500 mg/5 mL; tab: 500 mg].
-Phenazopyridine (Pyridium), children 6-12 yrs: 12
mg/kg/day PO tid (max 200 mg/dose); >12 yrs:
100-200 mg PO tid x 2 days prn dysuria [tabs: 100,
200 mg]. Does not treat infection; acts only as an
analgesic.
11. Extras and X-rays: Renal ultrasound. Voiding
cystourethrogram 3 weeks after infection. Radiological
work up on all children <1 year of age.
12. Labs: CBC, SMA 7. UA with micro, urine Gram stain,
culture and sensitivity. Repeat urine culture and
sensitivity 24-48 hours after therapy; blood culture and
sensitivity.
Pyelonephritis
1. Admit to:
2. Diagnosis: Pyelonephritis
3.Condition:
5. Activity:
6. Nursing: Inputs and outputs, daily weights
7. Diet:
8.IV Fluids:
-If less than 1 week old, see suspected sepsis, pages
108, 155.
-Ampicillin 100 mg/kg/day IV/IM q6h, max 12 gm/day
AND
-Gentamicin (Garamycin) or Tobramycin (Nebcin):
30 days-5 yr: 7.5 mg/kg/day IV/IM q8h.
12 gm/day.
prn temp >38°. ...
11. Extras and X-rays: Renal ultrasound.
12. Labs: CBC, SMA-7. UA with micro, urine culture and
sensitivity. Repeat urine culture and sensitivity 24-48
hours after initiation of therapy; blood culture and
sensitivity x 2; drug levels.
Osteomyelitis
1. Admit to:
2. Diagnosis: Osteomyelitis
3. Condition:
5. Activity:
6. Nursing: Keep involved extremity elevated. Consent
for osteotomy.
7. Diet:
8. IV Fluids:
Children <3 yrs (H flu, strep, staph):
max 9 gm/day.
Children >3 yrs (staph, strep, H flu):
-Nafcillin (Nafcil) or oxacillin (Bactophill) 100-150
mg/kg/day IV/IM q6h, max 12 gm/day OR
max 12 gm/day OR
-Cefazolin (Ancef) 100 mg/kg/day IV/IM q6-8h, max 6
gm/day OR
max 9 gm/day.
Postoperative or Traumatic (staph, gram neg, Pseu-
domonas):
of ticarcillin IV/IM q6-8h, max 24 gm/day OR
max 4 gm/day AND
12 gm/day OR
-Nafcillin (Nafcil) or oxacillin (Bactocill) 150 mg/kg/day
IV/IM q6h, max 12 gm/day AND
-Tobramycin (Nebcin)
>10 yr: 5.0 mg/kg/day IV q8h.
Chronic Osteomyelitis (staphylococcal):
-Dicloxacillin (Dycill, Dynapen, Pathocil) 75-100
mg/kg/day PO q6h, max 2 gm/day [caps: 125, 250,
500 mg; susp: 62.5 mg/5 mL] OR
-Cephalexin (Keflex) 50-100 mg/kg/day PO q6-12h,
max 4 gm/day [caps: 250, 500 mg; drops 100
mg/mL; susp 125 mg/5 mL, 250 mg/5 mL; tabs: 500
mg, 1 gm].
prn temp >38°.
11. Extras and X-rays: Bone scan, multiple X-ray views,
CT. Orthopedic and infectious disease consultations.
12. Labs: CBC, SMA 7, blood culture and sensitivity x 3,
ESR, sickle prep, UA, culture and sensitivity, antibiotic
levels, serum bacteriocidal titers.
Otitis Media
Acute Otitis Media (S pneumoniae, non-typable H flu,
M catarrhalis, Staph aureus, group A streptococcus):
-Amoxicillin (Amoxil) 25-50 mg/kg/day PO q8h, max 3
gm/day
[caps: 250, 500 mg; drops: 50 mg/mL; susp; 125
mg/5mL, 200 mg/5mL, 250 mg/5mL, 400 mg/5mL;
tabs: 500, 875 mg; tabs, chew: 125, 200, 250, 400
mg] OR
-Trimethoprim/Sulfamethoxazole (Bactrim, Septra) 6-8
mg/kg/day of TMP PO bid, max 320 mg TMP/day
[susp per 5 mL: TMP 40 mg/SMX 200 mg; tab DS:
80mg/SMX 400 mg] OR
-Erythromycin/sulfisoxazole (Pediazole) 1 mL/kg/day
PO qid or 40 mg/kg/day of erythromycin PO qid,
max 50 mL/day
[susp per 5 mL: erythromycin 200 mg/sulfisoxazole
600 mg] OR
-Amoxicillin/clavulanate (Augmentin) 40 mg/kg/day of
amoxicillin PO q8h x 7-10d, max 500 mg/dose
[susp per 5 mL: 125, 250 mg; tabs: 250, 500 mg;
tab, chew: 125, 250 mg] OR
40 mg/kg/day PO q12h, max 875 mg of
amoxicillin/dose
[susp: 200 mg/5mL, 400 mg/5mL; tab: 875 mg; tab,
chew: 200, 400 mg]
500 mg/day
days 2-5
tabs: 250, 600 mg]
OR
-Clarithromycin (Biaxin) 15-30 mg/kg/day PO bid, max
1 gm/day
mg] OR
-Cefixime (Suprax) 8 mg/kg/day PO bid-qd, max 400
mg/day
[susp: 100 mg/5 mL; tabs: 200, 400 mg] OR
-Cefuroxime axetil (Ceftin) tab: child: 125-250 mg PO
bid; adult: 250-500 mg PO bid; susp: 30 mg/kg/day
PO q12h, max 500 mg/day
[susp: 125 mg/5 mL; tabs 125, 250, 500 mg] OR
-Loracarbef (Lorabid) 30 mg/kg/day PO bid, max 400
mg/day
[caps: 200, 400 mg; susp: 100 mg/5 mL, 200
mg/5mL] OR
-Cefpodoxime (Vantin) 10 mg/kg/day PO bid, max 800
mg/day
mg] OR
-Cefprozil (Cefzil) 30 mg/kg/day PO bid, max 1gm/day
[susp: 125 mg/5 mL, 250 mg/5 mL; tabs: 250 mg,
500 mg] OR
-Ceftriaxone (Rocephin) 50 mg/kg IM x one dose, max
2000 mg
Acute Otitis Media (resistant strains of Strep
pneumoniae):
-Amoxicillin (Amoxil) 80-90 mg/kg/day PO q12h, max
3 gm/day
[caps: 250, 500 mg; drops: 50 mg/mL; susp; 125
tabs: 500, 875 mg; tabs, chew: 125, 200, 250,
400mg]
-Amoxicillin/clavulanate (Augmentin BID) 80-90
mg/kg/day PO q12h.
[susp 200 mg/5 mL, 400 mg/5 mL; tab: 875 mg;
tab, chew: 200, 400 mg]
Prophylactic Therapy (>3 episodes in 6 months):
Therapy reserved for control of recurrent acute otitis
media, defined as three or more episodes per 6 months
or 4 or more episodes per 12 months.
-Sulfisoxazole (Gantrisin) 50 mg/kg/day PO qhs
[tab 500 mg; susp 500 mg/5 mL] OR
-Amoxicillin (Amoxil) 20 mg/kg/day PO qhs
[caps: 250,500 mg; drops: 50 mg/mL; susp; 125
tabs: 500, 875 mg; tabs, chew: 125, 200, 250,
400mg] OR
mg/kg/day of TMP PO qhs
80mg/SMX 400 mg]
Symptomatic Therapy:
-Ibuprofen (Advil) 5-10 mg/kg/dose PO q6-8 hrs prn
fever
[suspension: 100 mg/5 mL, tabs: 200, 300, 400,
600, 800 mg] AND/OR
-Acetaminophen (Tylenol) 10-15 mg/kg/dose PO/PR
q4-6h prn fever
[tabs: 325, 500 mg; chewable tabs: 80 mg; caplets:
160 mg, 500 mg; drops: 80 mg/0.8 mL; elixir: 120
mg/5 mL, 130 mg/5 mL, 160 mg/5 mL, 325 mg/5
mL; caplet, ER: 650 mg; suppositories: 120, 325,
650 mg].
-Benzocaine/antipyrine (Auralgan otic): fill ear canal
with 2-4 drops; moisten cotton pledget and place in
external ear; repeat every 1-2 hours prn pain [soln,
otic: Antipyrine 5.4%, benzocaine 1.4% in 10 mL
and 15 mL bottles]
Extras and X rays: Aspiration tympanocentesis,
tympanogram; audiometry.
Otitis Externa
Otitis Externa (Pseudomonas, gram negatives, pro-
teus):
-Polymyxin B/neomycin/hydrocortisone (Cortisporin
otic susp or solution) 2-4 drops in ear canal tid-qid
x 5-7 days.
[otic soln or susp per mL: neomycin sulfate 5 mg;
polymyxin B sulfate 10,000 units; hydrocortisone 10
mg in 10 mL bottles)].
The suspension is preferred. The solution should
not be used if the eardrum is perforated.
Malignant Otitis Externa in Diabetes (Pseudomonas):
-Ceftazidime (Fortaz) 100-150 mg/kg/day IV/IM q8h,
max 12gm/day OR
-Piperacillin (Pipracil) or ticarcillin (Ticar) 200-300
mg/kg/day IV/IM q4-6h, max 24gm/day OR
-Tobramycin (Nebcin)
>10 yr: 5.0 mg/kg/day IV q8h.
Tonsillopharyngitis
Streptococcal Pharyngitis:
-Penicillin V (Pen Vee K) 25-50 mg/kg/day PO qid x
10 days, max 3 gm/day [susp: 125 mg/5 mL, 250
mg/5 mL; tabs: 125, 250, 500 mg] OR
-Penicillin G benzathine (Bicillin LA) 25,000-50,000
U/kg (max 1.2 MU) IM x 1 dose OR
-Azithromycin (Zithromax) 12 mg/kg/day PO qd x 5
days, max 500 mg/day
tabs: 250, 600 mg] OR
-Clarithromycin (Biaxin)15 mg/kg/day PO bid, max 1
gm/day
[susp 125 mg/5 mL, 250 mg/5 mL; tabs: 250, 500
mg] OR
-Erythromycin (penicillin allergic patients) 40
mg/kg/day PO qid x 10 days, max 2 gm/day
Erythromycin ethylsuccinate (EryPed, EES)
tab, chew: 200 mg]
Erythromycin base (E-Mycin, Ery-Tab, Eryc)
[cap, DR: 250 mg; tabs: 250, 333, 500 mg]
Refractory Pharyngitis:
40 mg/kg/day of amoxicillin PO q8h x 7-10d, max
500 mg/dose
mg; tabs, chew: 125, 250 mg] OR
-Dicloxacillin (Dycill, Dynapen, Pathocil)
50 mg/kg/day PO qid, max 2 gm/day
[caps 125, 250, 500; elixir 62.5 mg/5 mL] OR
-Cephalexin (Keflex)
50 mg/kg/day PO qid-tid, max 4 gm/day
[caps: 250, 500 mg; drops 100 mg/mL; susp 125
mg/5 mL, 250 mg/5 mL; tabs: 500 mg, 1 gm].
Prophylaxis (5 strep infections in 6 months):
-Penicillin V Potassium (Pen Vee K)
40 mg/kg/day PO bid, max 3 gm/day
[susp 125 mg/5 mL, 250 mg/5 mL; tabs: 125, 250,
500 mg].
Retropharyngeal Abscess (strep, anaerobes, E
corrodens):
-Clindamycin (Cleocin) 25-40 mg/kg/day IV/IM q6-8h,
max 4.8 gm/day OR
100-150 mg/kg/day IV/IM q6h, max 12 gm/day AND
max 9 gm/day
Labs: Throat culture, rapid antigen test; PA lateral and
neck films; CXR. Otolaryngology consult for incision and
drainage.
Epiglottitis
1. Admit to: Pediatric intensive care unit.
2. Diagnosis: Epiglottitis
3. Condition:
4. Vital Signs: Call MD if:
5. Activity:
6. Nursing: Pulse oximeter. Keep head of bed elevated,
allow patient to sit; curved blade laryngoscope,
tracheostomy tray and oropharyngeal tube at bedside.
Avoid excessive manipulation or agitation. Respiratory
isolation.
7. Diet: NPO
8. IV Fluids:
-Oxygen, humidified, blow-by; keep sat >92%.
Antibiotics:
Most common causative organism is Haemophilus
influenzae.
-Ceftriaxone (Rocephin) 50 mg/kg/day IV/IM qd, max
2 gm/day OR
max 9 gm/day OR
-Cefotaxime (Claforan) 100-150 mg/kg/day IV/IM q6-
8h, max 12 gm/day
10. Extras and X-rays: CXR PA and LAT, lateral neck.
Otolaryngology consult.
11. Labs: CBC, CBG/ABG. Blood culture and sensitivity,
latex agglutination; UA, urine antigen screen.
Sinusitis
Treatment of Sinusitis (S. pneumoniae, H flu, M cat-
arrhalis, group A strep, anaerobes):
-Treat for 14-21 days.
-Amoxicillin (Amoxil) 40 mg/kg/day PO tid, max 3
gm/day [caps: 250,500 mg; drops: 50 mg/mL; susp;
125 mg/5mL, 200 mg/5mL, 250 mg/5mL, 400
mg/5mL; tabs: 500, 875 mg; tabs, chew: 125, 200,
250 , 400mg] OR
500 mg/day
days 2-5
[cap: 250 mg; susp: 100 mg/5mL, 200 mg/5mL; tab:
250, 600 mg] OR
-Trimethoprim/sulfamethoxazole (Bactrim, Septra) 6-8
mg/kg/day of TMP PO bid, max 320 mg TMP/day
TMP 160 mg/SMX 800 mg; tab SS: TMP 80mg/SMX
400 mg] OR
-Erythromycin/sulfisoxazole (Pediazole) 1 mL/kg/day
PO qid or 40-50 mg/kg/day of erythromycin PO qid,
max 2 gm erythromycin/day
[susp per 5 mL: Erythromycin 200 mg, sulfisoxazole
600 mg] OR
-Amoxicillin/clavulanate (Augmentin) 40 mg/kg/day of
amoxicillin PO tid, max 500 mg/dose
40 mg/kg/day PO bid, max 875 mg
(amoxicillin)/dose
tabs, chew: 200, 400 mg] OR
PO bid
susp: 30 mg/kg/day PO qid, max 500 mg/day
[susp: 125 mg/5 mL; tabs: 125, 250, 500 mg]
Labs: Sinus x-rays, MRI scan.
Active Pulmonary Tuberculosis

1. Admit to:
2. Diagnosis: Active Pulmonary Tuberculosis
3. Condition:
4. Vital signs:
5. Activity:
6. Nursing: Respiratory isolation.
7. Diet:
Pulmonary Infection:
Six Month Regimen: Two months of isoniazid, rifampin
and pyrazinamide daily, followed by 4 months of
isoniazid and rifampin daily OR
Two months of isoniazid, rifampin and pyrazinamide
daily, followed by 4 months of isoniazid and rifampin
twice weekly.
Nine Month Regimen (for hilar adenopathy only):
Nine months of isoniazid and rifampin daily OR one
month of isoniazid and rifampin daily, followed by 8
months of isoniazid and rifampin twice weekly.
Anti-tuberculosis Agents
Drug Daily Twice Dosage

Dose Weekly Forms
Dose
Isoniazid 10-15 20-30 Tab: 50, 100,

(Laniazid) mg/kg/day mg/kg PO, 300 mg
PO qd, max 900 Syr: 10
max 300 mg mg/mL
mg
Rifampin 10-20 10-20 Cap: 150,

(Rifadin) mg/kg/day mg/kg, 300 mg Ex-
PO qd, max 600 temporaneou
max 600 mg s suspension
mg
Pyrazina- 20-40 50 mg/kg Tab: 500 mg

mide mg/kg PO PO, max Extempora-
qd, max 2000 mg neous sus-
2000 mg pension
Ethambut 15-25 50 mg/kg Tab: 100,

ol mg/kg/day PO, max 400 mg
(Myambu PO qd, 2500 mg
tol) max 2500
mg
Strepto- 20-40 20-40 Inj: 400

mycin mg/kg IM mg/kg IM, mg/mL, IM
qd, max 1 max 1 gm only
gm
-Directly observed therapy should be considered for all

patients. All household contacts should be tested.
Tuberculosis Prophylaxis for Skin Test Conversion:
-Isoniazid-susceptible: Isoniazid (Laniazid) 10
mg/kg/day (max 300 mg) PO qd x 6-9 months.
-Isoniazid-resistant: Rifampin (Rifadin) 10 mg/kg/day
(max 600 mg) PO qd for 9 months.
9. Extras and X-rays: CXR PA, LAT, spinal series.
10. Labs: CBC, SMA7, liver panel, HIV antibody, ABG.
First AM sputum for AFB x 3 (drug sensitivity tests on
first isolate). Gastric aspirates for AFB qAM x 3. UA,
urine AFB.
Cellulitis
1. Admit to:
2. Diagnosis: Cellulitis
3. Condition:
5. Activity:
6. Nursing: Keep affected extremity elevated; warm
compresses tid prn. Monitor area of infection.
7. Diet:
8. IV Fluids:
Empiric Therapy for Extremity Cellulitis:
100-200 mg/kg/day/IV/IM q4-6h, max 12gm/day OR
-Cefazolin (Ancef) 75-100 mg/kg/day IV/IM q6-8h, max
6 gm/day OR
-Cefoxitin (Mefoxin) 100-160 mg/kg/day IV/IM q6h,
max 12 gm/day OR
IV/IM q6-8h, max 24 gm/day OR
mg/kg/day PO qid, max 2 gm/day [caps: 125, 250,
500 mg; susp: 62.5 mg/5 mL].
Cheek/Buccal Cellulitis (H flu):
max 9 gm/day OR
8h, max 12 gm/day
Periorbital Cellulitis (H. flu, pneumococcus):
max 9 gm/day OR
PO bid
susp: 30 mg/kg/day PO qid, max 500 mg/day
[susp: 125 mg/5 mL; tabs: 125, 250, 500 mg]
-Acetaminophen and codeine, 0.5-1 mg co-
11. Extras and X-rays: X-ray views of site.
12. Labs: CBC, SMA 7, blood culture and sensitivity.
Leading edge aspirate, Gram stain, culture and
sensitivity; UA, urine culture.
Impetigo, Scalded Skin Syndrome,

and Staphylococcal Scarlet Fever
1. Admit to:
2. Diagnosis: Impetigo, scalded skin syndrome or
staphylococcal scarlet fever
3. Condition:
5. Activity:
6. Nursing: Warm compresses tid prn.
7. Diet:
8. IV Fluids:
100-200 mg/kg/day IV/IM q4-6h, max 12 gm/day OR
mg/kg/day PO qid x 5-7days, max 2 gm/day [caps
125, 250, 500 mg; elixir 62.5 mg/5 mL] OR
-Cephalexin (Keflex) 25-50 mg/kg/day PO qid, max 4
gm/day [caps: 250, 500 mg; drops 100 mg/mL; susp
125 mg/5 mL, 250 mg/5 mL; tabs: 500 mg, 1 gm]
OR
-Loracarbef (Lorabid) 30 mg/kg/day PO bid, max 800
mg/day [caps: 200, 400 mg; susp: 100 mg/5 mL, 200
mg/5mL] OR
-Cefpodoxime (Vantin) 10 mg/kg/day PO bid, max 800
mg/day [susp: 50 mg/5 mL, 100 mg/5 mL; tabs: 100
mg, 200 mg] OR
-Cefprozil (Cefzil) 30 mg/kg/day PO bid, max 1 gm/day
mg] OR
-Vancomycin (Vancocin) 40 mg/kg/day IV q6-8h, max
4 gm/day
-Mupirocin (Bactroban) ointment or cream, apply
topically tid (cream/oint: 2% 15 gm). Extensive
involvement requires systemic antibiotics.
-Acetaminophen and codeine, 0.5-1 mg co-
11. Labs: CBC, SMA 7, blood culture and sensitivity.
Drainage fluid for Gram stain, culture and sensitivity;
UA.
Tetanus
History of One or Two Primary Immunizations or
Unknown:
Low risk wound - Tetanus toxoid 0.5 mL IM.
Tetanus prone - Tetanus toxoid 0.5 mL IM, plus
tetanus immunoglobulin (TIG) 250 U IM.
Three Primary Immunizations and 10 yrs or more
Since Last Booster:
Low risk wound - Tetanus toxoid, 0.5 mL IM.
Tetanus prone - Tetanus toxoid, 0.5 mL IM.
Three Primary Immunizations and 5-10 yrs Since Last
Booster:
Low risk wound - None
Tetanus prone - Tetanus toxoid 0.5 mL IM.
Three Primary Immunizations and <5 yrs Since Last
Booster:
Low risk wound - None
Tetanus prone - None
Treatment of Clostridium Tetani Infection:
-Tetanus immune globulin (TIG): single dose of 3,000
to 6,000 U IM (consider immune globulin intrave-
nous if TIG is not available). Part of the TIG dose
may be infiltrated locally around the wound. Keep
wound clean and débrided.
-Penicillin G 100,000 U/kg/day IV q4-6h, max 24
MU/day x 10-14 days OR
-Metronidazole (Flagyl) 30 mg/kg/day PO/IV q6h, max
4 gm/day x 10-14 days.
Pediculosis
Pediculosis Capitis (head lice):
-Permethrin (Nix) is the preferred treatment. Available
in a 1% cream rinse that is applied to the scalp and
hair for 10 minutes. A single treatment is adequate,
but a second treatment may be applied 7-10 days
after the first treatment [cream rinse: 1% 60 mL].
-Pyrethrin (Rid, A-2000, R&C). Available as a sham-
poo that is applied to the scalp and hair for 10
minutes. A repeat application 7-10 days later may
sometimes be necessary [shampoo (0.3% pyreth-
rins, 3% piperonyl butoxide): 60, 120, 240 mL].
-For infestation of eyelashes, apply petrolatum oint-
ment tid-qid for 8-10 days and mechanically remove
the lice.
Pediculosis Corporis (body lice):
-Treatment consists of improving hygiene and clean-
ing clothes. Infested clothing should be washed and
dried at hot temperatures to kill the lice.
Pediculicides are not necessary.
Pediculosis Pubis (pubic lice, “crabs”): Permethrin
(Nix) or pyrethrin-based products may be used as
described above for pediculosis capitis. Retreatment
is recommended 7-10 days later.
Scabies
Treatment:
Bathe with soap and water; scrub and remove scaling or
crusted detritus; towel dry. All clothing and bed linen
contaminated within past 2 days should be washed in
hot water for 20 min.
Permethrin (Elimite) - 5% cream: Adults and children:
Massage cream into skin from head to soles of feet.
Remove by washing after 8 to 14 hours. Treat infants
on scalp, temple and forehead. One application is
curative. [cream: 5% 60 gm]
Lindane (Kwell, Gamma benzene) - available as 1%
cream or lotion: Use 1% lindane for adults and older
children; not recommended in pregnancy, infants, or
on excoriated skin. 1-2 treatments are effective.
Massage a thin layer from neck to toes (including
soles). In adults, 20-30 gm of cream or lotion is
sufficient for 1 application. Bathe after 8 hours. May be
repeated in one week if mites remain or if new lesions
appear. Contraindicated in children <2 years of age.
[lotion: 1% 60, 473 mL; shampoo:1%: 60, 473 mL].
Dermatophytoses
Diagnostic procedures:
(1) KOH prep of scales and skin scrapings for hyphae.
(2) Fungal cultures are used for uncertain cases.
Treat for at least 4 weeks.
Tinea corporis (ringworm), cruris (jock itch), pedis
(athlete’s foot):
-Ketoconazole (Nizoral) cream qd [2%: 15, 30, 60 gm].
-Clotrimazole (Lotrimin) cream bid [1%: 15, 30, 45
gm].
-Miconazole (Micatin) cream bid [2%: 15, 30 gm].
-Econazole (Spectazole) cream bid [1%: 15, 30, 85
gm].
-Oxiconazole (Oxistat) cream or lotion qd-bid [1%
cream: 15, 30, 60 gm; 1% lotion: 30 mL].
-Sulconazole (Exelderm) cream or lotion qd-bid [1%
cream: 15, 30, 60 gm; 1% lotion: 30 mL].
-Naftifine (Naftin) cream or gel applied bid [1%: 15, 30
gm].
-Terbinafine (Lamisil) cream or applied bid [1% cream:
15, 30 gm; 1% gel: 5, 15, 30 gm].
Tinea capitis:
-Griseofulvin Microsize (Grisactin, Grifulvin V) 15-20
mg/kg/day PO qd, max 1000 mg/day [caps: 125, 250
mg; susp: 125 mg/5 mL; tabs: 250, 500 mg]
-Griseofulvin Ultramicrosize (Fulvicin P/G, Grisactin
Ultra, Gris-PEG) 5-10 mg/kg/day PO qd, max 750
mg/day [tabs: 125, 165, 250, 330 mg].
-Give griseofulvin with whole-milk or fatty foods to
increase absorption. May require 4-6 weeks of
therapy and should be continued for two weeks
beyond clinical resolution.
Tinea Unguium (Fungal Nail Infection):
-Griseofulvin (see dosage above) is effective, but may
require up to 4 months of therapy.
Tinea Versicolor:
-Cover body surface from face to knees with selenium
sulfide 2.5% lotion or selenium sulfide 1% shampoo
daily for 30 minutes for 1 week, then monthly x 3 to
help prevent recurrences.
Bite Wounds
1. Admit to:
2. Diagnosis: Bite Wound.
5. Activity:
6. Nursing: Cooling measures prn temp >38° C, age
appropriate pain scale.
7. Diet:
8. IV Fluids: D5 NS at maintenance rate.
-Initiate antimicrobial therapy for: moderate/severe bite
wounds, especially if edema or crush injury is
present; puncture wounds, especially if bone, tendon
sheath, or joint penetration may have occurred;
facial bites; hand and foot bites; genital area bites;
wounds in immunocompromised or asplenic pa-
tients.
Dog Bites and Cat Bites:
Oral: amoxicillin/clavulanate
Oral, penicillin allergic: extended-spectrum
cephalosporins or trimethoprim-sulfamethoxazole
PLUS clindamycin
IV: ampicillin-sulbactam
IV, penicillin allergic: extended spectrum
PLUS clindamycin
Reptile Bites:
Oral: amoxicillin-clavulanate
Oral, penicillin allergic: extended-spectrum
PLUS clindamycin ..
IV: ampicillin-sulbactam PLUS gentamicin .
IV, penicillin allergic: clindamycin PLUS gentamicin
Human Bites:
Oral: amoxicillin-clavulanate
Oral, penicillin allergic: trimethoprim-sulfamethoxazole
PLUS clindamycin
IV: ampicillin-sulbactam
IV, penicillin allergic: extended-spectrum
PLUS clindamycin
Antibiotic Dosages:
40 mg/kg/day of amoxicillin PO tid, max 500
mg/dose
40 mg/kg/day PO bid, max 875 mg
(amoxicillin)/dose
tabs, chew: 200, 400 mg]
-Cefpodoxime (Vantin)
10 mg/kg/day PO bid, max 800 mg/day
[susp: 50 mg/5 mL, 100 mg/5 mL; tabs: 100 mg, 200
mg] OR
-Cefprozil (Cefzil)
30 mg/kg/day PO bid, max 1 gm/day
mg] OR
-Cefixime (Suprax)
8 mg/kg/day PO bid-qd, max 400 mg/day
[susp: 100 mg/5 mL; tabs: 200, 400 mg]
6-8 mg/kg/day of TMP PO/IV bid, max 320 mg
TMP/day
[inj per mL: TMP 16 mg/SMX 80 mg; susp per 5 mL:
TMP 40 mg/SMX 200 mg; tab DS: TMP 160
-Clindamycin (Cleocin) 10-30 mg/kg/day PO q6-8h,
max 1800 mg/day or 25-40 mg/kg/day IV/IM q6-8h,
max 4.8 gm/day [cap: 75, 150, 300 mg; soln: 75
mg/5mL]
-Ampicillin-sulbactam (Unasyn) 100-200 mg/kg/day
ampicillin IV/IM a6h, max 12 gm ampicillin/day
[1.5 gm (ampicillin 1 gm and sulbactam 0.5 gm; 3
gm (ampicillin 2 gm and sulbactam 1 gm)]
8h, max 12 gm/day
-Ceftriaxone (Rocephin) 50 mg/kg/day IV/IM qd, max
2 gm/day
-Gentamicin (Garamycin) (normal renal function):
>10 yr: 5.0 mg/kg/day IV/IM q8h.
Additional Considerations:
-Sponge away visible dirt. Irrigate with a copious
volume of sterile saline by high-pressure syringe
irrigation. Debride any devitalized tissue.
-Tetanus immunization if not up-to-date.
-Assess risk of rabies from animal bites and risk of
hepatitis and HIV from human bites.
-Ibuprofen (Motrin) 5-10 mg/kg/dose PO q6-8h prn OR
temp >38°C or pain.
11. Extras and X-rays: X-ray views of site of injury.
12. Labs: CBC, SMA 7, wound culture.
Lyme Disease
1. Admit to:
2. Diagnosis: Lyme disease.
3. Condition:
5. Activity:
6. Nursing:
7. Diet:
Early Localized Disease:
Age >8 yrs: doxycycline 100 mg PO bid x 14-21 days
[caps: 50, 100 mg; susp: 25 mg/5mL; syrup: 50
mg/5mL; tabs 50, 100 mg]
All ages: amoxicillin 25-50 mg/kg/day PO bid (max 3
gm/day) x 14-21 days
[caps: 250,500 mg; drops: 50 mg/mL; susp; 125
tabs: 500, 875 mg; tabs, chew: 125, 200, 250 ,
400mg]
Early Disseminated and Late Disease:
Multiple Erythema Migrans: Take same oral regimen
as for early disease but for 21 days.
Isolated Facial Palsy: Take same oral regimen as for
early disease but for 21-28 days.
Arthritis: Take same oral regimen as for early dis-
ease but for 28 days.
Persistent or Recurrent Arthritis:
-Ceftriaxone (Rocephin) 75-100 mg/kg/day IM/IV 12-
24h (max 2 gm/dose) for 14-21 days OR
-Penicillin G 300,000 U/kg/day IV q4h (max 20
million units/day) x 14-21 days.
Carditis or Meningitis or Encephalitis:
-Ceftriaxone (Rocephin) 75-100 mg/kg/day IM/IV q12-
24h (max 2 gm/dose) for 14-21 days OR
-Penicillin G 300,000 U/kg/day IV q4h (max 20 million
units/day) x 14-21 days.
Lyme disease vaccine is available for children >15 years
of age.
-Ibuprofen (Advil) 5-10 mg/kg/dose PO q6-8h prn
temp >38° C OR
temp >38° C.
11. Extras and X-rays: CXR, MRI.
12. Labs: IgM-specific antibody titer usually peaks
between weeks 3 and 6 after the onset of infection.
Enzyme immunoassay (EIA) is the most commonly
used test for detection of antibodies. The Western
immunoblot test is the most useful for corroborating a
positive or equivocal EIA test.
Gastrointestinal Disorders
Gastroenteritis
1. Admit to:
2. Diagnosis: Acute Gastroenteritis
3. Condition:
5. Activity:
6. Nursing: Inputs and outputs, daily weights, urine spe-
cific gravity.
7. Diet: Rehydralyte, Pedialyte or soy formula (Isomil
DF), bland diet.
8. IV Fluids: See Dehydration, page 147.
Severe Gastroenteritis with Fever, Gross Blood and
Neutrophils in Stool (E coli, Shigella, Salmonella):
mg/day [susp: 100 mg/5 mL; tabs: 200, 400 mg]
OR
mg of TMP component/kg/day PO bid x 5-7d, max
320 mg TMP/day [susp per 5 mL: TMP 40 mg/SMX
200 mg; tab DS: TMP 160 mg/SMX 800 mg; tab
SS: TMP 80mg/SMX 400 mg].
Salmonella (treat infants and patients with sep-
ticemia):
-Ceftriaxone (Rocephin) 50-75 mg/kg/day IV/IM q12-
mg/day [susp: 100 mg/5 mL; tabs: 200, 400 mg]
OR
-Ampicillin 100-200 mg/kg/day IV q6h, max 12 gm/day
or 50-100 mg/kg/day PO qid x 5-7d, max 4 gm/day
mg/5 mL, 250 mg/5 mL, 500 mg/5 mL] OR
mg TMP/kg/day PO bid x 5-7d, max 320 mg
TMP/day [susp per 5 mL: TMP 40 mg/SMX 200
mg; tab DS: TMP 160 mg/SMX 800 mg; tab SS:
TMP 80mg/SMX 400 mg] OR
-If >18 yrs: Ciprofloxacin (Cipro) 250-750 mg PO q12h
or 200-400 mg IV q12h [inj: 200, 400 mg; susp: 100
mg/mL; tabs: 100, 250, 500, 750 mg]
Antibiotic Associated Diarrhea and
Pseudomembranous Colitis (Clostridium difficile):
-Treat for 7-10 days. Do not give antidiarrheal drugs.
-Metronidazole (Flagyl) 30 mg/kg/day PO/IV (PO
preferred) q8h x 7 days, max 4 gm/day. [inj: 500
mg; tabs: 250, 500 mg; extemporaneous suspen-
sion] OR
-Vancomycin (Vancocin) 40 mg/kg/day PO qid x 7
days, max 2 gm/day [caps: 125, 250 mg; oral soln:
250 mg/5 mL, 500 mg/6 mL]. Vancomycin therapy
is reserved for patients who are allergic to
metronidazole or who have not responded to
metronidazole therapy.
Rotavirus supportive treatment, see Dehydration
page 147.
10. Extras and X-rays: Upright abdomen
11. Labs: SMA7, CBC; stool Wright stain for leukocytes,
Rotazyme. Stool culture and sensitivity for enteric
pathogens; C difficile toxin and culture, ova and para-
sites; occult blood. Urine specific gravity, UA, blood
culture and sensitivity.
Specific Therapy for Gastroenteritis

Shigella Sonnei:
-Treat x 5 days. Oral therapy is acceptable except for
seriously ill patients. For resistant strains,
ciprofloxacin should be considered but is not
recommended for use for persons younger than 18
years of age except in exceptional circumstances.
-Ampicillin (preferred over amoxicillin) 50-100
mg/kg/day PO q6h, max 3 gm/day [caps: 250, 500
mg; drops: 100 mg/mL; susp: 125 mg/5 mL, 250
mg/5 mL; 500 mg/5 mL] OR
mg TMP/kg/day PO/IV q12h x 5 days [inj per mL:
TMP 16mg/SMX 80mg; susp per 5 mL: TMP 40
mg/SMX 200 mg; tab DS: TMP 160 mg/SMX 800
mg; tab SS: TMP 80mg/SMX 400 mg] OR
-Ampicillin 50-80 mg/kg/day PO q6h, max 4 gm/day;
or 100 mg/kg/day IV/IM q6h for 5-7 days, max 12
gm/day [caps: 250, 500 mg; susp: 125 mg/5 mL,
250 mg/5 mL] OR
mg/day [susp: 100 mg/5 mL; tabs: 200, 400 mg].
Yersinia (sepsis):
-Most isolates are resistant to first-generation
cephalosporins and penicillins.
-Trimethoprim/sulfamethoxazole (Bactrim, Septra) 10
mg/kg/day TMP PO q12h x 5-7days [susp per 5
mL: TMP 40 mg/SMX 200 mg; tab DS: TMP 160
Campylobacter jejuni:
-Erythromycin 40 mg/kg/day PO q6h x 5-7 days, max
2 gm/day
Erythromycin ethylsuccinate (EryPed, EES)
tab, chew: 200 mg]
Erythromycin base (E-Mycin, Ery-Tab, Eryc)
[cap, DR: 250 mg; tabs: 250, 333, 500 mg] OR
10 mg/kg PO x 1 on day 1 (max 500 mg) followed
by 5 mg/kg/day PO qd on days 2-5 (max 250 mg)
tabs: 250, 600 mg]
Enteropathogenic E coli (Travelers Diarrhea):
mg/kg/day TMP PO/IV bid [inj per mL: TMP 16
mg/SMX 80 mg; susp per 5 mL: TMP 40 mg/SMX
200 mg; tab DS: TMP 160 mg/SMX 800 mg; tab
SS: TMP 80mg/SMX 400 mg].
-Patients older than 8 years old: Doxycycline
(Vibramycin) 2-4 mg/kg/day PO q12-24h, max 200
mg/day [caps: 50, 100 mg; susp: 25 mg/5mL;
syrup: 50 mg/5mL; tabs 50, 100 mg].
Enteroinvasive E coli:
-Antibiotic selection should be based on susceptibility
testing of the isolate. If systemic infection is sus-
pected, parenteral antimicrobial therapy should be
given.
Giardia Lamblia:
-Metronidazole is the drug of choice. A 5-7 day course
of therapy has a cure rate of 80-95%. Furazolidone
is 72-100% effective when given for 7-10 days.
Albendazole is also an acceptable alternative when
given for 5 days.
-Metronidazole (Flagyl) 15 mg/kg/day PO q8h x 5-7
days (max 4 gm/day) [tabs: 250, 500 mg; extempo-
raneous suspension] OR
-Furazolidone (Furoxone) 5-8.8 mg/kg/day PO qid for
7-10 days, max 400 mg/day [susp: 50 mg/15 mL;
tab: 100 mg] OR
-Albendazole (Albenza): if > 2 yrs, 400 mg PO qd x 5
days [tab: 200mg; extemporaneous
suspension]Entamoeba Histolytica:
Asymptomatic cyst carriers:
-Iodoquinol (Yodoxin) 30-40 mg/kg/day PO q8h
(max 1.95 gm/day) x 20 days [tabs: 210, 650
mg; powder for reconstitution] OR
-Paromomycin (Humatin) 25-35 mg/kg/day PO q8h
x 7 days [cap: 250 mg] OR
-Diloxanide: 20 mg/kg/day PO q8h x 10 days, max
1500 mg/day. (Available only through CDC).
Mild-to-moderate intestinal symptoms with no
dysentery:
-Metronidazole (Flagyl): 35-50 mg/kg/day PO q8h
x 10 days, max 2250 mg/day [tabs: 250, 500
mg; extemporaneous suspension] followed by:
Dysentery or extraintestinal disease (including
liver abscess):
-Metronidazole (Flagyl): 35-50 mg/kg/day PO q8h
x 10 days, max 2250 mg/day [tabs: 250, 500
mg; extemporaneous suspension] followed by:
Hepatitis A
1. Admit to:
2. Diagnosis: Hepatitis A
3. Condition:
6. Nursing: Contact precautions.
7. Diet:
8. IV Fluids: D5NS IV at maintenance rate.
9. Symptomatic Medications: -
Trimeth
obenza
m i d e
(Tigan)
15 mg/kg/day IM/PO/PR q6-8h, max 100 mg/dose
if <13.6 kg or 200 mg/dose if 13.6-41kg.
mg].
temp >38° C or pain.
-Hepatitis A immune globulin, 0.02 mL/kg IM (usually
requires multiple injections at different sites), when
given within 2 weeks after exposure to HAV, is 85%
effective in preventing symptomatic infection.
-Hepatitis A vaccine (Havrix) if >2 yrs: 0.5 mL IM,
repeat in 6-12 months.
11. Extras and X-rays:Abdominal x-ray series.
12. Labs: IgM anti-HAV antibody, HAV IgG, liver function
tests, INR, PTT, stool culture for enteric pathogens.
Hepatitis B
1. Admit to:
2. Diagnosis: Hepatitis B.
5. Activity:
6. Nursing: Standard precautions.
7. Diet: Low fat diet.
-Trimethobenzamide (Tigan)
15 mg/kg/day IM/PO/PR q6-8h, max 100 mg/dose
if <13.6 kg or 200 mg/dose if 13.6-41kg.
mg].
-Diphenhydramine (Benadryl) 1 mg/kg/dose
IV/IM/IO/PO q6h prn pruritus or nausea, max 50
mg/dose OR
-Acetaminophen (Tylenol)15 mg/kg PO/PR q4h prn
temp >38° C or pain.
Post exposure prophylaxis f o r p r e vi o usly

unimmunized persons:
-Hepatitis B immune globulin 0.06 mL/kg (minimum
0.5 mL) IM x1 AND
-Hepatitis B vaccine 0.5 mL IM (complete three dose
series with second dose in one month and third
dose in six months)
10. Extras and X-rays:
11. Labs: IgM anti-HAV, IgM anti-HBc, HBsAg, anti-
HCV; alpha-1-antitrypsin, ANA, ferritin, ceruloplasmin,
urine copper, liver function tests, INR, PTT.
Ulcerative Colitis
1.Admit to:
2.Diagnosis: Ulcerative colitis.
3.Condition:
4.Vital signs: Call MD if:
5.Activity:
6.Nursing: Daily weights, inputs and outputs.
7.Diet: NPO except for ice chips, no milk products.
8.IV Fluids:
-Mesalamine (Asacol): 50 mg/kg/day PO q8-12h, max
800 mg PO TID [tab, EC: 400 mg] OR
-Mesalamine (Pentasa) 50 mg/kg/day PO q6-12h,
max 1000 mg PO qid [cap, CR: 250 mg] OR
-Mesalamine (Rowasa) >12 yrs: 60 mL (4 gm) reten-
tion enema at bedtime retained overnight for
approximately 8 hrs [4 gm/60 mL] OR > 12 yrs:
mesalamine (Rowasa) 1 suppository PR bid [supp:
500 mg] OR
-Olsalazine sodium (Dipentum) >12 yrs: 500 mg PO
with food bid [cap: 250 mg] OR
-Sulfasalazine (Azulfidine), children >2 yrs:
Mild exacerbation: 40-50 mg/kg/day PO q6h
Moderate to severe exacerbation: 50-75 mg/kg/day
PO q4-6h, max 6 gm/day.
Maintenance therapy: 30-50 mg/kg/day PO q4-8h,
max 2 gm/day.
[susp: 50 mg/mL; tab, EC: 500 mg] OR
-Hydrocortisone retention enema 100 mg PR qhs OR
-Hydrocortisone acetate 90 mg aerosol foam PR qd-
bid or 25 mg supp PR bid.
-Prednisone 1-2 mg/kg/day PO qAM or bid (max 40-
60 mg/day).
Other Medications:
-Vitamin B12 100 mcg IM qd x 5 days, then 100-200
mcg IM q month.
10. Extras and X-rays: Upright abdomen, GI consult.
11. Labs: CBC, platelets, SMA 7, Mg, ionized calcium;
liver panel, blood culture and sensitivity x 2. Stool
culture and sensitivity for enteric pathogens, ova and
parasites, C. difficile toxin and culture, Wright's stain.
Gastroesophageal Reflux
A. Treatment:
-Thicken feedings; give small volume feedings; keep
head of bed elevated 30 degrees.
-Metoclopramide (Reglan) 0.1-0.2 mg/kg/dose PO qid
20-30 minutes prior to feedings, max 1 mg/kg/day
[concentrated soln: 10 mg/mL; syrup: 1 mg/mL;
tab: 10 mg]
-Cimetidine (Tagamet) 20-40 mg/kg/day IV/PO q6h
(20-30 min before feeding) [inj: 150 mg/mL; oral
soln: 60 mg/mL; tabs: 200, 300, 400, 800 mg]
-Ranitidine (Zantac) 2-4 mg/kg/day IV q8h or 4-6
mg/kg/day PO q12h [inj: 25 mg/mL; liquid: 15
mg/mL; tabs: 75, 150, 300 mg]
-Erythromycin (used as a prokinetic agent not as an
antibiotic) 2-3 mg/kg/dose PO q6-8h.
[ethylsuccinate susp: 200 mg/5mL, 400 mg/5mL]
Concomitant cisapride is contraindicated due to
potentially fatal drug interaction.
-Cisapride (Propulsid) 0.15-0.3 mg/kg/dose PO tid-
qid [susp: 1 mg/mL; tab, scored: 10 mg]. Available
via limited-access protocol only (Janssen, 1-800-
Janssen) due to risk of serious cardiac
arrhythmias.
B. Extras and X-rays: Upper GI series, pH probe, gastr-
oesophageal nuclear scintigraphy (milk scan), endos-
copy.
Constipation
I. Management of Constipation in Infants
A. Glycerin suppositories are effective up to 6 months
of age: 1 suppository rectally prn.Barley malt
extract, 1-2 teaspoons, can be added to a feeding
two to three times daily. Four to six ounces prune
juice are often effective. After 6 months of age,
lactulose 1 to 2 mL/kg/day is useful.
B. Infants that do not respond may be treated with
emulsified mineral oil (Haley’s MO) 2 mL/kg/dose
PO bid, increasing as needed to 6-8 oz per day.
II. Management of Constipation in Children >2 years
of Age
A. The distal impaction should be removed with
hypertonic phosphate enemas (Fleet enema).
Usually three enemas are administered during a
36 to 48 hour period.
B. Lactulose may also be used at 5 to 10 mL PO bid,
increasing as required up to 45 mL PO bid.
C. Emulsified mineral oil (Haley’s MO) may be begun
at 2 mL/kg/dose PO bid and increased as needed
up to 6 to 8 oz per day. Concerns about mineral oil
interfering with absorption of fat-soluble vitamins
have not been substantiated.
D. Milk of magnesia: Preschoolers are begun at 2 tsp
PO bid, with adjustments made to reach a goal of
one to three substantial stools a day over 1 to 2
weeks. Older children: 1-3 tablets (311mg magne-
sium hydroxide/chewable tablet) PO bid prn.
E. A bulk-type stool softener (e.g., Metamucil) should
be initiated. Increase intake of high-residue foods
(e.g. fruits, vegetables), bran, and whole grain
products. Water intake should be increased.
III. Stool Softeners and Laxatives:
A. Docusate sodium (Colace):
<3y 20-40 mg/day PO q6-24h
3-6y 20-60 mg/day PO q6-24h
6-12y 40-150 mg/day PO q6-24h
>12y 50-400 mg/day PO q6-24h
[caps: 50,100, 250 mg; oral soln: 10 mg/mL, 50
mg/mL]
B. Magnesium hydroxide (Milk of Magnesia) 0.5
mL/kg/dose or 2-5 yr: 5-15 mL; 6-12y: 15-30 mL;
>12y: 30-60 mL PO prn.
C. Hyperosmotic soln (CoLyte or GoLytely) 15-20
mL/kg/hr PO/NG.
D. Polyethylene glycol (MiraLax)
3-6 yr: 1 tsp powder dissolved in 3 ounces fluid PO
qd-tid
6-12 yr: ½ tablespoon powder dissolved in 4 ounces
fluid PO qd-tid
>12 yr: one tablespoon powder dissolved in 8 ounces
fluid PO qd-tid
E. Senna (Senokot, Senna-Gen) 10-20 mg/kg PO/PR
qhs prn (max 872 mg/day) [granules: 362
mg/teaspoon; supp: 652 mg; syrup: 218 mg/5mL;
tabs: 187, 217, 600 mg]
F. Sennosides (Agoral, Senokot, Senna-Gen), 2-6 yrs:
3-8.6 mg/dose PO qd-bid; 6-12 yrs: 7.15-15 mg/dose
PO qd-bid; > 12 yrs: 12-25 mg/dose PO qd-bid
[granules per 5 mL: 8.3, 15, 20 mg; liquid: 33 mg/mL;
syrup: 8.8 mg/5 mL; tabs: 6, 8.6, 15, 17, 25 mg]
IV. Diagnostic Evaluation: Anorectal manometry,
anteroposterior and lateral abdominal radiographs,
lower GI study of unprepared colon.
Toxicology
Poisonings
Gastric Decontamination:
Ipecac Syrup:
<6 mos: not recommended
6-12 mos: 5-10 mL PO followed by 10-20 mL/kg of
water
1-12 yrs: 15 mL PO followed by 10-20 mL/kg of water
>12 yrs: 30 mL PO followed by 240 mL of water
May repeat dose one time if vomiting does not occur
within 20-30 minutes. Syrup of ipecac is contraindi-
cated in corrosive or hydrocarbon ingestions or in
patients without or soon to lose gag reflex.
Activated Charcoal: 1 gm/kg/dose (max 50 gm) PO/NG;
the first dose should be given using product contain-
ing sorbitol as a cathartic. Repeat ½ of initial dose q4h
if indicated.
Gastric Lavage: Left side down, with head slightly lower
than body; place large-bore orogastric tube and check
position by injecting air and auscultating. Normal
saline lavage: 15 mL/kg boluses until clear (max 400
mL), then give activated charcoal or other antidote.
Save initial aspirate for toxicological exam. Gastric
lavage is contraindicated if corrosives, hydrocarbons,
or sharp objects were ingested.
Cathartics:
-Magnesium citrate 6% sln:
<6 yrs: 2-4 mL/kg/dose PO/NG
6-12 yrs: 100-150 mL PO/NG
>12 yrs: 150-300 mL PO/NG
Antidotes to Common Poisonings

Narcotic or Propoxyphene Overdose:
-Naloxone (Narcan) 0.1 mg/kg/dose (max 4 mg)
IV/IO/ET/IM, may repeat q2min.
Methanol or Ethylene Glycol Overdose:
-Ethanol 8-10 mL/kg (10% inj soln) IV in D5W over
30min, then 0.8-1.4 mL/kg/hr. Maintain ethanol level
at 100-130 mg/dL.
Carbon Monoxide Inhalation:
-Oxygen 100% or hyperbaric oxygen.
Cyanide Ingestion:
-Amyl nitrite, break ampule and inhale ampule con-
tents for 30 seconds q1min until sodium nitrite is ad-
ministered. Use new amp q3min AND
-Sodium nitrite 0.33 mL/kg of 3% inj soln (max 10 mL)
IV over 5 minutes. Repeat ½ dose 30 min later if
inadequate clinical response.
Followed By:
-Sodium thiosulfate 1.65 mL/kg of 25% soln (max 50
mL) IV.
Phenothiazine Reaction (Extrapyramidal Reaction):
-Diphenhydramine (Benadryl) 1 mg/kg IV/IM q6h x 4
doses (max 50 mg/dose) followed by 5 mg/kg/day
PO q6h for 2-3 days.
Digoxin Overdose:
-Digibind (Digoxin immune Fab). Dose (# vials) = dig-
oxin level in ng/mL x body wt (kg)/100 OR
Dose (# of vials) = mg of digoxin ingested divided by
0.6
Benzodiazepine Overdose:
-Flumazenil (Romazicon) 0.01 mg/kg IV (max 0.5 mg).
Repeat dose if symptoms return.
Alcohol Overdose: Cardiorespiratory support
-Labs: Blood glucose; CBC, ABG, rapid toxicology
screen.
-Treatment: Dextrose 0.5-1 gm/kg (2-4 mL/kg D25W
or 5-10 mL/kg D10W), max 25 gm.
-Naloxone (Narcan) 0.1 mg/kg (max 2 mg) IV, repeat
q2min prn to max dose 8-10 mg if drug overdose
suspected. For extreme agitation, give diazepam
0.1-0.5 mg/kg IV (max 5 mg if < 5 yrs, 10 mg if >5
yrs).
Anticholinergic Toxicity
-Physostigmine (Antilirium): 0.01-0.03 mg/kg/dose IV;
may repeat after 15-20 minutes to a maximum total
dose of 2 mg.
Heparin Overdose
-Protamine sulfate dosage is determined by the most
recent dosage of heparin and the time elapsed
since the overdose.
Dosage of Protamine Sulfate
Time Elapsed IV Dose of Protamine (mg) to

Neutralize 100 units of Hepa-
rin
Immediate 1-1.5
30-60 minutes 0.5-0.75
> 2 hrs 0.25-0.375
Warfarin Overdose
-Phytonadione (Vitamin K1)
-If no bleeding and rapid reversal needed and patient
will require further oral anticoagulation therapy, give
0.5-2 mg IV/SC
-If no bleeding and rapid reversal needed and patient
will not require further oral anticoagulation therapy,
give 2-5 mg IV/SC
-If significant bleeding but not life-threatening, give
0.5-2 mg IV/SC
-If significant bleeding and life-threatening, give 5 mg
IV
[inj: 2 mg/mL, 10 mg/mL]
Acetaminophen Overdose
1. Admit to:
2. Diagnosis: Acetaminophen overdose
3. Condition:
4. Vital signs: Call MD if
6. Nursing: ECG monitoring, inputs and outputs, pulse
oximeter, aspiration precautions.
7. Diet:
8. IV Fluids:
-Gastric lavage with 10 mL/kg (if >5 yrs, use 150-200
mL) of normal saline by nasogastric tube if < 60
minutes after ingestion.
-Activated charcoal (if recent ingestion) 1 gm/kg PO/
NG q2-4h, remove via suction prior to acet-
ylcysteine.
-N-Acetylcysteine (Mucomyst, NAC) loading dose 140
mg/kg PO/ NG, then 70 mg/kg PO/NG q4h x 17
doses (20% sln diluted 1:4 in carbonated bever-
age); follow acetaminophen levels. Continue for full
treatment course even if serum levels fall below
nomogram.
-Phytonadione (Vitamin K) 1-5 mg PO/IV/IM/SQ (if
INR >1.5).
-Fresh frozen plasma should be administered if INR
>3.
10. Extras and X-rays: Portable CXR. Nephrology
consult for charcoal hemoperfusion.
11. Labs: CBC, SMA 7, liver panel, amylase, INR/PTT;
SGOT, SGPT, bilirubin, acetaminophen level now and
q4h until nondetectable. Plot serum acetaminophen
level on Rumack-Matthew nomogram to assess
severity of ingestion unless sustained release Tylenol
was ingested. Toxicity is likely with ingestion >150
mg/kg (or 7.5 gm in adolescents/adults).
Lead Toxicity
1. Admit to:
2. Diagnosis: Lead toxicity
3. Condition:
4. Vital signs: Call MD if
6. Nursing: ECG monitoring, inputs and outputs, pulse
oximeter
7. Diet:
8. IV Fluids:
Symptoms of lead encephalopathy and/or blood level
>70 mcg/DL:
-Treat for five days with edetate calcium disodium and
dimercaprol:
-Edetate calcium disodium 250 mg/m2/dose IM q4h or
50 mg/kg/day continuous IV infusion or 1-1.5 gm/m2
IV as either an 8hr or 24 hr infusion.
-Dimercaprol (BAL): 4 mg/kg/dose IM q4h
Symptomatic lead poisoning without encephalopathy
or asymptomatic with blood level >70 mcg/dL:
-Treat for 3–5 days with edetate calcium disodium and
dimercaprol until blood lead level < 50 mcg/dL.
-Edetate calcium disodium 167 mg/m2 IM q4h or 1
gm/m2 as a 8-24 hr continuous IV infusion.
-Dimercaprol (BAL): 4 mg/kg IM x 1 then 3
mg/kg/dose IM q4h
Asymptomatic children with blood lead level 45-69
mcg/dL:
-Edetate calcium disodium 25 mg/kg/day as a 8-24 hr
IV infusion or IV q12h OR
-Succimer (Chemet): 10 mg/kg/dose (or 350
mg/m2/dose) PO q8h x 5 days followed by 10
mg/kg/dose (or 350 mg/m2/dose) PO q12h x 14
days [cap: 100 mg]
11. Labs: CBC, SMA 7, blood lead level, serum iron
level.
Theophylline Overdose
1. Admit to:
2. Diagnosis: Theophylline overdose
3. Condition:
5. Activity:
6. Nursing: ECG monitoring until serum level is less than
20 mcg/mL; inputs and outputs, aspiration and seizure
precautions.
7. Diet:
8. IV Fluids: Give IV fluids at rate to treat dehydration.
-No specific antidote is available.
-Activated charcoal 1 gm/kg PO/NG (max 50 gm) q2-
4h, followed by cathartic, regardless of time of
ingestion. Multiple dose charcoal has been shown
to be effective in enhancing elimination.
-Gastric lavage if greater than 20 mg/kg was ingested
or if unknown amount ingested or if symptomatic.
-Charcoal hemoperfusion (if serum level >60 mcg/mL
or signs of neurotoxicity, seizure, coma).
10. Extras and X-rays: Portable CXR, ECG.
11. Labs: CBC, SMA 7, theophylline level; INR/PTT, liver
panel. Monitor K, Mg, phosphorus, calcium, acid/base
balance.
Iron Overdose
1. Admit to:
2. Diagnosis: Iron overdose
3. Condition:
5. Activity:
7. Diet:
8. IV Fluids: Maintenance IV fluids
Toxicity likely if >60 mg/kg elemental iron ingested.
Possibly toxic if 20-60 mg/kg elemental iron ingested.
Induce emesis with ipecac if recent ingestion (<1 hour
ago). Charcoal is not effective. Gastric lavage if
greater than 20 mg/kg of elemental iron ingested or
if unknown amount ingested.
If hypotensive, give IV fluids (10-20 mL/kg normal
saline) and place the patient in Trendelenburg's po-
sition.
Maintain urine output of >2 mL/kg/h.
If peak serum iron is greater than 350 mcg/dL or if
patient is symptomatic, begin chelation therapy.
-Deferoxamine (Desferal) 15 mg/kg/hr continuous
IV infusion. Continue until serum iron is within
normal range.
Exchange transfusion is recommended in severely
symptomatic patients with serum iron >1,000 m-
cg/dL.
10. Extras and X-rays: KUB to determine if tablets are
present in intestine.
11. Labs: Type and cross, CBC, electrolytes, serum iron,
TIBC, INR/PTT, blood glucose, liver function tests,
calcium.
Neurologic and Endo-
crinologic Disorders
Seizure and Status Epilepticus
2. Diagnosis: Seizure
3. Condition:
4. Vital signs: Neurochecks q2-6h; call MD if:
5. Activity:
6. Nursing: Seizure and aspiration precautions, ECG
and EEG monitoring.
7. Diet: NPO
8. IV Fluids:
Febrile Seizures: Control fever with antipyretics and
cooling measures. Anticonvulsive therapy is usually not
required.
Status Epilepticus:
1. Maintain airway, 100% O2 by mask; obtain brief
history, fingerstick glucose.
2. Start IV NS. If hypoglycemic, give 1-2 mL/kg D25W
IV/IO (0.25-0.5 gm/kg).
3. Lorazepam (Ativan) 0.1 mg/kg (max 4 mg) IV/IM.
Repeat q15-20 min x 3 prn.
4. Phenytoin (Dilantin) 15-18 mg/kg in normal saline
at <1 mg/kg/min (max 50 mg/min) IV/IO. Monitor BP
and ECG (QT interval).
5. If seizures continue, intubate and give phenobar-
bital loading dose of 15-20 mg/kg IV or 5 mg/kg IV
every 15 minutes until seizures are controlled or 30
mg/kg is reached.
6. If seizures are refractory, consider midazolam
(Versed) infusion (0.1 mg/kg/hr) or general anesthe-
sia with EEG monitoring.
7. Rectal Valium gel formulation
< 2 yrs: not recommended
2-5 yrs: 0.5 mg/kg
6-11 yrs: 0.3 mg/kg
>12 yrs: 0.2 mg/kg
Round dose to 2.5, 5, 10, 15, and 20 mg/dose.
Dose may be repeated in 4-12 hrs if needed. Do not
use more than five times per month or more than
once every five days.
[rectal gel (Diastat): pediatric rectal tip - 5 mg/mL
(2.5, 5, 10 mg size); adult rectal tip - 5 mg/mL (10,
15, 20 mg size)]
Generalized Seizures Maintenance Therapy:
-Carbamazepine (Tegretol):
<6 yr: initially 10-20 mg/kg/day PO bid, then may
increase in 5-7 day intervals by 5 mg/kg/day; usual
max dose 35 mg/kg/day PO q6-8h
6-12 yr: initially 100 mg PO bid (10 mg/kg/day PO
bid), then may increase by 100 mg/day at weekly
intervals; usual maintenance dose 400-800 mg/day
PO bid-qid.
>12 yr: initially 200 mg PO bid, then may increase by
200 mg/day at weekly intervals; usual maintenance
dose 800-1200 mg/day PO bid-tid
Dosing interval depends on product selected. Susp:
q6-8h; tab: q8- 12h; tab, chew:
q8-12h; tab, ER: q12h
[susp: 100 mg/5 mL; tab: 200 mg; tab, chewable:
100 mg; tab, ER: 100, 200, 400 mg] OR
-Divalproex sodium (Depakote, Valproic acid) PO:
Initially 10-15 mg/kg/day bid-tid, then increase by 5-
10 mg/kg/day weekly as needed; usual mainte-
nance dose 30-60 mg/kg/day bid-tid. Up to 100
mg/kg/day tid-qid may be required if other enzyme-
inducing anticonvulsants are used concomitantly.
IV: total daily dose is equivalent to total daily oral
dose but divide q6h and switch to oral therapy as
soon as possible. PR: dilute syrup 1:1 with water for
use as a retention enema, loading dose 17-20
mg/kg x 1 or maintenance 10-15 mg/kg/dose q8h
[cap: 250 mg; cap, sprinkle: 125 mg; inj: 100
mg/mL; syrup: 250 mg/5 mL; tab, DR: 125, 250,
500 mg] OR
-Phenobarbital (Luminal): Loading dose 10-20 mg/kg
IV/IM/PO, then maintenance dose 3-5 mg/kg/day
PO qd-bid
[cap: 16 mg; elixir: 15 mg/5mL, 4 mg/mL; inj: 30
mg/mL, 60 mg/mL, 65 mg/mL, 130 mg/mL; tabs:
8, 15, 16, 30, 32, 60, 65,100 mg] OR
-Phenytoin (Dilantin): Loading dose 15-18 mg/kg
IV/PO, then maintenance dose 5-7 mg/kg/day PO/IV
q8-24h (only sustained release capsules may be
dosed q24h)
[caps: 30, 100 mg; elixir: 125 mg/5 mL; inj: 50
mg/mL; tab, chewable: 50 mg]
-Fosphenytoin (Cerebyx): > 5 yrs: loading dose 10-20
mg PE IV/IM, maintenance dose 4-6 mg/kg/day PE
IV/IM q12-24h. Fosphenytoin 1.5 mg is equivalent to
phenytoin 1 mg which is equivalent to fosphenytoin
1 mg PE (phenytoin equivalent unit). Fosphenytoin
is a water-soluble pro-drug of phenytoin and must
be ordered as mg of phenytoin equivalent (PE).
[inj: 150 mg (equivalent to phenytoin sodium 100
mg) in 2 mL vial; 750 mg (equivalent to phenytoin
sodium 500 mg) in 10 mL vial]
Partial Seizures and Secondary Generalized Sei-
zures:
-Carbamazepine (Tegretol), see above OR
-Phenytoin (Dilantin), see above
-Phenobarbital (Luminal), see above OR
-Valproic acid (Depacon, Depakote, Depakene), see
above.
-Lamotrigine (Lamictal):
Adding to regimen containing valproic acid: 2-12
yrs: 0.15 mg/kg/day PO qd-bid weeks 1-2, then
increase to 0.3 mg/kg/day PO qd-bid weeks 3-4,
then increase q1-2 weeks by 0.3 mg/kg/day to
maintenance dose 1-5 mg/kg/day (max 200
mg/day)
>12 yrs: 25 mg PO qOD weeks 1-2, then increase
to 25 mg PO qd weeks 3-4, then increase q1-2
weeks by 25-50 mg/day to maintenance dose 100-
400 mg/day PO qd-bid
Adding to regimen without valproic acid: 2-12
yrs: 0.6 mg/kg/day PO bid weeks 1-2, then in-
crease to 1.2 mg/kg/day PO bid weeks 3-4, then
increase q1-2 weeks by 1.2 mg/kg/day to mainte-
nance dose 5-15 mg/kg/day PO bid (max 400
mg/day)
>12 yrs: 50 mg PO qd weeks 1-2, then increase to
50 mg PO bid weeks 3-4, then increase q1-2
weeks by 100 mg/day to maintenance dose 300-
500 mg/day PO bid.
[tabs: 25, 100, 150, 200 mg]
-Primidone (Mysoline) PO: 8 yrs: 50-125 mg/day qhs,
increase by 50-125 mg/day q3-7d; usual dose 10-25
mg/kg/day tid-qid
>8 yrs: 125-250 mg qhs; increase by 125-250
mg/day q3-7d, usual dose 750-1500 mg/day tid-qid
(max 2 gm/day).
[susp: 250 mg/5mL; tabs: 50, 250 mg]
10. Extras and X-rays: MRI with and without gadolinium,
EEG with hyperventilation, CXR, ECG. Neurology
consultation.
11. Labs: ABG/CBG, CBC, SMA 7, calcium, phosphate,
magnesium, liver panel, VDRL, anticonvulsant levels,
blood and urine culture. UA, drug and toxin screen.
Therapeutic Serum Levels
Carbamazepine 4-12 mcg/mL
Clonazepam 20-80 ng/mL
Ethosuximide 40-100 mcg/mL
Phenobarbital 15-40 mcg/mL
Phenytoin 10-20 mcg/mL
Primidone 5-12 mcg/mL
Valproic acid 50-100 mcg/mL
Adjunctive Anticonvulsants
Felbamate (Felbatol)
2-14 yrs: 15 mg/kg/day PO tid-qid, increase weekly by
15 mg/kg/day if needed to maximum of 45 mg/kg/day
or 3600 mg/day (whichever is smaller)
>14 yrs: 1200 mg/day PO tid-qid, increase weekly by
1200 mg/day if needed to maximum of 3600 mg/day
[susp: 600 mg/5 mL; tabs: 400, 600 mg]
Warning: due to risk of aplastic anemia and hepatic
failure reported with this drug, written informed con-
sent must be obtained from patient/parent prior to
initiating therapy. Patients must have CBC, liver
enzymes, and bilirubin monitored before starting drug
therapy and q1-2 weeks during therapy. Discontinue
the drug immediately if bone marrow suppression or
elevated
liver function tests occur.
Gabapentin (Neurontin)
2-12 yrs: 5-35 mg/kg/day PO q8h
> 12 yrs: initially 300 mg PO tid, titrate dose upward if
needed; usual dose 900-1800 mg/day, maximum
3600 mg/day
[caps: 100, 300, 400 mg; soln: 250 mg/5 mL; tabs:
600, 800 mg]
Adjunctive treatment of partial and secondarily gener-
alized seizures.
Levetiracetam (Keppra)
> 16 yrs: 500 mg PO bid, may increase by 1000
mg/day q2 weeks to maximum of 3000 mg/day [tabs:
250, 500, 750 mg]
Tiagabine (Gabitril)
< 12 yrs: dosing guidelines not established
12-18 yrs: 4 mg PO qd x 1 week, then 4 mg bid x 1
week, then increase weekly by 4-8 mg/day and titrate
to response; maximum dose 32 mg/day bid-qid. [tabs:
2, 4, 12, 16, 20 mg]. Lower doses may be effective in
patients not receiving enzyme-inducing drugs.
Topiramate (Topamax)
2-16 yrs with partial onset seizures: 1-3 mg/kg/day PO
qhs x 1 week (max 25 mg/day), may increase q1-2
weeks by 1-3 mg/kg/day bid to usual maintenance
dose 5-9 mg/kg/day bid
2-16 yrs with primary generalized tonic clonic sei-
zures: use slower initial titration rate to max of 6
mg/kg/day PO by the end of eight weeks
> 16 yrs with partial onset seizures: 50 mg/day qhs x
1 week, then 100 mg/day bid x 1 week, then increase
by 50 mg/day q week; usual maintenance dose 200
mg bid, max 1600 mg/day
> 16 yrs with generalized tonic clonic seizures: use
slower initial titration rate to usual maintenance dose
200 mg bid, max 1600 mg/day
[caps, sprinkles: 15, 25, 50 mg; tabs: 25, 100, 200 mg]
Vigabatrin (Sabril) PO
3-9 yrs: 500 mg bid
> 9 yrs: 1000 mg bid, may increase if needed to max
4000 mg/day
[tab: 500 mg]. Most effective in complex partial sei-
zures, with or without generalization. Should be used
as add-on therapy in patients with drug-resistant
seizures, not as monotherapy. Do not abruptly discon-
tinue therapy; gradually taper off to avoid rebound
increase in seizure frequency and possible psychotic-
like episodes.
New Onset Diabetes

1. Admit to:
2. Diagnosis: New Onset Diabetes Mellitus
3. Condition:
5. Activity:
6. Nursing: Record labs on a flow sheet. Fingerstick
glucose at 0700, 1200, 1700, 2100, 0200; diabetic
and dietetic teaching.
7. Diet: Diabetic diet with 1000 kcal + 100 kcal/year of
age. 3 meals and 3 snacks (between each meal and
qhs.)
8. IV Fluids: Hep-lock with flush q shift.
-Goal is preprandial glucose of 100-200 mg/dL
Total Daily Insulin Dosage
<5 Years 5-11 Years 12-18 Years

(U/kg) (U/kg) (U/kg)
0.6-0.8 0.75-0.9 0.8-1.5
-Divide 2/3 before breakfast and 1/3 before dinner.

Give 2/3 of total insulin requirement as NPH and
give 1/3 as lispro or regular insulin.
10. Extras and X-rays: CXR. Endocrine and dietary
consult.
11. Labs: CBC, ketones; SMA 7 and 12, antithyroglob-
ulin, antithyroid microsomal, anti-insulin, anti-islet cell
antibodies. UA, urine culture and sensitivity; urine
pregnancy test; urine ketones.
Diabetic Ketoacidosis
2. Diagnosis: Diabetic ketoacidosis
3. Condition: Critical
5. Activity:
6. Nursing: ECG monitoring; capillary glucose checks
q1-2h until glucose level is <200 mg/dL, daily weights,
inputs and outputs. O2 at 2-4 L/min by NC. Record
labs on flow sheet.
7. Diet: NPO
8. IV Fluids: 0.9% saline 10-20 mL/kg over 1h, then
repeat until hemodynamically stable. Then give 0.45%
saline, and replace ½ of calculated deficit plus insensi-
ble loss over 8h, replace remaining ½ of deficit plus
insensible losses over 16-24h. Keep urine output >1.0
mL/kg/hour.
Add KCL when potassium is <6.0 mEq/dL
Serum K+ Infusate KCL
<3 40-60 mEq/L
3-4 30
4-5 20
5-6 10
>6 0
Rate: 0.25-1 mEq KCL/kg/hr, maximum 1 mEq/kg/h or
20 mEq/h.
-Insulin Regular (Humulin) 0.05-0.1 U/kg/hr (50 U in
500 mL NS) continuous IV infusion. Adjust to
decrease glucose by 50-100 mg/dL/hr.
-If glucose decreases at less than 50 mg/dL/hr,
increase insulin to 0.14-0.2 U/kg/hr. If glucose
decreases faster than 100 mg/dL/hr, continue
insulin at 0.05-0.1 U/kg/h and add D5W to IV fluids.
-When glucose approaches 250-300 mg/dL, add D5W
to IV. Change to subcutaneous insulin (lispro or
regular) when bicarbonate is >15, and patient is
tolerating PO food; do not discontinue insulin drip
until one hour after subcutaneous dose of insulin.
10. Extras and X-rays: Portable CXR, ECG. Endocrine
and dietary consultation.
11. Labs: Dextrostixs q1-2h until glucose <200, then q3-
6h. Glucose, potassium, phosphate, bicarbonate q3-
4h; serum acetone, CBC. UA, urine ketones, culture
and sensitivity.
Hematologic and Inflam-
matory Disorders
Sickle Cell Crisis
1.Admit to:
2.Diagnosis: Sickle Cell Anemia, Sickle Cell Crisis
3.Condition:
4.Vital signs: Call MD if
5.Activity:
6.Nursing: Age appropriate pain scale.
7.Diet:
8.IV Fluids: D5 ½ NS at 1.5-2.0 x maintenance.
-Morphine sulfate 0.1 mg/kg/dose (max 10-15 mg)
IV/IM/SC q2-4h prn or follow bolus with infusion of
0.05-0.1 mg/kg/hr prn or 0.3-0.5 mg/kg PO q4h prn
OR
-Acetaminophen/codeine 0.5-1 mg/kg/dose (max 60
mg/dose) of codeine PO q4-6h prn [elixir: 12 mg
codeine/5 mL; tabs: 15, 30, 60 mg codeine compo-
nent] OR
-Acetaminophen and hydrocodone [elixir per 5 mL:
hydrocodone 2.5 mg, acetaminophen] 167 mg; tabs:
Hydrocodone 2.5 mg, acetaminophen 500 mg;
Hydrocodone 5 mg, acetaminophen 500 mg;
Hydrocodone 7.5 mg, acetaminophen 500 mg,
Hydrocodone 7.5 mg, acetaminophen 650 mg,
Hydrocodone 10 mg, acetaminophen 500 mg,
Hydrocodone 10 mg, acetaminophen 650 mg
Children: 0.6 mg hydrocodone/kg/day PO q6-8h prn
<2 yr: do not exceed 1.25 mg/dose
2-12 yr: do not exceed 5 mg/dose
>12 yr: do not exceed 10 mg/dose
Patient Controlled Analgesia
-Morphine
Basal rate 0.01-0.02 mg/kg/hr
Intermittent bolus dose 0.01-0.03 mg/kg
Bolus frequency (“lockout interval”) every 6-15
minutes
-Hydromorphone (Dilaudid)
Basal rate 0.0015-0.003 mg/kg/hr
Intermittent bolus dose 0.0015-0.0045 mg/kg
Bolus frequency (“lockout interval”) every 6-15 min
Adjunctive Therapy:
-Hydroxyzine (Vistaril) 0.5-1 mg/kg/dose PO q6h (max
50 mg/dose)
-Ibuprofen (Motrin) 10 mg/kg/dose PO q6h (max 800
mg/dose) OR
-Ketorolac (Toradol) 0.4 mg/kg/dose IV/IM q6h (max
30 mg/dose); maximum 3 days, then switch to oral
ibuprofen
Maintenance Therapy:
-Hydroxyurea (Hydrea): 15 mg/kg/day PO qd, may
increase by 5 mg/kg/day q12 weeks to a maximum
dose of 35 mg/kg/day. Monitor for myelotoxicity.
[caps: 200, 300, 400, 500 mg]
-Folic acid 1 mg PO qd (if >1 yr).
-Transfusion PRBC 5 mL/kg over 2h, then 10 mL/kg
over 2h, then check hemoglobin. If hemoglobin is
less than 6-8 gm/dL, give additional 10 mL/kg.
-Deferoxamine (Desferal) 15 mg/kg/hr x 48 hours
(max 12 gm/day) concomitantly with transfusion or 1-
2 gm/day SQ over 8-24 hrs
-Vitamin C 100 mg PO qd while receiving
deferoxamine
-Vitamin E PO qd while receiving deferoxamine
<1 yr: 100 IU/day
1-6 yr: 200 IU/day
>6 yr: 400 IU/day
-Penicillin VK (Pen Vee K) (prophylaxis for
pneumococcal infections): <3 yrs: 125 mg PO bid;
>3 yrs: 250 mg PO bid [elixir: 125 mg/5 mL, 250
mg/5 mL; tabs: 125, 250, 500 mg]. If compliance
with oral antibiotics is poor, use penicillin G
benzathine 50,000 U/kg (max 1.2 million units) IM
every 3 weeks. Erythromycin is used if penicillin
allergic.
11. Labs: CBC, blood culture and sensitivity, reticulocyte
count, type and cross, SMA 7, parvovirus titers, UA,
urine culture and sensitivity.
Kawasaki Syndrome
1. Admit to:
2. Diagnosis:
3. Condition:
6. Nursing: temperature at least q4h
7. Diet:
-Immunoglobulin (IVIG) 2 gm/kg/dose IV x 1 dose.
Administer dose at 0.02 mL/kg/min over 30 min; if no
adverse reaction, increase to 0.04 mL/kg/min over
30 min; if no adverse reaction, increase to 0.08
mL/kg/min for remainder of infusion. Defer measles
vaccination for 11 months after receiving high dose
IVIG. [inj: 50 mg/mL, 100 mg/mL]
-Aspirin 100 mg/kg/day PO or PR q6h until fever
resolves, then 8-10 mg/kg/day PO/PR qd [supp: 60,
120, 125, 130, 195, 200, 300, 325, 600, 650 mg;
tabs: 325, 500, 650 mg; tab, chew: 81 mg].
-Ambubag, epinephrine (0.1 mL/kg of 1:10,000), and
diphenhydramine 1 mg/kg (max 50 mg) should be
available for IV use if an anaphylactic reaction to
immunoglobulin occurs.
9. Extras and X-rays: ECG, echocardiogram, chest X-
ray. Rheumatology consult.
10. Labs: CBC with differential and platelet count. ESR,
CBC, liver function tests, rheumatoid factor,
salicylate levels, blood culture and sensitivity x 2,
SMA 7.
Fluids and Electrolytes
Dehydration
1. Admit to:
2. Diagnosis: Dehydration
3. Condition:
5. Activity:
6. Nursing: Inputs and outputs, daily weights. Urine
specific gravity q void.
7. Diet:
8. IV Fluids:
Maintenance Fluids:
<10 kg 100 mL/kg/24h
10-20 kg 1000 mL plus 50 mL/kg/24h for each
kg >10 kg
>20 kg 1500 mL plus 20 mL/kg/24h for each
kg >20 kg.
Electrolyte Requirements:
Sodium: 3-5 mEq/kg/day
Potassium: 2-3 mEq/kg/day
Chloride: 3 mEq/kg/day
Glucose: 5-10 gm/100 mL water required (D5W - D10W)
Estimation of Dehydration
Degree of Dehy- Mild Moderate Severe
dration
Weight Loss-- 5% 10% 15%

Infants
Weight Loss-- 3%-4% 6%-8% 10%

Children
Pulse Normal Slightly Very in-

increased creased
Blood Pressure Normal Normal to Orthostatic

orthostati to shock
c, >10
mm Hg
change
Behavior Normal Irritable Hyperirritabl

e to lethar-
gic
Thirst Slight Moderate Intense
Mucous Mem- Normal Dry Parched

branes
Tears Present De- Absent,

creased sunken
eyes
Anterior Fonta- Normal Normal to Sunken

nelle sunken
External Jugular Visible Not visi- Not visible

Vein when su- ble except even with
pine with supraclavic-
supraclavi ular pres-
cular sure
pressure
Skin Capillary Delayed Very de-

refill <2 capillary layed cap-
sec refill, 2-4 illary refill
sec (dec- (>4 sec),
reased tenting; cool
turgor) skin, acro-
cyanotic, or
mottled
Urine Specific >1.020 >1.020; Oliguria or

Gravity (SG) oliguria anuria
Approximate <50 50-100 >100 mL/kg

Fluid Deficit mL/kg mL/kg
Electrolyte Deficit Calculation:

Na+ deficit = (desired Na - measured Na in mEq/L) x
0.6 x weight in kg
K+ deficit = (desired K - measured K in mEq/L) x 0.25
x weight in kg
Cl! deficit= (desired Cl - measured Cl in mEq/L) x 0.45
x weight in kg
Free H2O deficit in hypernatremic dehydration = 4
mL/kg for every mEq that serum Na >145 mEq/L.
Phase 1, Acute Fluid Resuscitation (Symptomatic
Dehydration):
-Give NS 20-30 mL/kg IV at maximum rate; repeat
fluid boluses of NS 20-30 mL/kg until adequate
circulation.
Phase 2, Deficit and Maintenance Therapy (Asymp-
tomatic dehydration):
Hypotonic Dehydration (Na+ <125 mEq/L):
-Calculate total maintenance and deficit fluids and
sodium deficit for 24h (minus fluids and electrolytes
given in phase 1). If isotonic or hyponatremic
dehydration, replace 50% over 8h and 50% over
next 16h.
-Estimate and replace ongoing losses q6-8h.
-Add potassium to IV solution after first void.
-Usually D5 ½ NS or D5 1/4 NS saline with 10-40 mEq
KCL/liter 60 mL/kg over 2 hours. Then infuse at 6-8
mL/kg/h for 12h.
-See hyponatremia, page 150.
Isotonic Dehydration (Na+ 130-150 mEq/L):
-Calculate total maintenance and replacement fluids
for 24h (minus fluids and electrolytes given in
phase 1) and give half over first 8h, then remaining
half over next 16 hours.
-Add potassium to IV solution after first void.
-Estimate and replace ongoing losses.
-Usually D5 ½ NS or D5 1/4 NS with 10-40 mEq
KCL/L.
Hypertonic Dehydration (Na+ >150 mEq/L):
-Calculate and correct free water deficit and correct
slowly. Lower sodium by 10 mEq/L/day; do not
reduce sodium by more than 15 mEq/L/24h or by
>0.5 mEq/L/hr.
-If volume depleted, give NS 20-40 mL/kg IV until
adequate circulation, then give ½-1/4 NS in 5%
dextrose to replace half of free water deficit over
first 24h. Follow serial serum sodium levels and
correct deficit over 48-72h.
-Free water deficit: 4 mL/kg x (serum Na+ -145)
-Also see "hypernatremia" page 150.
-Add potassium to IV solution after first void as KCL.
-Usually D5 1/4 NS or D5W with 10-40 mEq/L KCL.
Estimate and replace ongoing losses and mainte-
nance.
Replacement of ongoing losses (usual fluids):
-Nasogastric suction: D5 ½ NS with 20 mEq KCL/L or
½ NS with KCL 20 mEq/L.
-Diarrhea: D5 1/4 NS with 40 mEq KCl/L
Oral Rehydration Therapy (mild-moderate dehydra-
tion <10%):
-Oral rehydration electrolyte solution (Rehydralyte,
Pedialyte, Ricelyte, Revital Ice) deficit replacement
of 60-80 mL/kg PO or via NG tube over 2h. Provide
additional fluid requirement over remaining 18-20
hours; add anticipated fluid losses from stools of 10
mL/kg for each diarrheal stool.
Oral Electrolyte Solutions
Product Na (mEq/L) K Cl (mEq/L)

(mEq/L)
Rehydralyte 75 20 65
Ricelyte 50 25 45
Pedialyte 45 20 35
Hyperkalemia
1. Admit to: Pediatric ICU
2. Diagnosis: Hyperkalemia
3. Condition:
5. Activity:
6. Nursing: Continuous ECG monitoring, inputs and
outputs, daily weights.
7. Diet:
8. IV Fluids:
Hyperkalemia (K+ >7 or EKG Changes)
-Calcium gluconate 50-100 mg/kg (max 1 gm) IV over
5-10 minutes or calcium chloride 10-20 mg/kg (max
1 gm) IV over 10 minutes.
-Regular insulin 0.1 U/kg plus glucose 0.5 gm/kg IV
bolus (as 10% dextrose).
-Sodium bicarbonate 1-2 mEq/kg IV over 3-5 min (give
after calcium in separate IV), repeat in 10-15 min if
necessary.
-Furosemide (Lasix) 1 mg/kg/dose (max 40 mg IV) IV
q6-12h prn, may increase to 2 mg/kg/dose IV [inj:
10 mg/mL]
-Kayexalate resin 0.5-1 gm/kg PO/PR. 1 gm resin
binds 1 mEq of potassium.
9. Extras and X-rays: ECG, dietetics, nephrology
consults.
10. Labs: SMA7, Mg, calcium, CBC, platelets. UA; urine
potassium.
Hypokalemia
1. Admit to: Pediatric ICU
2. Diagnosis: Hypokalemia
3. Condition:
5. Activity:
6. Nursing: ECG monitoring, inputs and outputs, daily
weights.
7. Diet:
8. IV Fluids:
If serum K >2.5 mEq/L and ECG changes are absent:
Add 20-40 mEq KCL/L to maintenance IV fluids. May
give 1-4 mEq/kg/day to maintain normal serum
potassium. May supplement with oral potassium.
K <2.5 mEq/L and ECG abnormalities:
Give KCL 1-2 mEq/kg IV at 0.5 mEq/kg/hr; max rate 1
mEq/kg/hr or 20 mEq/kg/hr in life-threatening
situations (whichever is smaller). Recheck serum
potassium, and repeat IV boluses prn; ECG moni-
toring required.
Oral Potassium Therapy:
-Potassium chloride (KCl) elixir 1-3 mEq/kg/day PO
q8-24h [10% soln = 1.33 mEq/mL].
9. Extras and X-rays: ECG, dietetics, nephrology
consults.
10. Labs: SMA7, Mg, calcium, CBC. UA, urine potas-
sium.
Hypernatremia
1. Admit to:
2. Diagnosis: Hypernatremia
3. Condition:
5. Activity:
7. Diet:
8. IV Fluids:
If volume depleted or hypotensive, give NS 20-40
mL/kg IV until adequate circulation, then give D5 ½
NS IV to replace half of body water deficit over first
24h. Correct serum sodium slowly at 0.5-1
mEq/L/hr. Correct remaining deficit over next 48-
72h.
Body water deficit (liter) = 0.6 x (weight kg) x (serum
Na -140)
Hypernatremia with ECF Volume Excess:
-Furosemide (Lasix) 1 mg/kg IV.
-D5 1/4 NS to correct body water deficit.
9. Extras and X-rays: ECG.
10. Labs: SMA 7, osmolality, triglycerides. UA, urine
specific gravity; 24h urine Na, K, creatinine.
Hyponatremia
1. Admit to:
2. Diagnosis: Hyponatremia
3. Condition:
5. Activity:
6. Nursing: Inputs and outputs, daily weights,
neurochecks.
7. Diet:
8. IV Fluids:
Hyponatremia with Edema (Hypervolemia)(low
osmolality <280, urine sodium <10 mM/L: nephrosis,
CHF, cirrhosis; urine sodium >20: acute/chronic renal
failure):
-Water restrict to half maintenance.
-Furosemide (Lasix) 1 mg/kg/dose IV over 1-2 min or
2-3 mg/kg/day PO q8-24h.
Hyponatremia with Normal Volume Status (low
osmolality <280, urine sodium <10 mM/L: water intoxica-
tion; urine sodium >20 mM/L: SIADH, hypothyroidism,
renal failure, Addison disease, stress, drugs):
-0.9% saline with 20-40 mEq KCL/L infused to correct
hyponatremia at rate of <0.5 mEq/L/hr) OR use 3%
NS in severe hyponatremia [3% NS = 513 mEq/liter].
Hyponatremia with Hypovolemia (low osmolality <280;
urine sodium <10 mM/L: vomiting, diarrhea, 3rd
space/respiratory/skin loss; urine sodium >20 mM/L:
diuretics, renal injury, renal tubular acidosis, adrenal
insufficiency, partial obstruction, salt wasting):
-If volume depleted, give NS 20-40 mL/kg IV until
adequate circulation.
-Gradually correct sodium deficit in increments of 10
mEq/L. Determine volume deficit clinically, and
determine sodium deficit as below.
-Calculate 24 hour fluid and sodium requirement and
give half over first 8 hours, then give remainder over
16 hours. 0.9% saline = 154 mEq/L
-Usually D5NS 60 mL/kg IV over 2h (this will increase
extracellular sodium by 10 mEq/L), then infuse at 6-8
mL/kg/hr x 12h.
Severe Symptomatic Hyponatremia:
-If volume depleted, give NS 20-40 mL/kg until ade-
quate circulation.
-Determine volume of 3% hypertonic saline (513
mEq/L) to be infused as follows:
Na(mEq) deficit = 0.6 x (wt kg) x (desired Na - actual
Na)
Volume of soln (L) = Sodium to be infused (mEq) ÷
mEq/L in solution
-Correct half of sodium deficit slowly over 24h.
-For acute correction, the serum sodium goal is 125
mEq/L; max rate for acute replacement is 1
mEq/kg/hr. Serum Na should be adjusted in incre-
ments of 5 mEq/L to reach 125 mEq/L. The first dose
is given over 4 hrs. For further correction for serum
sodium to above 125 mEq/L, calculate mEq dose of
sodium and administer over 24-48h.
9. Extras and X-rays: CXR, ECG.
10. Labs: SMA 7, osmolality, triglyceride. UA, urine
specific gravity. Urine osmolality, Na, K; 24h urine Na,
K, creatinine.
Hypophosphatemia
Indications for Intermittent IV Administration:
1. Serum phosphate <1.0 mg/dL or
2. Serum phosphate <2.0 mg/dL and patient symp-
tomatic or
3. Serum phosphate <2.5 mg/dL and patient on ventilator
Treatment of Hypophosphatemia
Dosage of IV Phosphate Serum Phos-

phate
Low dose 0.08 >1 mg/dL

mM/kg IV
over 6 hrs
Intermediate dose 0.16 0.5-1 mg/dL

mM/kg IV
over 6 hrs
0.24
mM/kg IV
over 4 hrs
High Dose 0.36 <0.5 mg/dL

mM/kg IV
over 6 hrs
IV Phosphate Cations:
Sodium phosphate: Contains sodium 4 mEq/mL,
phosphate 3 mM/mL
Potassium phosphate: Contains potassium 4.4
mEq/mL, phosphate 3 mM/mL
Max rate 0.06 mM/kg/hr
Oral Phosphate Replacement
1-3 mM/kg/day PO bid-qid
Potassium Phosphate:
Powder (Neutra-Phos-K): phosphorus 250 mg [8 mM]
and potassium 556 mg [14.25 mEq] per packet; Tab
(K-Phos Original): phosphorus 114 mg [3.7 mM],
potassium 144 mg [3.7 mEq]
Sodium Phosphate: Phosphosoda Soln per 100 mL:
sodium phosphate 18 gm and sodium biphosphate 48
gm [contains phosphate 4 mM/mL]
Sodium and Potassium Phosphate: Powd Packet:
phosphorus 250 mg [8 mM], potassium 278 mg [7.125
mEq], sodium 164 mg [7.125 mEq];
Tabs:
K-Phos MF: phosphorus 125.6 mg [4 mM], potassium
44.5 mg [1.1 mEq], sodium 67 mg [2.9 mEq]
K-Phos Neutral: phosphorus 250 mg [8 mM], potas-
sium 45 mg [1.1 mEq], sodium 298 mg [13 mEq]
K-Phos No 2: phosphorus 250 mg [8 mM], potassium
88 mg [2.3 mEq], sodium 134 mg [5.8 mEq]
Uro-KP-Neutral: phosphorus 250 mg [8 mM], potas-
sium 49.4 mg [1.27 mEq], sodium 250.5 mg [10.9
mEq]
Hypomagnesemia
Indications for Intermittent IV Administration:
1. Serum magnesium <1.2 mg/dL
2. Serum magnesium <1.6 mg/dL and patient symptom-
atic
3. Calcium resistant tetany
Magnesium Sulfate, Acute Treatment:
-25-50 mg/kg/dose (0.2-0.4 mEq/kg/dose) IV every 4-

6 hrs x 3-4 doses as needed (max 2000 mg = 16
mEq/dose); max rate 1 mEq/kg/hr (125 mg/kg/hr).
Magnesium sulfate IV maintenance dose: 1-2
mEq/kg/day (125-250 mg/kg/day) in maintenance IV
solution.
Magnesium PO Maintenance Dose: 10-20 mg/kg/dose
elemental magnesium PO qid.
Magnesium Chloride (Slow-Mag): mg salt (mEq elemen-
tal magnesium; mg elemental magnesium)
Tab, SR: 535 mg (5.2 mEq; 63 mg).
Magnesium Gluconate (Magonate): mg salt (mEq ele-
mental magnesium; mg elemental magnesium)
Liq: 1000 mg/5mL (4.8 mEq/5mL; 54 mg).
Tab: 500 mg (2.4 mEq; 27 mg).
Magnesium Oxide: mg salt (mEq elemental magnesium;
mg elemental magnesium).
Tabs: 400 mg (20 mEq; 242 mg), 420 mg (21 mEq;
254 mg), 500 mg (25 mEq; 302 mg).
Caps: 140 mg (7 mEq; 84 mg).
Magnesium Sulfate: mg salt (mEq elemental magnesium;
mg elemental magnesium)
Soln: 500 mg/mL (4.1 mEq/mL; 49.3 mg/mL).
Newborn Care
Neonatal Resuscitation
APGAR Score
Sign 0 1 2
Heart Absent Slow >100

rate per (<100)
minute
Respira- Absent Slow, Good,

tions irregular crying
Muscle Limp Some Active

tone flexion motion
Reflex No re- Grimace Cough or

irritabil- sponse sneeze
ity
Color Blue or Pink body Com-

pale with blue pletely
extremi- pink
ties
Assess APGAR score at 1 minute and 5 minutes,

then continue assessment at 5 minute intervals
until APGAR is greater than 7.
General Measures:
1. Review history, check equipment, oxygen, masks,
laryngoscope, ET tubes, medications.
Vigorous, Crying Infant: Provide routine delivery room
care for infants with heart rate >100 beats per minute,
spontaneous respirations, and good color and tone:
warmth, clearing the airway, and drying.
Meconium in Amniotic Fluid:
1. Deliver the head and suction meconium from the
hypopharynx on delivery of the head. If the newly born
infant has absent or depressed respirations, heart rate
<100 bpm, or poor muscle tone, perform direct tra-
cheal suctioning to remove meconium from the airway.
2. If no improvement occurs or if the clinical condition
deteriorates, bag and mask ventilate with intermittent
positive pressure using 100% Fi02; stimulate vigor-
ously by drying. Initial breath pressure: 30-40 cm H2O
for term infants, 20-30 cm H2O for preterm infants.
Ventilate at 15-20 cm H20 at 30-40 breaths per minute.
Monitor bilateral breath sounds and expansion.
3. If spontaneous respirations develop and heart rate is
normal, gradually reduce ventilation rate until using
onlycontinuous positive airway pressure (CPAP).
Wean to blow-by oxygen, but continue blow-by oxygen
if the baby remains dusky.
4. Consider intubation if the heart rate remains <100
beats per minute and is not rising, or if respirations are
poor and weak.
Resuscitation:
1. Provide assisted ventilation with attention to oxygen
delivery, inspiratory time, and effectiveness as judged
by chest rise if stimulation does not achieve prompt
onset of spontaneous respirations or the heart rate is
<100 bpm.
2. Provide chest compressions if the heart rate is absent
or remains <60 bpm despite adequate assisted ventila-
tion for 30 seconds. Coordinate chest compressions
with ventilations at a ratio of 3:1 and a rate of 120
events per minute to achieve approximately 90 com-
pressions and 30 breaths per minute.
3. Chest compressions should be done by two thumb-
encircling hands in newly born infants and older
infants. The depth of chest compression should be one
third of the anterior-posterior diameter of the chest.
Chest compressions should be sufficiently deep to
generate a palpable pulse.
4. If condition worsens or if there is no change after 30
seconds, or if mask ventilation is difficult: use laryngo-
scope to suction oropharynx and trachea and intubate.
Apply positive pressure ventilation. Check bilateral
breath sounds and chest expansion. Check and adjust
ET tube position if necessary. Continue cardiac
compressions if heart rate remains depressed. Check
CXR for tube placement.
Hypotension or Bradycardia or Asystole: Epinephrine
0.1-0.3 mL/kg [0.01-0.03 mg/kg (0.1 mg/mL =
1:10,000)] IV or ET q3-5min. Dilute ET dose to 2-3 mL
in NS. If infant fails to respond, consider increasing
dose to 0.1 mg/kg (0.1 mL/kg of 1 mg/mL = 1:1000).
Hypovolemia: Insert umbilical vein catheter and give O
negative blood, plasma, 5% albumin, Ringer’s lactate,
or normal saline 10 mL/kg IV over 5-10 minutes.
Repeat as necessary to correct hypovolemia.
Severe Birth Asphyxia, Mixed Respiratory/Metabolic
Acidosis (not responding to ventilatory support;
pH <7.2): Give sodium Bicarbonate 1 mEq/kg, dilute
1:1 in sterile water IV q5-10min as indicated.
Narcotic-Related Depression:
1. Naloxone (Narcan) 0.1 mg/kg = 0.25 mL/kg (0.4
mg/mL concentration) or 0.1 mL/kg (1 mg/mL concen-
tration) ET/IV/IM/SC, may repeat q2-3 min. May cause
drug withdrawal and seizures in the infant if the mother
is a drug abuser.
2. Repeat administration may be necessary since the
duration of action of naloxone may be shorter than the
duration of action of the narcotic.
Endotracheal Tube Sizes
Weight Gesta- Tube Depth of

(gm) tional Size Insertion
Age (mm) from Up-
(weeks) per Lip
(cm)
<1000 <28 2.5 6.5-7
1000- 28-34 3.0 7-8

2000
2000- 34-38 3.5 8-9

3000
>3000 >38 3.5-4.0 >9
Suspected Neonatal Sepsis

1. Admit to:
2. Diagnosis: Suspected sepsis
3. Condition:
5. Activity:
6. Nursing: Inputs and outputs, daily weights, cooling
measures prn temp >38°C, consent for lumbar punc-
ture.
7. Diet:
8. IV Fluids: IV fluids at 1-1.5 times maintenance.
Newborn Infants <1 month old (group B strep, E coli,
or group D strep, gram negatives, Listeria
monocytogenes):
-Ampicillin and gentamicin OR ampicillin and
cefotaxime as below.
-Add vancomycin as below if >7 days old and a cen-
tral line is present.
Neonatal Dosage of Ampicillin:
<1200 gm 0-4 weeks: 100 mg/kg/day IV/IMq12h
1200-2000 gm:
<7d: 100 mg/kg/day IV/IM q12h
>7d: 150 mg/kg/day IV/IM q8h
>2000 gm:
<7d: 150 mg/kg/day IV/IM q8h
>7d: 200 mg/kg/day IV/IM q6h
Cefotaxime (Claforan):
<1200 grams: 0-4 wks: 100 mg/kg/day IV/IM q12h
> 1200 grams: 0-7 days: 100 mg/kg/day IV/IM q12h
>7 days: 150 mg/kg/day IV/IM q8h
Gentamicin (Garamycin)/Tobramycin (Nebcin):
<1200 gm 0-4 weeks: 2.5 mg/kg/dose IV/IMq24h
1200-2000 gm:
<7d: 2.5 mg/kg/dose IV/IM q12-24h
>7d: 2.5 mg/kg/dose IV/IM q12-24h
>2000 gm:
<7d: 2.5 mg/kg/dose IV/IM q12-24h
>7d: 2.5 mg/kg/dose IV/IM q12h
Neonatal Vancomycin (Vancocin) Dosage:
<1200 gm 0-4 weeks: 15 mg/kg/dose IV q24h
1200-2000 gm:
<7d: 10 mg/kg/dose IV q12-18h
>7d: 10 mg/kg/dose IV q8-12h
>2000 gm:
<7d: 10 mg/kg/dose IV q12h
>7d: 10 mg/kg/dose IV q8-12h
Nafcillin (Nafcil):
<1200 gm:
0-4 weeks 50 mg/kg/day IV/IM q12h
1200-2000 gm:
<7 days: 50 mg/kg/day IV/IM q12h
>2000 gm:
Mezlocillin (Mezlin):
<1200 gm:
0-4 weeks 150 mg/kg/day IV/IM q12h
1200-2000 gm:
>2000 gm:
Amikacin:
<1200 gm 0-4 weeks: 10 mg/kg/dose IV/IM q24h
1200-2000 gm:
<7d: 10 mg/kg/dose IV/IM q12-24h
>7d: 10 mg/kg/dose IV/IM q12-24h
>2000 gm:
<7d: 10 mg/kg/dose IV/IM q12-24h
>7d: 10 mg/kg/dose IV/IM q12h
10. Extras and X-rays: CXR
11. Laboratory Studies: CBC, SMA 7, blood culture
and sensitivity; UA, culture and sensitivity, antibiotic
levels.
CSF Tube 1 - Gram stain, bacterial culture and sensitiv-
ity, antigen screen (1-2 mL).
CSF Tube 2 - Glucose protein (1-2 mL).
Respiratory Distress Syndrome

1. Provide mechanical ventilation as indicated.
2. Exogenous surfactant:
Prophylactic Therapy: Infants at risk for developing
RDS with a birth weight <1250gm.
Rescue Therapy: Treatment of infants with RDS
based on respiratory distress not attributable to any
other causes and chest radiographic findings consis-
tent with RDS.
-Beractant (Survanta): 4 mL/kg of birth weight via
endotracheal tube then q6h up to 4 doses total [100
mg (4 mL), 200 mg (8 mL)]
-Colfosceril (Exosurf): 5 mL/kg of birth weight via
endotracheal tube then q12h for 2-3 doses total [108
mg (10 mL)]
-Poractant alfa (Curosurf): first dose 2.5 mL/kg (200
mg/kg/dose) of birthweight via endotracheal tube,
may repeat with 1.25 mL/kg/dose (100 mg/kg/dose)
at 12-hour intervals for up to two additional doses
[120 mg (1.5 mL), 240 mg (3 mL)]
-Calfactant (Infasurf): 3 mL/kg via endotracheal tube,
may repeat q12h up to a total of 3 doses [6 mL]
Apnea
1. Admit to:
2. Diagnosis: Apnea
3. Condition:
5. Activity:
6. Nursing: Heart rate monitor, impedance apnea moni-
tor, pulse oximeter. Keep bag and mask resuscitation
equipment at bed side. Rocker bed or oscillating water
bed.
7. Diet: Infant formula ad lib
8. IV Fluids:
Apnea of Prematurity/Central Apnea:
-Aminophylline: loading dose 5 mg/kg IV, then mainte-
nance 5 mg/kg/day IV q12h [inj: 25 mg/mL] OR
-Theophylline: loading dose 5 mg/kg PO, then 5
mg/kg/day PO q12h. [elixir: 80 mg/15mL].
-Caffeine citrate: Loading dose 10-20 mg/kg IV/PO,
then 5 mg/kg/day PO/IV q12-24h [inj: 20 mg/mL, oral
soln: 20 mg/mL, extemporaneously prepared oral
suspension: 10 mg/mL].
10. Extras and X-rays: Pneumogram, cranial ultra-
sound. Upper GI (rule out reflux), EEG.
11. Labs: CBC, SMA 7, glucose, calcium, theophylline
level (therapeutic range 6-14 mcg/mL) , caffeine level
(therapeutic range 10-20 mcg/mL).
Chronic Lung Disease

1. Admit to:
2. Diagnosis: Chronic lung disease.
5. Activity:
6. Nursing: Inputs and outputs, daily weights
7. Diet:
Diuretics:
-Furosemide (Lasix) 1 mg/kg/dose PO/IV/IM q6-24h
prn [inj: 10 mg/mL; oral soln: 10 mg/mL, 40 mg/5mL]
-Chlorothiazide (Diuril) 2-8 mg/kg/day IV q12-24h or
20-40 mg/kg/day PO q12h [inj: 500 mg; susp: 250
mg/5mL]
-Spironolactone (Aldactone) 2-3 mg/kg/day PO q12-
24h [tabs: 25, 50, 100 mg; extemporaneous suspen-
sion]
Steroids:
-Dexamethasone (Decadron) 0.5-1 mg/kg/day IV/IM
q6-12h
-Prednisone 1-2 mg/kg/day PO q12-24h [soln: 1
mg/mL, 5 mg/mL]
11. Extras and X-rays: CXR
12. Labs: CBC, SMA 7.
Hyperbilirubinemia
1. Admit to:
2. Diagnosis: Hyperbilirubinemia.
5. Activity:
6. Nursing: Inputs and outputs, daily weights, monitor
skin color, monitor for lethargy and hypotonia
7. Diet:
8. IV Fluids: Isotonic fluids at maintenance rate (100-
150 mL/kg/day). Encourage enteral feedings if possi-
ble.
-Phenobarbital 5 mg/kg/day PO/IV q12-24h [elixir: 15
mg/5mL, 20 mg/5mL; inj: 30 mg/mL, 60 mg/mL, 65
mg/mL, 130 mg/mL]
-Phototherapy
-Exchange transfusion for severely elevated bilirubin
11. Extras and X-rays:
12. Labs: Total bilirubin, indirect bilirubin, albumin, SMA
7. Blood group typing of mother and infant, a direct
Coombs' test. Complete blood cell count, reticulocyte
count, blood smear. In infants of Asian or Greek
descent, glucose-6-phosphate dehydrogenase
(G6PD) should be measured.
Congenital Herpes Simplex Infection

-Acyclovir (Zovirax) 60 mg/kg/day IV q8h. Infuse each
dose over 1 hr x 14 days (if disease is limited to
skin, eye, and mouth) or 21 days (if disease is
disseminated or involves the CNS). Infants with
ocular involvement should also receive topical
ophthalmic trifluridine.
-Trifluridine ophthalmic solution (Viroptic) 1 drop in
each affected eye q2h while awake [ophth soln 1%:
7.5 mL bottle].
Hepatitis Prophylaxis
Infant born to HBs-Ag Positive Mother or Unknown
Status Mother:
-Hepatitis B immune globulin (HBIG) 0.5 mL IM x 1
within 12 hours of birth
-Hepatitis B vaccine 0.5 mL IM (at separate site)
within 12 hours of birth, second dose at age 1-2
months, third dose at age 6 months.
Neonatal HIV Prophylaxis

1. Pregnant women with HIV should be given oral
zidovudine (200 mg PO q8h or 300 mg PO q12h)
beginning at 14 weeks gestation and continuing
throughout the pregnancy.
2. Intravenous zidovudine should be given to the
mother during labor until delivery (2 mg/kg during
the first hour and then 1 mg/kg/hr until delivery).
3. Oral administration of zidovudine to the newborn
should be instituted immediately after birth and
continued for at least six weeks (start at
8mg/kg/day PO q6h for the first two weeks, and
then follow the dosing regimens for zidovudine.
The mother should not breast feed the infant.
GYNECOLOGY
Surgical Documentation
for Gynecology
Gynecologic Surgical History
Identifying Data. Age, gravida (number of pregnancies),
para (number of deliveries).
Chief Compliant. Reason given by patient for seeking
surgical care.
History of Present Illness (HPI). Describe the course of
the patient's illness, including when it began, character of
the symptoms; pain onset (gradual or rapid), character of
pain (constant, intermittent, cramping, radiating); other
factors associated with pain (urination, eating, strenuous
activities); aggravating or relieving factors. Other related
diseases; past diagnostic testing.
Obstetrical History. Past pregnancies, durations and
outcomes, preterm deliveries, operative deliveries.
Gynecologic History: Last menstrual period, length of
regular cycle.
Past Medical History (PMH). Past medical problems,
previous surgeries, hospitalizations, diabetes, hyperten-
sion, asthma, heart disease.
Medications. Cardiac medications, oral contraceptives,
estrogen.
Allergies. Penicillin, codeine.
Family History. Medical problems in relatives.
Social History. Alcohol, smoking, drug usage, occupa-
tion.
General: Fever, fatigue, night sweats.
HEENT: Headaches, masses, dizziness.
Respiratory: Cough, sputum, dyspnea.
Cardiovascular: Chest pain, extremity edema.
Gastrointestinal: Vomiting, abdominal pain, melena
(black tarry stools), hematochezia (bright red blood
per rectum).
Genitourinary: Dysuria, hematuria, discharge.
Skin: Easy bruising, bleeding tendencies.
Gynecologic Physical Examination

General:
Vital Signs: Temperature, respirations, heart rate, blood
pressure.
Eyes: Pupils equally round and react to light and accom-
modation (PERRLA); extraocular movements intact
(EOMI).
Neck: Jugular venous distention (JVD), thyromegaly,
masses, lymphadenopathy.
Chest: Equal expansion, rales, breath sounds.
Heart: Regular rate and rhythm (RRR), first and second
heart sounds, murmurs.
Breast: Skin retractions, masses (mobile, fixed), ery-
thema, axillary or supraclavicular node enlargement.
Ab d o m e n : S c a r s , b o we l s o u n d s , m a s s e s ,
hepatosplenomegaly, guarding, rebound, costoverte-
bral angle tenderness, hernias.
Genitourinary: Urethral discharge, uterus, adnexa,
ovaries, cervix.
Extremities: Cyanosis, clubbing, edema.
Neurological: Mental status, strength, tendon reflexes,
sensory testing.
Laboratory Evaluation: Electrolytes, glucose, liver
function tests, INR/PTT, CBC with differential; X-rays,
ECG (if >35 yrs or cardiovascular disease), urinalysis.
Assessment and Plan: Assign a number to each prob-
lem. Discuss each problem, and describe surgical plans
for each numbered problem, including preoperative
testing, laboratory studies, medications, and antibiotics.
Discharge Summary
Patient's Name:
Chart Number:
Date of Admission:
Date of Discharge:
Admitting Diagnosis:
Discharge Diagnosis:
Name of Attending or Ward Service:
Surgical Procedures:
History and Physical Examination and Laboratory
Data: Describe the course of the disease up to the time
the patient came to the hospital, and describe the physi-
cal exam and laboratory data on admission.
Hospital Course: Describe the course of the patient's
illness while in the hospital, including evaluation, treat-
ment, outcome of treatment, and medications given.
Discharged Condition: Describe improvement or
deterioration in condition.
Disposition: Describe the situation to which the patient
will be discharged (home, nursing home).
Discharged Medications: List medications and instruc-
tions.
Discharged Instructions and Follow-up Care: Date of
return for follow-up care at clinic; diet, exercise instruc-
tions.
Problem List: List all active and past problems.
Copies: Send copies to attending physician, clinic, con-
sultants and referring physician.
Surgical Progress Note
Surgical progress notes are written in “SOAP” format.
Surgical Progress Note
Date/Time:
Post-operative Day Number:
Problem List: Antibiotic day number and
hyperalimentation day number if applicable. List
each surgical problem separately (eg, status-post
appendectomy, hypokalemia).
Subjective: Describe how the patient feels in the
patient's own words, and give observations about
the patient. Indicate any new patient complaints,
note the adequacy of pain relief, and passing of
flatus or bowel movements. Type of food the patient
is tolerating (eg, nothing, clear liquids, regular diet).
Objective:
Vital Signs: Maximum temperature (Tmax) over
the past 24 hours. Current temperature, vital
signs.
Intake and Output: Volume of oral and intrave-
nous fluids, volume of urine, stools, drains, and
nasogastric output.
Physical Exam:
General appearance: Alert, ambulating.
Heart: Regular rate and rhythm, no murmurs.
Chest: Clear to auscultation.
Abdomen: Bowel sounds present, soft,
nontender.
Wound Condition: Comment on the wound
condition (eg, clean and dry, good granula-
tion, serosanguinous drainage). Condition of
dressings, purulent drainage, granulation
tissue, erythema; condition of sutures,
dehiscence. Amount and color of drainage
Lab results: White count, hematocrit, and
electrolytes, chest x-ray
Assessment and Plan: Evaluate each numbered
problem separately. Note the patient's general con-
dition (eg, improving), pertinent developments, and
plans (eg, advance diet to regular, chest x-ray). For
each numbered problem, discuss any additional
orders and plans for discharge or transfer.
Procedure Note
A procedure note should be written in the chart when a
procedure is performed. Procedure notes are brief
operative notes.
Procedure Note
Date and time:

Procedure:
Indications:
Patient Consent: Document that the indications,
risks and alternatives to the procedure were ex-
plained to the patient. Note that the patient was
given the opportunity to ask questions and that the
patient consented to the procedure in writing.
Lab tests: Electrolytes, INR, CBC
Description of Procedure: Briefly describe the
procedure, including sterile prep, anesthesia
method, patient position, devices used, anatomic
location of procedure, and outcome.
Complications and Estimated Blood Loss (EBL):
Disposition: Describe how the patient tolerated the
procedure.
Specimens: Describe any specimens obtained and
laboratory tests which were ordered.
Discharge Note
The discharge note should be written in the patient’s chart
prior to discharge.
Discharge Note
Date/time:
Diagnoses:
during hospitalization, including surgical procedures
and antibiotic therapy.
scans.
Postoperative Check
A postoperative check should be completed on the
evening after surgery. This check is similar to a daily
progress note.
Example Postoperative Check
Date/time:
Postoperative Check
Subjective: Note any patient complaints, and note
the adequacy of pain relief.
Objective:
General appearance:
Vitals: Maximum temperature in the last 24
hours (Tmax), current temperature, pulse, respi-
ratory rate, blood pressure.
Urine Output: If urine output is less than 30 cc
per hour, more fluids should be infused if the
patient is hypovolemic.
Physical Exam:
Chest and lungs:
Abdomen:
Wound Examination: The wound should be
examined for excessive drainage or bleeding,
skin necrosis, condition of drains.
Drainage Volume: Note the volume and char-
acteristics of drainage from Jackson-Pratt drain
or other drains.
Labs: Post-operative hematocrit value and
other labs.
Assessment and Plan: Assess the patient’s over-
all condition and status of wound. Comment on
abnormal labs, and discuss treatment and dis-
charge plans.
Total Abdominal Hysterectomy and

Bilateral Salpingo-oophorectomy
Operative Report
Preoperative Diagnosis: 45 year old female, gravida 3
para 3, with menometrorrhagia unresponsive to medical
therapy.
Postoperative Diagnosis: Same as above
Operation: Total abdominal hysterectomy and bilateral
salpingo-oophorectomy
Surgeon:
Assistant:
Anesthesia: General endotracheal
Findings At Surgery: Enlarged 10 x 12 cm uterus with
multiple fibroids. Normal tubes and ovaries bilaterally.
Frozen section revealed benign tissue. All specimens
sent to pathology.
Description of Operative Procedure: After obtaining
informed consent, the patient was taken to the operating
room and placed in the supine position, given general
anesthesia, and prepped and draped in sterile fashion.
A Pfannenstiel incision was made 2 cm above the
symphysis pubis and extended sharply to the rectus
fascia. The fascial incision was bilaterally incised with
curved Mayo scissors, and the rectus sheath was sepa-
rated superiorly and inferiorly by sharp and blunt dissec-
tion. The peritoneum was grasped between two Kelly
clamps, elevated, and incised with a scalpel. The pelvis
was examined with the findings noted above. A Balfour
retractor was placed into the incision, and the bowel was
packed away with moist laparotomy sponges. Two Kocher
clamps were placed on the cornua of the uterus and used
for retraction.
The round ligaments on both sides were clamped,
sutured with #0 Vicryl, and transected. The anterior leaf
of the broad ligament was incised along the bladder
reflection to the midline from both sides, and the bladder
was gently dissected off the lower uterine segment and
cervix with a sponge stick.
The retroperitoneal space was opened and the ureters
were identified bilaterally. The infundibulopelvic ligaments
on both sides were then doubly clamped, transected, and
doubly ligated with #O Vicryl. Excellent hemostasis was
observed. The uterine arteries were skeletonized bilater-
ally, clamped with Heaney clamps, transected, and
sutured with #O Vicryl. The uterosacral ligaments were
clamped bilaterally, transected, and suture ligated in a
similar fashion.
The cervix and uterus was amputated, and the vaginal
cuff angles were closed with figure-of-eight stitches of #O
Vicryl, and then were transfixed to the ipsilateral cardinal
and uterosacral ligament. The vaginal cuff was closed
with a series of interrupted #O Vicryl, figure-of-eight
sutures. Excellent hemostasis was obtained.
The pelvis was copiously irrigated with warm normal
saline, and all sponges and instruments were removed.
The parietal peritoneum was closed with running #2-O
Vicryl. The fascia was closed with running #O Vicryl. The
skin was closed with stables. Sponge, lap, needle, and
instrument counts were correct times two. The patient
was taken to the recovery room, awake and in stable
condition.
Estimated Blood Loss (EBL): 150 cc
Specimens: Uterus, tubes, and ovaries
Drains: Foley to gravity
Fluids: Urine output - 100 cc of clear urine
Complications: None
Disposition: The patient was taken to the recovery room
in stable condition.
Endometrial Sampling and Dilation

and Curettage
The endometrial cavity is frequently evaluated because of
abnormal uterine bleeding, pelvic pain, infertility, or
pregnancy complications. The most common diagnostic
indications for obtaining endometrial tissue include
abnormal uterine bleeding, postmenopausal bleeding,
endometrial dating, endometrial cells on Papanicolaou
smear, and follow-up of women undergoing medical
therapy for endometrial hyperplasia.
I. Endometrial biopsy
A. The office endometrial biopsy offers a number of
advantages to D&C because it can be done with
minimal to no cervical dilation, anesthesia is not
required, and the cost is approximately one-tenth of
a hospital D&C.
B. Numerous studies have shown that the endometrium
is adequately sampled with these techniques.
C. Pipelle endometrial sampling device is the most
popular method for sampling the endometrial lining.
The device is constructed of flexible polypropylene
with an outer sheath measuring 3.1 mm in diameter.
D. The device is placed in the uterus through an
undilated cervix. The piston is fully withdrawn to
create suction and, while the device is rotated 360
degrees, the distal port is brought from the fundus to
the internal os to withdraw a sample. The device is
removed and the distal aspect of the instrument is
severed, allowing for the expulsion of the sample
into formalin.
E. The detection rates for endometrial cancer by Pipelle
in postmenopausal and premenopausal women are
99.6 and 91 percent, respectively.
F. D&C should be considered when the endometrial
biopsy is nondiagnostic, but a high suspicion of
cancer remains (eg, hyperplasia with atypia, pres-
ence of necrosis, or pyometra).
II.Dilation and curettage
A. Dilation and curettage is performed as either a
diagnostic or therapeutic procedure. Indications for
diagnostic D&C include:
1. A nondiagnostic office biopsy in women who are
at high risk of endometrial carcinoma.
2. Insufficient tissue for analysis on office biopsy.
3. Cervical stenosis prevents the completion of an
office biopsy.
B. Diagnostic D&Cs are usually performed with
hysteroscopy to obtain a visual image of the
endometrial cavity, exclude focal disease, and
prevent missing unsuspected polyps.
C. Examination under anesthesia. After anesthesia
has been administered, the size, shape, and position
of the uterus are noted, with particular attention to
the axis of the cervix and flexion of the fundus. The
size, shape, and consistency of the adnexa are
determined. The perineum, vagina, and cervix are
then prepared with an aseptic solution and vaginal
retractors are inserted into the vagina.
D. Operative technique. A D&C is performed with the
woman in the dorsal lithotomy position.
1. Endocervical curettage (ECC) is performed
before dilation of the cervix. A Kevorkian-Younge
curette is introduced into the cervical canal up to
the internal os. Curetting of all four quadrants of
the canal should be conducted and the specimen
placed on a Telfa pad.
2. Sounding and dilation. Traction is applied to
align the axis of the cervix and the uterine canal.
The uterus should be sounded to document the
size and confirm the position. The sound should
be held between the thumb and the index finger
to avoid excessive pressure.
3. Cervical dilation is then performed. The dilator is
grasped in the middle of the instrument with the
thumb and index finger. The cervix is gradually
dilated beginning with the #13 French Pratt
dilator. The dilator should be inserted through the
internal os, without excessively entering the
uterine cavity.
4. Sharp curettage is performed systematically
beginning at the fundus and applying even pres-
sure on the endometrial surface along the entire
length of the uterus to the internal cervical os. The
endometrial tissue is placed on a Telfa pad
placed in the vagina. Moving around the uterus in
a systematic fashion, the entire surface of the
endometrium is sampled. The curettage proce-
dure is completed when the "uterine cry" (gritti-
ness to palpation) is appreciated on all surfaces
of the uterus. Curettage is followed by blind
extraction with Randall polyp forceps to improve
the rate of detection of polyps.
General Gynecology
Management of the Abnormal
Papanicolaou Smear
The Papanicolaou smear is a screening test for abnor-
malities that increases the risk of cervical cancer.
Treatment decisions are based upon the results of
colposcopically directed biopsies of the cervix.
Papanicolaou smear reports are classified using the
Bethesda System, which was revised in 2001.
I. Pap Smear Report
Bethesda 2001 Pap Smear Report
Interpretation Result
Negative for intraepithelial lesion or malignancy (when
there is no cellular evidence of neoplasia, state this in the
General Categorization above and/or in the Interpreta-
tion/Result section of the report, whether there are organ-
isms or other non-neoplastic findings)
Infection (Trichomonas vaginalis, Candida spp., shift in
flora suggestive of bacterial vaginosis, Actinomyces
spp., cellular changes consistent with Herpes simplex
virus)
Other Non-neoplastic Findings (Optional to report; list
not inclusive):
Reactive cellular changes associated with inflammation
(includes typical repair) radiation, intrauterine contra-
ceptive device (IUD)
Glandular cells status post-hysterectomy
Atrophy
Other
Endometrial cells (in a woman >40 years of age) (spec-
ify if "negative for squamous intraepithelial lesion")
Epithelial Cell Abnormalities
Squamous Cell
Atypical squamous cells
-of undetermined significance (ASC-US)
-cannot exclude HSIL (ASC-H)
Low-grade squamous intraepithelial lesion (LSIL)
encompassing: HPV/mild dysplasia/CIN 1
High-grade squamous intraepithelial lesion (HSIL)
encompassing: moderate and severe dysplasia,
CIS/CIN 2 and CIN 3 with features suspicious for
invasion (if invasion is suspected)
Squamous cell carcinoma
Glandular Cell
Atypical
-Endocervical cells (not otherwise specified or
specify in comments)
-Glandular Cell (not otherwise specified or spec-
ify in comments)
-Endometrial cells (not otherwise specified or
specify in comments)
-Glandular cells (not otherwise specified or spec-
ify in comments)
Atypical
-Endocervical cells, favor neoplastic
-Glandular cells, favor neoplastic
Endocervical adenocarcinoma in situ
Adenocarcinoma (endocervical, endometrial,
extrauterine, not otherwise specified (not otherwise
specified)
Other Malignant Neoplasms (specify)
II. Screening for cervical cancer

A. Regular Pap smears are recommended for all
women who are or have been sexually active and
who have a cervix.
B. Testing should begin when the woman first en-
gages in sexual intercourse. Adolescents whose
sexual history is thought to be unreliable should
be presumed to be sexually active at age 18.
C. Pap smears should be performed at least every 1
to 3 years. Testing is usually discontinued after
age 65 in women who have had regular normal
screening tests. Women who have had a hyster-
ectomy, including removal of the cervix for rea-
sons other than cervical cancer or its precursors,
do not require Pap testing.
III. Techniques used in evaluation of the abnormal
pap smear
A. Colposcopy allows examination of the lower
genital tract to identify epithelial changes. Abnor-
mal areas should be targeted for biopsy to deter-
mine a pathologic diagnosis.
B. Human papillomavirus testing
1. HPV infection is the leading etiologic agent in
the development of premalignant and malig-
nant lower genital tract disease. Premeno-
pausal women who test positive for certain
types of HPV are at higher risk of cervical
dysplasia (HPV positive), while those who are
HPV negative or have types of HPV DNA of low
oncogenic potential are at low risk.
2. The most commonly used HPV test is the
Hybrid Capture ll HPV DNA Assay (HC ll),
which tests for high-risk HPV types 16, 18, 31,
33, 35, 39, 45, 51, 52, 56, 58, 59, and 68. High-
risk HPV types 16 and 18 are the viruses most
frequently isolated in cervical cancer tissue.
IV. Atypical squamous cells
A. Atypical squamous cells of undetermined
significance (ASCUS) is further divided into ASC-
US, which are qualified as "of undetermined
significance," and ASC-H, in which a high-grade
squamous intraepithelial lesion (HSIL) cannot be
excluded.
B. ASC requires further evaluation. This cytologic
diagnosis is common and frequently associated
with spontaneously resolving, self-limited disease.
However, 5 to 17 percent of patients with ASC and
24 to 94 percent of those with ASC-H will have CIN
II or III at biopsy.
C. Women with ASC-US
1. Management of minimally abnormal cervical
cytology smears (ASC-US):
a. If liquid-based cytology is used, reflex testing
for HPV should be performed, alternatively
cocollection for HPV DNA testing can be done
at the time of a conventional cervical cytology
smear.
b. Colposcopy should performed if human
papillomavirus testing is positive. Thirty to 60
percent of women with ASC will test positive for
high-risk HPV types and require immediate
colposcopy.
2. Patients with a positive high-risk type HPV DNA
test should be evaluated by colposcopy; those
with a negative test may be triaged to repeat
cytologic evaluation in 12 months. Management
of women who test positive for high-risk HPV
types, but have no CIN consists of either 1)
cytological testing repeated in six and 12 months
with colposcopic evaluation of ASC-US or greater
or 2) HPV testing repeated in 12 months with
colposcopy if HPV results are positive.
V. Special circumstances
A. When an infectious organism is identified, the
patient should be contacted to determine if she is
symptomatic. Antibiotic therapy is indicated for
symptomatic infection.
B. Reactive changes due to inflammation are
usually not associated with an organism on the
Pap smear. The Pap smear does not need to be
repeated unless the patient is HIV positive, in
which case it should be repeated in four to six
months.
C. Atrophic epithelium is a normal finding in
postmenopausal women.
1. Administration of estrogen causes atypical atro-
phic, but not dysplastic, epithelium to mature into
normal squamous epithelium.
2. Hormonal therapy given for vaginal atrophy
should be followed by repeat cervical cytology
one week after completing treatment. If negative,
cytology should be repeated again in four to six
months. If both tests are negative, the woman
can return to routine screening intervals, but if
either test is positive for ASC-US or greater, she
should be evaluated with colposcopy.
D. Immunosuppressed women, including all women
who are HIV positive, with ASC-US should be
referred for immediate colposcopy, instead of HPV
testing.
E. ASC-US with absence of CIN on biopsy. If
colposcopic examination does not show CIN, then
follow-up cytological testing should be performed
in 12 months.
F. ASC-US with biopsy proven CIN. Since sponta-
neous regression is observed in approximately 60
percent of CIN l, expectant management with
serial cytologic smears at three to four month
intervals is reasonable for the reliable patient.
G. Women with ASC-H. All women with ASC-H on
cytological examination should receive colposcopy.
If repeat of cytology confirms ASC-H but biopsy is
negative for CIN, follow-up cytology in six and 12
months or HPV DNA testing in 12 months is
recommended. Colposcopy should be repeated for
ASC or greater on cytology or a positive test for
high risk HPV DNA. Biopsy proven CIN is treated,
as appropriate.
VI. Low- and high-grade intraepithelial neoplasia
A. Low-grade squamous intraepithelial lesions
(LSIL) may also be referred to as CIN I or mild
dysplasia. Immediate referral for colposcopy is the
recommended management for LSIL. Endocervical
sampling should be done in nonpregnant women
in whom the transformation zone cannot be fully
visualized or a lesion extends into the endocervical
canal. Endocervical sampling also should be done
in nonpregnant women when no lesion is identified
on colposcopy.
1. If no CIN is identified following satisfactory or
unsatisfactory colposcopy and biopsies, then
options for follow-up include either:
a. Repeat cytology testing at six and 12 months,
or
b. HPV DNA testing at 12 months
2. Referral for repeat colposcopy is required if
cytology yields ASC or greater or HPV DNA is
positive for a high-risk type.
3. Women with histologically confirmed CIN I LSIL
may be treated with ablation or excision or fol-
lowed with serial cytologic smears every three to
six months if the entire lesion and limits of the
transformation zone are completely visualized.
LSIL confined to the endocervical canal may be
followed with repeat smears obtained with a
cytobrush and with ECC.
4. Postmenopausal women. Postmenopausal
women may be managed by serial cytology at six
and 12 months or HPV DNA testing at 12 months
with referral to colposcopy for positive results.
Women with atrophy are treated with intravaginal
estrogen followed by repeat cytology seven days
after completion of therapy, with referral to
colposcopy if an abnormality persists. If repeat
cytology is normal, then another cytology test
should be obtained in four to six months. The
woman can return to routine surveillance if both
tests are normal, but should be referred for
colposcopy if either test is positive.
5. Adolescents. Initial colposcopy may be deferred
in adolescents. Instead, they may be managed
with serial cytology at six and 12 months or HPV
DNA testing at 12 months with referral to
colposcopy for positive results.
6. Pregnant women. Colposcopy should be per-
formed, with biopsy and endocervical curettage
performed for any lesion suspicious for HSIL or
more severe disease.
B. High-grade squamous intraepithelial lesions
1. A high-grade squamous intraepithelial lesion
(HSIL) may also be referred to as CIN II or III,
severe dysplasia, or carcinoma in situ (CIS). One
to two percent of women with HSIL on a cytologic
smear have invasive cancer at the time of further
evaluation and 20 percent of women with biopsy-
proven CIS will develop an invasive cancer if left
untreated. All women with HSIL should be re-
ferred for colposcopy and endocervical sampling.
C. Follow-up evaluation. Pap smears are recom-
mended every three to four months for the first
year after treatment for dysplasia. Women with
cervical dysplasia present at the LEEP or cone
margin or in the concomitant ECC also need a
follow-up colposcopy with endocervical curettage
every six months for one year. Routine surveil-
lance can be resumed if there is no recurrence
after the first year. Surveillance consists of Pap
smears on a yearly basis for most women, and on
a twice-yearly basis for high-risk women (ie, HIV
positive).
VII. Abnormal glandular cells
A. A report of atypical glandular cells (AGC) indicates
the presence of glandular cells that could be
coming from the endocervical or endometrial
region. The Bethesda 2001 system classifies AGC
into two subcategories:
1. AGC endocervical, endometrial, or not otherwise
specified (NOS)
2. AGC favor neoplasia, endocervical or NOS
B. Additional categories for glandular cell abnormali-
ties are:
1. Endocervical adenocarcinoma in situ (AIS)
2. Adenocarcinoma
C. Evaluation of AGC or AIS on cervical cytology:
These women should be referred for colposcopy
and sampling of the endocervical canal. Women
over age 35 and younger women with AGC and
unexplained vaginal bleeding also need an
endometrial biopsy. Women with only atypical
endometrial cells on cytology can be initially
evaluated with endometrial biopsy.
D. Endometrial cells in women >40 years of age:
Endometrial biopsy should be performed.
References: See page 282.
Contraception
Approximately 31 percent of births are unintended; about
22 percent were "mistimed," while 9 percent were "un-
wanted."
I. Sterilization
A. Sterilization is the most common and effective form
of contraception. While tubal ligation and vasectomy
may be reversible, these procedures should be
considered permanent.
B. Essure microinsert sterilization device is a
permanent, hysteroscopic, tubal sterilization device
which is 99.9 percent effective. The coil-like device
is inserted in the office under local anesthesia into
the fallopian tubes where it is incorporated by tissue.
After placement, women use alternative contracep-
tion for three months, after which hysterosalping-
ography is performed to assure correct placement.
Postoperative discomfort is minimal.
C. Tubal ligation is usually performed as a laparo-
scopic procedure in outpatients or in postpartum
women in the hospital. The techniques used are
unipolar or bipolar coagulation, silicone rubber band
or spring clip application, and partial salpingectomy.
D. Vasectomy (ligation of the vas deferens) can be
performed in the office under local anesthesia. A
semen analysis should be done three to six months
after the procedure to confirm azoospermia.
II.Oral contraceptives
A. Combined (estrogen-progestin) oral contraceptives
are reliable, and they have noncontraceptive bene-
fits, which include reduction in dysmenorrhea, iron
deficiency, ovarian cancer, endometrial cancer.
Combination Oral Contraceptives
Drug Progestin, mg Estrogen
Monophasic combinations
Ortho-Novum 1 Norethindrone (1) Ethinyl estradiol

/35 21, 28 (35)
Ovcon 35 21, 28 Norethindrone Ethinyl estradiol

(0.4) (35)
Brevicon 21, 28 Norethindrone Ethinyl estradiol

(0.5) (35)
Modicon 28 Norethindrone Ethinyl estradiol

(0.5) (35)
Necon 0.5/35E Norethindrone Ethinyl estradiol

21, 28 (0.5) (35)
Nortrel 0.5/35 28 Norethindrone Ethinyl estradiol

(0.5) (35)
Necon 1 /35 21, Norethindrone (1) Ethinyl estradiol

28 (35)
Norinyl 1 /35 21, Norethindrone (1) Ethinyl estradiol

28 (35)
Nortrel 1 /35 21, Norethindrone (1) Ethinyl estradiol

28 (35)
Loestrin 1 /20 21, Norethindrone Ethinyl estradiol

28 acetate (1) (20)
Microgestin 1 /20 Norethindrone Ethinyl estradiol

28 acetate (1) (20)
Loestrin 1.5/30 Norethindrone Ethinyl estradiol

21, 28 acetate (1.5) (30)
Microgestin Norethindrone Ethinyl estradiol

1.5/30 28 acetate (1.5) (30)
Alesse 21, 28 Levonorgestrel Ethinyl estradiol

(0.1) (20)
Aviane 21, 28 Levonorgestrel Ethinyl estradiol

(0.1) (20)
Lessina 28 Levonorgestrel Ethinyl estradiol

(0.1) (20)
Levlite 28 Levonorgestrel Ethinyl estradiol

(0.1) (20)
Necon 1/50 21, Norethindrone (1) Mestranol (50)

28
Norinyl 1150 21, Norethindrone (1) Mestranol (50)

28
Ortho-Novum Norethindrone (1) Mestranol (50)

1/50 28
Ovcon 50 28 Norethindrone (1) Ethinyl estradiol

(50)
Cyclessa 28 Desogestrel (0.1) Ethinyl estradiol

(25)
Apri 28 Desogestrel Ethinyl estradiol

(0.15) (30)
Desogen 28 Desogestrel Ethinyl estradiol

(0.15) (30)
Ortho-Cept 21, 28 Desogestrel Ethinyl estradiol

(0.15) (30)
Yasmin 28 Drospirenone (3) Ethinyl estradiol

(30)
Demulen 1 /35 Ethynodiol Ethinyl estradiol

21, 28 diacetate (1) (35)
Zovia 1 /35 21, 28 Ethynodiol Ethinyl estradiol

diacetate (1) (35)
Demulen 1/50 21, Ethynodiol Ethinyl estradiol

28 diacetate (1) (50)
Zovia 1 /50 21, 28 Ethynodiol Ethinyl estradiol

diacetate (1) (50)
Levlen 21, 28 Levonorgestrel Ethinyl estradiol

(0.15) (30)
Levora 21, 28 Levonorgestrel Ethinyl estradiol

(0.15) (30)
Nordette 21, 28 Levonorgestrel Ethinyl estradiol

(0.15) (30)
Ortho-Cyclen 21, Norgestimate Ethinyl estradiol

28 (0.25) (35)
Lo/Ovral 21, 28 Norgestrel (0.3) Ethinyl estradiol

(30)
Low-Ogestrel 21, Norgestrel (0.3) Ethinyl estradiol

28 (30)
Ogestrel 28 Norgestrel (0.5) Ethinyl estradiol

(50)
Ovral 21, 28 Norgestrel (0.5) Ethinyl estradiol

(50)
Multiphasic Combinations
Kariva 28 Desogestrel Ethinyl estradiol

(0.15) (20, 0, 10)
Mircette 28 Desogestrel Ethinyl estradiol

(0.15) (20, 0, 10)
Tri-Levlen 21, 28 Levonorgestrel Ethinyl estradiol

(0.05, 0.075, (30, 40, 30)
0.125)
Triphasil 21, 28 Levonorgestrel Ethinyl estradiol

(0.05, 0.075, (30, 40, 30)
0.125)
Trivora 28 Levonorgestrel Ethinyl estradiol

(0.05, 0.075, (30, 40, 30)
0.125)
Necon 10/11 21, Norethindrone Ethinyl estradiol

28 (0.5, 1) (35)
Ortho-Novum Norethindrone Ethinyl estradiol

10/11 28 (0.5, 1) (35)
Ortho-Novum Norethindrone Ethinyl estradiol

7/7/7 21, 28 (0.5, 0.75, 1) (35)
Tri-Norinyl 21, 28 Norethindrone Ethinyl estradiol

(0.5, 1, 0.5) (35)
Estrostep 28 Norethindrone Ethinyl estradiol

acetate (1) (20, 30, 35)
Ortho Tri-Cyclen Norgestimate Ethinyl estradiol

21, 28 (0.18, 0.215, (35)
0.25)
B. Pharmacology
1. Ethinyl estradiol is the estrogen in virtually all
OCs.
2. C o m m o n l y u s e d p r o g e s t i n s i n c l u d e
norethindrone, norethindrone acetate, and
levonorgestrel. Ethynodiol diacetate is a
progestin, which also has significant estrogenic
activity. New progestins have been developed
with less androgenic activity; however, these
agents may be associated with deep vein throm-
bosis.
C. Mechanisms of action
1. The most important mechanism of action is
estrogen-induced inhibition of the midcycle
surge of gonadotropin secretion, so that ovula-
tion does not occur.
2. Another potential mechanism of contraceptive
action is suppression of gonadotropin secretion
during the follicular phase of the cycle, thereby
preventing follicular maturation.
3. Progestin-related mechanisms also may contrib-
ute to the contraceptive effect. These include
rendering the endometrium is less suitable for
implantation and making the cervical mucus less
permeable to penetration by sperm.
D. Contraindications
1. Absolute contraindications to OCs:
a. Previous thromboembolic event or stroke
b. History of an estrogen-dependent tumor
c. Active liver disease
d. Pregnancy
e. Undiagnosed abnormal uterine bleeding
f. Hypertriglyceridemia
g. Women over age 35 years who smoke heavily
(greater than 15 cigarettes per day)
2. Screening requirements. Hormonal contracep-
tion can be safely provided after a careful medi-
cal history and blood pressure measurement.
Pap smears are not required before a prescrip-
tion for OCs.
E. Efficacy. When taken properly, OCs are a very
effective form of contraception. The actual failure
rate is 2 to 3 percent due primarily to missed pills or
failure to resume therapy after the seven-day pill-
free interval.
Noncontraceptive Benefits of Oral Contraceptive

Pills
Dysmenorrhea Functional ovarian cysts

Mittelschmerz Benign breast cysts
Metrorrhagia Ectopic pregnancy
Premenstrual syndrome Acne
Hirsutism Endometriosis
Ovarian and endometrial
cancer
F. Drug interactions. The metabolism of OCs is

accelerated by phenobarbital, phenytoin and
rifampin. The contraceptive efficacy of an OC is
likely to be decreased in women taking these drugs.
Other antibiotics (with the exception of rifampin) do
not affect the pharmacokinetics of ethinyl estradiol.
G. Preparations
1. There are two types of oral contraceptive pills:
combination pills that contain both estrogen and
progestin, and the progestin-only pill ("mini-pill").
Progestin-only pills, which are associated with
more breakthrough bleeding than combination
pills, are rarely prescribed except in lactating
women. Combination pills are packaged in 21-
day or 28-day cycles. The last seven pills of a 28-
day pack are placebo pills.
2. Monophasic combination pills contain the same
dose of estrogen and progestin in each of the 21
hormonally active pills. Current pills contain on
average 30 to 35 :g. Pills containing less than 50
:g of ethinyl estradiol are "low-dose" pills.
3. 20 µg preparations. Several preparations con-
taining only 20 :g of ethinyl estradiol are now
available (Lo-Estrin 1/20, Mircette, Alesse,
Aviane). These are often used for
perimenopausal women who want contraception
with the lowest estrogen dose possible. These
preparations provide enough estrogen to relieve
vasomotor flashes. Perimenopausal women
often experience hot flashes and premenstrual
mood disturbances during the seven-day pill-free
interval. Mircette, contains 10 :g of ethinyl
estradiol on five of the seven "placebo" days,
which reduces flashes and mood symptoms.
4. Yasmin contains 30 mcg of ethinyl estradiol and
drospirenone. Drospirenone has anti-
mineralocorticoid activity. It can help prevent
bloating, weight gain, and hypertension, but it
can increase serum potassium. Yasmin is contra-
indicated in patients at risk for hyperkalemia due
to renal, hepatic, or adrenal disease. Yasmin
should not be combined with other drugs that can
increase potassium, such as ACE inhibitors,
angiotensin receptor blockers, potassium-sparing
diuretics, potassium supplements, NSAIDs, or
salt substitutes.
5. Third-generation progestins
a. Mo r e s e l e c t ive p r o g e s t i n s i n c l u d e
norgestimate, desogestrel, and gestodene.
They have some structural modifications that
lower their androgen activity. Norgestimate
(eg, Ortho-Cyclen or Tri-Cyclen) and
desogestrel (eg, Desogen or Ortho-Cept) are
the least androgenic compounds in this class.
The new progestins are not much less
androgenic than norethindrone.
b. The newer OCs are more effective in reducing
acne and hirsutism in hyperandrogenic
women. They are therefore an option for
women who have difficulty tolerating older
OCs. There is an increased risk of deep
venous thrombosis with the use of these
agents, and they should not be routinely used.
H. Recommendations
1. Monophasic OCs containing the second genera-
tion progestin, norethindrone (Ovcon 35, Ortho-
Novum 1/35) are recommended when starting a
patient on OCs for the first time. This progestin
has very low androgenicity when compared to
other second generation progestins, and also
compares favorably to the third generation
progestins in androgenicity.
2. The pill should be started on the first day of the
period to provide the maximum contraceptive
effect in the first cycle. However, most women
start their pill on the first Sunday after the period
starts. Some form of back-up contraception is
needed for the first month if one chooses the
Sunday start, because the full contraceptive
effect might not be provided in the first pill pack.
Factors to Consider in Starting or Switching Oral

Contraceptive Pills
Products that
Objective Action achieve the ob-
jective
To minimize Select a product Alesse, Aviane,

high risk of with a lower dosage Loestrin 1/20,
thrombosis of estrogen. Levlite, Mircette
To minimize Select a product Alesse, Aviane,

nausea, with a lower dosage Levlite, Loestrin
breast ten- of estrogen. 1/20, Mircette
derness or
vascular
headaches
To minimize Select a product Lo/Ovral, Nordette,

spotting or with a higher dos- Ortho-Cept, Ortho-
break- age of estrogen or Cyclen, Ortho Tri-
through a progestin with Cyclen
bleeding greater potency.
To minimize Select a product Brevicon, Demulen

androgenic containing a low- 1/35, Modicon,
effects dose norethindrone Ovcon 35
or ethynodiol
diacetate.
To avoid Select a product Brevicon, Demulen

dyslipidemia containing a low- 1/35, Modicon,
dose norethindrone Ovcon 35
or ethynodiol
diacetate.
Instructions on the Use of Oral Contraceptive
Pills
Initiation of use (choose one):

The patient begins taking the pills on the first day of men-
strual bleeding.
The patient begins taking the pills on the first Sunday after
menstrual bleeding begins.
The patient begins taking the pills immediately if she is
definitely not pregnant and has not had unprotected sex
since her last menstrual period.
Missed pill
If it has been less than 24 hours since the last pill was
taken, the patient takes a pill right away and then returns to
normal pill-taking routine.
If it has been 24 hours since the last pill was taken, the
patient takes both the missed pill and the next scheduled pill
at the same time.
If it has been more than 24 hours since the last pill was
taken (ie, two or more missed pills), the patient takes the
last pill that was missed, throws out the other missed pills
and takes the next pill on time. Additional contraception is
used for the remainder of the cycle.
Additional contraceptive method

Use an additional contraceptive method for the first 7 days
after initially starting oral contraceptive pills.
Use an additional contraceptive method for 7 days if more
than 12 hours late in taking an oral contraceptive pill.
Use an additional contraceptive method while taking an
interacting drug and for 7 days thereafter.
III. Injectable contraceptives

A. Depot medroxyprogesterone acetate (DMPA,
Depo-Provera) is an injectable contraceptive. Deep
intramuscular injection of 150 mg results in effec-
tive contraception for three to four months. Effec-
tiveness is 99.7 percent.
B. Women who receive the first injection after the
seventh day of the menstrual cycle should use a
second method of contraception for seven days.
The first injection should be administered within
five days after the onset of menses, in which case
alternative contraception is not necessary.
C. Ovulation is suppressed for at least 14 weeks after
injection of a 150 mg dose of DMPA. Therefore,
injections should repeated every three months. A
pregnancy test must be administered to women
who are more than two weeks late for an injection.
D. Return of fertility can be delayed for up to 18
months after cessation of DMPA. DMPA is not
ideal for women who may wish to become pregnant
soon after cessation of contraception.
E. Amenorrhea, irregular bleeding, and weight gain
(typically 1 to 3 kg) are the most common adverse
effects of DMPA. Adverse effects also include
acne, headache, and depression. Fifty percent of
women report amenorrhea by one year. Persistent
bleeding may be treated with 50 :g of ethinyl
estradiol for 14 days.
F. Medroxyprogesterone acetate/estradiol
cypionate (MPA/E2C, Lunelle) is a combined (25
mg MPA and 5 mg E2C), injectable contraceptive.
1. Although monthly IM injections are required,
MPA/E2C has several desirable features:
a. It has nearly 100 percent effectiveness in
preventing pregnancy.
b. Fertility returns within three to four months
after it is discontinued.
c. Irregular bleeding is less common than in
women given MPA alone.
2. Weight gain, hypertension, headache,
mastalgia, or other nonmenstrual complaints are
common.
3. Lunelle should be considered for women who
forget to take their birth control pills or those
who want a discreet method of contraception.
The initial injection should be given during the
first 5 days of the menstrual cycle or within 7
days of stopping oral contraceptives. Lunelle
injections should be given every 28 to 30 days;
33 days at the most.
G. Transdermal contraceptive patch
1. Ortho Evra is a transdermal contraceptive
patch, which is as effective as oral contracep-
tives. Ortho Evra delivers 20 :g of ethinyl
estradiol and 150 :g of norelgestromin daily for
6 to 13 months. Compliance is better with the
patch. The patch is applied at the beginning of
the menstrual cycle. A new patch is applied
each week for 3 weeks; week 4 is patch-free. It
is sold in packages of 3 patches. Effectiveness
is similar to oral contraceptives.
2. Breakthrough bleeding during the first two
cycles, dysmenorrhea, and breast discomfort
are more common in women using the patch. A
reaction at the site of application of the patch
occurs in 1.9 percent of the women. Contracep-
tive efficacy may be slightly lower in women
weighing more than 90 kg.
H. Contraceptive vaginal ring (NuvaRing) delivers
15 :g ethinyl estradiol and 120 :g of etonogestrel
daily) and is worn intravaginally for three weeks of
each four week cycle. Advantages of this method
include avoidance of gastrointestinal metabolism,
rapid return to ovulation after discontinuation, lower
doses of hormones, ease and convenience, and
improved cycle control.
IV. Barrier methods
A. Barrier methods of contraception, such as the
condom, diaphragm, cervical cap, and spermi-
cides, have fewer side effects than hormonal
contraception.
B. The diaphragm and cervical cap require fitting by a
clinician and are only effective when used with a
spermicide. They must be left in the vagina for six
to eight hours after intercourse; the diaphragm
needs to be removed after this period of time, while
the cervical cap can be left in place for up to 24
hours. These considerations have caused them to
be less desirable methods of contraception. A
major advantage of barrier contraceptives is their
efficacy in protecting against sexually transmitted
diseases and HIV infection.
V. Intrauterine devices
A. The currently available intrauterine devices (IUDs)
are safe and effective methods of contraception:
1. Copper T380 IUD induces a foreign body reac-
tion in the endometrium. It is effective for 8 to 10
years.
2. Progesterone-releasing IUDs inhibit sperm
survival and implantation. They also decrease
menstrual blood loss and relieve dysmenorrhea.
Paragard is replaced every 10 years.
Progestasert IUDs must be replaced after one
year.
3. Levonorgestrel IUD (Mirena) provides effective
contraception for five years.
B. Infection
1. Women who are at low risk for sexually transmit-
ted diseases do not have a higher incidence of
pelvic inflammatory disease with use of an IUD.
An IUD should not be inserted in women at high
risk for sexually transmitted infections, and
women should be screened for the presence of
sexually transmitted diseases before insertion.
2. Contraindications to IUDs:
a. Women at high risk for bacterial endocarditis
(eg, rheumatic heart disease, prosthetic
valves, or a history of endocarditis).
b. Women at high risk for infections, including
those with AIDS and a history of intravenous
drug use.
c. Women with uterine leiomyomas which alter
the size or shape of the uterine cavity.
VI. Lactation
A. Women who breast-feed have a delay in resump-
tion of ovulation postpartum. It is probably safest to
resume contraceptive use in the third postpartum
month for those who breast-feed full time, and in
the third postpartum week for those who do not
breast-feed.
B. A nonhormonal contraceptive or progesterone-
containing hormonal contraceptive can be started
at any time; an estrogen-containing oral contracep-
tive pill should not be started before the third week
postpartum because women are still at increased
risk of thromboembolism prior to this time. Oral
contraceptive pills can decrease breast milk, while
progesterone-containing contraceptives may
increase breast milk.
VII. Progestin-only agents
A. Progestin-only agents are slightly less effective
than combination oral contraceptives. They have
failure rates of 0.5 percent compared with the 0.1
percent rate with combination oral contraceptives.
B. Progestin-only oral contraceptives (Micronor, Nor-
QD, Ovrette) provide a useful alternative in women
who cannot take estrogen. Progestin-only contra-
ception is recommended for nursing mothers. Milk
production is unaffected by use of progestin-only
agents.
C. If the usual time of ingestion is delayed for more
than three hours, an alternative form of birth control
should be used for the following 48 hours. Because
progestin-only agents are taken continuously,
without hormone-free periods, menses may be
irregular, infrequent or absent.
VIII. Postcoital contraception
A. Emergency postcoital contraception consists of
administration of drugs within 72 hours to women
who have had unprotected intercourse (including
sexual assault), or to those who have had a failure
of another method of contraception (eg, broken
condom).
B. Preparations
1. Menstrual bleeding typically occurs within three
days after administration of most forms of hor-
monal postcoital contraception. A pregnancy
test should be performed if bleeding has not
occurred within four weeks.
2. Preven Emergency Contraceptive Kit includes
four combination tablets, each containing 50 :g
o f e t h i n yl e s t r a d i o l a n d 0 . 2 5 m g o f
levonorgestrel, and a pregnancy test to rule out
pregnancy before taking the tablets. Instructions
are to take two of the tablets as soon as possi-
ble within 72 hours of coitus, and the other two
tablets twelve hours later.
3. An oral contraceptive such as Ovral (two tablets
twelve hours apart) or Lo/Ovral (4 tablets twelve
hours apart) can also be used.
4. Nausea and vomiting are the major side effects.
Meclizine 50 mg, taken one hour before the first
dose, reduces nausea and vomiting but can
cause some sedation.
5. Plan B is a pill pack that contains two 0.75 mg
tablets of levonorgestrel to be taken twelve
hours apart. The cost is comparable to the
Preven kit ($20). This regimen may be more
effective and better tolerated than an estrogen-
progestin regimen.
6. Copper T380 IUD. A copper intrauterine device
(IUD) placed within 120 hours of unprotected
intercourse can also be used as a form of emer-
gency contraception. An advantage of this
method is that it provides continuing contracep-
tion after the initial event.
Emergency Contraception
1. Consider pretreatment one hour before each oral con-

traceptive pill dose, using one of the following orally
administered antiemetic agents:
Prochlorperazine (Compazine), 5 to 10 mg
Promethazine (Phenergan), 12.5 to 25 mg
Trimethobenzamide (Tigan), 250 mg
Meclizine (Antivert) 50 mg
2. Administer the first dose of oral contraceptive pill within
72 hours of unprotected coitus, and administer the
second dose 12 hours after the first dose. Brand name
options for emergency contraception include the fol-
lowing:
Preven Kit – two pills per dose (0.5 mg of
levonorgestrel and 100 µg of ethinyl estradiol per
dose)
Plan B – one pill per dose (0.75 mg of
levonorgestrel per dose)
Ovral – two pills per dose (0.5 mg of levonorgestrel
and 100 µg of ethinyl estradiol per dose)
Nordette – four pills per dose (0.6 mg of
dose)
Triphasil – four pills per dose (0.5 mg of
dose)
Acute Pelvic Pain

I. Clinical evaluation
A. Assessment of acute pelvic pain should determine
the patient’s age, obstetrical history, menstrual
history, characteristics of pain onset, duration, and
palliative or aggravating factors.
B. Associated symptoms may include urinary or
gastrointestinal symptoms, fever, abnormal bleed-
ing, or vaginal discharge.
C. Past medical history. Contraceptive history, surgi-
cal history, gynecologic history, history of pelvic
inflammatory disease, ectopic pregnancy, sexually
transmitted diseases should be determined. Current
sexual activity and practices should be assessed.
D. Method of contraception
1. Sexual abstinence in the months preceding the
onset of pain lessons the likelihood of pregnancy-
related etiologies.
2. The risk of acute PID is reduced by 50% in
patients taking oral contraceptives or using a
barrier method of contraception. Patients taking
oral contraceptives are at decreased risk for an
ectopic pregnancy or ovarian cysts.
E. Risk factors for acute pelvic inflammatory dis-
ease. Age between 15-25 years, sexual partner with
symptoms of urethritis, prior history of PID.
II. Physical examination
A. Fever, abdominal or pelvic tenderness, and
peritoneal signs should be sought.
B. Vaginal discharge, cervical erythema and discharge,
cervical and uterine motion tenderness, or adnexal
masses or tenderness should be noted.
III. Laboratory tests
A. Pregnancy testing will identify pregnancy-related
causes of pelvic pain. Serum beta-HCG becomes
positive 7 days after conception. A negative test
virtually excludes ectopic pregnancy.
B. Complete blood count. Leukocytosis suggest an
inflammatory process; however, a normal white
blood count occurs in 56% of patients with PID and
37% of patients with appendicitis.
C. Urinalysis. The finding of pyuria suggests urinary
tract infection. Pyuria can also occur with an in-
flamed appendix or from contamination of the urine
by vaginal discharge.
D. Testing for Neisseria gonorrhoeae and
Chlamydia trachomatis are necessary if PID is a
possibility.
E. Pelvic ultrasonography is of value in excluding the
diagnosis of an ectopic pregnancy by demonstrating
an intrauterine gestation. Sonography may reveal
acute PID, torsion of the adnexa, or acute appendi-
citis.
F. Diagnostic laparoscopy is indicated when acute
pelvic pain has an unclear diagnosis despite com-
prehensive evaluation.
III. Differential diagnosis of acute pelvic pain
A. Pregnancy-related causes. Ectopic pregnancy,
spontaneous, threatened or incomplete abortion,
intrauterine pregnancy with corpus luteum bleeding.
B. Gynecologic disorders. PID, endometriosis,
ovarian cyst hemorrhage or rupture, adnexal torsion,
Mittelschmerz, uterine leiomyoma torsion, primary
dysmenorrhea, tumor.
C. Nonreproductive tract causes
1. Gastrointestinal. Appendicitis, inflammatory
bowel disease, mesenteric adenitis, irritable
bowel syndrome, diverticulitis.
2. Urinary tract. Urinary tract infection, renal calcu-
lus.
IV. Approach to acute pelvic pain with a positive
pregnancy test
A. In a female patient of reproductive age, presenting
with acute pelvic pain, the first distinction is whether
the pain is pregnancy-related or non-pregnancy-
related on the basis of a serum pregnancy test.
B. In the patient with acute pelvic pain associated with
pregnancy, the next step is localization of the tissue
responsible for the hCG production. Transvaginal
ultrasound should be performed to identify an
intrauterine gestation. Ectopic pregnancy is charac-
terized by a noncystic adnexal mass and fluid in the
cul-de-sac.
V.Approach to acute pelvic pain in non-pregnant
patients with a negative HCG
A. Acute PID is the leading diagnostic consideration in
patients with acute pelvic pain unrelated to preg-
nancy. The pain is usually bilateral, but may be
unilateral in 10%. Cervical motion tenderness, fever,
and cervical discharge are common findings.
B. Acute appendicitis should be considered in all
patients presenting with acute pelvic pain and a
negative pregnancy test. Appendicitis is character-
ized by leukocytosis and a history of a few hours of
periumbilical pain followed by migration of the pain
to the right lower quadrant. Neutrophilia occurs in
75%. A slight fever exceeding 37.3°C, nausea,
vomiting, anorexia, and rebound tenderness may be
present.
C. Torsion of the adnexa usually causes unilateral
pain, but pain can be bilateral in 25%. Intense,
progressive pain combined with a tense, tender
adnexal mass is characteristic. There is often a
history of repetitive, transitory pain. Pelvic
sonography often confirms the diagnosis. Laparo-
scopic diagnosis and surgical intervention are
indicated.
D. Ruptured or hemorrhagic corpus luteal cyst
usually causes bilateral pain, but it can cause
unilateral tenderness in 35%. Ultrasound aids in
diagnosis.
E. Endometriosis usually causes chronic or recurrent
pain, but it can occasionally cause acute pelvic pain.
There usually is a history of dysmenorrhea and deep
dyspareunia. Pelvic exam reveals fixed uterine
retrodisplacement and tender uterosacral and cul-
de-sac nodularity. Laparoscopy confirms the diagno-
sis.
Chronic Pelvic Pain

Chronic pelvic pain (CPP) affects approximately one in
seven women in the United States (14 percent). Chronic
pelvic pain (>6 months in duration) is less likely to be
associated with a readily identifiable cause than is acute
pain.
I. Etiology of chronic pelvic pain
A. Physical and sexual abuse. Numerous studies
have demonstrated a higher frequency of physical
and/or sexual abuse in women with CPP. Between
30 and 50 percent of women with CPP have a
history of abuse (physical or sexual, childhood or
adult).
B. Gynecologic problems
1. Endometriosis is present in approximately one-
third of women undergoing laparoscopy for CPP
and is the most frequent finding in these women.
Typically, endometriosis pain is a sharp or
“crampy” pain. It starts at the onset of menses,
becoming more severe and prolonged over
several menstrual cycles. It is frequently accom-
panied by deep dyspareunia. Uterosacral liga-
m e n t n o d u l a r i t y i s h i g h l y s pecific f o r
endometriosis. Examining the woman during her
menstruation may make the nodularity easier to
palpate. A more common, but less specific,
finding is tenderness in the cul-de-sac or
uterosacral ligaments that reproduces the pain of
deep dyspareunia.
2. Pelvic adhesions are found in approximately
one-fourth of women undergoing laparoscopy for
CPP. Adhesions form after intra-abdominal
inflammation; they should be suspected if the
woman has a history of surgery or pelvic inflam-
matory disease (PID). The pain may be a dull or
sharp pulling sensation that occurs at any time
during the month. Physical examination is usu-
ally nondiagnostic.
3. Dysmenorrhea (painful menstruation) and
mittelschmerz (midcycle pain) without other
organic pathology are seen frequently and may
contribute to CPP in more than half of all cases.
4. Chronic pelvic inflammatory disease may
cause CPP. Therefore, culturing for sexually
transmitted agents should be a routine part of
the evaluation.
Medical Diagnoses and Chronic Pelvic Pain
Medical diagnosis/symptom Prevalence

source
Bowel dysmotility disorders 50 to 80%

Musculoskeletal disorders 30 to 70%
Cyclic gynecologic pain 20 to 50%
Urologic diagnoses 5 to 10%
Endometriosis, advanced and/or with Less than 5%
dense bowel adhesions
Unusual medical diagnoses Less than 2%
Multiple medical diagnoses 30 to 50%
No identifiable medical diagnosis Less than 5%
C. Nongynecologic medical problems

1. Bowel dysmotility (eg, irritable bowel syndrome
and constipation) may be the primary symptom
source in 50 percent of all cases of CPP and
may be a contributing factor in up to 80 percent
of cases. Pain from irritable bowel syndrome is
typically described as a crampy, recurrent pain
accompanied by abdominal distention and
bloating, alternating diarrhea and constipation,
and passage of mucus. The pain is often worse
during or near the menstrual period. A highly
suggestive sign is exquisite tenderness to
palpation which improves with continued pres-
sure.
2. Musculoskeletal dysfunction, including ab-
dominal myofascial pain syndromes, can cause
or contribute to CPP.
D. Psychologic problems
1. Depressive disorders contribute to more than
half of all cases of CPP. Frequently, the pain
becomes part of a cycle of pain, disability, and
mood disturbance. The diagnostic criteria for
depression include depressed mood, diminished
interest in daily activities, weight loss or gain,
insomnia or hypersomnia, psychomotor agitation
or retardation, fatigue, feelings of worthlessness,
loss of concentration, and recurrent thoughts of
death.
2. Somatoform disorders, including somatization
disorder, contribute to 10 to 20 percent of cases
of CPP. The essential feature of somatization
disorder is a pattern of recurring, multiple,
clinically significant somatic complaints.
II. Clinical evaluation of chronic pelvic pain
A. History
1. The character, intensity, distribution, and loca-
tion of pain are important. Radiation of pain or
should be assessed. The temporal pattern of the
pain (onset, duration, changes, cyclicity) and
aggravating or relieving factors (eg, posture,
meals, bowel movements, voiding, menstrua-
tion, intercourse, medications) should be docu-
mented.
2. Associated symptoms. Anorexia, constipation,
or fatigue are often present.
3. Previous surgeries, pelvic infections, infertility,
or obstetric experiences may provide additional
clues.
4. For patients of reproductive age, the timing and
characteristics of their last menstrual period, the
presence of non-menstrual vaginal bleeding or
discharge, and the method of contraception
used should be determined.
5. Life situations and events that affect the pain
should be sought.
6. Gastrointestinal and urologic symptoms, includ-
ing the relationship between these systems to
the pain should be reviewed.
7. The patient's affect may suggest depression or
other mood disorders.
B. Physical examination
1. If the woman indicates the location of her pain
with a single finger, the pain is more likely
caused by a discrete source than if she uses a
sweeping motion of her hand.
2. A pelvic examination should be performed.
Special attention should be given to the bladder,
urethra.
3. The piriformis muscles should be palpated;
piriformis spasm can cause pain when climbing
stairs, driving a car, or when first arising in the
morning. This muscle is responsible for external
rotation of the hip and can be palpated
posterolaterally, cephalic to the ischial spine.
This examination is most easily performed if the
woman externally rotates her hip against the
resistance of the examiner's other hand.
Piriformis spasm is treated with physical ther-
apy.
4. Abdominal deformity, erythema, edema, scars,
hernias, or distension should be noted. Abnor-
mal bowel sounds may suggest a gastrointesti-
nal process.
5. Palpation should include the epigastrium, flanks,
and low back, and inguinal areas.
C. Special tests
1. Initial laboratory tests should include cervical
cytology, endocervical cultures for Neisseria
gonorrhoeae and Chlamydia, stool Hemoccult,
and urinalysis. Other tests may be suggested by
the history and examination.
2. Laparoscopy is helpful when the pelvic examina-
tion is abnormal or when initial therapy fails.
III. Management
A. Myofascial pain syndrome may be treated by a
variety of physical therapy techniques. Trigger
points can often be treated with injections of a local
anesthetic (eg, bupivacaine [Marcaine]), with or
without the addition of a corticosteroid.
B. If the pain is related to the menstrual cycle, treat-
ment aimed at suppressing the cycle may help.
Common methods to accomplish this include
administration of depot medroxyprogesterone
(Depo-Provera) and continuously dosed oral
contraceptives.
C. Cognitive-behavioral therapy is appropriate for all
women with CPP. Relaxation and distraction
techniques are often helpful.
D. When endometriosis or pelvic adhesions are
discovered on diagnostic laparoscopy, they are
usually treated during the procedure. Hysterectomy
may be warranted if the pain has persisted for more
than six months, does not respond to analgesics
(including anti-inflammatory agents), and impairs
the woman's normal function.
E. Antidepressants or sleeping aids are useful
adjunctive therapies. Amitriptyline (Elavil), in low
doses of 25-50 mg qhs, may be of help in improv-
ing sleep and reducing the severity of chronic pain
complaints.
F. Muscle relaxants may prove useful in patients with
guarding, splinting, or reactive muscle spasms.
Endometriosis
Endometriosis is characterized by the presence of
endometrial tissue on the ovaries, fallopian tubes or other
abnormal sites, causing pain or infertility. Women are
usually 25 to 29 years old at the time of diagnosis.
Approximately 24 percent of women who complain of
p e l vi c p a i n a r e s u b s equently found to have
endometriosis. The overall prevalence of endometriosis
is estimated to be 5 to 10 percent.
A. Endometriosis should be considered in any woman
of reproductive age who has pelvic pain. The most
c o m m o n s y m p t o m s a r e d ys m e n o r r h e a ,
dyspareunia, and low back pain that worsens during
menses. Rectal pain and painful defecation may
also occur. Other causes of secondary
dysmenorrhea and chronic pelvic pain (eg, upper
genital tract infections, adenomyosis, adhesions)
may produce similar symptoms.
Differential Diagnosis of Endometriosis
Generalized pelvic pain Dyspareunia

Musculoskeletal causes
Pelvic inflammatory (pelvic relaxation, levator
disease spasm)
Endometritis Gastrointestinal tract (con-
Pelvic adhesions stipation, irritable bowel
Neoplasms, benign or syndrome)
malignant Urinary tract (urethral syn-
Ovarian torsion drome, interstitial cystitis)
Sexual or physical Infection
abuse Pelvic vascular congestion
Nongynecologic Diminished lubrication or
causes vaginal expansion because
Dysmenorrhea of insufficient arousal
Primary Infertility
Secondary Male factor
(adenomyosis, Tubal disease (infection)
myomas, infection, Anovulation
cervical stenosis) Cervical factors (mucus,
sperm antibodies, stenosis)
Luteal phase deficiency
B. Infertility may be the presenting complaint for

endometriosis. Infertile patients often have no
painful symptoms.
C. Physical examination. The physician should
palpate for a fixed, retroverted uterus, adnexal and
uterine tenderness, pelvic masses or nodularity
along the uterosacral ligaments. A rectovaginal
examination should identify uterosacral, cul-de-sac
or septal nodules. Most women with endometriosis
have normal pelvic findings.
II. Treatment
A. Confirmatory laparoscopy is usually required before
treatment is instituted. In women with few symp-
toms, an empiric trial of oral contraceptives or
progestins may be warranted to assess pain relief.
B. Medical treatment
1. Initial therapy also should include a nonsteroidal
anti-inflammatory drug.
a. Naproxen (Naprosyn) 500 mg followed by 250
mg PO tid-qid prn [250, 375,500 mg].
b. Naproxen sodium (Aleve) 200 mg PO tid prn.
c. Naproxen sodium (Anaprox) 550 mg, followed
by 275 mg PO tid-qid prn.
d. Ibuprofen (Motrin) 800 mg, then 400 mg PO
q4-6h prn.
e. Mefenamic acid (Ponstel) 500 mg PO fol-
lowed by 250 mg q6h prn.
2. Progestational agents. Progestins are similar
to combination OCPs in their effects on FSH, LH
and endometrial tissue. They may be associated
with more bothersome adverse effects than
OCPs. Progestins are effective in reducing the
symptoms of endometriosis. Oral progestin
regimens may include once-daily administration
of medroxyprogesterone at the lowest effective
dosage (5 to 20 mg). Depot
medroxyprogesterone may be given intramuscu-
larly every two weeks for two months at 100 mg
per dose and then once a month for four months
at 200 mg per dose.
3. Oral contraceptive pills (OCPs) suppress LH
and FSH and prevent ovulation. Combination
OCPs alleviate symptoms in about three quar-
ters of patients. Oral contraceptives can be
taken continuously (with no placebos) or cycli-
cally, with a week of placebo pills between
cycles. The OCPs can be discontinued after six
months or continued indefinitely.
4. Danazol (Danocrine) has been highly effective
in relieving the symptoms of endometriosis, but
adverse effects may preclude its use. Adverse
effects include headache, flushing, sweating and
atrophic vaginitis. Androgenic side effects in-
clude acne, edema, hirsutism, deepening of the
voice and weight gain. The initial dosage should
be 800 mg per day, given in two divided oral
doses. The overall response rate is 84 to 92
percent.
Medical Treatment of Endometriosis
Adverse
Drug Dosage effects
Danazol 800 mg per day in 2 di- Estrogen defi-

(Danocrine) vided doses ciency,
androgenic
side effects
Oral contra- 1 pill per day (continuous Headache,

ceptives or cyclic) nausea, hyper-
tension
Medroxyprog 5 to 20 mg orally per day Same as with

esterone other oral
(Provera) progestins
Medroxyprog 100 mg IM every 2 weeks Weight gain,

esterone for 2 months; then 200 depression,
suspension mg IM every month for 4 irregular men-
(Depo- months or 150 mg IM ses or
Provera) every 3 months amenorrhea
Norethindron 5 mg per day orally for 2 Same as with

e (Aygestin) weeks; then increase by other oral
2.5 mg per day every 2 progestins
weeks up to 15 mg per
day
Leuprolide 3.75 mg IM every month Decrease in

(Lupron) for 6 months bone density,
estrogen defi-
ciency
Goserelin 3.6 mg SC (in upper ab- Estrogen defi-

(Zoladex) dominal wall) every 28 ciency
days
Nafarelin 400 mg per day: 1 spray Estrogen defi-

(Synarel) in 1 nostril in a.m.; 1 ciency, bone
spray in other nostril in density
p.m.; start treatment on changes, nasal
day 2 to 4 of menstrual irritation
cycle
C. GnRH agonists. These agents (eg, leuprolide

[Lupron], goserelin [Zoladex]) inhibit the secretion
of gonadotropin. GnRH agonists are contraindi-
cated in pregnancy and have hypoestrogenic side
effects. They produce a mild degree of bone loss.
Because of concerns about osteopenia, “add-back”
therapy with low-dose estrogen has been recom-
mended. The dosage of leuprolide is a single
monthly 3.75-mg depot injection given intramuscu-
larly. Goserelin, in a dosage of 3.6 mg, is adminis-
tered subcutaneously every 28 days. A nasal spray
(nafarelin [Synarel]) may be used twice daily. The
response rate is similar to that with danazol; about
90 percent of patients experience pain relief.
D. Surgical treatment
1. Surgical treatment is the preferred approach to
infertile patients with advanced endometriosis.
Laparoscopic ablation of endometriosis lesions
may result in a 13 percent increase in the proba-
bility of pregnancy.
2. Definitive surgery, which includes hysterectomy
and oophorectomy, is reserved for women with
intractable pain who no longer desire pregnancy.
Primary Amenorrhea
Amenorrhea (absence of menses) results from dysfunc-
tion of the hypothalamus, pituitary, ovaries, uterus, or
vagina. It is often classified as either primary (absence of
menarche by age 16) or secondary (absence of menses
for more than three cycle intervals or six months in
women who were previously menstruating).
I. Etiology
A. Primary amenorrhea is usually the result of a
genetic or anatomic abnormality. Common etiolo-
gies of primary amenorrhea:
1. Chromosomal abnormalities causing gonadal
dysgenesis: 45 percent
2. Physiologic delay of puberty: 20 percent
3. Müllerian agenesis: 15 percent
4. Transverse vaginal septum or imperforate hy-
men: 5 percent
5. Absent production of gonadotropin-releasing
hormone (GnRH) by the hypothalamus: 5 percent
6. Anorexia nervosa: 2 percent
7. Hypopituitarism: 2 percent
Causes of Primary and Secondary Amenorrhea
Abnormality Causes
Pregnancy
Anatomic abnormalities
Congenital abnormality Isolated defect

in Mullerian develop- Testicular feminization syn-
ment drome
5-Alpha-reductase defi-
ciency
Vanishing testes syndrome
Defect in testis determining
factor
Congenital defect of Agenesis of lower vagina

urogenital sinus devel- Imperforate hymen
opment
Acquired ablation or Asherman’s syndrome

scarring of the Tuberculosis
endometrium
Disorders of
hypothalamic-pituitary
ovarian axis
Hypothalamic dysfunc-
tion
Pituitary dysfunction
Ovarian dysfunction
Causes of Amenorrhea due to Abnormalities in

the Hypothalamic-Pituitary-Ovarian Axis
Abnormality Causes
Hypothalamic dys- Functional hypothalamic

function amenorrhea
Weight loss, eating disorders
Exercise
Stress
Severe or prolonged illness
Congenital gonadotropin-releasing
hormone deficiency
Inflammatory or infiltrative diseases
Brain tumors - eg,
craniopharyngioma
Pituitary stalk dissection or com-
pression
Cranial irradiation
Brain injury - trauma, hemorrhage,
hydrocephalus
Other syndromes - Prader-Willi,
Laurence-Moon-Biedl
Pituitary dysfunc- Hyperprolactinemia

tion Other pituitary tumors- acromegaly,
corticotroph adenomas (Cushing's
disease)
Other tumors - meningioma,
germinoma, glioma
Empty sella syndrome
Pituitary infarct or apoplexy
Ovarian dysfunc- Ovarian failure (menopause)

tion Spontaneous
Premature (before age 40 years)
Surgical
Other Hyperthyroidism
Hypothyroidism
Diabetes mellitus
Exogenous androgen use
II. Diagnostic evaluation of primary amenorrhea

A. Step I: Evaluate clinical history:
1. Signs of puberty may include a growth spurt,
absence of axillary and pubic hair, or apocrine
sweat glands, or absence of breast develop-
ment. Lack of pubertal development suggests
ovarian or pituitary failure or a chromosomal
abnormality.
2. Family history of delayed or absent puberty
suggests a familial disorder.
3. Short stature may indicate Turner syndrome or
hypothalamic-pituitary disease.
4. Poor health may be a manifestation of
hypothalamic-pituitary disease. Symptoms of
other hypothalamic-pituitary disease include
headaches, visual field defects, fatigue, or
polyuria and polydipsia.
5. Virilization suggests polycystic ovary syndrome,
an androgen-secreting ovarian or adrenal tumor,
or the presence of Y chromosome material.
6. Recent stress, change in weight, diet, or exer-
cise habits; or illness may suggest hypothalamic
amenorrhea.
7. Heroin and methadone can alter hypothalamic
gonadotropin secretion.
8. Galactorrhea is suggestive of excess prolactin.
Some drugs cause amenorrhea by increasing
serum prolactin concentrations, including
metoclopramide and antipsychotic drugs.
B. Step II: Physical examination
1. An evaluation of pubertal development should
include current height, weight, and arm span
(normal arm span for adults is within 5 cm of
height) and an evaluation of the growth chart.
2. Breast development should be assessed by
Tanner staging.
3. The genital examination should evaluate clitoral
size, pubertal hair development, intactness of
the hymen, depth of the vagina, and presence of
a cervix, uterus, and ovaries. If the vagina can
not be penetrated with a finger, rectal examina-
tion may allow evaluation of the internal organs.
Pelvic ultrasound is also useful to determine the
presence or absence of müllerian structures.
4. The skin should be examined for hirsutism,
acne, striae, increased pigmentation, and
vitiligo.
5. Classic physical features of Turner syndrome
include low hair line, web neck, shield chest, and
widely spaced nipples.
C. Step III: Basic laboratory testing
1. If a normal vagina or uterus are not obviously
present on physical examination, pelvic
ultrasonography should be performed to confirm
the presence or absence of ovaries, uterus, and
cervix. Ultrasonography can be useful to exclude
vaginal or cervical outlet obstruction in patients
with cyclic pain.
a. Uterus absent
(1) If the uterus is absent, evaluation should
include a karyotype and serum testoster-
one. These tests should distinguish ab-
normal müllerian development (46,XX
karyotype with normal female serum
testosterone concentrations) from andro-
gen insensitivity syndrome (46,XY
karyotype and normal male serum testos-
terone concentrations).
(2) Patients with 5-alpha reductase defi-
ciency also have a 46,XY karyotype and
normal male serum testosterone concen-
trations but, in contrast to the androgen
insensitivity syndrome which is associ-
ated with a female phenotype, these
patients undergo striking virilization at the
time of puberty (secondary sexual hair,
muscle mass, and deepening of the
voice).
2. Uterus present. For patients with a normal
vagina and uterus and no evidence of an imper-
forate hymen, vaginal septum, or congenital
absence of the vagina. Measurement of serum
beta human chorionic gonadotropin to exclude
pregnancy and of serum FSH, prolactin, and
TSH.
a. A high serum FSH concentration is indicative
of primary ovarian failure. A karyotype is then
required and may demonstrate complete or
partial deletion of the X chromosome (Turner
syndrome) or the presence of Y chromatin.
The presence of a Y chromosome is associ-
ated with a higher risk of gonadal tumors and
makes gonadectomy mandatory.
b. A low or normal serum FSH concentration
suggests functional hypothalamic
amenorrhea, congenital GnRH deficiency, or
other disorders of the hypothalamic-pituitary
axis. Cranial MR imaging is indicated in most
cases of hypogonadotropic hypogonadism to
evaluate hypothalamic or pituitary disease.
Cranial MRI is recommended for all women
with primary hypogonadotropic
hypogonadism, visual field defects, or head-
aches.
c. Serum prolactin and thyrotropin (TSH) should
be measured, especially if galactorrhea is
present.
d. If there are signs or symptoms of hirsutism,
s e ru m t e s t o s t e r o n e a n d
dehydroepiandrosterone sulfate (DHEA-S)
should be measured to assess for an
androgen-secreting tumor.
e. If hypertension is present, blood tests should
be drawn for evaluate for CYP17 deficiency.
The characteristic findings are elevations in
serum progesterone (>3 ng/mL) and
deoxycorticosterone and low values for serum
17-alpha-hydroxyprogesterone (<0.2 ng/mL).
III. Treatment
A. Treatment of primary amenorrhea is directed at
correcting the underlying pathology; helping the
woman to achieve fertility, if desired; and preven-
tion of complications of the disease.
B. Congenital anatomic lesions or Y chromosome
material usually requires surgery. Surgical correc-
tion of a vaginal outlet obstruction is necessary
before menarche, or as soon as the diagnosis is
made after menarche. Creation of a neovagina for
patients with müllerian failure is usually delayed
until the women is emotionally mature. If Y chromo-
some material is found, gonadectomy should be
performed to prevent gonadal neoplasia. However,
gonadectomy should be delayed until after puberty
in patients with androgen insensitivity syndrome.
These patients have a normal pubertal growth spurt
and feminize at the time of expected puberty.
C. Ovarian failure requires counseling about the
benefits and risks of hormone replacement therapy.
D. Polycystic ovary syndrome is managed with
measures to reduce hirsutism, resume menses,
and fertility and prevent of endometrial hyperplasia,
obesity, and metabolic defects.
E. Functional hypothalamic amenorrhea can usu-
ally be reversed by weight gain, reduction in the
intensity of exercise, or resolution of illness or
emotional stress. For women who want to continue
to exercise, estrogen-progestin replacement ther-
apy should be given to those not seeking fertility to
prevent osteoporosis. Women who want to become
pregnant can be treated with gonadotropins or
pulsatile GnRH.
F. Hypothalamic or pituitary dysfunction that is not
reversible (eg, congenital GnRH deficiency) is
treated with either exogenous gonadotropins or
pulsatile GnRH if the woman wants to become
pregnant.
Secondary Amenorrhea
Amenorrhea (absence of menses) can be a transient,
intermittent, or permanent condition resulting from
dysfunction of the hypothalamus, pituitary, ovaries,
uterus, or vagina. Amenorrhea is classified as either
primary (absence of menarche by age 16 years) or
secondary (absence of menses for more than three
cycles or six months in women who previously had
menses). Pregnancy is the most common cause of
secondary amenorrhea.
I. Diagnosis
A. Step 1: Rule out pregnancy. A pregnancy test is
the first step in evaluating secondary amenorrhea.
Measurement of serum beta subunit of hCG is the
most sensitive test.
B. Step 2: Assess the history
1. Recent stress; change in weight, diet or exercise
habits; or illnesses that might result in hypotha-
lamic amenorrhea should be sought.
2. Drugs associated with amenorrhea, systemic
illnesses that can cause hypothalamic
amenorrhea, recent initiation or discontinuation
of an oral contraceptive, androgenic drugs
(danazol) or high-dose progestin, and
antipsychotic drugs should be evaluated.
3. Headaches, visual field defects, fatigue, or
p o l yu r i a a n d p o l yd i p s i a m a y s u g g e s t
hypothalamic-pituitary disease.
4. Symptoms of estrogen deficiency include hot
flashes, vaginal dryness, poor sleep, or de-
creased libido.
5. G a l a c t o r r h e a i s s u g g e s t i v e o f
hyperprolactinemia. Hirsutism, acne, and a
history of irregular menses are suggestive of
hyperandrogenism.
6. A history of obstetrical catastrophe, severe
bl eeding, dilatatio n a n d c u ret t a g e , o r
endometritis or other infection that might have
caused scarring of the endometrial lining sug-
gests Asherman's syndrome.
Causes of Primary and Secondary Amenorrhea
Abnormality Causes
Pregnancy
Anatomic abnormalities
Congenital abnormality Isolated defect

in Mullerian develop- Testicular feminization syn-
ment drome
5-Alpha-reductase defi-
ciency
Vanishing testes syndrome
Defect in testis determining
factor
Congenital defect of Agenesis of lower vagina

urogenital sinus devel- Imperforate hymen
opment
Acquired ablation or Asherman’s syndrome

scarring of the Tuberculosis
endometrium
Disorders of
hypothalamic-pituitary
ovarian axis
Hypothalamic dysfunc-
tion
Pituitary dysfunction
Ovarian dysfunction
Causes of Amenorrhea due to Abnormalities in
the Hypothalamic-Pituitary-Ovarian Axis
Abnormality Causes
Hypothalamic dys- Functional hypothalamic

function amenorrhea
Weight loss, eating disorders
Exercise
Stress
Severe or prolonged illness
Congenital gonadotropin-releas-
ing hormone deficiency
Inflammatory or infiltrative dis-
eases
Brain tumors - eg,
craniopharyngioma
Pituitary stalk dissection or com-
pression
Cranial irradiation
Brain injury - trauma, hemor-
rhage, hydrocephalus
Other syndromes - Prader-Willi,
Laurence-Moon-Biedl
Pituitary dysfunction Hyperprolactinemia

Other pituitary tumors-
acromegaly, corticotroph
adenomas (Cushing's disease)
Other tumors - meningioma,
germinoma, glioma
Empty sella syndrome
Pituitary infarct or apoplexy
Ovarian dysfunction Ovarian failure (menopause)

Spontaneous
Premature (before age 40
years)
Surgical
Other Hyperthyroidism
Hypothyroidism
Diabetes mellitus
Exogenous androgen use
Drugs Associated with Amenorrhea
Drugs that In- Antipsychotics

crease Prolactin Tricyclic antidepressants
Calcium channel blockers
Drugs with Estro- Digoxin, marijuana, oral contra-

genic Activity ceptives
Drugs with Ovarian Chemotherapeutic agents

Toxicity
C. Step 3: Physical examination. Measurements of

height and weight, signs of other illnesses, and
evidence of cachexia should be assessed. The
skin, breasts, and genital tissues should be evalu-
ated for estrogen deficiency. The breasts should be
palpated, including an attempt to express
galactorrhea. The skin should be examined for
hirsutism, acne, striae, acanthosis nigricans,
vitiligo, thickness or thinness, and easy bruisability.
D. Step 4: Basic laboratory testing. In addition to
measurement of serum hCG to rule out pregnancy,
minimal laboratory testing should include measure-
ments of serum prolactin, thyrotropin, and FSH to
rule out hyperprolactinemia, thyroid disease, and
ovarian failure (high serum FSH). If there is
hirsutism, acne or irregular menses, serum
dehydroepiandrosterone sulfate (DHEA-S) and
testosterone should be measured.
E. Step 5: Follow-up laboratory evaluation
1. High serum prolactin concentration. Prolactin
secretion can be transiently increased by stress
or eating. Therefore, serum prolactin should be
measured at least twice before cranial imaging
is obtained, particularly in those women with
small elevations (<50 ng/mL). These women
should be screened for thyroid disease with a
TSH and free T4 because hypothyroidism can
cause hyperprolactinemia.
2. Women with verified high serum prolactin values
should have a cranial MRI unless a very clear
explanation is found for the elevation (eg,
antipsychotics). Imaging should rule out a hypo-
thalamic or pituitary tumor.
3. High serum FSH concentration. A high serum
FSH concentration indicates the presence of
ovarian failure. This test should be repeated
monthly on three occasions to confirm. A
karyotype should be considered in most women
with secondary amenorrhea age 30 years or
younger.
4. High serum androgen concentrations. A high
serum androgen value may suggest the diagno-
sis of polycystic ovary syndrome or may suggest
an androgen-secreting tumor of the ovary or
adrenal gland. Further testing for a tumor might
include a 24-hour urine collection for cortisol and
17-ketosteroids, determination of serum 17-
hydroxyprogesterone after intravenous injection
of corticotropin (ACTH), and a dexamethasone
suppression test. Elevation of 17-ketosteroids,
DHEA-S, or 17-hydroxyprogesterone is more
consistent with an adrenal, rather than ovarian,
source of excess androgen.
5. Normal or low serum gonadotropin concen-
trations and all other tests normal
a. This result is one of the most common out-
comes of laboratory testing in women with
amenorrhea. Women with hypothalamic
amenorrhea (caused by marked exercise or
weight loss to more than 10 percent below
the expected weight) have normal to low
serum FSH values. Cranial MRI is indicated
in all women without an a clear explanation
for hypogonadotropic hypogonadism and in
most women who have visual field defects or
headaches. No further testing is required if
the onset of amenorrhea is recent or is easily
explained (eg, weight loss, excessive exer-
cise) and there are no symptoms suggestive
of other disease.
b. High serum transferrin saturation may indi-
cate hemochromatosi s , h i g h s erum
angiotensin-converting enzyme values sug-
gest sarcoidosis, and high fasting blood
glucose or hemoglobin A1c values indicate
diabetes mellitus.
6. Normal serum prolactin and FSH concentra-
tions with history of uterine instrumentation
preceding amenorrhea
a. Evaluation for Asherman's syndrome should
be completed. A progestin challenge should
be performed (medroxyprogesterone acetate
10 mg for 10 days). If withdrawal bleeding
occurs, an outflow tract disorder has been
ruled out. If bleeding does not occur, estro-
gen and progestin should be administered.
b. Oral conjugated estrogens (0.625 to 2.5 mg
daily for 35 days) with medroxyprogesterone
added (10 mg daily for days 26 to 35); failure
to bleed upon cessation of this therapy
strongly suggests endometrial scarring. In
this situation, a hysterosalpingogram or
hysteroscopy can confirm the diagnosis of
Asherman syndrome.
II. Treatment
A. Athletic women should be counseled on the need
for increased caloric intake or reduced exercise.
Resumption of menses usually occurs.
B. Nonathletic women who are underweight should
receive nutritional counseling and treatment of
eating disorders.
C. Hyperprolactinemia is treated with a dopamine
agonist. Cabergoline (Dostinex) or bromocriptine
(Parlodel) are used for most adenomas. Ovulation,
regular menstrual cycles, and pregnancy may
usually result.
D. Ovarian failure should be treated with hormone
replacement therapy.
E. Hyperandrogenism is treated with measures to
reduce hirsutism, resume menses, and fertility and
preventing endometrial hyperplasia, obesity, and
metabolic defects.
F. Asherman's syndrome is treated with
hysteroscopic lysis of adhesions followed by long-
term estrogen administration to stimulate regrowth
of endometrial tissue.
Menopause
Menopause is defined as the cessation of menstrual
periods in women. The average age of menopause is 51
years, with a range of 41-55. The diagnosis of meno-
pause is made by the presence of amenorrhea for six to
twelve months, together with the occurrence of hot
flashes. If the diagnosis is in doubt, menopause is
indicated by an elevated follicle-stimulating hormone
(FSH) level greater than 40 mlU/mL.
I. Perimenopausal transition is defined as the two to
eight years preceding menopause and the one year
after the last menstrual period. It is characterized by
normal ovulatory cycles interspersed with anovulatory
(estrogen-only) cycles. As a result, menses become
irregular, and heavy breakthrough bleeding, termed
dysfunctional uterine bleeding, can occur during longer
periods of anovulation.
II. Effects of estrogen deficiency after menopause
A. Hot flashes. The most common acute change
during menopause is the hot flash, which occurs in
75 percent of women. About 50 to 75 percent of
women have cessation of hot flashes within five
years. Hot flashes typically begin as a sudden
sensation of heat centered on the face and upper
chest that rapidly becomes generalized. The
sensation lasts from two to four minutes and is
often associated with profuse perspiration. Hot
flashes occur several times per day.
B. Sexual function. Estrogen deficiency leads to a
decrease in blood flow to the vagina and vulva.
This decrease is a major cause of decreased
vaginal lubrication, dyspareunia, and decreased
sexual function in menopausal women.
C. Urinary incontinence. Menopause results in
atrophy of the urethral epithelium with subsequent
atrophic urethritis and irritation; these changes
predispose to both stress and urge urinary inconti-
nence.
D. Osteoporosis. A long-term consequence of estro-
gen deficiency is the development of osteoporosis
and fractures. Bone loss exceeds bone reforma-
tion. Between 1 and 5 percent of the skeletal mass
can be lost per year in the first several years after
the menopause. Osteoporosis may occur in as little
as ten years.
E. Cardiovascular disease. The incidence of myo-
cardial infarction in women, although lower than in
men, increases dramatically after the menopause.
III. Estrogen replacement therapy
A. Data from the WHI and the HERS trials has deter-
mined that continuous estrogen-progestin therapy
does not appear to protect against cardiovascular
disease and increases the risk of breast cancer,
coronary heart disease, stroke, and venous
thromboembolism over an average follow-up of 5.2
years. As a result, the primary indication for estro-
gen therapy is for control of menopausal symp-
toms, such as hot flashes.
IV. Prevention and treatment of osteoporosis
A. Screening for osteoporosis. Measurement of
BMD is recommended for all women 65 years and
older regardless of risk factors. BMD should also
be measured in all women under the age of 65
years who have one or more risk factors for osteo-
porosis (in addition to menopause). The hip is the
recommended site of measurement.
B. Bisphosphonates
1. Alendronate (Fosamax) has effects compara-
ble to those of estrogen for both the treatment
of osteoporosis (10 mg/day or 70 mg once a
week) and for its prevention (5 mg/day).
Alendronate (in a dose of 5 mg/day or 35
mg/week) can also prevent osteoporosis in
postmenopausal women.
2. Risedronate (Actonel), a bisphosphonate, has
been approved for prevention and treatment of
osteoporosis at doses of 5 mg/day or 35 mg
once per week. Its efficacy and side effect
profile are similar to those of alendronate.
C. Raloxifene (Evista) is a selective estrogen recep-
tor modulator. It is available for prevention and
treatment of osteoporosis. At a dose of 60 mg/day,
bone density increases by 2.4 percent in the
lumbar spine and hip over a two year period. This
effect is slightly less than with bisphosphonates.
D. Calcium. Maintaining a positive calcium balance in
postmenopausal women requires a daily intake of
1500 mg of elemental calcium; to meet this most
women require a supplement of 1000 mg daily.
E. Vitamin D. All postmenopausal women should take
a multivitamin containing at least 400 IU vitamin D
daily.
F. Exercise for at least 20 minutes daily reduces the
rate of bone loss. Weight bearing exercises are
preferable.
V. Treatment of hot flashes and vasomotor instability
A. The manifestations of vasomotor instability are hot
flashes, sleep disturbances, headache, and irrita-
bility. Most women with severe vasomotor instabil-
ity accept short-term estrogen therapy for these
symptoms.
B. Short-term estrogen therapy for relief of vaso-
motor instability and hot flashes
1. Short-term estrogen therapy remains the best
treatment for relief of menopausal symptoms,
and therefore is recommended for most
postmenopausal women, with the exception of
those with a history of breast cancer, CHD, a
previous venous thromboembolic event or
stroke, or those at high risk for these complica-
tions. Short-term therapy is continued for six
months to four or five years. Administration of
estrogen short-term is not associated with an
increased risk of breast cancer.
2. Low dose estrogen is recommended (eg, 0.3
mg conjugated estrogens [Premarin] daily or 0.5
mg estradiol [Estrace] daily). These doses are
adequate for symptom management and pre-
vention of bone loss.
3. Endometrial hyperplasia and cancer can occur
after as little as six months of unopposed estro-
gen therapy; as a result, a progestin must be
added in those women who have not had a
hysterectomy. Medroxyprogesterone (Provera),
2.5 mg, is usually given every day of the month.
4. After the planned treatment interval, the estro-
gen should be discontinued gradually to mini-
mize recurrence of the menopausal symptoms,
for example, by omitting one pill per week (6
pills per week, 5 pills per week, 4 pills per
week).
C. Treatment of vasomotor instability in women
not taking estrogen
1. Selective serotonin reuptake inhibitors
(SSRIs) also relieve the symptoms of vasomotor
instability.
a. Venlafaxine (Effexor), at doses of 75 mg
daily, reduces hot flashes by 61 percent.
Mouth dryness, anorexia, nausea, and con-
stipation are common.
b. Paroxetine (Zoloft), 50 mg per day, relieves
vasomotor instability.
c. Fluoxetine (Prozac) 20 mg per day also has
beneficial effects of a lesser magnitude.
2. Clonidine (Catapres) relieves hot flashes in
80%. In a woman with hypertension, clonidine
might be considered as initial therapy. It is
usually given as a patch containing 2.5 mg per
week. Clonidine also may be given orally in
doses of 0.1 to 0.4 mg daily. Side effects often
limit the use and include dry mouth, dizziness,
constipation, and sedation.
3. Megestrol acetate (Megace) is a synthetic
progestin which decreases the frequency of hot
flashes by 85 percent at a dose of 40 to 80 mg
PO daily. Weight gain is the major side effect.
VI. Treatment of urogenital atrophy
A. Loss of estrogen causes atrophy of the vaginal
epithelium and results in vaginal irritation and
dryness, dyspareunia, and an increase in vaginal
infections. Systemic estrogen therapy results in
relief of symptoms.
B. Treatment of urogenital atrophy in women not
taking systemic estrogen
1. Moisturizers and lubricants. Regular use of a
vaginal moisturizing agent (Replens) and lubri-
cants during intercourse are helpful. Water
soluble lubricants such as Astroglide are more
effective than lubricants that become more
viscous after application such as K-Y jelly. A
more effective treatment is vaginal estrogen
therapy.
2. Low-dose vaginal estrogen
a. Vaginal ring estradiol (Estring), a silastic
ring impregnated with estradiol, is the pre-
ferred means of delivering estrogen to the
vagina. The silastic ring delivers 6 to 9 µg of
estradiol to the vagina daily for a period of
three months. The rings are changed once
every three months by the patient. Concomi-
tant progestin therapy is not necessary.
b. Conjugated estrogens (Premarin), 0.5 gm
of cream, or one-eighth of an applicatorful
daily into the vagina for three weeks, followed
by twice weekly thereafter. Concomitant
progestin therapy is not necessary.
c. Estrace cream (estradiol) can also by given
by vaginal applicator at a dose of one-eighth
of an applicator or 0.5 g (which contains 50
µg of estradiol) daily into the vagina for three
weeks, followed by twice weekly thereafter.
Concomitant progestin therapy is not neces-
sary.
d. Estradiol (Vagifem). A tablet containing 25
micrograms of estradiol is available and is
inserted into the vagina twice per week.
Concomitant progestin therapy is not neces-
sary.
Premenstrual Syndrome and

Premenstrual Dysphoric Disorder
Premenstrual syndrome (PMS) is characterized by
physical and behavioral symptoms that occur repetitively
in the second half of the menstrual cycle and interfere
with some aspects of the woman's life. Premenstrual
dysphoric disorder (PMDD) is the most severe form of
PMS, with the prominence anger, irritability, and internal
tension. PMS affects up to 75 percent of women with
regular menstrual cycles, while PMDD affects only 3 to 8
percent of women.
I. Symptoms
A. The most common physical manifestation of PMS is
abdominal bloating, which occurs in 90 percent of
women with this disorder; breast tenderness and
headaches are also common, occurring in more
than 50 percent of cases.
B. The most common behavioral symptom of PMS is
an extreme sense of fatigue which is seen in more
than 90 percent. Other frequent behavioral com-
plaints include irritability, tension, depressed mood,
labile mood (80 percent), increased appetite (70
percent), and forgetfulness and difficulty concentrat-
ing (50 percent).
C. Other common findings include acne, oversensitivity
to environmental stimuli, anger, easy crying, and
gastrointestinal upset. Hot flashes, heart palpita-
tions, and dizziness occur in 15 to 20 percent of
patients. Symptoms should occur in the luteal phase
only.
Symptom Clusters Commonly Noted in Patients

with PMS
Affective Symptoms Cognitive or performance

Depression or sadness Mood instability or mood
Irritability swings
Tension Difficulty in concentrating
Anxiety Decreased efficiency
Tearfulness or crying easily Confusion
Restlessness or jitteriness Forgetfulness
Anger Accident-prone
Loneliness Social avoidance
Appetite change Temper outbursts
Food cravings Energetic
Changes in sexual interest Fluid retention
Pain Breast tenderness or swell-
Headache or migraine ing
Back pain Weight gain
Breast pain Abdominal bloating or swell-
Abdominal cramps ing
General or muscular pain Swelling of extremities
General somatic
Fatigue or tiredness
Dizziness or vertigo
Nausea
Insomnia
DSM-IV Criteria for Premenstrual Dysphoric
Disorder
• Five or more symptoms

• At least one of the following four symptoms:
Markedly depressed mood, feelings of hopelessness,
or self-deprecating thoughts
Marked anxiety, tension, feeling of being "keyed up"
or "on edge"
Marked affective lability
Persistent and marked anger or irritability or increase
in interpersonal conflicts
• Additional symptoms that may be used to fulfill the crite-
ria:
Decreased interest in usual activities
Subjective sense of difficulty in concentrating
Lethargy, easy fatigability, or marked lack of energy
Marked change in appetite, overeating, or specific
food cravings
Hypersomnia or insomnia
Subjective sense of being overwhelmed or out of
control
• Other physical symptoms such as breast tenderness or
swelling, headaches, joint or muscle pain, a sensation of
bloating, or weight gain
• Symptoms occurring during last week of luteal phase
• Symptoms are absent postmenstrually
• Disturbances that interfere with work or school or with
usual social activities and relationships
• Disturbances that are not an exacerbation of symptoms
of another disorder
D. DSM-IV criteria for premenstrual dysphoric

disorder
1. Five or more of the following symptoms must
have been present during the week prior to
menses, resolving within a few days after men-
ses starts. At least one of the five symptoms
must be one of the first four on this list:
a. Feeling sad, hopeless, or self-deprecating
b. Feeling tense, anxious, or "on edge"
c. Marked lability of mood interspersed with
frequent tearfulness
d. Persistent irritability, anger, and increased
interpersonal conflicts
e. Decreased interest in usual activities, which
may be associated with withdrawal from
social relationships
f. Difficulty concentrating
g. Feeling fatigued, lethargic, or lacking in
energy
h. Marked changes in appetite, which may be
associated with binge eating or craving cer-
tain foods
i. Hypersomnia or insomnia
j. A subjective feeling of being overwhelmed or
out of control
k. Other physical symptoms, such as breast
tenderness or swelling, headaches, joint or
muscle pain, a sensation of bloating, weight
gain.
UCSD Criteria for Premenstrual Syndrome

1. The presence by self report of at least one of the following
somatic and affective symptoms during the five days prior
to menses in each of the three menstrual cycles:
Affective Somatic
Depression Breast tenderness
Angry outbursts Abdominal bloating
Irritability Headache
Confusion Swollen extremities
Social withdrawal
Fatigue
2. Relief of the above symptoms within four days of the

onset of menses, without recurrence until at least cycle
day 12.
3. The symptoms are present in the absence of any phar-
macologic therapy, hormone ingestion, drug or alcohol
use.
4. Identifiable dysfunction in social or economic perfor-
mance by one of the following criteria:
Marital or relationship discord confirmed by partner
Difficulties in parenting
Poor work or school performance, atten-
dance/tardiness
Increased social isolation
Legal difficulties
Suicidal Ideation
Seeking medical attention for a somatic symptom(s)
E. Differential diagnosis
1. PMDD should be differentiated from
premenstrual exacerbation of an underlying
major psychiatric disorder, as well as medical
conditions such as hyper- or hypothyroidism.
2. About 13 percent of women with PMS are found
to have a psychiatric disorder alone with no
evidence of PMS, while 38 percent had
premenstrual exacerbation of underlying depres-
sive and anxiety disorders.
3. Women who present with PMS have a much
higher incidence of major depression in the past
and are at greater risk for major depression in
the future.
4. 39 percent of women with PMDD meet criteria
for mood or anxiety disorders.
5. The assessment of patients with possible PMS
or PMDD should begin with the history, physical
examination, chemistry profile, complete blood
count, and serum TSH. The history should focus
in particular on the regularity of menstrual cy-
cles. Appropriate gynecologic endocrine evalua-
tion should be performed if the cycles are irregu-
lar (lengths less than 25 or greater than 36
days).
6. The patient should be asked to record symp-
toms prospectively for two months. If the patient
fails to demonstrate a symptom free interval in
the follicular phase, she should be evaluated for
a mood or anxiety disorder.
II. Treatment of premenstrual dysphoric disorder
A. Serotonin reuptake inhibitors
1. Fluoxetine (Sarafem) is an effective treatment
for PMDD when given in a daily dose of 20
mg/day. The response rate is 60 to 75 percent.
The most common reasons for failure to con-
tinue the treatment are headache, anxiety, and
nausea.
2. Other drugs that inhibit serotonin reuptake, such
as clomipramine (Anafranil [given either
throughout the menstrual cycle or restricted to
the luteal phase]), sertraline (Zoloft) 50 to 150
mg/day throughout the menstrual cycle, and
nefazodone (Serzone) 100-300 mg bid also may
be effective in PMS.
3. Venlafaxine (Effexor) selectively inhibits the
reuptake of both serotonin and norepinephrine
and is also effective (50 to 200 mg/day).
4. Intermittent therapy given during the luteal
phase only (starting on cycle day 14) has been
shown to be effective.
B. Alprazolam (Xanax), 0.25 mg TID OR qid, has
been shown in double-blind, placebo-controlled
crossover studies to be beneficial in PMS.
C. GnRH agonists (leuprolide [Lupron] or
buserelin) have shown some benefit. However,
women with severe premenstrual depression are
unresponsive to GnRH agonists. The physical
symptoms may be more responsive than mood
symptoms in women with PMS, and side effects
(hypoestrogenism) may limit the use of these drugs
for long-term therapy.
1. GnRH agonists and "add-back" therapy. Add-
back therapy with estrogen (and a progestin if
indicated) mitigates concerns about bone loss
from prolonged administration of GnRH
agonists. Leuprolide alone led to a 75 percent
improvement in luteal phase symptom scores.
This benefit was maintained (60 percent im-
provement) during a crossover period in which
estrogen/progestin replacement was added.
Alendronate can be considered in women who
do not tolerate hormonal add-back therapy but
need osteoporosis prophylaxis.
D. Danazol inhibits pituitary gonadotropin secretion,
and is an effective therapy for PMS. However, the
androgenic side effects of danazol limit its use to
patients who fail to respond adequately to the
above therapies.
Treatment of Premenstrual Syndrome
Fluoxetine (Sarafem) 5-20 mg qd

Sertraline (Zoloft) 25-50 mg qd
Paroxetine (Paxil) 5-20 mg qd
Buspirone (BuSpar) 25 mg qd in divided doses
Alprazolam (Xanax) 0.25-0.50 mg tid
Mefenamic acid (Ponstel) 250 mg tid with meals
Other
Spirolactone (Aldactone) 25-200 mg qd
Cabergoline (Dostinex) 0.25 mg - 1 mg twice a week during
the luteal phase for breast pain
E. Treatments with possible efficacy in PMS

1. Exercise and relaxation techniques. There is
suggestive evidence that exercise, relaxation,
and reflexology may help to alleviate PMS
symptoms.
2. Diuretics. Spironolactone (Aldactone), 25-200
mg qd, may significantly decrease in negative
mood symptom scores and somatic symptom.
F. Recommendations for the clinical management
of PMS/PMDD
1. Because of the proven efficacy and safety
profile, serotonin reuptake inhibitors (SSRIs) are
the first line therapy. Fluoxetine (Sarafem) has
been the best studied. The effective dose is 20
mg/day.
2. Approximately 15 percent of patients will experi-
ence significant side effects from an SSRI,
including nausea, jitteryness, and headache. In
such patients, a trial of either a lower starting
dose or a second SSRI, such as sertraline
(Zoloft) 25-50 mg qd, is warranted.
3. Approximately 15 percent do not respond to an
SSRI over several menstrual cycles. These
women are candidates for alprazolam (Xanax)
0.25 mg TID or QID in the luteal phase of the
cycle.
4. Patients who do not respond to SSRIs or
alprazolam are candidates for ovulation sup-
pression agents. In patients who respond well to
GnRH agonists, therapy may be extended
beyond six months with an attempt at "add-
back" therapy with estrogen and progesterone.
Abnormal Vaginal Bleeding
Menorrhagia (excessive bleeding) is most commonly
caused by anovulatory menstrual cycles. Occasionally it
is caused by thyroid dysfunction, infections or cancer.
I. Pathophysiology of normal menstruation
A. In response to gonadotropin-releasing hormone
from the hypothalamus, the pituitary gland synthe-
sizes follicle-stimulating hormone (FSH) and
luteinizing hormone (LH), which induce the ovaries
to produce estrogen and progesterone.
B. During the follicular phase, estrogen stimulation
causes an increase in endometrial thickness. After
ovulation, progesterone causes endometrial matu-
ration. Menstruation is caused by estrogen and
progesterone withdrawal.
C. Abnormal bleeding is defined as bleeding that
occurs at intervals of less than 21 days, more than
36 days, lasting longer than 7 days, or blood loss
greater than 80 mL.
II. Clinical evaluation of abnormal vaginal bleeding
A. A menstrual and reproductive history should include
last menstrual period, regularity, duration, fre-
quency; the number of pads used per day, and
intermenstrual bleeding.
B. Stress, exercise, weight changes and systemic
diseases, particularly thyroid, renal or hepatic
diseases or coagulopathies, should be sought. The
method of birth control should be determined.
C. Pregnancy complications, such as spontaneous
abortion, ectopic pregnancy, placenta previa and
abruptio placentae, can cause heavy bleeding.
Pregnancy should always be considered as a
possible cause of abnormal vaginal bleeding.
III. Puberty and adolescence--menarche to age 16
A. Irregularity is normal during the first few months of
menstruation; however, soaking more than 25 pads
or 30 tampons during a menstrual period is abnor-
mal.
B. Absence of premenstrual symptoms (breast tender-
ness, bloating, cramping) is associated with
anovulatory cycles.
C. Fever, particularly in association with pelvic or
abdominal pain may, indicate pelvic inflammatory
disease. A history of easy bruising suggests a
coagulation defect. Headaches and visual changes
suggest a pituitary tumor.
D. Physical findings
1. Pallor not associated with tachycardia or signs of
hypovolemia suggests chronic excessive blood
loss secondary to anovulatory bleeding,
adenomyosis, uterine myomas, or blood
dyscrasia.
2. Fever, leukocytosis, and pelvic tenderness
suggests PID.
3. Signs of impending shock indicate that the blood
loss is related to pregnancy (including ectopic),
trauma, sepsis, or neoplasia.
4. Pelvic masses may represent pregnancy, uterine
or ovarian neoplasia, or a pelvic abscess or
hematoma.
5. Fine, thinning hair, and hypoactive reflexes
suggest hypothyroidism.
6. Ecchymoses or multiple bruises may indicate
trauma, coagulation defects, medication use, or
dietary extremes.
E. Laboratory tests
1. CBC and platelet count and a urine or serum
pregnancy test should be obtained.
2. Screening for sexually transmitted diseases,
thyroid function, and coagulation disorders
(partial thromboplastin time, INR, bleeding time)
should be completed.
3. Endometrial sampling is rarely necessary for
those under age 20.
F. Treatment of infrequent bleeding
1. Therapy should be directed at the underlying
cause when possible. If the CBC and other initial
laboratory tests are normal and the history and
physical examination are normal, reassurance is
usually all that is necessary.
2. Ferrous gluconate, 325 mg bid-tid, should be
prescribed.
G. Treatment of frequent or heavy bleeding
1. Treatment with nonsteroidal anti-inflammatory
drugs (NSAIDs) improves platelet aggregation
and increases uterine vasoconstriction. NSAIDs
are the first choice in the treatment of
menorrhagia because they are well tolerated and
do not have the hormonal effects of oral contra-
ceptives.
a. Mefenamic acid (Ponstel) 500 mg tid during
the menstrual period.
b. Naproxen (Anaprox, Naprosyn) 500 mg load-
ing dose, then 250 mg tid during the men-
strual period.
c. Ibuprofen (Motrin, Nuprin) 400 mg tid during
the menstrual period.
d. Gastrointestinal distress is common. NSAIDs
are contraindicated in renal failure and peptic
ulcer disease.
2. Iron should also be added as ferrous gluconate
325 mg tid.
H. Patients with hypovolemia or a hemoglobin level
below 7 g/dL should be hospitalized for hormonal
therapy and iron replacement.
1. Hormonal therapy consists of estrogen
(Premarin) 25 mg IV q6h until bleeding stops.
Thereafter, oral contraceptive pills should be
administered q6h x 7 days, then taper slowly to
one pill qd.
2. If bleeding continues, IV vasopressin (DDAVP)
should be administered. Hysteroscopy may be
necessary, and dilation and curettage is a last
resort. Transfusion may be indicated in severe
hemorrhage.
325 mg tid.
IV. Primary childbearing years – ages 16 to early
40s
A. Contraceptive complications and pregnancy are the
most common causes of abnormal bleeding in this
age group. Anovulation accounts for 20% of cases.
B. Adenomyosis, endometriosis, and fibroids increase
in frequency as a woman ages, as do endometrial
hyperplasia and endometrial polyps. Pelvic inflam-
matory disease and endocrine dysfunction may also
occur.
C. Laboratory tests
1. CBC and platelet count, Pap smear, and preg-
nancy test.
2. Screening for sexually transmitted diseases,
thyroid-stimulating hormone, and coagulation
disorders (partial thromboplastin time, INR,
bleeding time).
3. If a non-pregnant woman has a pelvic mass,
ultrasonography or hysterosonography (with
uterine saline infusion) is required.
D. Endometrial sampling
1. Long-term unopposed estrogen stimulation in
anovulatory patients can result in endometrial
hyperplasia, which can progress to adeno-
carcinoma; therefore, in perimenopausal patients
who have been anovulatory for an extended
interval, the endometrium should be biopsied.
2. Biopsy is also recommended before initiation of
hormonal therapy for women over age 30 and for
those over age 20 who have had prolonged
bleeding.
3. Hysteroscopy and endometrial biopsy with a
Pipelle aspirator should be done on the first day
of menstruation (to avoid an unexpected preg-
nancy) or anytime if bleeding is continuous.
E. Treatment
1. Medical protocols for anovulatory bleeding
(dysfunctional uterine bleeding) are similar to
those described above for adolescents.
2. Hormonal therapy
a. In women who do not desire immediate fertil-
ity, hormonal therapy may be used to treat
menorrhagia.
b. A 21-day package of oral contraceptives is
used. The patient should take one pill three
times a day for 7 days. During the 7 days of
therapy, bleeding should subside, and, follow-
ing treatment, heavy flow will occur. After 7
days off the hormones, another 21-day pack-
age is initiated, taking one pill each day for 21
days, then no pills for 7 days.
c. Alternatively, medroxyprogesterone (Provera),
10-20 mg per day for days 16 through 25 of
each month, will result in a reduction of men-
strual blood loss. Pregnancy will not be
prevented.
d. Patients with severe bleeding may have
hypotension and tachycardia. These patients
require hospitalization, and estrogen
(Premarin) should be administered IV as 25
mg q4-6h until bleeding slows (up to a maxi-
mum of four doses). Oral contraceptives
should be initiated concurrently as described
above.
325 mg tid.
4. Surgical treatment can be considered if child-
bearing is completed and medical management
fails to provide relief.
V. P r e m e n o p a u s a l , p e r i m e n o p a u s a l , a n d
postmenopausal years--age 40 and over
A. Anovulatory bleeding accounts for about 90% of
abnormal vaginal bleeding in this age group.
However, bleeding should be considered to be
from cancer until proven otherwise.
B. History, physical examination and laboratory
testing are indicated as described above. Meno-
pausal symptoms, personal or family history of
malignancy and use of estrogen should be sought.
A pelvic mass requires an evaluation with
ultrasonography.
C. Endometrial carcinoma
1. In a perimenopausal or postmenopausal wom-
an, amenorrhea preceding abnormal bleeding
suggests endometrial cancer. Endometrial
evaluation is necessary before treatment of
abnormal vaginal bleeding.
2. Before endometrial sampling, determination of
endometrial thickness by transvaginal
ultrasonography is useful because biopsy is
often not required when the endometrium is less
than 5 mm thick.
D. Treatment
1. Cystic hyperplasia or endometrial hyperplasia
without cytologic atypia is treated with depo-
medroxyprogesterone, 200 mg IM, then 100 to
200 mg IM every 3 to 4 weeks for 6 to 12
months. Endometrial hyperplasia requires
repeat endometrial biopsy every 3 to 6 months.
2. Atypical hyperplasia requires fractional dilation
and curettage, followed by progestin therapy or
hysterectomy.
3. If the patient's endometrium is normal (or atro-
phic) and contraception is a concern, a low-
dose oral contraceptive may be used. If contra-
ception is not needed, estrogen and progester-
one therapy should be prescribed.
4. Surgical management
a. Vaginal or abdominal hysterectomy is the
most absolute curative treatment.
b. Dilatation and curettage can be used as a
temporizing measure to stop bleeding.
c. Endometrial ablation and resection by
laser, electrodiathermy “rollerball,” or
excisional resection are alternatives to
hysterectomy.
Breast Cancer Screening and Diag-

nosis
Breast cancer is the second most commonly diagnosed

cancer among women, after skin cancer. Approximately
182,800 new cases of invasive breast cancer are diag-
nosed in the United States per year. The incidence of
breast cancer increases with age. White women are more
likely to develop breast cancer than black women. The
incidence of breast cancer in white women is about 113
cases per 100,000 women and in black women, 100
cases per 100,000.
I. Risk Factors
Risk Factors for Breast Cancer
Age greater than 50 years Age greater than 30 at

Prior history of breast first birth
cancer Obesity
Family history High socioeconomic sta-
Early menarche, before tus
age 12 Atypical hyperplasia on
Late menopause, after biopsy
age 50 Ionizing radiation expo-
Nulliparity sure
A. Family history is highly significant in a first-degree

relative (ie, mother, sister, daughter), especially if the
cancer has been diagnosed premenopausally.
Women who have premenopausal first-degree rela-
tives with breast cancer have a three- to fourfold
increased risk of breast cancer. Having several
second-degree relatives with breast cancer may
further increase the risk of breast cancer. Most
women with breast cancer have no identifiable risk
factors.
B. Approximately 8 percent of all cases of breast cancer
are hereditary. About one-half of these cases are
attributed to mutations in the BRCA1 and BRCA2
genes. Hereditary breast cancer commonly occurs in
premenopausal women. Screening tests are available
that detect BRCA mutations.
II. Diagnosis and evaluation
A. Clinical evaluation of a breast mass should assess
duration of the lesion, associated pain, relationship to
the menstrual cycle or exogenous hormone use, and
change in size since discovery. The presence of
nipple discharge and its character (bloody or tea-
colored, unilateral or bilateral, spontaneous or ex-
pressed) should be assessed.
B. Menstrual history. The date of last menstrual period,
age of menarche, age of menopause or surgical
removal of the ovaries, previous pregnancies should
be determined.
C. History of previous breast biopsies, cyst aspiration,
dates and results of previous mammograms should
be determined.
D. Family history should document breast cancer in
relatives and the age at which family members were
diagnosed.
III. Physical examination
A. The breasts should be inspected for asymmetry,
deformity, skin retraction, erythema, peau d'orange
(breast edema), and nipple retraction, discoloration, or
inversion.
B. Palpation
1. The breasts should be palpated while the patient is
sitting and then supine with the ipsilateral arm
extended. The entire breast should be palpated
systematically. The mass should be evaluated for
size, shape, texture, tenderness, fixation to skin or
chest wall.
2. A mass that is suspicious for breast cancer is
usually solitary, discrete and hard. In some in-
stances, it is fixed to the skin or the muscle. A
suspicious mass is usually unilateral and
nontender. Sometimes, an area of thickening may
represent cancer. Breast cancer is rarely bilateral.
The nipples should be expressed for discharge.
3. The axillae should be palpated for adenopathy,
with an assessment of size of the lymph nodes,
number, and fixation.
IV. Mammography. Screening mammograms are recom-
mended every year for asymptomatic women 40 years
and older. Unfortunately, only 60 percent of cancers
are diagnosed at a local stage.
Screening for Breast Cancer in Women
Age American Cancer Society guide-

lines
20 to 39 years Clinical breast examination every

three years
Monthly self-examination of breasts
Age 40 years Annual mammogram

and older Annual clinical breast examination
Monthly self-examination of breasts
V. Methods of breast biopsy

A. Palpable masses. Fine-needle aspiration biopsy
(FNAB) has a sensitivity ranging from 90-98%.
Nondiagnostic aspirates require surgical biopsy.
1. The skin is prepped with alcohol and the lesion is
immobilized with the nonoperating hand. A 10 mL
syringe, with a 14 gauge needle, is introduced in to
the central portion of the mass at a 90° angle.
When the needle enters the mass, suction is
applied by retracting the plunger, and the needle is
advanced. The needle is directed into different
areas of the mass while maintaining suction on the
syringe.
2. Suction is slowly released before the needle is
withdrawn from the mass. The contents of the
needle are placed onto glass slides for pathologic
examination.
3. Excisional biopsy is done when needle biopsies
are negative but the mass is clinically suspected of
malignancy.
B. Stereotactic core needle biopsy. Using a computer-
driven stereotactic unit, the lesion is localized in three
dimensions, and an automated biopsy needle obtains
samples. The sensitivity and specificity of this tech-
nique are 95-100% and 94-98%, respectively.
C. Nonpalpable lesions
1. Needle localized biopsy
a. Under mammographic guidance, a needle and
hookwire are placed into the breast parenchyma
adjacent to the lesion. The patient is taken to the
operating room along with mammograms for an
excisional breast biopsy.
b. The skin and underlying tissues are infiltrated
with 1% lidocaine with epinephrine. For lesions
located within 5 cm of the nipple, a periareolar
incision may be used or use a curved incision
located over the mass and parallel to the areola.
Incise the skin and subcutaneous fat, then
palpate the lesion and excise the mass.
c. After removal of the specimen, a specimen x-ray
is performed to confirm that the lesion has been
removed. The specimen can then be sent fresh
for pathologic analysis.
d. Close the subcutaneous tissues with a 4-0
chromic catgut suture, and close the skin with 4-
0 subcuticular suture.
D. Ultrasonography. Screening is useful to differentiate
between solid and cystic breast masses when a
palpable mass is not well seen on a mammogram.
Ultrasonography is especially helpful in young women
with dense breast tissue when a palpable mass is not
visualized on a mammogram. Ultrasonography is not
used for routine screening because
microcalcifications are not visualized and the yield of
carcinomas is negligible.
Breast Disorders
Breast pain, nipple discharge and a palpable mass are
the most common breast problems for which women
consult a physician.
I. Nipple Discharge
A. Clinical evaluation
1. Nipple discharge may be a sign of cancer; there-
fore, it must be thoroughly evaluated. About 8%
of biopsies performed for nipple discharge dem-
onstrate cancer. The duration, bilaterality or
unilaterality of the discharge, and the presence of
blood should be determined. A history of oral
contraceptives, hormone preparations,
phenothiazines, nipple or breast stimulation or
lactation should be sought. Discharges that flow
spontaneously are more likely to be pathologic
than discharges that must be manually ex-
pressed.
2. Unilateral, pink colored, bloody or non-milky
discharge, or discharges associated with a mass
are the discharges of most concern. Milky dis-
charge can be caused by oral contraceptive
agents, estrogen replacement therapy,
phenothiazines, prolactinoma, or hypothyroidism.
Nipple discharge secondary to malignancy is
more likely to occur in older patients.
3. Risk factors. The assessment should identify
risk factors, including age over 50 years, past
personal history of breast cancer, history of
hyperplasia on previous breast biopsies, and
family history of breast cancer in a first-degree
relative (mother, sister, daughter).
B. Physical examination should include inspection of
the breast for ulceration or contour changes and
inspection of the nipple. Palpation should be per-
formed with the patient in both the upright and the
supine positions to determine the presence of a
mass.
C. Diagnostic evaluation
1. Bloody discharge. A mammogram of the in-
volved breast should be obtained if the patient is
over 35 years old and has not had a
mammogram within the preceding 6 months.
Biopsy of any suspicious lesions should be
completed.
2. Watery, unilateral discharge should be referred
to a surgeon for evaluation and possible biopsy.
3. Non-bloody discharge should be tested for the
presence of blood with a Hemoccult card. Nipple
discharge secondary to carcinoma usually con-
tains hemoglobin.
4. Milky, bilateral discharge should be evaluated
with assays of prolactin and thyroid stimulating
hormone to exclude an endocrinologic cause.
a. A mammogram should be performed if the pa-
tient is due for routine mammographic screen-
ing.
b. If results of the mammogram and the
endocrinologic screening studies are normal,
the patient should return for a follow-up visit in
6 months to ensure that there has been no
specific change in the character of the dis-
charge, such as development of bleeding.
II. Breast Pain
A. Breast pain is the most common breast symptom
causing women to consult primary care physicians.
Mastalgia is more common in premenopausal
women than in postmenopausal women, and it is
rarely a presenting symptom of breast cancer.
B. The evaluation of breast pain should determine the
type of pain, its location and its relationship to the
menstrual cycle. Most commonly, breast pain is
associated with the menstrual cycle (cyclic
mastalgia).
C. Cyclic pain is usually bilateral and poorly localized.
The pain is often relieved after the menses. Cyclic
breast pain occurs more often in younger women
and resolves spontaneously.
D. Noncyclic mastalgia is most common in women 40
to 50 years of age. It is often a unilateral pain.
Noncyclic mastalgia is occasionally secondary to
the presence of a fibroadenoma or cyst, and the
pain may be relieved by treatment of the underlying
breast lesion.
E. Evaluation. A thorough breast examination should
be performed to exclude the presence of a breast
mass. Women 35 years of age and older should
undergo mammography unless a mammogram was
obtained in the past 12 months. If a suspicious
lesion is detected, biopsy is required. When the
physical examination is normal, imaging studies are
not indicated in women younger than 35 years of
age. A follow-up clinical breast examination should
be performed in 1-2 months.
F. Mastodynia
1. Mastodynia is defined as breast pain in the
absence of a mass or other pathologic abnormal-
ity.
2. Causes of mastodynia include menstrually
related pain, costochondritis, trauma, and
sclerosing adenosis.
III.Fibrocystic Complex
A. Breast changes are usually multifocal, bilateral, and
diffuse. One or more isolated fibrocystic lumps or
areas of asymmetry may be present. The areas are
usually tender.
B. This disorder predominantly occurs in women with
premenstrual abnormalities, nulliparous women,
and nonusers of oral contraceptives.
C. The disorder usually begins in mid-20's or early
30's. Tenderness is associated with menses and
lasts about a week. The upper outer quadrant of the
breast is most frequently involved bilaterally. There
is no increased risk of cancer for the majority of
patients.
D. Suspicious areas may be evaluated by fine needle
aspiration (FNA) cytology. If mammography and
FNA are negative for cancer, and the clinical
examination is benign, open biopsy is generally not
needed.
E. Medical management of fibrocystic complex
1. Oral contraceptives are effective for severe
breast pain in most young women. Start with a
pill that contains low amounts of estrogen and
relatively high amounts of progesterone
(Loestrin, LoOvral, Ortho-Cept).
2. If oral contraceptives do not provide relief,
medroxyprogesterone, 5-10 mg/day from days
15-25 of each cycle, is added.
3. A professionally fitted support bra often provides
significant relief.
4. Danazol (Danocrine), an antigonadotropin, has
a response rate of 50 to 75 percent in women
with cyclic pain who received danazol in a dos-
age of 100 to 400 mg per day. Danazol therapy
is recommended only for patients with severe,
activity-limiting pain. Side effects include men-
strual irregularity, acne, weight gain and
hirsutism.
5. Evening primrose oil (g-linolenic acid) is effec-
tive in about 38 to 58 percent of patients with
mastalgia; 2 - 4 g per day.
IV. Breast Masses
A. The normal glandular tissue of the breast is nodu-
lar. Nodularity is a physiologic process and is not
an indication of breast pathology. Dominant
masses may be discrete or poorly defined, but they
differ in character from the surrounding breast
tissue. The differential diagnosis of a dominant
breast mass includes macrocyst (clinically evident
cyst), fibroadenoma, prominent areas of fibrocystic
change, fat necrosis and cancer.
B. Cystic Breast Masses
1. Cysts are a common cause of dominant breast
masses in premenopausal women more than 40
years of age, but they are an infrequent cause of
such masses in younger women. Cysts are
usually well demarcated, firm and mobile.
2. Ultrasonography or aspiration must establish a
definitive diagnosis for a cyst. Cysts require
surgical biopsy if the aspirated fluid is bloody, the
palpable abnormality does not resolve com-
pletely after the aspiration of fluid or the same
cyst recurs multiple times in a short period of
time. Routine cytologic examination of cyst fluid
is not indicated.
3. Nonpalpable cysts identified by mammography
and confirmed to be simple cysts by ultrasound
examination require no treatment.
C. Solid Breast Masses
1. Noncystic masses in premenopausal women that
are clearly different from the surrounding breast
tissue require histologic sampling by fine-needle
aspiration, core cutting, needle biopsy or
excisional biopsy.
2. Solid Masses in Women Less Than 40 Years
of Age
a. If the physical examination reveals no evi-
dence of a dominant breast mass, the patient
should be reassured and instructed in breast
self-examination. If the clinical significance of
a physical finding is uncertain, a directed
ultrasound examination is performed. If this
examination does not demonstrate a mass,
the physical examination is repeated in two to
four months. In women 35 to 40 years of age
who have a normal ultrasound examination, a
mammogram may also be obtained.
b. A suspicious mass is solitary, discrete, hard
and adherent to adjacent tissue. Mammogra-
phy should be performed before obtaining a
pathologic diagnosis.
c. If a clinically benign mass is present, an
ultrasound examination and fine-needle aspi-
ration are performed to confirm that the mass
is benign. This approach is the “triple test”
(clinical examination, ultrasonography [or
mammography] and fine-needle aspiration).
3. Solid Masses in Women More Than 40 Years
of Age. Abnormalities detected on physical
examination in older women should be regarded
as possible cancers until they are proven to be
benign. In women more than 40 years of age,
diagnostic mammography is a standard part of
the evaluation of a solid breast mass.
Sexual Assault
Sexual assault is defined as any sexual act performed by
one person on another without the person's consent.
Sexual assault includes genital, anal, or oral penetration
by a part of the accused's body or by an object. It may
result from force, the threat of force, or the victim's
inability to give consent. The annual incidence of sexual
assault is 200 per 100,000 persons.
I. Psychological effects
A. A woman who is sexually assaulted loses control
over her life during the period of the assault. Her
integrity and her life are threatened. She may
experience intense anxiety, anger, or fear. After the
assault, a "rape-trauma" syndrome often occurs.
The immediate response may last for hours or days
and is characterized by generalized pain, head-
ache, chronic pelvic pain, eating and sleep distur-
bances, vaginal symptoms, depression, anxiety,
and mood swings.
B. The delayed phase is characterized by flashbacks,
nightmares, and phobias.
II. Medical evaluation
A. Informed consent must be obtained before the
examination. Acute injuries should be stabilized.
About 1% of injuries require hospitalization and
major operative repair, and 0.1% of injuries are
fatal.
B. A history and physical examination should be
performed. A chaperon should be present during
the history and physical examination to reassure
the victim and provide support. The patient should
be asked to state in her own words what happened,
identify her attacker if possible, and provide details
of the act(s) performed if possible.
Clinical Care of the Sexual Assault Victim
Medical
Obtain informed consent from the patient
Obtain a gynecologic history
Assess and treat physical injuries
Obtain appropriate cultures and treat any existing
infections
Provide prophylactic antibiotic therapy and offer
immunizations
Provide therapy to prevent unwanted conception
Offer baseline serologic tests for hepatitis B vi-
rus, human immunodeficiency virus (HIV), and
syphilis
Provide counseling
Arrange for follow-up medical care and counsel-
ing
Legal
Provide accurate recording of events
Document injuries
Collect samples (pubic hair, fingernail scrapings,
vaginal secretions, saliva, blood-stained clothing)
Report to authorities as required
Assure chain of evidence
C. Previous obstetric and gynecologic conditions

should be sought, particularly infections, preg-
nancy, use of contraception, and date of the last
menstrual period. Preexisting pregnancy, risk for
pregnancy, and the possibility of preexisting infec-
tions should be assessed.
D. Physical examination of the entire body and
photographs or drawings of the injured areas
should be completed. Bruises, abrasions, and
lacerations should be sought. Superficial or exten-
sive lacerations of the hymen and vagina, injury to
the urethra, and occasionally rupture of the vaginal
vault into the abdominal cavity may be noted. Bite
marks are common.
1. Pelvic examination should assess the status of
the reproductive organs, collect samples from
the cervix and vagina, and test for Neisseria
gonorrhoeae and Chlamydia trachomatis.
2. A Wood light should be used to find semen on
the patient's body: dried semen will fluoresce.
Sperm and other Y-chromosome-bearing cells
may be identified from materials collected from
victims.
E. A serum sample should be obtained for baseline
serology for syphilis, herpes simplex virus, hepatitis
B virus, and HIV.
F. Trichomonas is the most frequently acquired STD.
The risk of acquiring human immunodeficiency
virus (HIV) <1% during a single act of heterosexual
intercourse, but the risk depends on the population
involved and the sexual acts performed. The risk of
acquiring gonorrhea is 6-12%, and the risk of
acquiring syphilis is 3%.
G. Hepatitis B virus is 20 times more infectious than
HIV during sexual intercourse. Hepatitis B immune
globulin (0.06 mL of hepatitis B immune globulin
per kilogram) should be administered intramuscu-
larly as soon as possible within 14 days of expo-
sure. It is followed by the standard three-dose
immunization series with hepatitis B vaccine (0, 1,
and 6 months), beginning at the time of hepatitis B
immune globulin administration.
H. Emergency contraception. If the patient is found
to be at risk for pregnancy as a result of the as-
sault, emergency contraception should be offered.
The risk of pregnancy after sexual assault is 2-4%
in victims not already using contraception. One
dose of combination oral contraceptive tablets is
given at the time the victim is seen and an addi-
tional dose is given in 12 hours. Emergency contra-
ception can be effective up to 120 hours after
unprotected coitus. Metoclopramide (Reglan), 20
mg with each dose of hormone, is prescribed for
nausea. A pregnancy test should be performed at
the 2-week return visit if conception is suspected.
Emergency Contraception
1. Consider pretreatment one hour before each oral

contraceptive pill dose, using one of the following
orally administered antiemetic agents:
Prochlorperazine (Compazine), 5 to 10 mg
Promethazine (Phenergan), 12.5 to 25 mg
Trimethobenzamide (Tigan), 250 mg
2. Administer the first dose of oral contraceptive pill within
72 hours of intercourse, and administer the second
dose 12 hours after the first dose. Brand name options
for emergency contraception include the following:
Preven Kit--two pills per dose (0.5 mg of levonorgestrel
Ovral--two pills per dose (0.5 mg of levonorgestrel and
100 µg of ethinyl estradiol per dose)
Plan B--one pill per dose (0.75 mg of levonorgestrel
per dose)
Nordette--four pills per dose (0.6 mg of levonorgestrel
Triphasil--four pills per dose (0.5 mg of levonorgestrel
Screening and Treatment of Sexually Transmis-
sible Infections Following Sexual Assault
Initial Examination
Infection
• Testing for and gonorrhea and chlamydia from speci-
mens from any sites of penetration or attempted pene-
tration
• Wet mount and culture or a vaginal swab specimen for
Trichomonas
• Serum sample for syphilis, herpes simplex virus, hepati-
tis B virus, and HIV
Pregnancy Prevention
Prophylaxis
• Hepatitis B virus vaccination and hepatitis B immune
globulin.
• Empiric recommended antimicrobial therapy for
chlamydial, gonococcal, and trichomonal infections and
for bacterial vaginosis:
Ceftriaxone, 125 mg intramuscularly in a single dose,
plus
Metronidazole, 2 g orally in a single dose, plus
Doxycycline 100 mg orally two times a day for 7 days
Azithromycin (Zithromax) is used if the patient is unlikely
to comply with the 7 day course of doxycycline; single
dose of four 250 mg caps.
If the patient is penicillin-allergic, ciprofloxacin 500 mg
PO or ofloxacin 400 mg PO is substituted for
ceftriaxone. If the patient is pregnant, erythromycin
500 mg PO qid for 7 days is substituted for
doxycycline.
HIV prophylaxis consists of zidovudine (AZT) 200 mg
PO tid, plus lamivudine (3TC) 150 mg PO bid for 4
weeks.
Follow-Up Examination (2 weeks)
• Cultures for N gonorrhoeae and C trachomatis (not

needed if prophylactic treatment has been provided)
• Wet mount and culture for T vaginalis
• Collection of serum sample for subsequent serologic
analysis if test results are positive
Follow-Up Examination (12 weeks)
Serologic tests for infectious agents:

T pallidum
HIV (repeat test at 6 months)
Hepatitis B virus (not needed if hepatitis B virus vaccine
was given)
III. Emotional care

A. The physician should discuss the injuries and the
probability of infection or pregnancy with the victim,
and she should be allowed to express her anxi-
eties.
B. Anxiolytic medication may be useful; lorazepam
(Ativan) 1-5 mg PO tid prn anxiety.
C. The patient should be referred to personnel trained
to handle rape-trauma victims within 1 week.
IV. Follow-up care
A. The patient is seen for medical follow-up in 2
weeks for documentation of healing of injuries.
B. Repeat testing includes syphilis, hepatitis B, and
gonorrhea and chlamydia cultures. HIV serology
should be repeated in 3 months and 6 months.
C. A pregnancy test should be performed if concep-
tion is suspected.
Osteoporosis
Over 1.3 million osteoporotic fractures occur each year in
the United States. The risk of all fractures increases with
age; among persons who survive until age 90, 33 percent
of women will have a hip fracture. The lifetime risk of hip
fracture for white women at age 50 is 16 percent. Osteo-
porosis i s c h aracterized by low bone mass,
microarchitectural disruption, and increased skeletal
fragility.
Risk Factors for Osteoporotic Fractures
Personal history of fracture White race

as an adult Advanced age
History of fracture in a first- Lifelong low calcium intake
degree relative Alcoholism
Current cigarette smoking Inadequate physical activ-
Low body weight (less than ity
58 kg [127 lb]) Recurrent falls
Female sex Dementia
Estrogen deficiency (meno- Impaired eyesight despite
pause before age 45 years adequate correction
or bilateral ovariectomy, Poor health/frailty
prolonged premenopausal
amenorrhea [greater than
one year])
I. Screening for osteoporosis and osteopenia

A. Normal bone density is defined as a bone mineral
density (BMD) value within one standard deviation
of the mean value in young adults of the same sex
and race.
B. Osteopenia is defined as a BMD between 1 and
2.5 standard deviations below the mean.
C. Osteoporosis is defined as a value more than 2.5
standard deviations below the mean; this level is
the fracture threshold. These values are referred to
as T-scores (number of standard deviations above
or below the mean value).
D. Dual x-ray absorptiometry. In dual x-ray
absorptiometry (DXA), two photons are emitted from
an x-ray tube. DXA is the most commonly used
method for measuring bone density because it
gives very precise measurements with minimal
radiation. DXA measurements of the spine and hip
are recommended.
E. Biochemical markers of bone turnover. Urinary
deoxypyridinoline (DPD) and urinary alpha-1 to
alpha-2 N-telopeptide of collagen (NTX) are the
most specific and clinically useful markers of bone
resorption. Biochemical markers are not useful for
the screening or diagnosis of osteoporosis because
the values in normal and osteoporosis overlap
substantially.
II. Recommendations for screening for oseteoporosis
of the National Osteoporosis Foundation
A. All women should be counseled about the risk
factors for osteoporosis, especially smoking cessa-
tion and limiting alcohol. All women should be
encouraged to participate in regular weight-bearing
and exercise.
B. Measurement of BMD is recommended for all
women 65 years and older regardless of risk
factors. BMD should also be measured in all
women under the age of 65 years who have one or
more risk factors for osteoporosis (in addition to
menopause). The hip is the recommended site of
measurement.
C. All adults should be advised to consume at least
1,200 mg of calcium per day and 400 to 800 IU of
vitamin D per day. A daily multivitamin (which
provides 400 IU) is recommended. In patients with
documented vitamin D deficiency, osteoporosis, or
previous fracture, two multivitamins may be reason-
able, particularly if dietary intake is inadequate and
access to sunlight is poor.
D. Treatment is recommended for women without risk
factors who have a BMD that is 2 SD below the
mean for young women, and in women with risk
factors who have a BMD that is 1.5 SD below the
mean.
III. Nonpharmacologic therapy of osteoporosis in
women
A. Diet. An optimal diet for treatment (or prevention)
of osteoporosis includes an adequate intake of
calories (to avoid malnutrition), calcium, and vita-
min D.
B. Calcium. Postmenopausal women should be
advised to take 1000 to 1500 mg/day of elemental
calcium, in divided doses, with meals.
C. Vitamin D total of 800 IU daily should be taken.
D. Exercise. Women should exercise for at least 30
minutes three times per week. Any weight-bearing
exercise regimen, including walking, is acceptable.
E. Cessation of smoking is recommended for all
women because smoking cigarettes accelerates
bone loss.
IV.Drug therapy of osteoporosis in women
A. Selected postmenopausal women with osteoporo-
sis or at high risk for the disease should be consid-
ered for drug therapy. Particular attention should be
paid to treating women with a recent fragility frac-
ture, including hip fracture, because they are at
high risk for a second fracture.
B. Candidates for drug therapy are women who
already have postmenopausal osteoporosis (less
than -2.5) and women with osteopenia (T score -1
to -2.5) soon after menopause.
C. Bisphosphonates
1. Alendronate (Fosamax) (10 mg/day or 70 mg
once weekly) or risedronate (Actonel) (5
mg/day or 35 mg once weekly) are good choices
for the treatment of osteoporosis.
Bisphosphonate therapy increases bone mass
and reduces the incidence of vertebral and
nonvertebral fractures.
2. Alendronate (5 mg/day or 35 mg once weekly)
and risedronate (5 mg/day of 35 mg once
weekly) have been approved for prevention of
osteoporosis.
3. Alendronate or risedronate should be taken with
a full glass of water 30 minutes before the first
meal or beverage of the day. Patients should not
lie down for at least 30 minutes after taking the
dose to avoid the unusual complication of pill-
induced esophagitis.
4. Alendronate is well tolerated and effective for at
least seven years.
5. The bisphosphonates (alendronate or
risedronate) and raloxifene are first-line treat-
ments for prevention of osteoporosis. The
bisphosphonates are first-line therapy for treat-
ment of osteoporosis. Bisphosphonates are
preferred for prevention and treatment of osteo-
porosis because they increase bone mineral
density more than raloxifene.
D. Selective estrogen receptor modulators
1. Raloxifene (Evista) (5 mg daily or a once-a-
week preparation) is a selective estrogen recep-
tor modulator (SERM) for prevention and treat-
ment of osteoporosis. It increases bone mineral
density and reduces serum total and low-
density-lipoprotein (LDL) cholesterol. It also
appears to reduce the incidence of vertebral
fractures and is one of the first-line drugs for
prevention of osteoporosis.
2. Raloxifene is somewhat less effective than the
bisphosphonates for the prevention and treat-
ment of osteoporosis. Venous thromboembolism
is a risk.
Treatment Guidelines for Osteoporosis
Calcium supplements with or without vitamin D supple-

ments or calcium-rich diet
Weight-bearing exercise
Avoidance of alcohol tobacco products
Alendronate (Fosamax)
Risedronate (Actonel)
Raloxifene (Evista)
Agents for Treating Osteoporosis
Medication Dosage Route
Calcium 1,000 to 1,500 Oral

mg per day
Vitamin D 400 IU per day Oral

(800 IU per day
in winter in
northern lati-
tudes)
Alendronate Prevention: 5 Oral

(Fosamax) mg per day or
35 mg once-a-
week
Treatment: 10
mg per day or
70 mg once-a-
week
Risedronate 5 mg daily or 35 Oral

(Actonel) mg once weekly
Raloxifene 60 mg per day Oral

(Evista)
Conjugated 0.3 mg per day Oral

estrogens
E. Monitoring the response to therapy

1. Bone mineral density and a marker of bone
turnover should be measured at baseline, fol-
lowed by a repeat measurement of the marker in
three months.
2. If the marker falls appropriately, the drug is
having the desired effect, and therapy should be
continued for two years, at which time bone
mineral density can be measured again. The
anticipated three-month decline in markers is 50
percent with alendronate.
F. Estrogen/progestin therapy
1. Estrogen-progestin therapy is no longer a first-
line approach for the treatment of osteoporosis
in postmenopausal women because of in-
creases in the risk of breast cancer, stroke,
venous thromboembolism, and coronary dis-
ease.
2. Indic ations for estrogen-progestin in
postmenopausal women include persistent
menopausal symptoms and patients with an
indication for antiresorptive therapy who cannot
tolerate the other drugs.
Urinary Incontinence
Women between the ages of 20 to 80 year have an
overall prevalence for urinary incontinence of 53.2
percent.
I. Types of Urinary Incontinence
A. Stress Incontinence
1. Stress incontinence is the involuntary loss of
urine produced by coughing, laughing or exercis-
ing. The underlying abnormality is typically
urethral hypermobility caused by a failure of the
anatomic supports of the bladder neck. Loss of
bladder neck support is often attributed to injury
occurring during vaginal delivery.
2. The lack of normal intrinsic pressure within the
urethra--known as intrinsic urethral sphincter
deficiency--is another factor leading to stress
incontinence. Advanced age, inadequate estro-
gen levels, previous vaginal surgery and certain
neurologic lesions are associated with poor
urethral sphincter function.
B. Overactive Bladder. Involuntary loss of urine
preceded by a strong urge to void, whether or not
the bladder is full, is a symptom of the condition
commonly referred to as “urge incontinence.” Other
commonly used terms such as detrusor instability
and detrusor hyperreflexia refer to involuntary
detrusor contractions observed during urodynamic
studies.
II.History and Physical Examination
A. A preliminary diagnosis of urinary incontinence can
be made on the basis of a history, physical exami-
nation and a few simple office and laboratory tests.
B. The medical history should assess diabetes,
stroke, lumbar disc disease, chronic lung disease,
fecal impaction and cognitive impairment. The
obstetric and gynecologic history should include
gravity; parity; the number of vaginal, instru-
ment-assisted and cesarean deliveries; the time
interval between deliveries; previous hysterectomy
and/or vaginal or bladder surgery; pelvic radiother-
apy; trauma; and estrogen status.
Key Questions in Evaluating Patients for Urinary

Incontinence
Do you leak urine when you cough, laugh, lift something or

sneeze? How often?
Do you ever leak urine when you have a strong urge on the
way to the bathroom? How often?
How frequently do you empty your bladder during the day?
How many times do you get up to urinate after going to
sleep? Is it the urge to urinate that wakes you?
Do you ever leak urine during sex?
Do you wear pads that protect you from leaking urine? How
often do you have to change them?
Do you ever find urine on your pads or clothes and were
unaware of when the leakage occurred?
Does it hurt when you urinate?
Do you ever feel that you are unable to completely empty
your bladder?
Drugs That Can Influence Bladder Function
Drug Side effect
Antidepressants, Sedation, retention (over-

antipsychotics, seda- flow)
tives/hypnotics
Diuretics Frequency, urgency (OAB)
Caffeine Frequency, urgency (OAB)
Anticholinergics Retention (overflow)
Alcohol Sedation, frequency (OAB)
Narcotics Retention, constipation,

sedation (OAB and over-
flow)
Alpha-adrenergic blockers Decreased urethral tone

(stress incontinence)
Alpha-adrenergic agonists Increased urethral tone,

retention (overflow)
Beta-adrenergic agonists Inhibited detrusor function,

retention (overflow)
C. Because fecal impaction has been linked to urinary

incontinence, a history that includes frequency of
bowel movements, length of time to evacuate and
whether the patient must splint her vagina or
perineum during defecation should be obtained.
Patients should be questioned about fecal inconti-
nence.
D. A complete list of all prescription and nonprescrip-
tion drugs should be obtained. When appropriate,
discontinuation of these medications associated
with incontinence or substitution of appropriate
alternative medications will often cure or signifi-
cantly improve urinary incontinence.
E. Physical Examination
1. Immediately before the physical examination,
the patient should void as normally and com-
pletely as possible. The voided volume should
be recorded. A post-void residual volume can
then be determined within 10 minutes by
catheterization or ultrasound examination.
Post-void residual volumes more than 100 mL
are considered abnormal.
2. A clean urine sample can be sent for culture
and urinalysis.
3. Determining post-void residual volume and
urinalysis allows screening for overflow inconti-
nence, chronic urinary tract infections,
hematuria, diabetes, kidney disease and meta-
bolic abnormalities.
4. The abdominal examination should rule out
diastasis recti, masses, ascites and
organomegaly. Pulmonary and cardiovascular
assessment may be indicated to assess control
of cough or the need for medications such as
diuretics.
5. The lumbosacral nerve roots should be as-
sessed by checking deep tendon reflexes, lower
extremity strength, sharp/dull sensation and the
bulbocavernosus and clitoral sacral reflexes.
6. The pelvic examination should include an evalu-
ation for inflammation, infection and atrophy.
Signs of inadequate estrogen levels are thinning
and paleness of the vaginal epithelium, loss of
rugae, disappearance of the labia minora and
presence of a urethral caruncle.
7. A urethral diverticula is usually identified as a
distal bulge under the urethra. Gentle massage
of the area will frequently produce a purulent
discharge from the urethral meatus.
8. Testing for stress incontinence is performed by
asking the patient to cough vigorously while the
examiner watches for leakage of urine.
9. While performing the bimanual examination,
levator ani muscle function can be evaluated by
asking the patient to tighten her “vaginal mus-
cles” and hold the contraction as long as possi-
ble. It is normal for a woman to be able to hold
such a contraction for five to 10 seconds. The
bimanual examination should also include a
rectal examination to assess anal sphincter
tone, fecal impaction, occult blood, or rectal
lesions.
III. Treatment of urinary incontinence
A. Rehabilitation of the pelvic floor muscles is the
common goal of treatments through the use of
pelvic muscle exercises (Kegel's exercises),
weighted vaginal cones and pelvic floor electrical
stimulation.
B. A set of specially designed vaginal weights can be
used as mechanical biofeedback to augment pelvic
muscle exercises. The weights are held inside the
vagina by contracting the pelvic muscles for 15
minutes at a time.
C. Pelvic floor electrical stimulation with a vaginal or
anal probe produces a contraction of the levator ani
muscle. Cure or improvement in 48 percent of
treated patients, compared with 13 percent of
control subjects.
D. Occlusive devices, such as pessaries, can mimic
the effects of a retropubic urethropexy. A properly
fitted pessary prevents urine loss during vigorous
coughing in the standing position with a full blad-
der.
E. Medications such as estrogens and al-
pha-adrenergic drugs may also be effective in
treating women with stress incontinence. Stress
incontinence may be treated with localized estro-
gen replacement therapy (ERT). Localized ERT
can be given in the form of estrogen cream or an
estradiol-impregnated vaginal ring (Estring).
Medications Used to Treat Urinary Incontinence
Drug Dosage
Stress Incontinence
Pseudoephedrine 15 to 30 mg, three times

(Sudafed) daily
Vaginal estrogen ring Insert into vagina every

(Estring) three months.
Vaginal estrogen cream 0.5 g, apply in vagina every

night
Overactive bladder
Oxybutynin ER (Ditropan 5 to 15 mg, every morning

XL)
Tolterodine LA (Detrol LA) 2-4 mg qd
Generic oxybutynin 2.5 to 10 mg, two to four

times daily
Tolterodine (Detrol) 1 to 2 mg, two times daily
Imipramine (Tofranil) 10 to 75 mg, every night
Dicyclomine (Bentyl) 10 to 20 mg, four times

daily
Hyoscyamine (Cystospaz) 0.375 mg, two times daily
F. Alpha-adrenergic drugs such as pseudoephedrine

improve stress incontinence by increase resting
urethral tone. These drugs cause subjective im-
provement in 20 to 60 percent of patients.
G. Surgery to correct genuine stress incontinence is a
viable option for most patients. Retropubic
urethropexies (ie, Burch laparoscopic and Mar-
shall-Marchetti-Krantz [MMK] procedures) and
suburethral slings have long-term success rates
consistently reported in the 80 to 96 percent range.
H. Another minimally invasive procedure for the
treatment of stress incontinence caused by intrinsic
sphincter deficiency is periurethral injection.
I. Overactive bladder
1. Behavioral therapy, in the form of bladder re-
training and biofeedback, seeks to reestablish
cortical control of the bladder by having the
patient ignore urgency and void only in re-
sponse to cortical signals during waking hours.
2. Pharmacologic agents may be given empirically
to women with symptoms of overactive bladder.
Tolterodine (Detrol) and extended-release
oxybutynin chloride (Ditropan XL) have largely
replaced generic oxybutynin as a first-line treat-
ment option for overactive bladder because of
favorable side effect profiles.
3. ERT is also an effective treatment for women
with overactive bladder. Even in patients taking
systemic estrogen, localized ERT (ie,
estradiol-impregnated vaginal ring) may in-
crease inadequate estrogen levels and de-
crease the symptoms associated with overactive
bladder.
4. Pelvic floor electrical stimulation is also effective
in treating women with overactive bladder.
Pelvic floor electrical stimulation results in a 50
percent cure rate of detrusor instability.
5. Neuromodulation of the sacral nerve roots
through electrodes implanted in the sacral
foramina is a promising new surgical treatment
that has been found to be effective in the treat-
ment of urge incontinence.
6. The FDA has recently approved extracorporeal
magnetic innervation, a noninvasive procedure
for the treatment of incontinence caused by
pelvic floor weakness. Extracorporeal magnetic
innervation may have a place in the treatment of
women with both stress and urge incontinence.
Urinary Tract Infection

Urinary tract infections (UTIs) are a leading cause of
morbidity in persons of all ages. Sexually active young
women, elderly persons and those undergoing genitouri-
nary instrumentation or catheterization are at risk.
I. Acute uncomplicated cystitis in young women
A. Sexually active young women are most at risk for
UTIs.
B. Approximately 90 percent of uncomplicated cystitis
episodes are caused by Escherichia coli, 10 to 20
percent are caused by coagulase-negative Staphy-
lococcus saprophyticus and 5 percent or less are
caused by other Enterobacteriaceae organisms or
enterococci. Up to one-third of uropathogens are
resistant to ampicillin and, but the majority are
susceptible to trimethoprim-sulfamethoxazole (85 to
95 percent) and fluoroquinolones (95 percent).
C. Patients should be evaluated for pyuria by urinalysis
(wet mount examination of spun urine) or a dipstick
test for leukocyte esterase.
Urinary Tract Infections in Adults
Category Diagnostic First-line Comments

criteria therapy
Acute un- Urinalysis TMP-SMX Three-day

compli- for pyuria DS course is best
cated cys- and hema- (Bactrim, Quinolones
titis turia (culture Septra) may be used
not re- Trimethopri in areas of
quired) m TMP-SMX
(Proloprim) resistance or
Ciprofloxaci in patients
n (Cipro) who cannot
Ofloxacin tolerate
(Floxin) TMP-SMX
Recurrent Symptoms If the patient Repeat ther-

cystitis in and a urine has more apy for seven
young culture with than three to 10 days
women a bacterial cystitis epi- based on cul-
count of sodes per ture results
more than year, treat and then use
100 CFU prophylacti- prophylactic
per mL of cally with therapy
urine postcoital,
patient- di-
rected or
continuous
daily ther-
apy
Acute cys- Urine cul- Same as for Treat for

titis in ture with a acute un- seven to 10
young bacterial complicated days
men count of cystitis
1,000 to
10,000 CFU
per mL of
urine
Acute un- Urine cul- If gram-neg- Switch from IV

compli- ture with a ative organ- to oral admin-
cated bacterial ism, oral istration when
pyelo- count of fluoroquinol the patient is
nephritis 100,000 one able to take
CFU per mL If gram-pos- medication by
of urine itive organ- mouth; com-
ism, amoxi- plete a 14-day
cillin course
If parenteral
administra-
tion is re-
quired, cef-
triaxone
(Rocephin)
or a fluoro-
quinolone
If Entero-
coccus spe-
cies, add
oral or IV
amoxicillin
Compli- Urine cul- If gram-neg- Treat for 10 to

cated uri- ture with a ative organ- 14 days
nary tract bacterial ism, oral
infection count of fluoroquinol
more than one
10,000 CFU If Entero-
per mL of coccus spe-
urine cies, ampi-
cillin or
amoxicillin
with or with-
out gent-
amicin
(Garamycin)
Category Diagnostic First-line Comments
criteria therapy
Catheter-a Symptoms If gram-neg- Remove cath-

ssociated and a urine ative organ- eter if possi-
urinary culture with ism, a ble, and treat
tract infec- a bacterial fluoroquino- for seven to
tion count of lone 10 days
more than If gram-pos- For patients
100 CFU itive organ- with long-term
per mL of ism, ampi- catheters and
urine cillin or am- symptoms,
oxicillin plus treat for five to
gentamicin seven days
Antibiotic Therapy for Urinary Tract Infections
Diagnostic Dura- Empiric options

group tion of
therapy
Acute uncom- Three

plicated uri- days Trimethoprim-sulfamethox
nary tract in- azole (Bactrim DS), one
fections in double-strength tablet PO
women twice daily
Trimethoprim (Proloprim),
100 mg PO twice daily
Norfloxacin (Noroxin), 400
mg twice daily
Ciprofloxacin (Cipro), 250
mg twice daily
Lomefloxacin (Maxaquin),
400 mg per day
Ofloxacin (Floxin), 200 mg
twice daily
Enoxacin (Penetrex), 200
mg twice daily
Sparfloxacin (Zagam), 400
mg as initial dose, then
200 mg per day
Levofloxacin (Levaquin), 250
mg per day
Nitrofurantoin (Macrodantin),
100 mg four times daily
Cefpodoxime (Vantin), 100
mg twice daily
Cefixime (Suprax), 400 mg
per day
Amoxicillin-clavulanate(Au
gmentin), 500 mg twice
daily
Acute uncom- 14 days

plicated Trimethoprim-sulfamethox
pyelonephritis azole DS, one dou-
ble-strength tablet PO
twice daily
mg twice daily
Levofloxacin (Maxiquin), 250
mg per day
Enoxacin (Penetrex), 400
mg twice daily
Sparfloxacin (Zagam) 400
mg initial dose, then 200
mg per day 104.50
twice daily
Cefpodoxime (Vantin), 200
mg twice daily
Cefixime (Suprax), 400 mg
per day
Up to 3
days Trimethoprim-sulfamethox
azole (Bactrim) 160/800 IV
twice daily
Ceftriaxone (Rocephin), 1 g
IV per day
mg twice daily
twice daily
Levofloxacin (Penetrex), 250
mg per day
Aztreonam (Azactam), 1 g
three times daily
Gentamicin (Garamycin), 3
mg per kg per day in 3 di-
vided doses every 8 hours
Complicated 14 days Fluoroquinolones PO

urinary tract
infections Up to 3 Ampicillin, 1 g IV every six
days hours, and gentamicin, 3
mg per kg per day
Urinary tract Seven

infections in days Trimethoprim-sulfamethox
young men azole, one double-strength
tablet PO twice daily
Fluoroquinolones
D. Treatment of acute uncomplicated cystitis in

young women
1. Three-day regimens appear to offer the optimal
combination of convenience, low cost and an
efficacy comparable to that of seven-day or
longer regimens.
2. Trimethoprim-sulfamethoxazole is the most
cost-effective treatment. Three-day regimens of
ciprofloxacin (Cipro), 250 mg twice daily, and
ofloxacin (Floxin), 200 mg twice daily, produce
better cure rates with less toxicity.
3. Quinolones that are useful in treating compli-
cated and uncomplicated cystitis include
ciprofloxacin, norfloxacin, ofloxacin, enoxacin
( P e n e t r e x) , l o m e f l o xa c i n ( M a xa q u i n ) ,
sparfloxacin (Zagam) and levofloxacin
(Levaquin).
4. Trimethoprim-sulfamethoxazole remains the
antibiotic of choice in the treatment of uncompli-
cated UTIs in young women. Fluoroquinolones
are recommended for patients who cannot
tolerate sulfonamides or trimethoprim or who
have a high frequency of antibiotic resistance.
Three days is the optimal duration of treatment
for uncomplicated cystitis. A seven-day course
should be considered in pregnant women,
diabetic women and women who have had
symptoms for more than one week.
II. Recurrent cystitis in young women
A. Up to 20 percent of young women with acute
cystitis develop recurrent UTIs. The causative
organism should be identified by urine culture.
B. Women who have more than three UTI recurrences
within one year can be managed using one of three
preventive strategies.
1. Acute self-treatment with a three-day course of
standard therapy.
2. Postcoital prophylaxis with one-half of a
trimethoprim-sulfamethoxazole double-strength
tablet (40/200 mg).
3. Continuous daily prophylaxis for six months with
trimethoprim-sulfamethoxazole, one-half tablet
per day (40/200 mg); nitrofurantoin, 50 to 100
mg per day; norfloxacin (Noroxin), 200 mg per
day; cephalexin (Keflex), 250 mg per day; or
trimethoprim (Proloprim), 100 mg per day.
III. Complicated UTI
A. A complicated UTI is one that occurs because of
enlargement of the prostate gland, blockages, or
the presence of resistant bacteria.
B. Accurate urine culture and susceptibility are neces-
sary. Treatment consists of an oral fluoroquinolone.
In patients who require hospitalization, parenteral
administration of ceftazidime (Fortaz) or
cefoperazone (Cefobid), cefepime (Maxipime),
aztreonam (Azactam), imipenem-cilastatin
(Primaxin) or the combination of an
antipseudomonal penicillin (ticarcillin [Ticar],
mezlocillin [Mezlin], piperacillin [Pipracil]) with an
aminoglycoside.
C. Enterococci are frequently encountered
uropathogens in complicated UTIs. In areas in
which vancomycin-resistant Enterococcus faecium
is prevalent, quinupristin-dalfopristin (Synercid)
may be useful.
D. Patients with complicated UTIs require at least a
10- to 14-day course of therapy. Follow-up urine
cultures should be performed within 10 to 14 days
after treatment.
IV. Uncomplicated pyelonephritis
A. Women with acute uncomplicated pyelonephritis
may present with a mild cystitis-like illness and
flank pain; fever, chills, nausea, vomiting,
leukocytosis and abdominal pain; or a serious
gram-negative bacteremia. Uncomplicated
pyelonephritis is usually caused by E. coli.
B. The diagnosis should be confirmed by urinalysis
and by urine culture. Urine cultures demonstrate
more than 100,000 CFU per mL of urine in 80
percent of women with pyelonephritis. Blood cul-
tures are positive in up to 20 percent of women who
have this infection.
C. Empiric therapy using an oral fluoroquinolone is
recommended in women with mild to moderate
symptoms. Patients who are too ill to take oral
antibiotics should initially be treated with a
parenterally third-generation cephalosporin,
aztreonam, a broad-spectrum penicillin, a
quinolone or an aminoglycoside.
D. The total duration of therapy is usually 14 days.
Patients with persistent symptoms after three days
of antimicrobial therapy should be evaluated by
renal ultrasonography for evidence of urinary
obstruction or abscess.
Pubic Infections
I. Molluscum contagiosum
A. This disease is produced by a virus of the pox virus
family and is spread by sexual or close personal
contact. Lesions are usually asymptomatic and
multiple, with a central umbilication. Lesions can be
spread by autoinoculation and last from 6 months to
many years.
B. Diagnosis. The characteristic appearance is
adequate for diagnosis, but biopsy may be used to
confirm the diagnosis.
C. Treatment. Lesions are removed by sharp dermal
c u r e t t e , l i q u i d n i t r o g e n c r yo s u r g e r y, o r
electrodesiccation.
II. Pediculosis pubis (crabs)
A. Phthirus pubis is a blood sucking louse that is
unable to survive more than 24 hours off the body.
It is often transmitted sexually and is principally
found on the pubic hairs. Diagnosis is confirmed by
locating nits or adult lice on the hair shafts.
B. Treatment
1. Permethrin cream (Elimite), 5% is the most
effective treatment; it is applied for 10 minutes
and washed off.
2. Kwell shampoo, lathered for at least 4 minutes,
can also be used, but it is contraindicated in
pregnancy or lactation.
3. All contaminated clothing and linen should be
laundered.
III. Pubic scabies
A. This highly contagious infestation is caused by the
Sarcoptes scabiei (0.2-0.4 mm in length). The
infestation is transmitted by intimate contact or by
contact with infested clothing. The female mite
burrows into the skin, and after 1 month, severe
pruritus develops. A multiform eruption may de-
velop, characterized by papules, vesicles, pustules,
urticarial wheals, and secondary infections on the
hands, wrists, elbows, belt line, buttocks, genitalia,
and outer feet.
B. Diagnosis is confirmed by visualization of burrows
and observation of parasites, eggs, larvae, or red
fecal compactions under microscopy.
C. Treatment. Permethrin 5% cream (Elimite) is
massaged in from the neck down and remove by
washing after 8 hours.
Sexually Transmissible Infections

Approximately 12 million patients are diagnosed with a
sexually transmissible infection (STI) annually in the
United States. Sequella of STIs include infertility, chronic
pelvic pain, ectopic pregnancy, and other adverse preg-
nancy outcomes.
Diagnosis and Treatment of Bacterial Sexually

Transmissible Infections
Organ- Diagnos- Recommended Alternative

ism tic Meth- Treatment
ods
Chlam Direct flu- Doxycycline 100 Ofloxacin (Floxin)

ydia orescent mg PO 2 times a 300 mg PO 2 times
tracho- antibody, day for 7 days or a day for 7 days
matis enzyme Azithromycin
immuno- (Zithromax) 1 g
assay, PO
DNA
probe, cell
culture,
DNA am-
plification
Neisse Culture Ceftriaxone Levofloxacin

ria DNA (Rocephin) 125 (Levaquin) 250 mg
gonor- probe mg IM or PO once
rhoeae Cefixime 400 mg Spectinomycin 2 g
PO or IM once
Ciprofloxacin
(Cipro) 500 mg
PO or
Ofloxacin
(Floxin) 400 mg
PO
plus Doxycycline
100 mg 2 times
a day for 7 days
or azithromycin 1
g PO
Trepo- Clinical Primary and sec- Penicillin allergy in

nema appear- ondary syphilis patients with pri-
palli- ance and early latent mary, secondary,
dum Dark-field syphilis (<1 year or early latent
micros- duration): syphilis (<1 year of
copy benzathine peni- duration):
Nontrepon cillin G 2.4 mil- doxycycline 100
emal test: lion units IM in a mg PO 2 times a
rapid single dose. day for 2 weeks.
plasma
reagin,
VDRL
Treponem
al test:
MHA-TP,
FTA-ABS
Diagnosis and Treatment of Viral Sexually Trans-

missible Infections
Organ- Diagnostic Recommended Treatment Regi-

ism Methods mens
Herpes Clinical ap- First episode: Acyclovir (Zovirax)

simplex pearance 400 mg PO 5 times a day for 7-10
virus Cell culture days, or famciclovir (Famvir) 250
confirmation mg PO 3 times a day for 7-10 days,
or valacyclovir (Valtrex) 1 g PO 2
times a day for 7-10 days.
Recurrent episodes: acyclovir 400
mg PO 3 times a day for 5 days, or
800 mg PO 2 times a day for 5
days or famciclovir 125 mg PO 2
times a day for 5 days, or
valacyclovir 500 mg PO 2 times a
day for 5 days
Daily suppressive therapy:
acyclovir 400 mg PO 2 times a day,
or famciclovir 250 mg PO 2 times a
day, or valacyclovir 250 mg PO 2
times a day, 500 mg PO 1 time a
day, or 1000 mg PO 1 time a day
Organ- Diagnostic Recommended Treatment Regi-
ism Methods mens
Human Clinical ap- External warts: Patient may apply

papillo pearance of podofilox 0.5% solution or gel 2
ma condyloma times a day for 3 days, followed by
virus papules 4 days of no therapy, for a total of
Cytology up to 4 cycles, or imiquimod 5%
cream at bedtime 3 times a week
for up to 16 weeks. Cryotherapy
with liquid nitrogen or cryoprobe,
repeat every 1-2 weeks; or
podophyllin, repeat weekly; or TCA
80-90%, repeat weekly; or surgical
removal.
Vaginal warts: cryotherapy with
liquid nitrogen, or TCA 80-90%, or
podophyllin 10-25%
Human Enzyme Antiretroviral agents

immun immunoassa
o- y
defi- Western blot
ciency (for confirma-
virus tion)
Polymerase
chain reac-
tion
Treatment of Pelvic Inflammatory Disease
Reg Inpatient Outpatient

ime
n
A Cefotetan (Cefotan) 2 g Ofloxacin (Floxin) 400

IV q12h; or cefoxitin mg PO bid for 14 days
(Mefoxin) 2 g IV q6h plus metronidazole 500
plus doxycycline 100 mg PO bid for 14 days.
mg IV or PO q12h.
B Clindamycin 900 mg IV Ceftriaxone (Rocephin)

q8h plus gentamicin 250 mg IM once; or
loading dose IV or IM (2 cefoxitin 2 g IM plus
mg/kg of body weight), probenecid 1 g PO; or
followed by a mainte- other parenteral third-
nance dose (1.5 mg/kg) generation cephalosporin
q8h. (eg, ceftizoxime,
cefotaxime) plus
doxycycline 100 mg PO
bid for 14 days.
I. Chlamydia Trachomatis
A. Chlamydia trachomatis is the most prevalent STI in
the United States. Chlamydial infections are most
common in women age 15-19 years.
B. Routine screening of asymptomatic, sexually active
adolescent females undergoing pelvic examination
is recommended. Annual screening should be done
for women age 20-24 years who are either inconsis-
tent users of barrier contraceptives or who acquired
a new sex partner or had more than one sexual
partner in the past 3 months.
II. Gonorrhea. Gonorrhea has an incidence of 800,000
cases annually. Routine screening for gonorrhea is
recommended among women at high risk of infection,
including prostitutes, women with a history of repeated
episodes of gonorrhea, women under age 25 years
with two or more sex partners in the past year, and
women with mucopurulent cervicitis.
III. Syphilis
A. Syphilis has an incidence of 100,000 cases annu-
ally. The rates are highest in the South, among
African Americans, and among those in the 20- to
24-year-old age group.
B. Prostitutes, persons with other STIs, and sexual
contacts of persons with active syphilis should be
screened.
IV.Herpes simplex virus and human papillomavirus
A. An estimated 200,000-500,000 new cases of
herpes simplex occur annually in the United States.
New infections are most common in adolescents
and young adults.
B. Human papillomavirus affects about 30% of young,
sexually active individuals.
Pelvic Inflammatory Disease

Pelvic inflammatory disease (PID) is an acute infection of
the upper genital tract in women, involving any or all of
the uterus, oviducts, and ovaries. PID is a community-
acquired infection initiated by a sexually transmitted
agent. Pelvic inflammatory disease accounts for approxi-
mately 2.5 million outpatient visits and 200,000 hospital-
izations annually.
A. Lower abdominal pain is the cardinal presenting
symptom in women with PID, although the character
of the pain may be quite subtle. The onset of pain
during or shortly after menses is particularly sug-
gestive. The abdominal pain is usually bilateral and
rarely of more than two weeks' duration.
B. Abnormal uterine bleeding occurs in one-third or
more of patients with PID. New vaginal discharge,
urethritis, proctitis, fever, and chills can be associ-
ated signs.
C. Risk factors for PID:
1. Age less than 35 years
2. Nonbarrier contraception
3. New, multiple, or symptomatic sexual partners
4. Previous episode of PID
5. Oral contraception
6. African-American ethnicity
A. Only one-half of patients with PID have fever.
Abdominal examination reveals diffuse tenderness
greatest in the lower quadrants, which may or may
not be symmetrical. Rebound tenderness and
decreased bowel sounds are common. Tenderness
in the right upper quadrant does not exclude PID,
because approximately 10 percent of these patients
have perihepatitis (Fitz-Hugh Curtis syndrome).
B. Purulent endocervical discharge and/or acute
cervical motion and adnexal tenderness by
bimanual examination is strongly suggestive of PID.
Rectovaginal examination should reveal the uterine
adnexal tenderness.
III. Diagnosis
A. Diagnostic criteria and guidelines. The index of
suspicion for the clinical diagnosis of PID should be
high, especially in adolescent women.
B. The CDC has recommended minimum criteria
required for empiric treatment of PID. These major
determinants include lower abdominal tenderness,
adnexal tenderness, and cervical motion tender-
ness. Minor determinants (ie, signs that may in-
crease the suspicion of PID) include:
1. Fever (oral temperature >101°F; >38.3°C)
2. Vaginal discharge
3. Documented STD
4. Erythrocyte sedimentation rate (ESR)
5. C-reactive protein
6. Systemic signs
7. Dyspareunia
C. Empiric treatment for pelvic inflammatory dis-
ease is recommended when:
1. The examination suggests PID
2. Demographics (risk factors) are consistent with
PID
3. Pregnancy test is negative
Laboratory Evaluation for Pelvic Inflammatory

Disease
• Pregnancy test
• Microscopic exam of vaginal discharge in saline
• Complete blood counts
• Tests for chlamydia and gonococcus
• Urinalysis
• Fecal occult blood test
• C-reactive protein(optional)
IV. Diagnostic testing

A. Laboratory testing for patients suspected of
having PID always begins with a pregnancy test to
rule out ectopic pregnancy and complications of
an intrauterine pregnancy. A urinalysis and a stool
for occult blood should be obtained because
abnormalities in either reduce the probability of
PID. Blood counts have limited value. Fewer than
one-half of PID patients exhibit leukocytosis.
B. Gram stain and microscopic examination of
vaginal discharge may provide useful information.
If a cervical Gram stain is positive for Gram-
negative intracellular diplococci, the probability of
PID greatly increases; if negative, it is of little use.
C. Increased white blood cells (WBC) in vaginal fluid
may be the most sensitive single laboratory test
for PID (78 percent for >3 WBC per high power
field. However, the specificity is only 39 percent.
D. Recommended laboratory tests:
1. Pregnancy test
2. Microscopic exam of vaginal discharge in
saline
3. Complete blood counts
4. Tests for chlamydia and gonococcus
5. Urinalysis
6. Fecal occult blood test
7. C-reactive protein(optional)
E. Ultrasound imaging is reserved for acutely ill
patients with PID in whom a pelvic abscess is a
consideration.
V. Recommendations
A. Health care providers should maintain a low
threshold for the diagnosis of PID, and sexually
active young women with lower abdominal,
adnexal, and cervical motion tenderness should
receive empiric treatment. The specificity of these
clinical criteria can be enhanced by the presence
of fever, abnormal cervical/vaginal discharge,
elevated ESR and/or serum C-reactive protein,
and the demonstration of cervical gonorrhea or
chlamydia infection.
B. If clinical findings (epidemiologic, symptomatic,
and physical examination) suggest PID empiric
treatment should be initiated.
Differential Diagnosis of Pelvic Inflammatory

Disease
Appendicitis Irritable bowel syndrome

Ectopic pregnancy Somatization
Hemorrhagic ovarian cyst Gastroenteritis
Ovarian torsion Cholecystitis
Endometriosis Nephrolithiasis
Urinary tract Infection
VI. Treatment of pelvic inflammatory disease

A. The two most important initiators of PID, Neisseria
gonorrhoeae and Chlamydia trachomatis, must be
treated, but coverage should also be provided for
groups A and B streptococci, Gram negative
enteric bacilli (Escherichia coli, Klebsiella spp.,
and Proteus spp.), and anaerobes.
B. Outpatient therapy
1. For outpatient therapy, the CDC recommends
either oral ofloxacin (Floxin, 400 mg twice
daily) or levofloxacin (Levaquin, 500 mg once
daily) with or without metronidazole (Flagyl,
500 mg twice daily) for 14 days. An alternative
is an initial single dose of ceftriaxone
(Rocephin, 250 mg IM), cefoxitin (Mefoxin, 2 g
IM plus probenecid 1 g orally), or another
parenteral third-generation cephalosporin,
followed by doxycycline (100 mg orally twice
daily) with or without metronidazole for 14
days. Quinolones are not recommended to
treat gonorrhea acquired in California or Ha-
waii. If the patient may have acquired the
disease in Asia, Hawaii, or California, cefixime
or ceftriaxone should be used.
2. Another alternative is azithromycin (Zithromax,
1 g PO for Chlamydia coverage) and
amoxicillin-clavulanate (Amoxicillin, 875 mg
PO) once by directly observed therapy, fol-
lowed by amoxicillin-clavulanate (Amoxicillin,
875 mg PO BID) for 7 to 10 days.
C. Inpatient therapy
1. For inpatient treatment, the CDC suggests
either of the following regimens:
a. Cefotetan (Cefotan), 2 g IV Q12h, or
cefoxitin (Mefoxin, 2 g IV Q6h) plus
doxycycline (100 mg IV or PO Q12h)
b. Clindamycin (Cleocin), 900 mg IV Q8h,
plus gentamicin (1-1.5 mg/kg IV q8h)
2. Alternative regimens:
a. Ofloxacin (Floxin), 400 mg IV Q12h or
levofloxacin (Levaquin, 500 mg IV QD) with
or without metronidazole (Flagyl, 500 mg IV
Q8h). Quinolones are not recommended to
treat gonorrhea acquired in California or
Hawaii. If the patient may have acquired the
disease in Asia, Hawaii, or California,
cefixime or ceftriaxone should be used.
b. Ampicillin-sulbactam (Unasyn), 3 g IV
Q6h plus doxycycline (100 mg IV or PO
Q12h)
3. Parenteral administration of antibiotics should
be continued for 24 hours after clinical re-
sponse, followed by doxycycline (100 mg PO
BID) or clindamycin (Cleocin, 450 mg PO QID)
for a total of 14 days.
4. The following regimen may also be used:
Levofloxacin (Levaquin), 500 mg IV Q24h,
plus metronidazole (Flagyl, 500 mg IV Q8h).
With this regimen, azithromycin (Zithromax, 1
g PO once) should be given as soon as the
patient is tolerating oral intake. Parenteral
therapy is continued until the pelvic tenderness
on bimanual examination is mild or absent.
D. Annual screening is recommended for all sexu-
ally active women under age 25 and for women
over 25 if they have new or multiple sexual part-
ners. A retest for chlamydia should be completed
in 3 to 4 months after chlamydia treatment be-
cause of high rates of reinfection.
E. Additional evaluation:
1. Serology for the human immunodeficiency
virus (HIV)
2. Papanicolaou smear
3. Hepatitis B surface antigen determination and
initiation of the vaccine series for patients who
are antigen negative and unvaccinated
4. Hepatitis C virus serology
5. Serologic tests for syphilis
Vaginitis
Vaginitis is the most common gynecologic problem
encountered by primary care physicians. It may result
from bacterial infections, fungal infection, protozoan
infection, contact dermatitis, atrophic vaginitis, or allergic
reaction.
I. Clinical evaluation of vaginal symptoms
A. The type and extent of symptoms, such as itching,
discharge, odor, or pelvic pain should be deter-
mined. A change in sexual partners or sexual
activity, changes in contraception method, medica-
tions (antibiotics), and history of prior genital infec-
tions should be sought.
1. Evaluation of the vagina should include close
inspection of the external genitalia for excoria-
tions, ulcerations, blisters, papillary structures,
erythema, edema, mucosal thinning, or mucosal
pallor.
2. The color, texture, and odor of vaginal or cervical
discharge should be noted.
C. Vaginal fluid pH can be determined by immersing
pH paper in the vaginal discharge. A pH level
greater than 4.5 indicates the presence of bacterial
vaginosis or Trichomonas vaginalis.
D. Saline wet mount
1. One swab should be used to obtain a sample
from the posterior vaginal fornix, obtaining a
"clump" of discharge. Place the sample on a
slide, add one drop of normal saline, and apply a
coverslip.
2. Coccoid bacteria and clue cells (bacteria-coated,
stippled, epithelial cells) are characteristic of
bacterial vaginosis.
3. Trichomoniasis is confirmed by identification of
trichomonads – mobile, oval flagellates. White
blood cells are prevalent.
E. Potassium hydroxide (KOH) preparation
1. Place a second sample on a slide, apply one
drop of 10% potassium hydroxide (KOH) and a
coverslip. A pungent, fishy odor upon addition of
KOH – a positive whiff test – strongly indicates
2. The KOH prep may reveal Candida in the form of
thread-like hyphae and budding yeast.
F. Screening for STDs. Testing for gonorrhea and
chlamydial infection should be completed for
women with a new sexual partner, purulent cervical
discharge, or cervical motion tenderness.
II. Differential diagnosis
A. The most common cause of vaginitis is bacterial
vaginosis, followed by Candida albicans. The
prevalence of trichomoniasis has declined in recent
years.
B. Common nonvaginal etiologies include contact
dermatitis from spermicidal creams, latex in con-
doms, or douching. Any STD can produce vaginal
discharge.
Clinical Manifestations of Vaginitis
Candidal Vagi- Nonmalodorous, thick, white, "cottage

nitis cheese-like" discharge that adheres to
vaginal walls
Hyphal forms or budding yeast cells on
wet-mount
Pruritus
Normal pH (<4.5)
Bacterial Thin, dark or dull grey, homogeneous,

Vaginosis malodorous discharge that adheres to
the vaginal walls
Elevated pH level (>4.5)
Positive KOH (whiff test)
Clue cells on wet-mount microscopic
evaluation
Trichomonas Copious, yellow-gray or green, homoge-

Vaginalis neous or frothy, malodorous discharge
Elevated pH level (>4.5)
Mobile, flagellated organisms and leuko-
cytes on wet-mount microscopic eval-
uation
Vulvovaginal irritation, dysuria
Atrophic Vagini- Vaginal dryness or burning

tis
III. Yeast vaginitis

A. Half of all women have had at least one episode of
yeast vaginitis. Candida albicans accounts for
80% of yeast infections. The remaining 20% are
caused by Candida glabrata or Candida tropicalis.
Pregnancy, oral contraceptives, antibiotics, diabe-
tes and HIV infection are contributing factors.
B. Diagnosis
1. Typical symptoms are pruritus, thick vaginal
discharge, and genital irritation. Discharge is
odorless and cottage cheese-like. Women may
complain of dysuria.
2. Physical examination may reveal vulvar ery-
thema and fissuring.
3. Laboratory evaluation of vaginal fluid reveals a
pH of less than 4.5 and the presence of hyphae
on 10% potassium hydroxide (KOH) wet mount.
Elevations in pH also occur in the presence of
semen or blood.
4. Microscopy will reveal hyphae. The sensitivity of
the KOH wet mount is only 50% to 70%. There-
fore, treatment should be instituted even when
hyphae are absent but the clinical impression is
otherwise consistent.
5. Culture should be considered if the diagnosis is
in doubt or in recurrent cases. Dermatophyte
test medium is sensitive yeast.
C. Treatment
1. Uncomplicated vaginitis. These episodes can
b e t r e a t e d wi t h a n y n o n p r e s c r i p t i o n
short-course (up to 7-day) preparation, since all
are equally effective.
Treatment regimens for yeast vaginitis*
1-day regimens
Clotrimazole vaginal tablets (Mycelex G), 500 mg hs**
Fluconazole tablets (Diflucan), 150 mg PO
Itraconazole capsules (Sporanox), 200 mg PO bid
Tioconazole 6.5% vaginal ointment (Vagistat-1), 4.6 g hs**
[5 g]
3-day regimens
Butoconazole nitrate 2% vaginal cream (Femstat 3), 5 g hs
[28 g]
Clotrimazole vaginal inserts (Gyne-Lotrimin 3), 200 mg hs**
Miconazole vaginal suppositories (Monistat 3), 200 mg hs**
Terconazole 0.8% vaginal cream (Terazol 3), 5 g hs
Terconazole vaginal suppositories (Terazol 3), 80 mg hs
Itraconazole capsules (Sporanox), 200 mg PO qd (4)
5-day regimen
Ketoconazole tablets (Nizoral), 400 mg PO bid (4)
7-day regimens
Clotrimazole 1% cream (Gyne-Lotrimin, Mycelex-7,
Sweet'n Fresh Clotrimazole-7), 5 g hs**
Clotrimazole vaginal tablets (Gyne-Lotrimin, Mycelex-7,
Sweet'n Fresh Clotrimazole-7), 100 mg hs**
Miconazole 2% vaginal cream (Femizol-M, Monistat 7), 5 g
hs**
Miconazole vaginal suppositories (Monistat 7), 100 mg hs**
Terconazole 0.4% vaginal cream (Terazol 7), 5 g hs
14-day regimens
Nystatin vaginal tablets (Mycostatin), 100,000 U hs
Boric acid No. 0 gelatin vaginal suppositories, 600 mg bid
(2)
*Suppositories can be used if inflammation is predomi-

nantly vaginal; creams if vulvar; a combination if both.
Cream-suppository combination packs available:
clotrimazole (Gyne-Lotrimin, Mycelex); miconazole
(Monistat, M-Zole). If diagnosis is in doubt, consider oral
therapy to avoid amelioration of symptoms with use of
creams. Use 1-day or 3-day regimen if compliance is an
issue. Miconazole nitrate may be used during pregnancy.
**Nonprescription formulation. If nonprescription therapies

fail, use terconazole 0.4% cream or 80-mg suppositories at
bedtime for 7 days.
2. Complicated infections are more severe and

cure is more difficult. With use of nonprescrip-
tion preparations, the treatment course should
be longer (10 to 14 days). Since Candida spe-
cies other than albicans may be more likely in
complicated infections, treatment with
terconazole (Terazol) should be considered.
Single-dose oral fluconazole should be avoided.
Management options for complicated or recur-

rent yeast vaginitis
Extend any 7-day regimen to 10 to 14 days

Eliminate use of nylon or tight-fitting clothing
Consider discontinuing oral contraceptives
Consider eating 8 oz yogurt (with Lactobacillus acidophilus
culture) per day
Improve glycemic control in diabetic patients
For long-term suppression of recurrent vaginitis, use
ketoconazole, 100 mg (½ of 200-mg tablet) qd for 6
months
D. Recurrent infection is defined as more than four

episodes per year. Suppressive therapy for 6
months is recommended after completion of 10 to
14 days of a standard regimen. Oral ketoconazole,
100 mg daily for 6 months, has been shown to
reduce the recurrence rate to 5%. If the sexual
partner has balanitis, topical therapy should be
prescribed.
IV. Trichomoniasis
A. Trichomoniasis is responsible for less than 25% of
vaginal infections. The infection is caused by
Trichomonas vaginalis, which is a sexually trans-
mitted disease. Most men are asymptomatic.
B. Diagnosis
1. A copious, watery discharge is common, and
some patients may notice an odor. Often few
symptoms are present. Usually, the vulva and
vaginal mucosa are free of signs of inflamma-
tion. The discharge is thin and characterized by
an elevated pH, usually 6 to 7. Occasionally,
small punctate cervical hemorrhages with
ulcerations (strawberry cervix) are found.
2. Microscopic examination of vaginal fluid mixed
with saline solution (“wet prep”) shows an
increased number of leukocytes and motile
trichomonads. Microscopy has a sensitivity of
only 50% to 70%. Trichomonads are sometimes
reported on Pap smears, but false-positive
results are common.
3. Culture for identification of T vaginalis has a
sensitivity of 95% and should be performed
when the clinical findings are consistent with
trichomoniasis but motile organisms are absent.
A rapid DNA probe test, which has a sensitivity
of 90% and a specificity of 99.8%, can also be
used.
C. Treatment. Oral metronidazole (Flagyl, Protostat)
is recommended. Treatment of male sexual part-
ners is recommended. Metronidazole gel
(MetroGel-Vaginal) is less efficacious than oral
antiinfective therapy. The single 2-g dose of oral
metronidazole can be used safely in any trimester
of pregnancy.
Treatment options for trichomoniasis
Initial measures
Metronidazole (Flagyl, Protostat), 2 g PO in a single dose,
or metronidazole, 500 mg PO bid X 7 days, or
metronidazole, 375 mg PO bid X 7 days
Treat male sexual partners
Measures for treatment failure

Treatment sexual contacts
Re-treat with metronidazole, 500 mg PO bid X 7 days
If infection persists, confirm with culture and re-treat with
metronidazole,
2-4 g PO qd X 3-10 days
V. Bacterial Vaginosis
A. Bacterial vaginosis is a polymicrobial infection
caused by an overgrowth of anaerobic organisms.
It is the most common cause of vaginitis, account-
ing for 50% of cases. Gardnerella vaginalis has
been identified as one of the key organisms in
B. Diagnosis
1. Most have vaginal discharge (90%) and foul
odor (70%). Typically there is a homogeneous
vaginal discharge, pH higher than 4.5, “clue
cells” (epithelial cells studded with coccobacilli
on microscopic examination, and a positive
“whiff” test.
2. A specimen of vaginal discharge is obtained by
speculum, and the pH is determined before the
specimen is diluted. Next, the “whiff” test is
performed by adding several drops of 10% KOH
to the specimen. The test is positive when a
fishy odor is detected. Finally, the specimen is
viewed by wet-mount microscopy.
C. Treatment consists of oral metronidazole, 500 mg
twice a day for 7 days. Common side effects of
metronidazole include nausea, anorexia, abdomi-
nal cramps, and a metallic taste. Alcohol may
cause a disulfiram-like reaction. Use of sin-
gle-dose metronidazole may result in a higher
recurrence rate and an increase in gastrointestinal
side effects. Topical clindamycin is an option, but
the cream may weaken latex condoms and dia-
phragms.
VI. Other diagnoses causing vaginal symptoms
A. One-third of patients with vaginal symptoms will
not have laboratory evidence of bacterial
vaginosis, Candida, or Trichomonas. Other
causes of the vaginal symptoms include cervicitis,
allergic reactions, and vulvodynia.
B. Atrophic vaginitis should be considered in
postmenopausal patients if the mucosa appears
pale and thin and wet-mount findings are nega-
tive.
1. Oral estrogen (Premarin) 0.3 mg qd should
provide relief.
2. Vaginal ring estradiol (Estring), a silastic ring
impregnated with estradiol, is the preferred
means of delivering estrogen to the vagina.
The silastic ring delivers 6 to 9 µg of estradiol
to the vagina daily. The rings are changed once
every three months. Concomitant progestin
therapy is not necessary.
3. Conjugated estrogens (Premarin), 0.5 gm of
cream, or one-eighth of an applicatorful daily
into the vagina for three weeks, followed by
twice weekly thereafter. Concomitant progestin
therapy is not necessary.
4. Estrace cream (estradiol) can also by given
by vaginal applicator at a dose of one-eighth of
an applicator or 0.5 g (which contains 50 µg of
estradiol) daily into the vagina for three weeks,
followed by twice weekly thereafter. Concomi-
tant progestin therapy is not necessary.
C. Allergy and chemical irritation
1. Patients should be questioned about use of
substances that cause allergic or chemical
irritation, such as deodorant soaps, laundry
detergent, vaginal contraceptives, bath oils,
perfumed or dyed toilet paper, hot tub or swim-
ming pool chemicals, and synthetic clothing.
2. Topical steroids and systemic antihistamines
can help alleviate the symptoms.
Obstetrics
Prenatal Care
I. Prenatal history and physical examination
A. Diagnosis of pregnancy
1. Amenorrhea is usually the first sign of concep-
tion. Other symptoms include breast fullness and
tenderness, skin changes, nausea, vomiting,
urinary frequency, and fatigue.
2. Pregnancy tests. Urine pregnancy tests may be
positive within days of the first missed menstrual
period. Serum beta human chorionic gonadotro-
pin (HCG) is accurate up to a few days after
implantation.
3. Fetal heart tones can be detected as early as
11-12 weeks from the last menstrual period
(LMP) by Doppler. The normal fetal heart rate is
120-160 beats per minute.
4. Fetal movements ("quickening") are first felt by
the patient at 17-19 weeks.
5. Ultrasound will visualize a gestational sac at 5-6
weeks and a fetal pole with movement and
cardiac activity by 7-8 weeks. Ultrasound can
estimate fetal age accurately if completed before
24 weeks.
6. Estimated date of confinement. The mean
duration of pregnancy is 40 weeks from the LMP.
Estimated date of confinement (EDC) can be
calculated by Nägele's rule: Add 7 days to the
first day of the LMP, then subtract 3 months.
B. Contraceptive history. Recent oral contraceptive
usage often causes postpill amenorrhea, and may
cause erroneous pregnancy dating.
C. Gynecologic and obstetric history
1. Gravidity is the total number of pregnancies.
Parity is expressed as the number of term preg-
nancies, preterm pregnancies, abortions, and
live births.
2. The character and length of previous labors, type
of delivery, complications, infant status, and birth
weight are recorded.
3. Assess prior cesarean sections and determine
type of C-section (low transverse or classical),
and determine reason it was performed.
D. Medical and surgical history and prior hospitaliza-
tions are documented.
E. Medications and allergies are recorded.
F. Family history of medical illnesses, hereditary
illness, or multiple gestation is sought.
G. Social history. Cigarettes, alcohol, or illicit drug
use.
H. Review of systems. Abdominal pain, constipation,
headaches, vaginal bleeding, dysuria or urinary
frequency, or hemorrhoids.
I. Physical examination
1. Weight, funduscopic examination, thyroid,
breast, lungs, and heart are examined.
2. An extremity and neurologic exam are com-
pleted, and the presence of a cesarean section
scar is sought.
3. Pelvic examination
a. Pap smear and culture for gonorrhea are
completed routinely. Chlamydia culture is
completed in high-risk patients.
b. Estimation of gestational age by uterine
size
(1) The nongravid uterus is 3 x 4 x 7 cm. The
uterus begins to change in size at 5-6
weeks.
(2) Gestational age is estimated by uterine
size: 8 weeks = 2 x normal size; 10
weeks = 3 x normal; 12 weeks = 4 x
normal.
(3) At 12 weeks the fundus becomes palpa-
ble at the symphysis pubis.
(4) At 16 weeks, the uterus is midway be-
tween the symphysis pubis and the umbi-
licus.
(5) At 20 weeks, the uterus is at the umbili-
cus. After 20 weeks, there is a correlation
between the number of weeks of gesta-
tion and the number of centimeters from
the pubic symphysis to the top of the
fundus.
(6) Uterine size that exceeds the gestational
dating by 3 or more weeks suggests
multiple gestation, molar pregnancy, or
(most commonly) an inaccurate date for
LMP. Ultrasonography will confirm inac-
curate dating or intrauterine growth fail-
ure.
c. Adnexa are palpated for masses.
II. Initial visit laboratory testing
A. CBC, AB blood typing and Rh factor, antibody
screen, rubella, VDRL/RPR, hepatitis B surface Ag.
B. Pap smear, urine pregnancy test, urinalysis and
urine culture. Cervical culture for gonorrhea and
chlamydia.
C. Tuberculosis skin testing, HIV counseling/testing.
D. Hemoglobin electrophoresis is indicated in risks
groups, such as sickle hemoglobin in African
patients, B-thalassemia in Mediterranean patients,
and alpha-thalassemia in Asian patients. Tay-
Sachs carrier testing is indicated in Jewish patients.
III. Clinical assessment at first trimester prenatal
visits
A. Assessment at each prenatal visit includes mater-
nal weight, blood pressure, uterine size, and evalu-
ation for edema, proteinuria, and glucosuria.
B. First Doppler heart tones should become detectable
at 10-12 weeks, and they should be sought thereaf-
ter.
C. Routine prenatal vitamins are probably not neces-
sary. Folic acid supplementation preconceptually
and throughout the early part of pregnancy has
been shown to decrease the incidence of fetal
neural tube defects.
Frequency of Prenatal Care Visits in Low-Risk

Pregnancies
<28 weeks Every month
28-36 weeks Every 2 weeks
36-delivery Every 1 week until de-

livery
D. First Trimester Education. Discuss smoking,

alcohol, exercise, diet, and sexuality.
E. Headache and backache. Acetaminophen
(Tylenol) 325-650 mg every 3-4 hours is effective.
Aspirin is contraindicated.
F. Nausea and vomiting. First-trimester morning
sickness may be relieved by eating frequent, small
meals, getting out of bed slowly after eating a few
crackers, and by avoiding spicy or greasy foods.
Promethazine (Phenergan) 12.5-50 mg PO q4-6h
prn or diphenhydramine (Benadryl) 25-50 mg tid-
qid is useful.
G. Constipation. A high-fiber diet with psyllium
(Metamucil), increased fluid intake, and regular
exercise should be advised. Docusate (Colace)
100 mg bid may provide relief.
IV.Clinical assessment at second trimester visits
A. Questions for each follow-up visit
1. First detection of fetal movement (quicken-
ing) should occur at around 17 weeks in a
multigravida and at 19 weeks in a primigravida.
Fetal movement should be documented at
each visit after 17 weeks.
2. Vaginal bleeding or symptoms of preterm
labor should be sought.
B. Fetal heart rate is documented at each visit
C. Maternal serum testing at 15-16 weeks
1. Triple screen ("-fetoprotein, human chorionic
gonadotropin [hCG], and estriol). In women
under age 35 years, screening for fetal Down
syndrome is accomplished with a triple screen.
Maternal serum alpha-fetoprotein is elevated in
20-25% of all cases of Down syndrome, and it is
elevated in fetal neural tube deficits. Levels of
hCG are higher in Down syndrome and levels of
unconjugated estriol are lower in Down syn-
drome.
2. If levels are abnormal, an ultrasound examina-
tion is performed and genetic amniocentesis is
offered. The triple screen identifies 60% of
Down syndrome cases. Low levels of all three
serum analytes identifies 60-75% of all cases of
fetal trisomy 18.
D. At 15-18 weeks, genetic amniocentesis should
be offered to patients >35 years old, and it should
be offered if a birth defect has occurred in the
mother, father, or in previous offspring.
E. Screening ultrasound should usually be obtained
at 16-18 weeks.
F. At 24-28 weeks, a one-hour Glucola (blood glu-
cose measurement 1 hour after 50-gm oral glu-
cose) is obtained to screen for gestational diabe-
tes. Those with a particular risk (eg, previous
gestational diabetes or fetal macrosomia), require
earlier testing. If the 1 hour test result is greater
than 140 mg/dL, a 3-hour glucose tolerance test is
necessary.
G. Second trimester education. Discomforts include
backache, round ligament pain, constipation, and
indigestion.
V. Clinical assessment at third trimester visits
A. Fetal movement is documented. Vaginal bleeding
or symptoms of preterm labor should be sought.
Preeclampsia symptoms (blurred vision, headache,
rapid weight gain, edema) are sought.
B. Fetal heart rate is documented at each visit.
C. At 26-30 weeks, repeat hemoglobin and
hematocrit are obtained to determine the need for
iron supplementation.
D. At 28-30 weeks, an antibody screen is obtained in
Rh-negative women, and D immune globulin
(RhoGAM) is administered if negative.
E. At 36 weeks, repeat serologic testing for syphilis is
recommended for high risk groups.
F. Gonorrhea and chlamydia screening is re-
peated in the third-trimester in high-risk patients.
G. Screening for group B streptococcus coloniza-
tion at 35-37 weeks. Lower vaginal and rectal
cultures are recommended; cultures should not be
collected by speculum examination. The optimal
method for GBS screening is collection of a single
standard culture swab of the distal vagina and
rectum.
H. Third trimester education
1. Signs of labor. The patient should call physi-
cian when rupture of membranes or contrac-
tions have occurred every 5 minutes for one
hour.
2. Danger signs. Preterm labor, rupture of mem-
branes, bleeding, edema, signs of preeclamp-
sia.
3. Common discomforts. Cramps, edema, fre-
quent urination.
I. At 36 weeks, a cervical exam may be completed.
Fetal position should be assessed by palpation
(Leopold’s Maneuvers).
Normal Labor
Labor consists of the process by which uterine contrac-
tions expel the fetus. A term pregnancy is 37 to 42 weeks
from the last menstrual period (LMP).
I. Obstetrical history and physical examination
A. History of the present labor
1. Contractions. The frequency, duration, onset,
and intensity of uterine contractions should be
determined. Contractions may be accompanied
by a '’bloody show" (passage of blood-tinged
mucus from the dilating cervical os). Braxton
Hicks contractions are often felt by patients
during the last weeks of pregnancy. They are
usually irregular, mild, and do not cause cervical
change.
2. Rupture of membranes. Leakage of fluid may
occur alone or in conjunction with uterine con-
tractions. The patient may report a large gush of
fluid or increased moisture. The color of the
liquid should be determine, including the pres-
ence of blood or meconium.
3. Vaginal bleeding should be assessed. Spotting
or blood-tinged mucus is common in normal
labor. Heavy vaginal bleeding may be a sign of
placental abruption.
4. Fetal movement. A progressive decrease in
fetal movement from baseline, should prompt an
assessment of fetal well-being with a nonstress
test or biophysical profile.
B. History of present pregnancy
1. Estimated date of confinement (EDC) is
calculated as 40 weeks from the first day of the
LMP.
2. Fetal heart tones are first heard with a Doppler
instrument 10-12 weeks from the LMP.
3. Quickening (maternal perception of fetal move-
ment) occurs at about 17 weeks.
4. Uterine size before 16 weeks is an accurate
measure of dates.
5. Ultrasound measurement of fetal size before 24
weeks of gestation is an accurate measure of
dates.
6. Prenatal history. Medical problems during this
pregnancy should be reviewed, including urinary
tract infections, diabetes, or hypertension.
7. Antepartum testing. Nonstress tests, contrac-
tion stress tests, biophysical profiles.
8. Review of systems. Severe headaches,
scotomas, hand and facial edema, or epigastric
pain (preeclampsia) should be sought. Dysuria,
urinary frequency or flank pain may indicate
cystitis or pyelonephritis.
C. Obstetrical history. Past pregnancies, durations
and outcomes, preterm deliveries, operative deliv-
eries, prolonged labors, pregnancy-induced hyper-
tension should be assessed.
D. Past medical history of asthma, hypertension, or
renal disease should be sought.
A. Vital signs are assessed.
B. Head. Funduscopy should seek hemorrhages or
exudates, which may suggest diabetes or hyperten-
sion. Facial, hand and ankle edema suggest
preeclampsia.
C. Chest. Auscultation of the lungs for wheezes and
crackles may indicate asthma or heart failure.
D. Uterine Size. Until the middle of the third trimester,
the distance in centimeters from the pubic
symphysis to the uterine fundus should correlate
with the gestational age in weeks. Toward term, the
measurement becomes progressively less reliable
because of engagement of the presenting part.
E. Estimation of fetal weight is completed by palpa-
tion of the gravid uterus.
F. Leopold's maneuvers are used to determine the
position of the fetus.
1. The first maneuver determines which fetal pole
occupies the uterine fundus. The breech moves
with the fetal body. The vertex is rounder and
harder, feels more globular than the breech, and
can be moved separately from the fetal body.
2. Second maneuver. The lateral aspects of the
uterus are palpated to determine on which side
the fetal back or fetal extremities (the small
parts) are located.
3. Third maneuver. The presenting part is moved
from side to side. If movement is difficult, en-
gagement of the presenting part has occurred.
4. Fourth maneuver. With the fetus presenting by
vertex, the cephalic prominence may be palpa-
ble on the side of the fetal small parts.
G. Pelvic examination. The adequacy of the bony
pelvis, the integrity of the fetal membranes, the
degree of cervical dilatation and effacement, and
the station of the presenting part should be deter-
mined.
H. Extremities. Severe lower extremity or hand
edema suggests preeclampsia. Deep-tendon
hyperreflexia and clonus may signal impending
seizures.
I. Laboratory tests
1. Prenatal labs should be documented, including
CBC, blood type, Rh, antibody screen, serologic
test for syphilis, rubella antibody titer, urinalysis,
culture, Pap smear, cervical cultures for gonor-
rhea and Chlamydia, and hepatitis B surface
antigen (HbsAg).
2. During labor, the CBC, urinalysis and RPR are
repeated. The HBSAG is repeated for high-risk
patients. A clot of blood is placed on hold.
J. Fetal heart rate. The baseline heart rate, variabil-
ity, accelerations, and decelerations are recorded.
Labor History and Physical

Chief compliant: Contractions, rupture of membranes.
HPI: ___ year old Gravida (number of pregnancies) Para (number of
deliveries).
Gestational age, last menstrual period, estimated date of confinement.
Contractions (onset, frequency, intensity), rupture of membranes (time,
color). Vaginal bleeding (consistency, quantity, bloody show); fetal
movement.
Fetal Heart Rate Strip: Baseline rate, accelerations, reactivity, decelera-
tions, contraction frequency.
Dates: First day of last menstrual period, estimated date of confinement.
Ultrasound dating.
Prenatal Care: Date of first exam, number of visits; has size been equal to
dates? infections, hypertension, diabetes.
Obstetrical History: Dates of prior pregnancies, gestational age, route (C-
section with indications and type of uterine incision), weight, complications,
length of labor, hypertension.
Gynecologic History: Menstrual history (menarche, interval, duration),
herpes, gonorrhea, chlamydia, abortions; oral contraceptives.
Past Medical History: Illnesses, asthma, hypertension, diabetes, renal dis-
ease, surgeries.
Medications: Iron, prenatal vitamins.
Allergies: Penicillin, codeine?
Social History: Smoking, alcohol, drug use.
Family History: Hypertension, diabetes, bleeding disorders.
Review of Systems: Severe headaches, scotomas, blurred vision, hand
and face edema, epigastric pain, pruritus, dysuria, fever.
Physical Exam
General Appearance:
Vitals: BP, pulse, respirations, temperature.
HEENT: Funduscopy, facial edema, jugular venous distention.
Chest: Wheezes, rhonchi.
Cardiovascular: Rhythm, S1, S2, murmurs.
Abdomen: Fundal height, Leopold's maneuvers (lie, presentation).
Estimated fetal weight (EFW), tenderness, scars.
Cervix: Dilatation, effacement, station, position, status of membranes,
presentation. Vulvar herpes lesions.
Extremities: Cyanosis, clubbing, edema.
Neurologic: Deep tender reflexes, clonus.
Prenatal Labs: Obtain results of one hour post glucola, RPR/VDRL,
rubella, blood type, Rh, CBC, Pap, PPD, hepatitis BsAg, UA, C and S.
Current Labs: Hemoglobin, hematocrit, glucose, UA; urine dipstick for
protein.
Assessment: Intrauterine pregnancy (IUP) at 40 weeks, admitted with the
following problems:
Plan: Anticipated type of labor and delivery. List plan for each problem.
III. Normal labor

A. Labor is characterized by uterine contractions of
sufficient frequency, intensity, and duration to result
in effacement and dilatation of the cervix.
B. The first stage of labor starts with the onset of
regular contractions and ends with complete di-
latation (10 cm). This stage is further subdivided
into the latent and an active phases.
1. The latent phase starts with the onset of regular
uterine contractions and is characterized by
slow cervical dilatation to 4 cm. The latent phase
is variable in length.
2. The active phase follows and is characterized by
more rapid dilatation to 10 cm. During the active
phase of labor, the average rate of cervical
dilatation is 1.5 cm/hour in the multipara and 1.2
cm/hour in the nullipara.
C. The second stage of labor begins with complete
dilatation of the cervix and ends with delivery of the
infant. It is characterized by voluntary and involun-
tary pushing. The average second stage of labor is
one-half hour in a multipara and 1 hour in the
primipara.
D. The third stage of labor begins with the delivery of
the infant and ends with the delivery of the pla-
centa.
E. Intravenous fluids. IV fluid during labor is usually
Ringer's lactate or 0.45% normal saline with 5%
dextrose. Intravenous fluid infused rapidly or given
as a bolus should be dextrose-free because mater-
nal hyperglycemia can occur.
F. Activity. Patients in the latent phase of labor are
usually allowed to walk.
G. Narcotic and analgesic drugs
1. Nalbuphine (Nubain) 5 to 10 mg SC or IV q2-3h.
2. Butorphanol (Stadol) 2 mg IM q3-4h or 0.5-1.0

mg IV q1.5-2.0h OR
3. Meperidine (Demerol) 50 to 100 mg IM q3-4h or
10 to 25 mg IV q1.5-3.0 h OR
4. Narcotics should be avoided if their peak action
will not have diminished by the time of delivery.
Respiratory depression is reversed with
naloxone (Narcan): Adults, 0.4 mg IV or IM and
neonates, 0.01 mg/kg.
H. Epidural anesthesia
1. Contraindications include infection in the lumbar
area, clotting defect, active neurologic disease,
sensitivity to the anesthetic, hypovolemia, and
septicemia.
2. Risks include hypotension, respiratory arrest,
toxic drug reaction, and rare neurologic compli-
cations. An epidural has no significant effect on
the progress of labor.
3. Before the epidural is initiated, the patient is
hydrated with 500-1000 mL of dextrose-free
intravenous fluid.
Labor and Delivery Admitting Orders

Admit: Labor and Delivery
Diagnoses: Intrauterine pregnancy at ____ weeks.
Condition: Satisfactory
Vitals: q1 hr per routine
Activity: May ambulate as tolerated.
Nursing: I and O. Catheterize prn; external or internal monitors.
Diet: NPO except ice chips.
IV Fluids: Lactated Ringers with 5% dextrose at 125 cc/h.
Medications:
Epidural at 4-5 cm.
Nalbuphine (Nubain) 5-10 mg IV/SC q2-3h prn OR
Butorphanol (Stadol) 0.5-1 mg IV q1.5-2h prn OR
Meperidine (Demerol) 25-75 mg slow IV q1.5-3h prn pain AND
Promethazine (Phenergan) 25-50 mg, IV q3-4h prn nausea OR
Hydroxyzine (Vistaril) 25-50 mg IV q3-4h prn
Fleet enema PR prn constipation.
Labs: CBC, dipstick urine protein, blood type and Rh, antibody screen,
VDRL, HBsAg, rubella, type and screen (C-section).
I. Intrapartum antibiotic prophylaxis for group B

streptococcus is recommended for the follow-
ing:
1. Pregnant women with a positive screening
culture unless a planned Cesarean section is
performed in the absence of labor or rupture of
membranes
2. Pregnant women who gave birth to a previous
infant with invasive GBS disease
3. Pregnant women with documented GBS
bacteriuria during the current pregnancy
4. Pregnant women whose culture status is un-
known (culture not performed or result not avail-
able) and who also have delivery at <37 weeks of
gestation, amniotic membrane rupture for >18
hours, or intrapartum temperature >100.4ºF
(>38ºC)
5. The recommended IAP regimen is penicillin G (5
million units IV initial dose, then 2.5 million units
IV Q4h). In women with non-immediate-type
penicillin-allergy, cefazolin (Ancef, 2 g initial
dose, then 1 g Q8h) is recommended.
Clindamycin (900 mg IV Q8h) or erythromycin
(500 mg IV Q6h) are recommended for patients
at high risk for anaphylaxis to penicillins as long
as their GBS isolate is documented to be sus-
ceptible to both clindamycin and erythromycin.
IV. Normal spontaneous vaginal delivery
A. Preparation. As the multiparous patient ap-
proaches complete dilatation or as the nulliparous
patient begins to crown the fetal scalp, preparations
are made for delivery.
B. Maternal position. The mother is usually placed in
the dorsal lithotomy position with left lateral tilt.
C. Delivery of a fetus in an occiput anterior posi-
tion
1. Delivery of the head
a. The fetal head is delivered by extension as
the flexed head passes through the vaginal
introitus.
b. Once the fetal head has been delivered,
external rotation to the occiput transverse
position occurs.
c. The oropharynx and nose of the fetus are
suctioned with the bulb syringe. A finger is
passed into the vagina along the fetal neck to
check for a nuchal cord. If one is present, it is
lifted over the vertex. If this cannot be accom-
plished, the cord is doubly clamped and
divided.
d. If shoulder dystocia is anticipated, the shoul-
ders should be delivered immediately.
2. Episiotomy consists of incision of the perineum,
enlarging the vaginal orifice at the time of deliv-
ery. If indicated, an episiotomy should be per-
formed when 3-4 cm of fetal scalp is visible.
a. With adequate local or spinal anesthetic in
place, a medial episiotomy is completed by
incising the perineum toward the anus and
into the vagina.
b. Avoid cutting into the anal sphincter or the
rectum. A short perineum may require a
mediolateral episiotomy.
c. Application of pressure at the perineal apex
with a towel-covered hand helps to prevent
extension of the episiotomy.
3. Delivery of the anterior shoulder is accom-
plished by gentle downward traction on the fetal
head. The posterior shoulder is delivered by
upward traction.
4. Delivery of the body. The infant is grasped
around the back with the left hand, and the right
hand is placed, near the vagina, under the baby's
buttocks, supporting the infant’s body. The in-
fant’s body is rotated toward the operator and
supported by the operator’s forearm, freeing the
right hand to suction the mouth and nose. The
baby's head should be kept lower than the body
to facilitate drainage of secretions.
5. Suctioning of the nose and oropharynx is re-
peated.
6. The umbilical cord is doubly clamped and cut,
leaving 2-3 cm of cord.
D. Delivery of the placenta
1. The placenta usually separates spontaneously
from the uterine wall within 5 minutes of delivery.
Gentle fundal massage and gentle traction on
the cord facilitates delivery of the placenta.
2. The placenta should be examined for missing
cotyledons or blind vessels. The cut end of the
cord should be examined for 2 arteries and a
vein. The absence of one umbilical artery sug-
gests a congenital anomaly.
3. Prophylaxis against excessive postpartum blood
loss consists of external fundal massage and
oxytocin (Pitocin), 20 units in 1000 mL of IV fluid
at 100 drops/minute after delivery of the pla-
centa. Oxytocin can cause marked hypotension
if administered as a IV bolus.
4. After delivery of the placenta, the birth canal is
inspected for lacerations.
Delivery Note
1. Note the age, gravida, para, and gestational age.
2. Time of birth, type of birth (spontaneous vaginal delivery), position (left occiput
anterior).
3. Bulb suctioned, sex, weight, APGAR scores, nuchal cord, and number of cord
vessels.
4. Placenta expressed spontaneously intact. Describe episiotomy degree and repair
technique.
5. Note lacerations of cervix, vagina, rectum, perineum.
6. Estimated blood loss:
7. Disposition: Mother to recovery room in stable condition. Infant to nursery in stable
condition.
Routine Postpartum Orders

Transfer: To recovery room, then postpartum ward when stable.
Vitals: Check vitals, bleeding, fundus q15min x 1 hr or until stable, then q4h.
Activity: Ambulate in 2 hours if stable
Nursing Orders: If unable to void, straight catheterize; sitz baths prn with 1:1000 Beta-
dine prn, ice pack to perineum prn, record urine output.
Diet: Regular
IV Fluids: D5LR at 125 cc/h. Discontinue when stable and taking PO diet.
Medications:
Oxytocin (Pitocin) 20 units in 1 L D5LR at 100 drops/minute or 10 U IM.
FeS04 325 mg PO bid-tid.
Symptomatic Medications:
Acetaminophen/codeine (Tylenol #3) 1-2 tab PO q3-4h prn OR
Oxycodone/acetaminophen (Percocet) 1 tab q6h prn pain.
Milk of magnesia 30 mL PO q6h prn constipation.
Docusate Sodium (Colace) 100 mg PO bid.
Dulcolax suppository PR prn constipation.
A and D cream or Lanolin prn if breast feeding.
Breast binder or tight brazier and ice packs prn if not to breast feed.
Labs: Hemoglobin/hematocrit in AM. Give rubella vaccine if titer <1:10.
Active Management of Labor

The active management of labor refers to active control
over the course of labor. There are three essential
elements to active management are careful diagnosis of
labor by strict criteria, constant monitoring of labor, and
prompt intervention (eg, amniotomy, high dose oxytocin)
if progress is unsatisfactory.
I. Criteria for active management of labor:
A. Nulliparous
B. Term pregnancy
C. Singleton infant in cephalic presentation
D. No pregnancy complications
E. Experiencing spontaneous onset of labor.
II. Diagnosis of labor
A. The diagnosis of labor is made only when contrac-
tions are accompanied by any one of the following:
1. Bloody show
2. Rupture of the membranes
3. Full cervical effacement
B. Women who meet these criteria are admitted to the
labor unit.
III.Management of labor
A. Rupture of membranes. Intact fetal membranes
are artificially ruptured one hour after the diagnosis
of labor is made to permit assessment of the quan-
tity of fluid and the presence of meconium. Rupture
of the membranes may accelerate labor.
B. Progress during the first stage of labor
1. Satisfactory progress in the first stage of labor is
confirmed by cervical dilatation of at least 1 cm
per hour after the membranes have been rup-
tured.
2. In the absence of medical contraindications,
labor that fails to progress at the foregoing rate
is treated with oxytocin.
3. Progress during the second stage of labor is
measured by fetal descent and rotation.
a. The second stage of labor is divided into two
phases: the first phase is the time from full
dilatation until the fetal head reaches the
pelvic floor; the second phase extends from
the time the head reaches the pelvic floor to
delivery of the infant.
b. The first phase of the second stage is char-
acterized by descent of the fetal head. If the
fetal head is high in the pelvis at full dilata-
tion, the woman often has no urge to push
and should not be encouraged to do so.
Oxytocin treatment may be useful if the fetal
head fails to descend after a period of obser-
vation.
C. Administration of oxytocin. Oxytocin is adminis-
tered for treatment of failure of labor to progress,
unless its use is contraindicated. Oxytocin may only
be administered if the following conditions are met:
1. Fetal membranes are ruptured
2. Absence of meconium in amniotic fluid
3. Singleton fetus in a vertex position
4. No evidence of fetal distress
High Dose Oxytocin (Pitocin) Regimen
Begin oxytocin 6 mU per minute IV

Increase dose by 6 mU per minute every 15 minutes
Maximum dose: 40 mU per minute
D. Failure to progress (dystocia) is diagnosed when

the cervix fails to dilate at least 1 cm per hour
during the first stage of labor or when the fetal head
fails to descend during the second stage of labor.
Three possible causes for failure to progress are
possible (excluding malpresentations and hydro-
cephalus):
1. Inefficient uterine action
2. Occiput-posterior position
3. Cephalopelvic disproportion.
E. Inefficient uterine action is the most common cause
of dystocia in the nulliparous gravida, especially
early in labor. Secondary arrest of labor after
previously satisfactory progress may be due to an
occiput-posterior position or cephalopelvic dispro-
portion. It is often difficult for the clinician to differ-
entiate among these entities, thus oxytocin is
administered in all cases of failure to progress
(unless a contraindication exists).
F. In the first stage, progressive cervical dilatation of
at least 1 cm per hour should occur within one hour
of establishing efficient uterine contractions (five to
seven contractions within 15 minutes) with oxytocin.
The second stage is considered prolonged if it
extends longer than two hours in women without
epidural anesthesia and longer than three hours in
women with epidural anesthesia despite adequate
contractions and oxytocin augmentation.
Perineal Lacerations and

Episiotomies
I. First-degree laceration
A. A first degree perineal laceration extends only
through the vaginal and perineal skin.
B. Repair: Place a single layer of interrupted 3-O
chromic or Vicryl sutures about 1 cm apart.
II. Second-degree laceration and repair of midline
episiotomy
A. A second degree laceration extends deeply into the
soft tissues of the perineum, down to, but not
including, the external anal sphincter capsule. The
disruption involves the bulbocavernosus and
transverse perineal muscles.
B. Repair
1. Proximate the deep tissues of the perineal body
by placing 3-4 interrupted 2-O or 3-O chromic or
Vicryl absorbable sutures. Reapproximate the
superficial layers of the perineal body with a
running suture extending to the bottom of the
episiotomy.
2. Identify the apex of the vaginal laceration.
Suture the vaginal mucosa with running, inter-
locking, 3-O chromic or Vicryl absorbable su-
ture.
3. Close the perineal skin with a running,
subcuticular suture. Tie off the suture and
remove the needle.
III. Third-degree laceration
A. This laceration extends through the perineum and
through the anal sphincter.
B. Repair
1. Identify each severed end of the external anal
sphincter capsule, and grasp each end with an
Allis clamp.
2. Proximate the capsule of the sphincter with 4
interrupted sutures of 2-O or 3-O Vicryl suture,
making sure the sutures do not penetrate the
rectal mucosa.
3. Continue the repair as for a second degree
laceration as above. Stool softeners and sitz
baths are prescribed post-partum.
IV.Fourth-degree laceration
A. The laceration extends through the perineum, anal
sphincter, and extends through the rectal mucosa
to expose the lumen of the rectum.
B. Repair
1. Irrigate the laceration with sterile saline solution.
Identify the anatomy, including the apex of the
rectal mucosal laceration.
2. Approximate the rectal submucosa with a run-
ning suture using a 3-O chromic on a GI needle
extending to the margin of the anal skin.
3. Place a second layer of running suture to invert
the first suture line, and take some tension from
the first layer closure.
4. Identify and grasp the torn edges of the external
anal sphincter capsule with Allis clamps, and
perform a repair as for a third-degree laceration.
Close the remaining layers as for a second-
degree laceration.
5. A low-residue diet, stool softeners, and sitz
baths are prescribed post-partum.
Fetal Heart Rate Assessment

Fetal heart rate (FHR) assessment evaluates the fetal
condition by identifying FHR patterns that may be associ-
ated with adverse fetal or neonatal outcome or are
reassuring of fetal well-being.
I. Fetal monitoring techniques
A. Electronic fetal monitoring. The electronic fetal
monitor determines the FHR and continuously
records it in graphical form.
B. External fetal monitoring. The FHR is measured
by focusing an ultrasound beam on the fetal heart.
The fetal monitor interprets Doppler signals.
C. Internal fetal monitoring of FHR is an invasive
procedure. A spiral electrode is inserted
transcervically into the fetal scalp. The internal
electrode detects the fetal (ECG) and calculates the
fetal heart rate based upon the interval between R
waves. This signal provides accurate measurement
of beat-to-beat and baseline variability.
D. Biophysical profile. The biophysical profile (BPP)
consists of electronic fetal heart rate evaluation
combined with sonographically assessed fetal
breathing movements, motor movement, gross fetal
tone, and amniotic fluid volume.
II. Fetal heart rate patterns
A. The fetal heart rate pattern recorded by an elec-
tronic fetal monitor is categorized as reassuring or
nonreassuring.
B. Reassuring fetal heart rate patterns
1. A baseline fetal heart rate of 120 to 160 bpm
2. Absence of FHR decelerations
3. Age appropriate FHR accelerations
4. Normal FHR variability (5 to 25 bpm).
C. Early decelerations (ie, shallow symmetrical
decelerations in which the nadir of the deceleration
occurs simultaneously with the peak of the contrac-
tion) and mild bradycardia of 100 to 119 bpm are
caused by fetal head compression, and they are not
associated with fetal acidosis or poor neonatal
outcome.
D. The majority of fetal arrhythmias are benign and
spontaneously convert to normal sinus rhythm by 24
hours after birth. Persistent tachyarrhythmias may
cause fetal hydrops if present for many hours to
days. Persistent bradyarrhythmias are often associ-
ated with fetal heart disease (eg, cardiomyopathy
related to lupus), but seldom result in hypoxia or
acidosis in fetal life.
E. FHR accelerations and mild variable decelerations
are indicative of a normally functioning autonomic
nervous system.
F. Nonreassuring fetal heart rate patterns
1. Nonreassuring FHR patterns are nonspecific and
require further evaluation. The fetus may not be
acidotic initially; however, continuation or wors-
ening of the clinical situation may result in fetal
acidosis.
2. Late decelerations are characterized by a
smooth U-shaped fall in the fetal heart rate
beginning after the contraction has started and
ending after the contraction has ended. The
nadir of the deceleration occurs after the peak of
the contraction. Mild late decelerations are a
reflex central nervous system response to
hypoxia, while severe late decelerations suggest
direct myocardial depression.
3. Sinusoidal heart rate is defined as a pattern of
regular variability resembling a sine wave with a
fixed periodicity of three to five cycles per minute
and an amplitude of 5 to 40 bpm. The sinusoidal
pattern is caused by moderate fetal hypoxemia,
often secondary to fetal anemia.
4. Variable decelerations are characterized by the
variable onset of abrupt slowing of the FHR in
association with uterine contractions. Mild or
moderate variable decelerations do not have a
late component, are of short duration and depth,
and end by rapid return to a normal baseline
FHR. They are usually intermittent. This pattern
is not associated with acidosis or low Apgar
scores. Severe variable decelerations have a
late component during which the fetal pH falls.
They also may display loss of variability or re-
bound tachycardia and last longer than 60 sec-
onds or fall to less than 70 bpm. They tend to
become persistent and progressively deeper and
longer lasting over time.
5. Fetal distress patterns
a. Fetal distress is likely to cause fetal or neona-
tal death or damage if left uncorrected. Fetal
distress patterns are associated with fetal
acidemia and hypoxemia.
b. Undulating baseline. Alternating tachycardia
and bradycardia, often with reduced variability
between the wide swings in heart rate.
c. Severe bradycardia. Fetal heart rate below
100 bpm for a prolonged period of time (ie, at
least 10 minutes).
d. Tachycardia with diminished variability that is
unrelated to drugs or additional non-reassur-
ing periodic patterns (eg, late decelerations or
severe variable decelerations)
III. Intrapartum fetal surveillance
A. Transient episodes of hypoxemia and hypoxia are
generally well-tolerated by the fetus. Progressive or
severe episodes may lead to fetal acidosis and
subsequent asphyxia. One goal of intrapartum fetal
surveillance is to distinguish the fetus with FHR
abnormalities who is well compensated from one
who is at risk for neurological impairment or death.
Ancillary tests are useful for this purpose.
B. Ancillary tests
1. Fetal scalp stimulation. Fetal scalp stimulation
is similar to the vibroacoustic stimulation test
used antepartum. Absence of acidosis (ie, fetal
pH greater than 7.20) is confirmed by elicitation
of a FHR acceleration when an examiner stimu-
lates the fetal vertex with the examining finger.
Fetal scalp sampling is recommended to further
evaluate positive test results.
2. Fetal scalp blood sampling. Capillary blood
collected from the fetal scalp typically has a pH
lower than arterial blood. A pH of 7.20 was
initially thought to represent the critical value for
identifying serious fetal stress and an increase in
the incidence of low Apgar scores. The degree of
technical skill required prohibits widespread use
of this modality.
IV. Management of nonreassuring FHR patterns
during labor
1. Determine the cause of the abnormality (eg, cord
prolapse, maternal medication, abruption pla-
centa)
2. Attempt to correct the problem or initiate mea-
sures to improve fetal oxygenation (eg, change
maternal position, administer oxygen and intrave-
nous fluids, consider amnioinfusion or tocolysis)
3. If the nonreassuring pattern does not resolve
within a few minutes, perform ancillary tests to
determine the fetal condition
4. Determine whether operative intervention is
needed
B. The presence of accelerations almost always
assures the absence of fetal acidosis. Therefore, if
such accelerations are not observed, they should be
elicited by manual or vibroacoustic stimulation.
There is a 50 percent risk of fetal acidosis in fetuses
in whom accelerations cannot be elicited, so further
evaluation by fetal scalp sampling for pH is indi-
cated to help clarify the fetal acid-base status. Serial
evaluation every 20 to 30 minutes is necessary if
the FHR pattern remains nonreassuring. Expedi-
tious delivery is indicated for persistent
nonreassuring FHR patterns.
Management of Variant Fetal Heart Rate Pat-

terns
FHR Pattern Diagnosis Action
Normal rate nor- Fetus is well None

mal oxygenated
variability, accel-
erations,
no decelerations
Normal variabil- Fetus is still Conservative

ity, accelera- well oxygenated management.
tions, mild non- centrally
reassuring pat-
tern (brady-
cardia, late
decelerations,
variable deceler-
ations)
Normal variabil- Fetus is still Continue con-

ity, ± accelera- well oxygenated servative man-
tions, moderate- centrally, but agement. Con-
severe the FHR sug- sider stimulation
nonreassuring gests hypoxia testing. Prepare
pattern for rapid delivery
(bradycardia, if pattern wors-
late decelera- ens
tions, variable
decelerations)
FHR Pattern Diagnosis Action
Decreasing vari- Fetus may be Deliver if sponta-

ability, on the verge of neous delivery is
± accelerations, decompen- remote, or if
moderate-severe sation stimulation sup-
nonreassuring ports diagnosis
patterns of decompen-
(bradycardia, sation. Normal
late decelera- response to
tions, variable stimulation may
decelerations) allow time to
await a vaginal
delivery
Absent variabil- Evidence of Deliver. Stimula-

ity, no accelera- actual or im- tion
tions, moder- pending as- or in-utero man-
ate/severe phyxia agement may be
nonreassuring attempted if de-
patterns livery is not de-
(bradycardia, layed
late decelera-
tions, variable
decelerations)
Antepartum Fetal Surveillance

I. Antepartum fetal surveillance techniques
A. Antepartum fetal surveillance should be initiated in
pregnancies in which the risk of fetal demise is
known to be increased. These problems can in-
clude maternal conditions such as antiphospholipid
syndrome, chronic hypertension, renal disease,
systemic lupus erythematosus, or type 1 diabetes
mellitus. Monitoring should also be initiated in
pregnancy-related conditions such as
preeclampsia, intrauterine growth restriction
(IUGR), multiple gestation, poor obstetrical history,
or postterm pregnancy.
B. Antepartum fetal surveillance can include the
nonstress test (NST), BPP, oxytocin challenge test
(OCT), or modified BPP.
C. Nonstress test
1. A NST is performed using an electronic fetal
monitor. Testing is generally begun at 32 to 34
weeks. Testing is performed at daily to weekly
intervals as long as the indication for testing
persists.
2. The test is reactive if there are two or more fetal
heart rate accelerations of 15 bpm above the
baseline rate lasting for 15 seconds in a 20
minute period. A nonreactive NST does not
show such accelerations over a 40 minute
period. Nonreactivity may be related to fetal
immaturity, a sleep cycle, drugs, fetal anomalies,
or fetal hypoxemia.
3. If the NST is nonreactive, it is considered
nonreassuring and further evaluation or delivery
of the fetus is indicated. At term, delivery rather
than further evaluation is usually warranted. A
nonreassuring NST preterm usually should be
assessed with ancillary tests, since the false
positive rate of an isolated NST may be 50 to 60
percent.
D. Fetal movement assessment (“kick counts”)
1. A diminution in the maternal perception of fetal
movement often but not invariably precedes fetal
death, in some cases by several days.
2. The woman lies on her side and counts distinct
fetal movements. Perception of 10 distinct
movements in a period of up to 2 hours is con-
sidered reassuring. Once 10 movements have
been perceived, the count may be discontinued.
In the absence of a reassuring count, non stress
testing is recommended.
Indications for Antepartum Fetal Surveillance
Maternal Pregnancy complications

antiphospholipid syndrome preeclampsia
poorly controlled decreased fetal movement
hyperthyroidism oligohydramnios
hemoglobinopathies polyhydramnios
cyanotic heart disease Intrauterine growth restric-
systemic lupus tion
erythematosus postterm pregnancy
chronic renal disease isoimmunization
type I diabetes mellitus previous unexplained fetal
hypertensive disorders demise
multiple gestation
E. Ancillary tests
1. Vibroacoustic stimulation is performed by
placing an artificial larynx on the maternal abdo-
men and delivering a short burst of sound to the
fetus. The procedure can shorten the duration of
time needed to produce reactivity and the fre-
quency of nonreactive NSTs, without compro-
mising the predictive value of a reactive NST.
2. Oxytocin challenge test
a. The oxytocin challenge test (OCT) is done by
intravenously infusing dilute oxytocin until
three contractions occur within ten minutes.
The test is interpreted as follows:
b. A positive test is defined by the presence of
late decelerations following 50 percent or
more of the contractions
c. A negative test has no late or significant
variable decelerations
d. An equivocal-suspicious pattern consists of
intermittent late or significant variable decel-
erations, while an equivocal-hyperstimulatory
pattern refers to fetal heart rate decelerations
occurring with contractions more frequent
than every two minutes or lasting longer than
90 seconds
e. An unsatisfactory test is one in which the
tracing is uninterpretable or contractions are
fewer than three in 10 minutes
f. A positive test indicates decreased fetal
reserve and correlates with a 20 to 40 per-
cent incidence of abnormal FHR patterns
during labor. An equivocal-suspicious test
with repetitive variable decelerations is also
associated with abnormal FHR patterns in
labor, which are often related to cord com-
pression due to oligohydramnios.
3. Fetal biophysical profile
a. The fetal biophysical profile score refers to
the sonographic assessment of four biophysi-
cal variables: fetal movement, fetal tone, fetal
breathing, amniotic fluid volume and
nonstress testing. Each of these five parame-
ters is given a score of 0 or 2 points, depend-
ing upon whether specific criteria are met.
Fetal BPS is a noninvasive, highly accurate
means for predicting the presence of fetal
asphyxia.
b. Criteria
(1) A normal variable is assigned a score of
two and an abnormal variable a score of
zero. The maximal score is 10/10 and the
minimal score is 0/10.
(2) Amniotic fluid volume is based upon an
ultrasound-based objective measurement
of the largest visible pocket. The selected
largest pocket must have a transverse
diameter of at least one centimeter.
Components of the Biophysical Profile
Parame- Normal (score = 2) Abnormal

ter (score = 0)
Nonstress >2 accelerations >15 <2 accelera-

test beats per minute tions
above baseline during
test lasting >15 sec-
onds in 20 minutes
Amniotic Amniotic fluid index >5 AFI <5 or no

fluid vol- or at least 1 pocket pocket >2 cm
ume measuring 2 cm x 2 x 2 cm
cm in perpendicular
planes
Fetal Sustained FBM (>30 Absence of

breathing seconds) FBM or short
movement gasps only
<30 seconds
total
Fetal body >3 episodes of either <3 episodes

move- limb or trunk move- during test
ments ment
Fetal tone Extremities in flexion Extension at

at rest and >1 episode rest or no re-
of extension of extrem- turn to flexion
ity, hand or spine with after move-
return to flexion ment
A total score of 8 to 10 is reassuring; a score of 6 is suspi-

cious, and a score of 4 or less is ominous.
Amniotic fluid index = the sum of the largest vertical pocket
in each of four quadrants on the maternal abdomen inter-
secting at the umbilicus.
c. Clinical utility
(1) The fetal BPS is noninvasive and highly
accurate for predicting the presence of
fetal asphyxia. The probability of fetal
acidemia is virtually zero when the score
is normal (8 to 10). The false negative
rate (ie, fetal death within one week of a
last test with a normal score) is exceed-
ingly low. The likelihood of fetal compro-
mise and death rises as the score falls.
(2) The risk of fetal demise within one week
of a normal test result is 0.8 per 1000
women tested. The positive predictive
value of the BPS for evidence of true fetal
compromise is only 50 percent, with a
negative predictive value greater than
99.9 percent.
d. Indications and frequency of testing
(1) ACOG recommends antepartum test-
ing in the following situations:
(a) Women with high-risk factors for fetal
asphyxia should undergo antepartum
fetal surveillance with tests (eg, BPS,
nonstress test)
(b) Testing may be initiated as early as
26 weeks of gestation when clinical
conditions suggest early fetal compro-
mise is likely. Initiating testing at 32 to
34 weeks of gestation is appropriate
for most pregnancies at increased
risk of stillbirth.
(c) A reassuring test (eg, BPS of 8 to 10)
should be repeated periodically
(weekly or twice weekly) until delivery
when the high-risk condition persists.
(d) Any significant deterioration in the
clinic al s tatus (eg, worsening
preeclampsia, decreased fetal activ-
ity) requires fetal reevaluation.
(e) Severe oligohydramnios (no vertical
pocket >2 cm or amniotic fluid index
<5) requires either delivery or close
maternal and fetal surveillance.
(f) Induction of labor may be attempted
with abnormal antepartum testing as
long as the fetal heart rate and con-
tractions are monitored continuously
and are reassuring. Cesarean deliv-
ery is indicated if there are repetitive
late decelerations.
(2) The minimum gestational age for testing
should reflect the lower limit that interven-
tion with delivery would be considered.
This age is now 24 to 25 weeks.
(3) Modified biophysical profile. Assess-
ment of amniotic fluid volume and
nonstress testing appear to be as reliable
a predictor of long-term fetal well-being
as the full BPS. The rate of stillbirth within
one week of a normal modified BPS is
the same as with the full BPS, 0.8 per
1000 women tested.
Guidelines for Antepartum Testing
Indication Initiation Frequency
Post-term preg- 41 weeks Twice a week

nancy
Preterm rupture of At onset Daily

membranes
Bleeding 26 weeks or Twice a week

at onset
Oligohydramnios 26 weeks or Twice a week

at onset
Polyhydramnios 32 weeks Weekly
Diabetes 32 weeks Twice a week
Chronic or 28 weeks Weekly. In-

pregnancy-induced crease to twice-
hypertension weekly at 32
weeks.
Steroid-dependent 28 weeks Weekly

or poorly controlled
asthma
Sickle cell disease 32 weeks Weekly (more

(earlier if often if severe)
symptoms)
Impaired renal 28 weeks Weekly

function
Substance abuse 32 weeks Weekly
Prior stillbirth At 2 weeks Weekly

before prior
fetal death
Multiple gestation 32 weeks Weekly
Congenital anom- 32 weeks Weekly

aly
Fetal growth re- 26 weeks Twice a week or

striction at onset
Decreased fetal At time of Once

movement complaint
F. Perinatal outcome. An abnormal NST result

should be interpreted with caution. Further assess-
ment of fetal condition using the NST, OCT, or BPP
should usually be performed to help determine
whether the fetus is in immediate jeopardy.
G. Management of abnormal test results
1. Maternal reports of decreased fetal movement
should be evaluated by an NST, CST, BPP, or
modified BPP. These results, if normal, usually
are sufficient to exclude imminent fetal jeopardy.
A nonreactive NST or an abnormal modified
BPP generally should be followed by additional
testing (either a CST or a full BPP). In many
circumstances, a positive CST result generally
indicates that delivery is warranted.
2. A BPP score of 6 is considered equivocal; in the
term fetus, this score generally should prompt
delivery, whereas in the preterm fetus, it should
result in a repeat BPP in 24 hours. In the in-
terim, maternal corticosteroid administration
should be considered for pregnancies of less
than 34 weeks of gestation. Repeat equivocal
scores should result either in delivery or contin-
ued intensive surveillance. A BPP score of 4
usually indicates that delivery is warranted.
3. Preterm delivery is indicated for nonreassuring
antepartum fetal testing results that have been
confirmed by additional testing. At term, addi-
tional testing can be omitted since the risk from
delivery is small. Depending on the fetal heart
rate pattern, induction of labor with continuous
FHR and contraction monitoring may be at-
tempted in the absence of obstetrical contraindi-
cations. Repetitive late decelerations or severe
variable decelerations usually require cesarean
delivery.
Brief Postoperative Cesarean Sec-

tion Note
Pre-op diagnosis:
1. 23 year old G1P0, estimated gestational age = 40
weeks
2. Dystocia
3. Non-reassuring fetal tracing
Post-op diagnosis: Same as above
Procedure: Primary low segment transverse cesarean
section
Attending Surgeon, Assistant:
Anesthesia: Epidural
Operative Findings: Weight and sex of infant, APGARs
at 1 min and 5 min; normal uterus, tubes, ovaries.
Cord pH:
Specimens: Placenta, cord blood (type and Rh).
Estimated Blood Loss: 800 cc; no blood replaced.
Fluids, blood and urine output:
Drains: Foley to gravity.
Complications: None
Disposition: Patient sent to recovery room in stable
condition.
Cesarean Section Operative Report

Preoperative Diagnosis:
1. 23 year old G1P0, estimated gestational age = 40
weeks
2. Dystocia
3. Non-reassuring fetal tracing
Postoperative Diagnosis: Same as above
Title of Operation: Primary low segment transverse
cesarean section
Surgeon:
Assistant:
Anesthesia: Epidural
Findings At Surgery: Male infant in occiput posterior
presentation. Thin meconium with none below the cords,
pediatrics present at delivery, APGAR's 6/8, weight 3980
g. Normal uterus, tubes, and ovaries.
Description of Operative Procedure:
After assuring informed consent, the patient was taken
to the operating room and spinal anesthesia was initiated.
The patient was placed in the dorsal, supine position with
left lateral tilt. The abdomen was prepped and draped in
sterile fashion.
A Pfannenstiel skin incision was made with a scalpel
and carried through to the level of the fascia. The fascial
incision was extended bilaterally with Mayo scissors. The
fascial incision was then grasped with the Kocher clamps,
elevated, and sharply and bluntly dissected superiorly and
inferiorly from the rectus muscles.
The rectus muscles were then separated in the
midline, and the peritoneum was tented up, and entered
sharply with Metzenbaum scissors. The peritoneal
incision was extended superiorly and inferiorly with good
visualization of the bladder.
A bladder blade was then inserted, and the
vesicouterine peritoneum was identified, grasped with the
pick-ups, and entered sharply with the Metzenbaum
scissors. This incision was then extended laterally, and a
bladder flap was created. The bladder was retracted
using the bladder blade. The lower uterine segment was
incised in a transverse fashion with the scalpel, then
extended bilaterally with bandage scissors. The bladder
blade was removed, and the infants head was delivered
atraumatically. The nose and mouth were suctioned and
the cord clamped and cut. The infant was handed off to
the pediatrician. Cord gases and cord blood were sent.
The placenta was then removed manually, and the
uterus was exteriorized, and cleared of all clots and
debris. The uterine incision was repaired with 1-O chro-
mic in a running locking fashion. A second layer of 1-O
chromic was used to obtain excellent hemostasis. The
bladder flap was repaired with a 3-O Vicryl in a running
fashion. The cul-de-sac was cleared of clots and the
uterus was returned to the abdomen. The peritoneum was
closed with 3-0 Vicryl. The fascia was reapproximated
with O Vicryl in a running fashion. The skin was closed
with staples.
The patient tolerated the procedure well. Needle and
sponge counts were correct times two. Two grams of
Ancef was given at cord clamp, and a sterile dressing
was placed over the incision.
Estimated Blood Loss (EBL): 800 cc; no blood replaced
(normal blood loss is 500-1000 cc).
Specimens: Placenta, cord pH, cord blood specimens.
Drains: Foley to gravity.
Fluids: Input - 2000 cc LR; Output - 300 cc clear urine.
Complications: None.
Disposition: The patient was taken to the recovery room
then postpartum ward in stable condition.
Postoperative Management after

Cesarean Section
I. Post Cesarean Section Orders
A. Transfer: to post partum ward when stable.
B. Vital signs: q4h x 24 hours, I and O.
C. Activity: Bed rest x 6-8 hours, then ambulate; if
given spinal, keep patient flat on back x 8h. Incen-
tive spirometer q1h while awake.
D. Diet: NPO x 8h, then sips of water. Advance to
clear liquids, then to regular diet as tolerated.
E. IV Fluids: IV D5 LR or D5 ½ NS at 125 cc/h. Foley
to gravity; discontinue after 12 hours. I and O
catheterize prn.
F. Medications
1. Cefazolin (Ancef) 1 gm IVPB x one dose at time
of cesarean section.
2. Nalbuphine (Nubain) 5 to 10 mg SC or IV q2-3h
OR
3. Meperidine (Demerol) 50-75 mg IM q3-4h prn
pain.
4. Hydroxyzine (Vistaril) 25-50 mg IM q3-4h prn
nausea.
5. Prochlorperazine (Compazine) 10 mg IV q4-6h
prn nausea OR
6. Promethazine (Phenergan) 25-50 mg IV q3-4h
prn nausea
G. Labs: CBC in AM.
II. Postoperative Day #1
A. Assess pain, lungs, cardiac status, fundal height,
lochia, passing of flatus, bowel movement, disten-
sion, tenderness, bowel sounds, incision.
B. Discontinue IV when taking adequate PO fluids.
C. Discontinue Foley, and I and O catheterize prn.
D. Ambulate tid with assistance; incentive spirometer
q1h while awake.
E. Check hematocrit, hemoglobin, Rh, and rubella
status.
F. Medications
1. Acetaminophen/codeine (Tylenol #3) 1-2 PO q4-
6h prn pain OR
2. Oxycodone/acetaminophen (Percocet) 1 tab q6h
prn pain.
3. FeSO4 325 mg PO bid-tid.
4. Multivitamin PO qd, Colace 100 mg PO bid.
Mylicon 80 mg PO qid prn bloating.
III. Postoperative Day #2
A. If passing gas and/or bowel movement, advance to
regular diet.
B. Laxatives: Dulcolax supp prn or Milk of magnesia
30 cc PO tid prn. Mylicon 80 mg PO qid prn bloat-
ing.
IV. Postoperative Day #3
A. If transverse incision, remove staples and place
steri-strips on day 3. If a vertical incision, remove
staples on post op day 5.
B. Discharge home on appropriate medications; follow
up in 2 and 6 weeks.
Prevention of D Isoimmunization
The morbidity and mortality of Rh hemolytic disease can
be significantly reduced by identification of women at risk
for isoimmunization and by administration of D immuno-
globulin. Administration of D immunoglobulin [RhoGAM,
Rho(D) immunoglobulin, RhIg] is very effective in the
preventing isoimmunization to the D antigen.
I. Prenatal testing
A. Routine prenatal laboratory evaluation includes
ABO and D blood type determination and antibody
screen.
B. At 28-29 weeks of gestation woman who are D
negative but not D isoimmunized should be re-
tested for D antibody. If the test reveals that no D
antibody is present, prophylactic D immunoglobulin
[RhoGAM, Rho(D) immunoglobulin, RhIg] is indi-
cated.
C. If D antibody is present, D immunoglobulin will not
be beneficial, and specialized management of the
D isoimmunized pregnancy is undertaken to man-
age hemolytic disease of the fetus and hydrops
fetalis.
II. Routine administration of D immunoglobulin
A. Abortion. D sensitization may be caused by abor-
tion. D sensitization occurs more frequently after
induced abortion than after spontaneous abortion,
and it occurs more frequently after late abortion
than after early abortion. D sensitization occurs
following induced abortion in 4-5% of susceptible
women. All unsensitized, D-negative women who
have an induced or spontaneous abortion should
be treated with D immunoglobulin unless the father
is known to be D negative.
B. Dosage of D immunoglobulin is determined by the
stage of gestation. If the abortion occurs before 13
weeks of gestation, 50 mcg of D immunoglobulin
prevents sensitization. For abortions occurring at
13 weeks of gestation and later, 300-mcg is given.
C. Ectopic pregnancy can cause D sensitization. All
unsensitized, D-negative women who have an
ectopic pregnancy should be given D immunoglob-
ulin. The dosage is determined by the gestational
age, as described above for abortion.
D. Amniocentesis
1. D isoimmunization can occur after amniocente-
sis. D immunoglobulin, 300 mcg, should be
administered to unsensitized, D-negative,
susceptible patients following first- and second-
trimester amniocentesis.
2. Following third-trimester amniocentesis, 300
mcg of D immunoglobulin should be adminis-
tered. If amniocentesis is performed and delivery
is planned within 48 hours, D immunoglobulin
can be withheld until after delivery, when the
newborn can be tested for D positivity. If the
amniocentesis is expected to precede delivery
by more than 48 hours, the patient should re-
ceive 300 mcg of D immunoglobulin at the time
of amniocentesis.
E. Antepartum prophylaxis
1. Isoimmunized occurs in 1-2% of D-negative
women during the antepartum period. D immu-
noglobulin, administered both during pregnancy
and postpartum, can reduce the incidence of D
isoimmunization to 0.3%.
2. Antepartum prophylaxis is given at 28-29 weeks
of gestation. Antibody-negative, Rh-negative
gravidas should have a repeat assessment at 28
weeks. D immunoglobulin (RhoGAM, RhIg), 300
mcg, is given to D-negative women. However, if
the father of the fetus is known with certainty to
be D negative, antepartum prophylaxis is not
necessary.
F. Postpartum D immunoglobulin
1. D immunoglobulin is given to the D negative
mother as soon after delivery as cord blood
findings indicate that the baby is Rh positive.
2. A woman at risk who is inadvertently not given D
immunoglobulin within 72 hours after delivery
should still receive prophylaxis at any time up
until two weeks after delivery. If prophylaxis is
delayed, it may not be effective.
3. A quantitative Kleihauer-Betke analysis should
be performed in situations in which significant
maternal bleeding may have occurred (eg, after
maternal abdominal trauma, abruptio placentae,
external cephalic version). If the quantitative
determination is thought to be more than 30 mL,
D immune globulin should be given to the
mother in multiples of one vial (300 mcg) for
each 30 mL of estimated fetal whole blood in her
circulation, unless the father of the baby is
known to be D negative.
G. Abruptio placentae, placenta previa, cesarean
delivery, intrauterine manipulation, or manual
removal of the placenta may cause more than 30
mL of fetal-to-maternal bleeding. In these condi-
tions, testing for excessive bleeding (Kleihauer-
Betke test) or inadequate D immunoglobulin dos-
age (indirect Coombs test) is necessary.
Complications of Preg-
nancy
Nausea and Vomiting of Preg-
nancy and Hyperemesis
Gravidarum
Nausea and vomiting to affects about 70% to 85% of
pregnant women. Symptoms of nausea and vomiting of
pregnancy (NVP) are most common during the first
trimester; however, some women have persistent nausea
for their entire pregnancy. Hyperemesis often occurs in
association with high levels of human chorionic gonado-
tropin (hCG), such as with multiple pregnancies,
trophoblastic disease, and fetal anomalies such as
triploidy.
Conditions that Predispose to Excessive Nau-

sea and Vomiting
Viral gastroenteritis
Gestational trophoblastic disease
Hepatitis
Urinary tract infection
Multifetal gestation
Gallbladder disease
Migraine
I. Treatment of nausea and vomiting of pregnancy

A. Patients should avoid odors or foods that seem to
be aggravating the nausea. Useful dietary modifica-
tions include avoiding fatty or spicy foods, and
stopping iron supplements. Frequent small meals
also may improve symptoms. Recommendations
include bland and dry foods, high-protein snacks,
and crackers at the bedside to be taken first thing in
the morning.
B. Cholecystitis, peptic ulcer disease, or hepatitis can
cause nausea and vomiting and should be ex-
cluded. Gastroenteritis, appendicitis, pyelonephritis,
and pancreatitis also should be excluded. Obstetric
explanations for nausea and vomiting may include
multiple pregnancies or a hydatidiform mole.
C. Non-pharmacologic remedies are adequate for up
to 90% of patients with NVP. However, about 10%
will require medication and about 1% have severe
enough vomiting that they require hospitalization.
D. Vitamin therapy. Pyridoxine is effective as first-line
therapy and is recommended up to 25 mg three
times daily. Pyridoxine serum levels do not appear
to correlate with the prevalence or degree of nau-
sea and vomiting. Multivitamins also are effective
for prevention of NVP. Premesis Rx is a prescrip-
tion tablet with controlled-release vitamin B6, 75
mg, so it can be given once a day. It also contains
vitamin B12 (12 mcg), folic acid (1 mg), and calcium
carbonate (200 mg).
E. Over-the-Counter Therapy. If pyridoxine alone is
not efficacious, an alternative is to combine over-
the-counter doxylamine 25 mg (Unisom) and
pyridoxine 25 mg. One could combine the 25 mg of
pyridoxine three times daily with doxylamine 25 mg,
1 tablet every bedtime, and ½ tablet morning and
afternoon. There is no evidence that doxylamine is
a teratogen.
Drug Therapy for Nausea and Vomiting of Preg-

nancy
Generic name (trade Dosage

name)
Antihistamines
Doxylamine (Unisom) 25 mg ½ tab BID, 1 tab qhs
Dimenhydrinate (Drama- 25 to 100 mg po/im/iv ev-

mine) ery 4 to 6 hr
Diphenhydramine (Bena- 25 to 50 mg po/im/iv every

dryl) 4 to 6 hr
Trimethobenzamide 250 mg po every 6 to 8 hr

(Tigan) or
200 mg im/pr every 6 to 8
hr
Meclizine (Antivert) 12.5 to 25 mg BID/TID
Phenothiazines
Promethazine (Phenergan) 12.5 to 25 mg po/iv/pr ev-

ery 4 to 6 hr
Prochlorperazine 5 to 10 mg po/iv every 6 to

(Compazine) 8 hr or
25 mg pr every 6 to 8 hr
Prokinetic agents
Metoclopramide (Reglan) 10 to 20 mg po/iv every 6
hr
Serotonin (5-HT3) antagonists
Ondansetron (Zofran) 8 mg po/iv every 8 hr
Corticosteroids
Methylprednisolone 16 mg po TID for 3 days

(Medrol) then ½ dose every 3 days
for 2 wks
F. Pharmacologic Therapy
1. Prescribed medication is the next step if dietary
modifications and vitamin B6 therapy with
doxylamine are ineffective. The phenothiazines
are safe and effective, and promethazine
(Phenergan) often is tried first. One of the dis-
advantages of the phenothiazines is their
potential for dystonic effects.
2. Metoclopramide (Reglan) is the antiemetic
drug of choice in pregnancy in several Euro-
pean countries. There was no increased risk of
birth defects.
3. Ondansetron (Zofran) has been compared
with promethazine (Phenergan), and the two
drugs are equally effective, but ondansetron is
much more expensive. No data have been
published on first trimester teratogenic risk with
ondansetron.
II. Hyperemesis gravidarum
A. Hyperemesis gravidarum occurs in the extreme
0.5% to 1% of patients who have intractable vomit-
ing. Patients with hyperemesis have abnormal
electrolytes, dehydration with high urine-specific
gravity, ketosis and acetonuria, and untreated
have weight loss >5% of body weight. Intravenous
hydration is the first line of therapy for patients with
severe nausea and vomiting. Administration of
vitamin B1 supplements may be necessary to
prevent Wernicke's encephalopathy.
B. Antiemetics are given parenterally to patients with
hyperemesis. Corticosteroids may have a benefit
in hyper-emesis if other antiemetic therapy has
failed. One proposed regimen is
methylprednisolone 15 to 20 mg given intrave-
nously every 8 hours. A methylprednisolone oral
taper regimen is more effective than oral
promethazine.
Spontaneous Abortion
Abortion is defined as termination of pregnancy resulting
in expulsion of an immature, nonviable fetus. A fetus of
<20 weeks gestation or a fetus weighing <500 gm is
considered an abortus. Spontaneous abortion occurs in
15% of all pregnancies.
I. Threatened abortion is defined as vaginal bleeding
occurring in the first 20 weeks of pregnancy, without
the passage of tissue or rupture of membranes.
A. Symptoms of pregnancy (nausea, vomiting, fatigue,
breast tenderness, urinary frequency) are usually
present.
B. Speculum exam reveals blood coming from the
cervical os without amniotic fluid or tissue in the
endocervical canal.
C. The internal cervical os is closed, and the uterus is
soft and enlarged appropriate for gestational age.
D. Differential diagnosis
1. Benign and malignant lesions. The cervix often
bleeds from an ectropion of friable tissue.
Hemostasis can be accomplished by applying
pressure for several minutes with a large swab or
by cautery with a silver nitrate stick. Atypical
cervical lesions are evaluated with colposcopy
and biopsy.
2. Disorders of pregnancy
a. Hydatidiform mole may present with early
pregnancy bleeding, passage of grape-like
vesicles, and a uterus that is enlarged in
excess of that expected from dates. An ab-
sence of heart tones by Doppler after 12
weeks is characteristic. Hyperemesis,
preeclampsia, or hyperthyroidism may be
present. Ultrasonography confirms the diag-
nosis.
b. Ectopic pregnancy should be excluded when
first trimester bleeding is associated with
pelvic pain. Orthostatic light-headedness,
syncope or shoulder pain (from diaphragmatic
irritation) may occur.
(1) Abdominal tenderness is noted, and pelvic
examination reveals cervical motion ten-
derness.
(2) Serum beta-HCG is positive.
E. Laboratory tests
1. Complete blood count. The CBC will not reflect
acute blood loss.
2. Quantitative serum beta-HCG level may be
positive in nonviable gestations since beta-HCG
may persist in the serum for several weeks after
fetal death.
3. Ultrasonography should detect fetal heart
motion by 7 weeks gestation or older. Failure to
detect fetal heart motion after 9 weeks gestation
should prompt consideration of curettage.
F. Treatment of threatened abortion
1. Bed rest with sedation and abstinence from
intercourse.
2. The patient should report increased bleeding
(>normal menses), cramping, passage of tissue,
or fever. Passed tissue should be saved for
examination.
II. Inevitable abortion is defined as a threatened abor-
tion with a dilated cervical os. Menstrual-like cramps
usually occur.
A. Differential diagnosis
1. Incomplete abortion is diagnosed when tissue
has passed. Tissue may be visible in the vagina
or endocervical canal.
2. Threatened abortion is diagnosed when the
internal os is closed and will not admit a finger-
tip.
3. Incompetent cervix is characterized by dilata-
tion of the cervix without cramps.
B. Treatment of inevitable abortion
1. Surgical evacuation of the uterus is necessary.
2. D immunoglobulin (RhoGAM) is administered to
Rh-negative, unsensitized patients to prevent
isoimmunization. Before 13 weeks gestation, the
dosage is 50 mcg IM; at 13 weeks gestation, the
dosage is 300 mcg IM.
III. Incomplete abortion is characterized by cramping,
bleeding, passage of tissue, and a dilated internal os
with tissue present in the vagina or endocervical canal.
Profuse bleeding, orthostatic dizziness, syncope, and
postural pulse and blood pressure changes may occur.
A. Laboratory evaluation
1. Complete blood count. CBC will not reflect
acute blood loss.
2. Rh typing
3. Blood typing and cress-matching.
4. Karyotyping of products of conception is com-
pleted if loss is recurrent.
B. Treatment
1. Stabilization. If the patient has signs and symp-
toms of heavy bleeding, at least 2 large-bore IV
catheters (<16 gauge) are placed. Lactate
Ringer’s or normal saline with 40 U oxytocin/L is
given IV at 200 mL/hour or greater.
2. Products of conception are removed from the
endocervical canal and uterus with a ring for-
ceps. Immediate removal decreases bleeding.
Curettage is performed after vital signs have
stabilized.
3. Suction dilation and curettage
a. Analgesia consists of meperidine (Demerol),
35-50 mg IV over 3-5 minutes until the patient
is drowsy.
b. The patient is placed in the dorsal lithotomy
position in stirrups, prepared, draped, and
sedated.
c. A weighted speculum is placed intravaginally,
the vagina and cervix are cleansed, and a
paracervical block is placed.
d. Bimanual examination confirms uterine posi-
tion and size, and uterine sounding confirms
the direction of the endocervical canal.
e. Mechanical dilatation is completed with
dilators if necessary. Curettage is performed
with an 8 mm suction curette, with a single-
tooth tenaculum on the anterior lip of the
cervix.
4. Post-curettage. After curettage, a blood count
is ordered. If the vital signs are stable for several
hours, the patient is discharged with instructions
to avoid coitus, douching, or the use of tampons
for 2 weeks. Ferrous sulfate and ibuprofen are
prescribed for pain.
5. Rh-negative, unsensitized patients are given IM
RhoGAM.
6. Methylergonovine (Methergine), 0.2 mg PO
q4h for 6 doses, is given if there is continued
moderate bleeding.
IV.Complete abortion
A. A complete abortion is diagnosed when complete
passage of products of conception has occurred.
The uterus is well contracted, and the cervical os
may be closed.
B. Differential diagnosis
1. Incomplete abortion
2. Ectopic pregnancy. Products of conception
should be examined grossly and submitted for
pathologic examination. If no fetal tissue or villi
are observed grossly, ectopic pregnancy must
be excluded by ultrasound.
C. Management of complete abortion
1. Between 8 and 14 weeks, curettage is neces-
sary because of the high probability that the
abortion was incomplete.
2. D immunoglobulin (RhoGAM) is administered to
Rh-negative, unsensitized patients.
3. Beta-HCG levels are obtained weekly until zero.
Incomplete abortion is suspected if beta-HCG
levels plateau or fail to reach zero within 4
weeks.
V. Missed abortion is diagnosed when products of
conception are retained after the fetus has expired. If
products are retained, a severe coagulopathy with
bleeding often occurs.
A. Missed abortion should be suspected when the
pregnant uterus fails to grow as expected or when
fetal heart tones disappear.
B. Amenorrhea may persist, or intermittent vaginal
bleeding, spotting, or brown discharge may be
noted.
C. Ultrasonography confirms the diagnosis.
D. Management of missed abortion
1. CBC with platelet count, fibrinogen level, partial
thromboplastin time, and ABO blood typing and
antibody screen are obtained.
2. Evacuation of the uterus is completed after fetal
death has been confirmed. Dilation and evacua-
tion by suction curettage is appropriate when the
uterus is less than 12-14 weeks gestational size.
3. D immunoglobulin (RhoGAM) is administered
to Rh-negative, unsensitized patients.
Urinary Tract Infections in Preg-

nancy
Urinary tract infection (UTI) is a common problem in
pregnancy. Although asymptomatic bacteriuria occurs
with equal frequency in pregnant and nonpregnant
women, it progresses to symptomatic infection more
frequently during pregnancy. The prevalence of asymp-
tomatic bacteriuria is 5 to 9 percent. If asymptomatic
bacteriuria is not treated, pyelonephritis will develop in 20
to 40 percent of pregnant patients.
I. Risk factors for UTI in pregnancy:
A. Previous history of UTI, especially before 20 weeks
of gestation
B. Multiparity
C. Presence of hemoglobin S
D. Lower socioeconomic status
E. Sexual activity
F. Anatomical abnormalities
G. Diabetes mellitus
H. Advanced maternal age
II. Microbiology. Escherichia coli is responsible for 60 to
90 percent of cases of asymptomatic bacteriuria,
cystitis, and pyelonephritis.
III. Asymptomatic bacteriuria
A. Asymptomatic bacteriuria refers to the isolation of
>100,000 CFU of a single organism/mL from a
midstream-voided specimen in a woman without
UTI symptoms. It occurs in 5 to 9 percent of preg-
nancies, usually developing in the first month of
gestation, particularly in multiparous women.
B. Diagnosis. The definition of a positive urine culture
is >105 CFU/mL.
C. Treatment
1. Sulfisoxazole (Gantrisin) 500 mg PO TID for
three days.
2. Amoxicillin 500 mg PO TID for three days.
3. Amoxicillin-clavulanate (Augmentin), 500 mg
PO BID for three days.
4. Nitrofurantoin (Macrodantin) 50 mg PO QID
for seven days])
5. Cefixime (Suprax) 250 mg PO QD for three
days.
6. Fosfomycin (Monurol) 3 g PO as a single
dose.
7. These drugs should be used only if the isolate
has been established to be susceptible to the
agent. Sulfonamides can displace bilirubin from
plasma binding sites in the newborn and may
cause kernicterus. Sulfonamide therapy is not
recommended in the third trimester.
8. Relapses typically occur in the first two weeks
after treatment and are most common when the
bacteriuria originates in the kidney (50 percent).
Relapses should be treated with two weeks of
oral antibiotics.
9. Suppressive therapy is recommended for
women with persistent bacteriuria (ie, >2 posi-
tive urine cultures). Nitrofurantoin (Macrodantin
[50 to 100 mg orally at bedtime]) for the duration
of the pregnancy or cephalexin (Keflex [250 to
500 mg orally at bedtime]) may be used. A
culture for test of cure can be obtained a week
after completion of therapy and then repeated
monthly until completion of the pregnancy.
IV.Cystitis
A. Cystitis occurs in 0.3 to 1.3 percent of pregnant
women. Bacteria are confined to the lower urinary
tract in these patients.
B. Clinical features and diagnosis. Acute cystitis
should be considered in any gravida with symp-
toms of frequency, urgency, dysuria, hematuria, or
suprapubic pain in the absence of fever and flank
pain. Urine culture is the "gold standard" for diag-
nosis. However, a CFU count >102/mL should be
considered positive on a midstream urine speci-
men in women with acute symptoms and pyuria.
C. Treatment of cystitis
1. Urine culture should be obtained in patients with
signs and symptoms suggestive of cystitis, and
empiric antibiotic therapy should be initiated.
The treatment should be adjusted depending
upon the final culture results and the patient's
response to therapy. The same microorganisms
associated with asymptomatic bacteriuria are
responsible for cystitis.
2. Amoxicillin 250 mg TID.
3. Nitrofurantoin (Macrodantin) 100 mg BID.
4. Cephalexin (Keflex) 500 mg BID to QID.
5. Amoxicillin-clavulanate (Augmentin) 500 mg
BID or 250 mg TID
6. Trimethoprim-sulfamethoxazole (Bactrim)1
DS BID but not in the third trimester of preg-
nancy.
7. Cefpodoxime (Cefzil) 100 mg BID.
8. Cefixime (Suprax) 400 mg QD.
9. All of these drugs can be used for three to
seven days. Monthly urine cultures should be
performed beginning one to two weeks after
completion of treatment.
V. Pyelonephritis
A. Pyelonephritis complicates 1 to 2 percent of all
pregnancies. Seventy-three percent of cases were
identified in the antepartum period and 46 percent
are diagnosed in the second trimester.
B. Clinical features and diagnosis. A combination of
fever, chills, and costovertebral angle tenderness
is the usual presentation. Other symptoms include
dysuria, nausea, vomiting, and respiratory distress.
C. Pyuria is present in virtually all women with this
disorder. Urinalysis reveals one or two bacteria per
high power field (HPF) in an unspun catheterized
specimen or 20 bacteria per HPF in a spun speci-
men; white cell casts confirm the diagnosis. Urine
culture and susceptibility testing are completed.
D. Complications. Approximately 20 percent of
women with pyelonephritis develop complications
such as septic shock, anemia, acute respiratory
distress syndrome (ARDS), renal insufficiency,
perinephric abscess, and premature labor and birth
E. Inpatient treatment
1. Pyelonephritis in pregnant women is usually
treated with hospitalization and intravenous
antibiotics until the woman is afebrile for 24 to
48 hours.
2. Parenteral beta lactams or gentamicin are the
preferred antibiotics.
a. Cefazolin (Ancef) 1-2 gm IVPB q8h OR
b. Ampicillin 1 gm IVPB q4-6h AND
c. Gentamicin 2 mg/kg IVPB then 1.5 mg/kg IV
q8h OR
d. Ampicillin-sulbactam (Unasyn) 1.5-3 gm
IVPB q6h.
3. Symptoms that persist for more than 48 hours,
despite adequate intravenous antibiotic therapy,
require a renal ultrasound to assess for
perinephric abscess or renal calculi.
4. Intravenous treatment should continue until the
patient is afebrile for 48 hours. Inpatient therapy
is followed by an outpatient course of antibiotics
to complete 10 to 14 days of treatment.
5. Antimicrobial prophylaxis with nitrofurantoin
(Macrodantin [50 to 100 mg PO qhs]) or
cephalexin (Keflex [250 to 500 mg PO qhs]),
and periodic urinalysis and urine culture are
recommended for the remainder of the preg-
nancy.
F. Outpatient treatment may be considered in the
setting of uncomplicated disease (eg, absence of
underlying medical conditions, anatomic abnormali-
ties, pregnancy complications, or signs of sepsis).
Gestational Diabetes Mellitus

Poorly controlled gestational diabetes is associated with
an increase in the incidence of preeclampsia,
polyhydramnios, fetal macrosomia, birth trauma, opera-
tive delivery, and neonatal hypoglycemia. There is an
increased incidence of hyperbilirubinemia, hypocalcemia,
and erythremia. The perinatal mortality is increased, as is
the likelihood of development of obesity and diabetes in
offspring during childhood. Later development of diabetes
mellitus in the mother is also more frequent. The preva-
lence of gestational diabetes is higher in black, Hispanic,
Native American, and Asian women than white women.
The prevalence of gestational diabetes is 1.4 to 14
percent.
Risk Factors for Gestational Diabetes
• A family history of diabetes, especially in first degree

relatives
• Prepregnancy weight of 110 percent of ideal body weight
(pregravid weight more than 90 kg) or more or weight
gain in early adulthood.
• Age greater than 25 years
• A previous large baby (greater than 9 pounds [4.1 kg])
• History of abnormal glucose tolerance
• Hispanic, African, Native American, South or East Asian,
and Pacific Island ancestry
• A previous unexplained perinatal loss or birth of a mal-
formed child
• The mother was large at birth (greater than 9 pounds
[4.1 kg])
• Polycystic ovary syndrome
I. Screening and diagnostic criteria

A. Screening for gestational diabetes should be
performed at 24 to 28 weeks of gestation. However,
it can be done as early as the first prenatal visit if
there is a high degree of suspicion that the preg-
nant woman has undiagnosed type 2 diabetes (eg,
obesity, previous gestational diabetes or fetal
macrosomia, age >25 years, family history of
diabetes).
B. 50-g oral glucose challenge is given and venous
serum or plasma glucose is measured one hour
later; a value >140 mg/dL (7.8 mmol/L) is consid-
ered abnormal. Women with an abnormal value are
then given a 100-g, three-hour oral glucose toler-
ance test (GTT).
Criteria for Gestational Diabetes with Three

Hour Oral Glucose Tolerance Test
Fasting >95 mg/dL
1 hour >180 mg/dL
2 hour >155 mg/dL
3 hour >140 mg/dL
Any two or more abnormal results are diagnostic of

gestational diabetes.
II. Treatment of gestational diabetes mellitus

A. Diet
1. Dietary therapy should be started in women who
do not meet criteria for gestational diabetes
(abnormal glucose tolerance test) if they have
fasting blood glucose concentrations >90 mg/dL
or an abnormal glucose challenge test.
2. Caloric intake
a. Pregnant women who are 80 to 120 per-
cent of ideal body weight: 30 kcal per
present weight in kg per day.
b. Overweight pregnant women (120 to 150
percent of ideal body weight): 24 kcal per
c. Morbidly obese pregnant women (>150
percent of ideal body weight): 12 to 15 kcal
per present weight in kg per day.
d. Pregnant women who are less than 80
percent of ideal body weight: 40 kcal per
3. Calorie distribution: 40 percent carbohydrate,
20 percent protein, and 40 percent fat.
a. With this calorie distribution, 75 to 80 percent
of women with gestational diabetes can
achieve normoglycemia.
b. Three meals and three snacks per day are
recommended. Breakfast must be very small
(10 percent of total calories) to prevent the
blood glucose concentration one hour after
breakfast from rising above 120 mg/dL. The
remaining calories should be distributed as
30 percent at both lunch and dinner, with the
leftover calories distributed as snacks.
Treatment Goals for Gestational Diabetes

Mellitus
Time Blood Sugar
Fasting <90 mg/dL
1 hr postprandial <120 mg/dL
B. Initiation of insulin therapy

1. Approximately 15 percent of women with gesta-
tional diabetes require insulin because of ele-
vated blood glucose despite dietary therapy.
2. Insulin should be initiated when the fasting blood
glucose concentration is greater than 90 mg/dL
and the one-hour postprandial blood glucose
concentration is greater than 120 mg/dL on two
or more occasions within a two-week interval
despite dietary therapy.
3. Insulin regimen
a. If insulin is required because the fasting
blood glucose concentration is high, an
intermediate-acting insulin, such as NPH
insulin, is given before bedtime. The initial
dose should be 0.15 U/kg body weight.
b. If postprandial blood glucose concentrations
are high, then regular insulin or insulin lispro
should be given before meals at 1.5 U per 10
grams carbohydrate in the breakfast meal
and 1.0 U per 10 grams carbohydrate in the
lunch and dinner meals.
c. If both preprandial and postprandial blood
glucose concentrations are high, then a four-
injection per day regimen should be initiated.
The total dose is 0.7 U/kg for weeks six to 18,
0.8 U/kg for weeks 19 to 26, 0.9 U/kg for
weeks 27 to 36, and 1.0 U/kg for weeks 37 to
term.
d. The insulin should be divided as 45 percent
as NPH insulin, 30 percent before breakfast
and 15 percent before bedtime, and about 55
percent as preprandial regular insulin, 22
percent before breakfast, 16.5 percent before
lunch, and 16.5 percent before dinner. Insulin
resistance increases as gestation proceeds,
requiring an increase in insulin dose.
C. Fetal surveillance
1. Fetal surveillance should be initiated in the third
trimester in women in whom gestational diabe-
tes is not well-controlled, who require insulin, or
have other complications of pregnancy (eg,
hypertension). Counting fetal movements is a
simple way to assess fetal well-being. Fewer
than ten fetal movements in a 12-hour period is
associated with a poor outcome.
2. Early delivery. Women with good glycemic
control and no other complications of pregnancy
ideally will deliver at 39 to 40 weeks of gestation.
Indications for delivery before the 39th week
include poor glycemic control and fetal abnor-
malities. If early delivery is indicated, lung matu-
rity should be assessed by amniocentesis if
delivery could be safely postponed in the ab-
sence of fetal pulmonary maturity.
3. Normal delivery. The great majority of women
with gestational diabetes proceed to term and
have a spontaneous vaginal delivery. The
maternal blood glucose concentration should be
maintained between 70 and 90 mg/dL. Insulin
can usually be withheld during delivery, and an
infusion of normal saline is usually sufficient to
maintain normoglycemia.
Low-dosage Constant Insulin Infusion for the

Intrapartum Period
Blood Glu- Insulin Fluids (125 mL/h)

cose Dosage
(mg/100 mL) (U/h)
<100 0 5%dextrose/Lactated
Ringer's solution
100-140 1.0 5% dextrose/Lactated

Ringer's solution
141-180 1.5 Normal saline
181-220 2.0 Normal saline
>220 2.5 Normal saline
Dilution is 25 U of regular insulin in 250 mL of normal sa-

line, with 25 mL flushed through line, administered
intravenously.
D. Postpartum concerns and follow-up

1. Nearly all women with gestational diabetes are
normoglycemic after delivery. However, they are
at risk for gestational diabetes, impaired glu-
cose tolerance, and overt diabetes.
2. Immediately after delivery, blood glucose should
be measured to ensure that the mother no
longer has hyperglycemia. Fasting blood glu-
cose concentrations should be below 115
mg/dL and one-hour postprandial concentra-
tions should be below 140 mg/dL.
Diabetes Mellitus
Approximately 4 percent of pregnant women have diabe-
tes: 88 percent have gestational diabetes mellitus, while
the remaining 12 percent have pregestational diabetes.
Of those with pregestational diabetes, 35 percent have
type 1 and 65 percent type 2 diabetes.
I. Glycemic control and fetal and maternal complica-
tions
A. Pregnancy in diabetes is associated with an in-
crease in risk of congenital anomalies and sponta-
neous abortions in women who are in poor glycemic
control during the period of fetal organogenesis,
which is nearly complete at seven weeks
postconception.
B. Macrosomia. Another consequence of poor
glycemic control in pregnant women with diabetes
is fetal macrosomia, which leads to dystocia, an
increased need for cesarean delivery, and an
increase in fetal morbidity.
C. Glucose monitoring. Frequent measurements of
blood glucose are mandatory in women with type 1
diabetes during pregnancy. If the first morning
blood glucose value is high, testing should also be
performed at bedtime and in middle of the night.
Testing during Pregnancy in Type I Diabetes
Test Frequency
Hemoglobin A1c Every 4-6 weeks
Blood glucose 4-8 times daily at home; during

weekly/biweekly visits' in physician's
office
Urine ketones During period of illness; when any

blood glucose value is >200 mg/dL
Urinalysis Weekly/biweekly office visits
Serum creatinine Each trimester
Thyroid function tests Baseline measurements of serum

free T4 and TSH
Eye examination At baseline and as necessary per

retinal specialist
D. Urinary ketones should be measured periodically,

especially when the woman is ill or when any blood
glucose value is over 200 mg/dL. At these times
ketoacidosis may occur, a complication that is
associated with a high mortality rate in the fetus.
E. Target blood glucose values
1. Hemoglobin A1c (HbA1c) should be measured
every four to six weeks and more frequently if
the woman's glycemic control is poor.
2. Blood glucose goals in a pregnant diabetic:
a. Fasting capillary blood glucose concentra-
tion of 55 to 65 mg/dL, about 85 percent for
the venous plasma concentration.
b. One-hour postprandial blood glucose
concentration less than 120 mg/dL.
F. Recommendations for caloric intake:
1. Woman at ideal body weight: 30 kcal/kg per
day.
2. 20 to 50 percent above ideal body weight: 24
kcal/kg per day.
3. More than 50 percent above ideal body
weight: 12 to 18 kcal/kg per day.
4. More than 10 percent below ideal body
weight: 36 to 40 kcal/day.
G. Recommended distribution of calories: 40 to 50
percent carbohydrate, 20 percent protein, and 30 to
40 percent fat. Patients should eat three meals and
three snacks per day. The calorie distribution
should be 10 percent of calories at breakfast, 30
percent at both lunch and dinner, and 30 percent
as snacks. A daily supplement of ferrous sulfate
(30 mg) and folate (400 :g) is also recommended.
H. Insulin regimen
1. Most women with type 1 diabetes require at
least three injections of insulin per day. After an
early rise in insulin requirements between weeks
3 and 7, there often is a significant decline
between weeks 7 and 15, followed by a rise
during the remainder of pregnancy.
2. The average insulin requirement in pregnant
women with type 1 diabetes is 0.7 units/kg in the
first trimester, often increasing to 0.8 U/kg for
weeks 18 to 26, 0.9 U/kg for weeks 27 to 36,
and 1.0 U/kg for weeks 37 to term.
Insulin Adjustment Based on Blood Glucose (BG)
Time Insulin dose Adjustment

being ad-
justed
7:30 Bedtime If BG is >90 mg/dL, check at

AM NPH bedtime and 3:00 AM. If bedtime
value is high, increase dinner
regular insulin. If bedtime value
normal but 3:00 AM value is
above 100 mg/dL, then raise
bedtime NPH by 2 units. If 3:00
AM value is below 60 mg/dL,
then decrease bedtime NPH by 2
units. If 7:30 AM value is below
60 mg/dL, reduce bedtime NPH
by 2 units.
10:00 Morning reg- If 1 hour postprandial value is

AM ular above 140 mg/dL, increase next
morning regular insulin by 2
units. If the value is <110 mg/dL,
decrease next morning AM regu-
lar by 2 units.
1:00 Lunch regu- If 1 hour postprandial value is

PM lar above 140 mg/dL, increase lunch
regular insulin for the next day by
2 units. If the value Is below 110
mg/dL, decrease next day's
lunch regular insulin by 2 units.
4:30 Morning NPH If BG is above 90 mg/dL, then

PM increase morning NPH by 2
units. If 90 is below 60 mg/dL,
then decrease morning NPH by 2
units.
6:00 Dinner regu- If 1 hour postprandial value is

PM lar above 140 mg/dL, increase din-
ner regular insulin by 2 units. If 1
hour value is below 110 mg/dL,
decrease dinner regular insulin
by 2 units.
3. Women with type 2 diabetes also should be

treated with insulin. During the first trimester,
insulin requirements are similar in women with
type 1 and type 2 diabetes. However, as the
pregnancy proceeds into the third trimester,
insulin requirements increase proportionately
more in women with type 2 than type 1 diabetes.
4. A combination of regular insulin and
intermediate-acting insulin (such as NPH insulin)
should be administered. The insulin is initially
distributed as follows:
a. 45 percent of the total daily dose is given as
NPH insulin and 22 percent as regular insulin
before breakfast.
b. 17 percent of the total daily dose is given as
both NPH and regular insulin before dinner.
c. The premeal dose of regular insulin is given
on a sliding scale according to the blood
glucose value.
5. Macrosomia is defined as fetal weight greater
than 4.0 to 4.5 kg or birth weight above the 90th
percentile for gestational age. Macrosomic
fetuses are at increased risk for a prolonged
second stage of labor, shoulder dystocia, opera-
tive delivery, and perinatal death.
6. Congenital anomalies. Ultrasonography is
essential for the evaluation of congenital anoma-
lies. Congenital anomalies that occur with higher
frequency include anencephaly, microcephaly,
caudal regression syndrome, and genitourinary
and gastrointestinal anomalies. Congenital heart
disease may include hypertrophic
cardiomyopathy, atrial and ventricular septic
defects, transposition of the great vessels and
coarctation of the aorta.
7. Polyhydramnios can occur because of in-
creased amniotic fluid osmolality and polyuria
secondary to fetal hyperglycemia.
8. Antepartum surveillance. In women with diet-
controlled gestational diabetes, fetal surveillance
is usually not initiated until 40 weeks gestation,
since these women are at very low risk for
complications. More rigorous monitoring is
recommended for women who have additional
indications for closer fetal surveillance, such as
hypertension. Surveillance begins earlier in
women with either gestational or pregestational
diabetes treated with insulin. Testing is begun at
the 35th week of gestation if there is excellent
glycemic control. Testing should start at 26 to 28
weeks in women with poor control, nephropathy,
or hypertension.
I. Labor and delivery
1. Insulin is required before active labor and can
be given subcutaneously or by intravenous
infusion with a goal of maintaining blood glucose
concentrations between 70 and 90 mg/dL. The
insulin infusion consists of administration of 15
units of regular insulin in 150 mL of normal
saline IV at a rate of one to three units per hour.
2. Normal saline may be sufficient to maintain
euglycemia when labor is anticipated.
3. When active labor begins, insulin resistance
rapidly decreases and insulin requirements fall
rapidly. Thus, continuing insulin therapy is likely
to lead to hypoglycemia. To prevent this, glu-
cose should be infused at a rate of 2.5 mg/kg
per min. Capillary blood glucose should be
measured hourly. The glucose infusion should
be doubled for the next hour if the blood glucose
value is less than 60 mg/dL. However if the
value is 120 mg/dL or more, regular insulin is
given subcutaneously or intravenously until the
blood glucose value falls to 70 to 90 mg/dL. The
insulin dose is titrated to maintain
normoglycemia while glucose is infused at a rate
of 2.5 mg/kg per min.
4. If a cesarean section is planned, the bedtime
NPH insulin dose may be given on the morning
of surgery and every eight hours thereafter if
surgery is delayed.
5. Insulin requirements drop sharply after delivery,
and the new mother may not require insulin for
24 to 72 hours. Insulin requirements should be
recalculated at this time at 0.6 units/kg per day
based upon postpartum weight. Postpartum
calorie requirements are approximately 25
kcal/kg per day, and 27 kcal/kg per day in lactat-
ing women.
6. Women in whom labor is induced should receive
no morning insulin. Blood glucose monitoring
and glucose and insulin infusion are managed
as for active labor.
Group B Streptococcal Infection in

Pregnancy
Group B streptococcus (GBS; Streptococcus agalactiae),
a Gram positive coccus, is an important cause of infection
in neonates, causing sepsis, pneumonia, and meningitis.
GBS infection is acquired in utero or during passage
through the vagina. Vaginal colonization with GBS during
pregnancy may lead to premature birth, and GBS is a
frequent cause of maternal urinary tract infection,
chorioamnionitis, postpartum endometritis, and
bacteremia.
A. The primary risk factor for GBS infection is mater-
nal GBS genitourinary or gastrointestinal coloniza-
tion.
B. The rate of transmission from colonized mothers to
infants is approximately 50 percent. However, only
1 to 2 percent of all colonized infants develop early-
onset GBS disease.
C. Maternal obstetrical factors associated with
neonatal GBS disease:
1. Delivery at less than 37 weeks of gestation
2. Premature rupture of membranes
3. Rupture of membranes for 18 or more hours
before delivery
4. Chorioamnionitis
5. Temperature greater than 38°C during labor
6. Sustained intrapartum fetal tachycardia
7. Prior delivery of an infant with GBS disease
D. Manifestations of early-onset GBS disease.
Early-onset disease results in bacteremia, general-
ized sepsis, pneumonia, or meningitis. The clinical
signs usually are apparent in the first hours of life.
II. 2002 CDC guidelines for intrapartum antibiotic
prophylaxis:
A. All pregnant women should be screened for GBS
colonization with swabs of both the lower vagina
and rectum at 35 to 37 weeks of gestation. Patients
are excluded from screening if they had GBS
bacteriuria earlier in the pregnancy or if they gave
birth to a previous infant with invasive GBS dis-
ease. These latter patients should receive
intrapartum antibiotic prophylaxis regardless of the
colonization status.
B. Intrapartum antibiotic prophylaxis is recom-
mended for the following:
membranes
known (culture not performed or result not avail-
able) and who also have delivery at <37 weeks
of gestation, amniotic membrane rupture for >18
hours, or intrapartum temperature >100.4ºF
(>38ºC)
C. Intrapartum antibiotic prophylaxis is not recom-
mended for the following patients:
1. Positive GBS screening culture in a previous
pregnancy (unless the infant had invasive GBS
disease or the screening culture is also positive
in the current pregnancy)
2. Patient who undergoes a planned Cesarean
section without labor or rupture of membranes
3. Pregnant women with negative GBS screening
cultures at 35 to 37 weeks of gestation even if
they have one or more of the above intrapartum
risk factors
D. Recommended IAP regimen
1. Penicillin G (5 million units IV initial dose, then
2.5 million units IV Q4h) is recommended for
most patients.
2. In women with non-immediate-type penicillin-
allergy, cefazolin (Ancef, 2 g initial dose, then 1
g Q8h) is recommended.
3. Patients at high risk for anaphylaxis to peni-
cillins are treated with clindamycin (900 mg IV
Q8h) or erythromycin (500 mg IV Q6h) as long
as their GBS isolate is documented to be sus-
ceptible to both clindamycin and erythromycin.
4. For patients at high risk for anaphylaxis and
a GBS resistant isolate (or with unknown
susceptibility) to clindamycin or erythromycin,
vancomycin (1 g Q12h) should be given.
5. Antibiotic therapy is continued from hospital
admission through delivery.
E. Approach to threatened preterm delivery at <37
weeks of gestation: A patient with negative GBS
cultures (after 35 weeks of gestation) should not be
treated during threatened labor. If GBS cultures
have not been performed, these specimens should
be obtained and penicillin G administered as
above; if cultures are negative at 48 hours, penicil-
lin can be discontinued. If such a patient has not
delivered within four weeks, cultures should be
repeated.
F. If screening cultures taken at the time of threat-
ened delivery or previously performed (after 35
weeks of gestation) are positive, penicillin should
be continued for at least 48 hours unless delivery
supervenes. Patients who have been treated for
>48 hours and have not delivered should receive
IAP as above when delivery occurs.
Premature Rupture of Membranes

Premature rupture of membranes (PROM) is the most
common diagnosis associated with preterm delivery. The
incidence of this disorder to be 7-12%. In pregnancies of
less than 37 weeks of gestation, preterm birth (and its
sequelae) and infection are the major concerns after
PROM.
I. Pathophysiology
A. Premature rupture of membranes is defined as
rupture of membranes prior to the onset of labor.
B. Preterm premature rupture of membranes is
defined as rupture of membranes prior to term.
C. Prolonged rupture of membranes consists of
rupture of membranes for more than 24 hours.
D. The latent period is the time interval from rupture
of membranes to the onset of regular contractions
or labor.
E. Many cases of preterm PROM are caused by
idiopathic weakening of the membranes, many of
which are caused by subclinical infection. Other
causes of PROM include hydramnios, incompetent
cervix, abruptio placentae, and amniocentesis.
F. At term, about 8% of patients will present with
ruptured membranes prior to the onset of labor.
II. Maternal and neonatal complications
A. Labor usually follows shortly after the occurrence of
PROM. Ninety percent of term patients and 50% of
preterm patients go into labor within 24 hours after
rupture.
B. Patients who do not go into labor immediately are
at increasing risk of infection as the duration of
rupture increases. Chorioamnionitis, endometritis,
sepsis, and neonatal infections may occur.
C. Perinatal risks with preterm PROM are primarily
complications from immaturity, including respiratory
distress syndrome, intraventricular hemorrhage,
patent ductus arteriosus, and necrotizing
enterocolitis.
D. Premature gestational age is a more significant
cause of neonatal morbidity than is the duration of
membrane rupture.
III. Diagnosis of premature rupture of membranes
A. Diagnosis is based on history, physical examina-
tion, and laboratory testing. The patient's history
alone is correct in 90% of patients. Urinary leakage
or excess vaginal discharge is sometimes mistaken
for PROM.
B. Sterile speculum exam is the first step in confirm-
ing the suspicion of PROM. Digital examination
should be avoided because it increases the risk of
infection.
1. The general appearance of the cervix should be
assessed visually, and prolapse of the umbilical
cord or a fetal extremity should be excluded.
Cultures for group B streptococcus, gonorrhea,
and chlamydia are obtained.
2. A pool of fluid in the posterior vaginal fornix
supports the diagnosis of PROM.
3. The presence of amniotic fluid is confirmed by
nitrazine testing for an alkaline pH. Amniotic
fluid causes nitrazine paper to turn dark blue
because the pH is above 6.0-6.5. Nitrazine may
be false-positive with contamination from blood,
semen, or vaginitis.
4. If pooling and nitrazine are both non-confirma-
tory, a swab from the posterior fornix should be
smeared on a slide, allowed to dry, and exam-
ined under a microscope for "ferning," indicating
amniotic fluid.
5. Ultrasound examination for oligohydramnios is
useful to confirm the diagnosis, but
oligohydramnios may be caused by other disor-
ders besides PROM.
IV.Assessment of premature rupture of membranes
A. The gestational age must be carefully assessed.
Menstrual history, prenatal exams, and previous
sonograms are reviewed. An ultrasound examina-
tion should be performed.
B. The patient should be evaluated for the presence of
chorioamnionitis [fever (over 38°C), leukocytosis,
maternal and fetal tachycardia, uterine tenderness,
foul-smelling vaginal discharge].
C. The patient should be evaluated for labor, and a
sterile speculum examination should assess cervi-
cal change.
D. The fetus should be evaluated with heart rate
monitoring because PROM increases the risk of
umbilical cord prolapse and fetal distress caused by
oligohydramnios.
V. Management of premature rupture of membranes
A. Term patients
1. At 36 weeks and beyond, management of
PROM consists of delivery. Patients in active
labor should be allowed to progress.
2. Patients with chorioamnionitis, who are not in
labor, should be immediately induced with
oxytocin (Pitocin).
3. Patients who are not yet in active labor (in the
absence of fetal distress, meconium, or clinical
infection) may be discharged for 48 hours, and
labor usually follows. If labor has not begun
within a reasonable time after rupture of mem-
branes, induction with oxytocin (Pitocin) is
appropriate. Use of prostaglandin E2 is safe for
cervical ripening.
B. Preterm patients
1. Preterm patients with PROM prior to 36 weeks
are managed expectantly. Delivery is delayed for
the patients who are not in labor, not infected,
and without evidence of fetal distress.
2. Patients should be monitored for infection.
Cultures for gonococci, Chlamydia, and group B
streptococci are obtained. Symptoms, vital
signs, uterine tenderness, odor of the lochia,
and leukocyte counts are monitored.
3. Suspected occult chorioamnionitis is diagnosed
by amniocentesis for Gram stain and culture,
which will reveal gram positive cocci in chains.
4. Ultrasound examination should be performed to
detect oligohydramnios.
5. Intrapartum antibiotic prophylaxis group B
streptococcal is recommended for the follow-
ing:
a. Pregnant women with a positive screening
performed in the absence of labor or rupture
of membranes
b. Pregnant women who gave birth to a previ-
ous infant with invasive GBS disease
c. Pregnant women with documented GBS
d. Pregnant women whose culture status is
unknown (culture not performed or result not
available) and who also have delivery at <37
weeks of gestation, amniotic membrane
rupture for >18 hours, or intrapartum temper-
ature >100.4ºF (>38ºC)
e. The recommended IAP regimen is penicillin
G (5 million units IV initial dose, then 2.5
million units IV Q4h). In women with non-
immediate-type penicillin-allergy, cefazolin
(Ancef, 2 g initial dose, then 1 g Q8h) is
recommended.
6. Prolonged continuous fetal heart rate monitoring
in the initial assessment should be followed by
frequent fetal evaluation.
7. Premature labor is the most common outcome
of preterm PROM. Tocolytic drugs are often
used and corticosteroids are recommended to
accelerate fetal pulmonary maturity.
8. Expectant management consists of in-hospital
ob s e r va t i o n . Delivery is indicated for
chorioamnionitis, irreversible fetal distress, or
premature labor. Once gestation reaches 36
weeks, the patient may be managed as any
other term patient with PROM. Another option is
to evaluate the fetus at less than 36 weeks for
pulmonary maturity and expedite delivery once
maturity is documented by testing of amniotic
fluid collected by amniocentesis or from the
vagina. A positive phosphatidylglycerol test
indicates fetal lung maturity.
C. Previable or preterm premature rupture of
membranes
1. In patients in whom membranes rupture very
early in pregnancy (eg, <25 weeks). There is a
relatively low likelihood (<25%) that a surviving
infant will be delivered, and infants that do
survive will deliver very premature and suffer
significant morbidity.
2. Fetal deformation syndrome. The fetus suffer-
ing from prolonged early oligohydramnios may
develop pulmonary hypoplasia, facial deforma-
tion, limb contractures, and deformity.
3. Termination of pregnancy is advisable if the
gestational age is early. If the patient elects to
continue the pregnancy, expectant management
with pelvic rest at home is reasonable.
D. Chorioamnionitis
1. Chorioamnionitis requires delivery (usually
vaginally), regardless of the gestational age.
2. Antibiotic therapy
a. Ampicillin 2 gm IV q4-6h AND
b. Gentamicin 100 mg (2 mg/kg) IV load, then
100 mg (1.5 mg/kg) IV q8h.
Preterm Labor
Preterm labor is the leading cause of perinatal morbidity
and mortality in the United States. It usually results in
preterm birth, a complication that affects 8 to 10 percent
of births.
Risk Factors for Preterm Labor
Previous preterm delivery Infectious causes

Low socioeconomic status --Chorioamnionitis
Non-white race --Bacterial vaginosis
Maternal age <18 years or --Asymptomatic
>40 years bacteriuria
Preterm premature rupture --Acute pyelonephritis
of the membranes --Cervical/vaginal colo-
Multiple gestation nization
Maternal history of one or Fetal causes
more spontaneous second- --Intrauterine fetal death
trimester abortions --Intrauterine growth
Maternal complications retardation
--Maternal behaviors --Congenital anomalies
--Smoking Abnormal placentation
--Illicit drug use Presence of a retained
--Alcohol use intrauterine device
--Lack of prenatal care
Uterine causes
--Myomata (particularly
submucosal or
subplacental)
--Uterine septum
--Bicornuate uterus
--Cervical incompe-
tence
--Exposure to diethyl-
stilbestrol (DES)
I. Risk factors for preterm labor. Preterm labor is

characterized by cervical effacement and/or dilatation,
and increased uterine irritability that occurs before 37
weeks of gestation. Women with a history of previous
preterm delivery carry the highest risk of recurrence,
estimated to be between 17 and 37 percent.
II. Management of preterm labor
A. Tocolysis
1. Tocolytic therapy may offer some short-term
benefit in the management of preterm labor. A
delay in delivery can be used to administer
corticosteroids to enhance pulmonary maturity
and reduce the severity of fetal respiratory
distress syndrome, and to reduce the risk of
intraventricular hemorrhage. No study has
convincingly demonstrated an improvement in
survival or neonatal outcome with the use of
tocolytic therapy alone.
2. Contraindications to tocolysis include
nonreassuring fetal heart rate tracing, eclampsia
or severe preeclampsia, fetal demise (singleton),
chorioamnionitis, fetal maturity and maternal
hemodynamic instability.
3. Tocolytic therapy is indicated for regular uterine
contractions and cervical change (effacement or
dilatation). Oral terbutaline (Bricanyl) following
successful parenteral tocolysis is not associated
with prolonged pregnancy or reduced incidence
of recurrent preterm labor.
Preterm Labor, Threatened or Actual
1. Initial assessment to determine whether patient is

experiencing preterm labor
a. Assess for the following:
i. Uterine activity
ii. Rupture of membranes
iii. Vaginal bleeding
iv. Presentation
v. Cervical dilation and effacement
vi. Station
b. Reassess estimate of gestational age
2. Search for a precipitating factor/cause
3. Consider specific management strategies, which may
include the following:
a. Intravenous tocolytic therapy (decision should be
influenced by gestational age, cause of preterm
labor and contraindications)
b. Corticosteroid therapy (eg, betamethasone, in a
dosage of 12 mg IM every 24 hours for a total of
two doses)
c. Antibiotic therapy if specific infectious agent is iden-
tified or if preterm premature rupture of the mem-
branes
Tocolytic Therapy for the Management of

Preterm Labor
Medi- Mechanism of
cation action Dosage
Magne- Intracellular 4 to 6 g loading dose;

sium calcium antago- then 2 to 4 g IV every
sulfate nism hour
Terbuta Beta2- 0.25 to 0.5 mg SC ev-

line adrenergic re- ery three to four hours
(Brican ceptor agonist
yl) sympathomimet
ic; decreases
free
intracellular
calcium ions
Ritodrin Same as 0.05 to 0.35 mg per

e terbutaline minute IV
(Yutop
ar)
Nifedipi Calcium chan- 5 to 10 mg SL every

ne nel blocker 15 to 20 minutes (up to
(Procar four times), then 10 to
dia) 20 mg orally every four
to six hours
Indome Prostaglandin 50- to 100-mg rectal

thacin inhibitor suppository, then 25 to
(Indoci 50 mg orally every six
n) hours
Complications Associated With the Use of

Tocolytic Agents
Magnesium sulfate Indomethacin (Indocin)

• Pulmonary edema • Renal failure
• Profound • Hepatitis
hypotension • Gastrointestinal
• Profound muscular bleeding
paralysis Nifedipine (Procardia)
• Maternal tetany • Transient
• Cardiac arrest hypotension
• Respiratory depres-
sion
Beta-adrenergic agents
• Hypokalemia
• Hyperglycemia
• Hypotension
• Pulmonary edema
• Arrhythmias
• Cardiac insufficiency
• Myocardial ischemia
• Maternal death
B. Corticosteroid therapy
1. Dexamethasone and betamethasone are the
preferred corticosteroids for antenatal therapy.
Corticosteroid therapy for fetal maturation re-
duces mortality, respiratory distress syndrome
and intraventricular hemorrhage in infants be-
tween 24 and 34 weeks of gestation.
2. In women with preterm premature rapture of
membranes (PPROM), antenatal corticosteroid
therapy reduces the risk of respiratory distress
syndrome. In women with PPROM at less than
30 to 32 weeks of gestation, in the absence of
clinical chorioamnionitis, antenatal corticosteroid
use is recommended because of the high risk of
intraventricular hemorrhage at this early gesta-
tional age.
Recommended Antepartum Corticosteroid Regi-

mens for Fetal Maturation in Preterm Infants
Medication Dosage
Betamethasone 12 mg IM every 24 hours for two
(Celestone) doses
Dexamethasone 6 mg IM every 12 hours for four doses
C. Intrapartum antibiotic prophylaxis group B

streptococcal is recommended for the follow-
ing:
membranes
known (culture not performed or result not
available) and who also have delivery at <37
weeks of gestation, amniotic membrane rupture
for >18 hours, or intrapartum temperature
>100.4ºF (>38ºC)
5. The recommended IAP regimen is penicillin G (5
million units IV initial dose, then 2.5 million units
IV Q4h). In women with non-immediate-type
penicillin-allergy, cefazolin (Ancef, 2 g initial
dose, then 1 g Q8h) is recommended.
D. Bed rest. Although bed rest is often prescribed for
women at high risk for preterm labor and delivery,
there are no conclusive studies documenting its
benefit. A recent meta-analysis found no benefit to
bed rest in the prevention of preterm labor or
delivery.
Bleeding in the Second Half of

Pregnancy
Bleeding in the second half of pregnancy occurs in 4% of
all pregnancies. In 50% of cases, vaginal bleeding is
secondary to placental abruption or placenta previa.
I. Clinical evaluation of bleeding second half of
pregnancy
A. History of trauma or pain and the amount and
character of the bleeding should be assessed.
1. Vital signs and pulse pressure are measured.
Hypotension and tachycardia are signs of seri-
ous hypovolemia.
2. Fetal heart rate pattern and uterine activity are
assessed.
3. Ultrasound examination of the uterus, placenta
and fetus should be completed.
4. Speculum and digital pelvic examination should
not be done until placenta previa has been
excluded.
C. Laboratory Evaluation
1. Hemoglobin and hematocrit.
2. INR, partial thromboplastin time, platelet
count, fibrinogen level, and fibrin split prod-
ucts are checked when placental abruption is
suspected or if there has been significant hem-
orrhage.
3. A red-top tube of blood is used to perform a
bedside clot test.
4. Blood type and cross-match.
5. Urinalysis for hematuria and proteinuria.
6. The Apt test is used to distinguish maternal or
fetal source of bleeding. (Vaginal blood is mixed
with an equal part 0.25% sodium hydroxide.
Fetal blood remains red; maternal blood turns
brown.)
7. Kleihauer-Betke test of maternal blood is used
to quantify fetal to maternal hemorrhage.
II. Placental abruption (abruptio placentae) is defined
as complete or partial placental separation from the
decidua basalis after 20 weeks gestation.
A. Placental abruption occurs in 1 in 100 deliveries.
B. Factors associated with placental abruption
1. Preeclampsia and hypertensive disorders
2. History of placental abruption
3. High multiparity
4. Increasing maternal age
5. Trauma
6. Cigarette smoking
7. Illicit drug use (especially cocaine)
8. Excessive alcohol consumption
9. Preterm premature rupture of the membranes
10. Rapid uterine decompression after delivery of
the first fetus in a twin gestation or rupture of
membranes with polyhydramnios
11. Uterine leiomyomas
C. Diagnosis of placental abruption
1. Abruption is characterized by vaginal bleeding,
abdominal pain, uterine tenderness, and uterine
contractions.
a. Vaginal bleeding is visible in 80%; bleeding is
concealed in 20%.
b. Pain is usually of sudden onset, constant,
and localized to the uterus and lower back.
c. Localized or generalized uterine tenderness
and increased uterine tone are found with
severe placental abruption.
d. An increase in uterine size may occur with
placental abruption when the bleeding is
concealed. Concealed bleeding may be
detected by serial measurements of abdomi-
nal girth and fundal height.
e. Amniotic fluid may be bloody.
f. Fetal monitoring may detect distress.
g. Placental abruption may cause preterm labor.
2. Uterine contractions by tocodynamometry is
the most sensitive indicator of abruption.
3. Laboratory findings include proteinuria and a
consumptive coagulopathy, characterized by
decreased fibrinogen, prothrombin, factors V
and VIII, and platelets. Fibrin split products are
elevated.
4. Ultrasonography has a sensitivity in detecting
placental abruption of only 15%.
D. Management of placental abruption
1. Mild placental abruption
a. If maternal stability and reassuring fetal
surveillance are assured and the fetus is
immature, close expectant observation with
fetal monitoring is justified.
b. Maternal hematologic parameters are moni-
tored and abnormalities corrected.
c. Tocolysis with magnesium sulfate is initiated
if the fetus is immature.
2. Moderate to severe placental abruption
a. Shock is aggressively managed.
b. Coagulopathy
(1) Blood is transfused to replace blood loss.
(2) Clotting factors may be replaced using
cryoprecipitate or fresh-frozen plasma.
One unit of fresh-frozen plasma increases
fibrinogen by 10 mg/dL. Cryoprecipitate
contains 250 mg fibrinogen/unit; 4 gm
(15-20 U) is an effective dose.
(3) Platelet transfusion is indicated if the
platelet count is less than 50,000/mcL.
One unit of platelets raises the platelet
count 5000-10,000/mcL; 4 to 6 U is the
smallest useful dose.
c. Oxygen should be administered and urine
output monitored with a Foley catheter.
d. Vaginal delivery is expedited in all but the
mildest cases once the mother has been
stabilized. Amniotomy and oxytocin (Pitocin)
augmentation may be used. Cesarean sec-
tion is indicated for fetal distress, severe
abruption, or failed trial of labor.
III. Placenta previa occurs when any part of the placenta
implants in the lower uterine segment. It is associated
with a risk of serious maternal hemorrhage. Placenta
previa occurs in 1 in 200 pregnancies. Ninety percent
of placenta previas diagnosed in the second trimester
resolve spontaneously.
A. Total placenta previa occurs when the internal
cervical os is completely covered by placenta.
B. Partial placenta previa occurs when part of the
cervical os is covered by placenta.
C. Marginal placenta previa occurs when the pla-
cental edge is located within 2 cm of the cervical
os.
D. Clinical evaluation
1. Placenta previa presents with a sudden onset
of painless vaginal bleeding in the second or
third trimester. The peak incidence occurs at 34
weeks. The initial bleeding usually resolves
spontaneously and then recurs later in preg-
nancy.
2. One fourth of patients present with bleeding
and uterine contractions.
E. Ultrasonography is accurate in diagnosing pla-
centa previa.
F. Management of placenta previa
1. In a pregnancy >36 weeks with documented
fetal lung maturity, the neonate should be
immediately delivered by cesarean section.
2. Low vertical uterine incision is probably safer in
patients with an anterior placenta. Incisions
through the placenta should be avoided.
3. If severe hemorrhage jeopardizes the mother or
fetus, cesarean section is indicated regardless
of gestational age.
4. Expectant management is appropriate for
immature fetuses if bleeding is not excessive,
maternal physical activity can be restricted,
intercourse and douching can be prohibited,
and the hemoglobin can be maintained at >10
mg/dL.
5. Rh immunoglobulin is administered to Rh-
negative-unsensitized patients.
6. Delivery is indicated once fetal lung maturity
has been documented.
7. Tocolysis with magnesium sulfate may be used
for immature fetuses.
IV. Cervical bleeding
A. Cytologic sampling is necessary.
B. Bleeding can be controlled with cauterization or
packing.
C. Bacterial and viral cultures are sometimes diag-
nostic.
V. Cervical polyps
A. Bleeding is usually self-limited.
B. Trauma should be avoided.
C. Polypectomy may control bleeding and yield a
histologic diagnosis.
VI. Bloody show is a frequent benign cause of late third
trimester bleeding. It is characterized by blood-tinged
mucus associated with cervical change.
Preeclampsia-eclampsia and
Chronic Hypertension
The are four major hypertensive disorders in pregnancy
are preeclampsia-eclampsia, chronic hypertension,
preeclampsia superimposed upon chronic hypertension,
and gestational hypertension. Preeclampsia is character-
ized by hypertension and proteinuria developing after 20
weeks of gestation. Chronic hypertension is defined as
systolic pressure >140 mm Hg, diastolic pressure >90
mm Hg, or both that antedates pregnancy or is present
before the 20th week of pregnancy.
I. Incidence and risk factors for preeclampsia
A. Hypertensive disorders occur in about 12 to 22
percent of pregnancies. Preeclampsia occurs in 3
to 8 percent of pregnancies. A woman under the
age of 20 years who is undergoing her first preg-
nancy is at increased risk for preeclampsia. The
primigravid state is a predisposing factor. The
incidence of preeclampsia in a second pregnancy
is less than 1 percent in women who have had a
normotensive first pregnancy, as compared to 5-7
percent in women who had preeclampsia during the
first pregnancy.
B. Risk factors for preeclampsia:
1. Primigravid state
2. History of preeclampsia
3. A higher blood pressure at the initiation of preg-
nancy and a large body size
4. A family history of preeclampsia is associated
with a two to fivefold increase in risk
5. Multiple pregnancy
6. Preexisting maternal hypertension
7. Pregestational diabetes
8. Antiphospholipid antibody syndrome
9. Vascular or connective tissue disease
10. Advanced maternal age (>35 to 40 years)
II. Clinical manifestations of preeclampsia
A. Preeclampsia is characterized by the gradual
development of hypertension, proteinuria, and
edema in pregnancy, particularly in a primigravida.
These findings typically become apparent in the
latter part of the third trimester and progress until
delivery. In some women, however, symptoms
begin in the latter half of the second trimester.
Signs and symptoms of preeclampsia occurring
before 20 weeks of gestation are unusual unless
there is an underlying molar pregnancy, drug use or
withdrawal, or chromosomal aneuploidy in the
fetus.
B. Hypertension. Pregnancy related hypertension is
defined as a systolic blood pressure greater than
140 mm Hg or diastolic blood pressure greater than
90 mm Hg in a woman who was normotensive prior
to 20 weeks of gestation. Hypertension is usually
the earliest clinical finding of preeclampsia. The
blood pressure (BP) may rise in the second trimes-
ter, but usually does not reach the hypertensive
range (>140/90) until the third trimester, often after
the 37th week of gestation.
C. Proteinuria. In addition to hypertension, most
patients also have proteinuria (ie, 1+ on dipstick or
0.3 g protein or greater in a 24-hour urine speci-
men).
D. Eclampsia refers to the development of grand mal
seizures in a woman with preeclampsia.
Preeclampsia-eclampsia is caused by generalized
vasospasm, activation of the coagulation system,
and changes in autoregulatory systems related to
blood pressure control.
E. Edema and intravascular volume. Most women
with preeclampsia have edema. Although periph-
eral edema is common in normal pregnancy,
sudden and rapid weight gain and facial edema
often occur in women who develop preeclampsia.
F. Hematologic changes. Increased platelet turnover
is a consistent feature of preeclampsia. The most
common coagulation abnormality in preeclampsia
is thrombocytopenia.
G. Liver involvement may present as right upper
quadrant or epigastric pain, elevated liver enzymes
and subcapsular hemorrhage or hepatic rupture.
H. Central nervous system. Headache, blurred
vision, scotomata, and, rarely, cortical blindness
are manifestations of preeclampsia; seizures in a
preeclamptic woman are defined as eclampsia.
I. Fetus and placenta. The fetal consequences are
fetal growth restriction and oligohydramnios. Se-
vere or early onset preeclampsia result in the
greatest decrements in birth weight.
III.Diagnosis
A. The diagnosis of preeclampsia is largely based
upon clinical features developing after 20 weeks of
gestation in a woman who was previously
normotensive.
Diagnosis of Preeclampsia
Systolic blood pressure greater than 140 mm Hg

or
Diastolic blood pressure greater than 90 mm Hg
AND
A random urine protein determination of 1+ on dipstick or
30 mg/dL or proteinuria of 0.3 g or greater in a 24-hour
urine specimen
B. Plasma uric acid concentration. Preeclampsia is
typically associated with a rise in the plasma urate
level to above 5.5 to 6 mg/dL.
C. Laboratory evaluation:
1. Hematocrit: hemoconcentration supports the
diagnosis of preeclampsia
2. Platelet count
3. Quantification of protein excretion
4. Serum creatinine concentration
5. Serum uric acid concentration
6. S e r u m a l a n i n e a n d a s p a r t a t e
aminotransferase concentrations (ALT, AST)
7. Lactic acid dehydrogenase concentration
(LDH) and red blood cell smear may indicate
the presence of microangiopathic hemolysis.
Criteria for Severe Preeclampsia
New onset proteinuria hypertension and at least one of the

following:
Symptoms of central nervous system dysfunction:
Blurred vision, scotomata, altered mental status, se-
vere headache
Symptoms of liver capsule distention:
Right upper quadrant or epigastric pain
Hepatocellular injury
Serum transaminase concentration at least twice
normal
Severe blood pressure elevation:
Systolic blood pressure >160 mm Hg or diastolic >110
mm Hg on two occasions at least six hours apart
Thrombocytopenia
Less than 100,000 platelets per mm3
Proteinuria:
Over 5 grams in 24 hours or 3+ or more on two ran-
dom samples four hours apart
Oliguria <500 mL in 24 hours
Intrauterine fetal growth restriction
Pulmonary edema or cyanosis
Cerebrovascular accident
Coagulopathy
IV. Treatment of preeclampsia

A. The definitive treatment of preeclampsia is delivery.
Delivery is recommended for women with mild
preeclampsia at or near term and for most women
with severe preeclampsia regardless of gestational
age, except less than 33 weeks of gestation whose
only criterion for severe disease is:
1. Severe proteinuria (greater than 5 g in 24 hours).
2. Mild intrauterine fetal growth restriction (fifth to
tenth percentile).
3. Severe preeclampsia by blood pressure criteria
alone before 32 weeks of gestation, if there is
blood pressure reduction and resolution of any
laboratory abnormalities after hospitalization.
B. Treatment of hypertension. Antihypertensive
treatment is indicated if the systolic blood pressure
is >170 mm Hg. The preferred agents are
methyldopa for prolonged antenatal therapy, and
hydralazine, labetalol or nifedipine for peripartum
treatment of acute hypertensive episodes. Sodium
restriction and diuretics have no role in therapy.
Restricted physical activity can lower blood pres-
sure.
Acute Treatment of Severe Hypertension in

Preeclampsia
The goal is a gradual reduction of blood pressure to a

level below 160/105 mm Hg. Sudden and severe
hypotension should be avoided.
Hydralazine: 5 mg IV, repeat 5 to 10 mg IV every 20 min-

utes to maximum cumulative total of 20 mg or until blood
pressure is controlled.
Labetalol (Trandate): 20 mg IV, followed by 40 mg, then 80

mg, then 80 mg at 10 minute intervals until the desired
response is achieved or a maximum total dose of 220 mg
is administered.
Methyldopa (Aldomet) 250 mg BID orally, maximum dose 4

g/day
Fetal Assessment in Preeclampsia
Mild Daily fetal movement counting

preeclampsia Ultrasound examination for estimation
of fetal weight and amniotic fluid de-
termination at diagnosis. Repeat in
three weeks if the initial examination
is normal, twice weekly if there is evi-
dence of fetal growth restriction or
oligohydramnios.
Nonstress test and/or biophysical pro-
file once or twice weekly. Testing
should be repeated immediately if
there is an abrupt change in maternal
condition.
Severe Daily nonstress testing and/or bio-

preeclampsia physical profile
C. Antenatal corticosteroids to promote fetal lung

maturation should be administered to women less
than 34 weeks of gestation who are at high risk for
delivery within the next seven days.
Betamethasone (two doses of 12 mg given intra-
muscularly 24 hours apart) or dexamethasone (four
doses of 6 mg given intramuscularly 12 hours
apart) may be used.
D. Maternal monitoring. Laboratory evaluation (eg,
hematocrit, platelet count, creatinine, urine protein,
LDH, AST, ALT, uric acid) should be repeated
once or twice weekly in women with mild stable
preeclampsia.
E. Women with severe preeclampsia should be
delivered or hospitalized for the duration of preg-
nancy. Prolonged antepartum management may be
considered in selected women under 32 weeks of
gestation, such as those whose condition improves
after hospitalization and who have no evidence of
end-organ dysfunction or fetal deterioration.
F. Timing and indications for delivery. Delivery at
or by 40 weeks of gestation should be considered
for all women with preeclampsia. Women with mild
disease and a favorable cervix may benefit from
induction as early as 38 weeks, while those with
stable severe disease should be delivered after 32
to 34 weeks if possible (with demonstration of fetal
pulmonary maturity).
Indications for Delivery in Preeclampsia
Maternal indications Gestational age greater than or

equal to 38 weeks of gestation
Platelet count less than 100,000
cells per mm3
Deteriorating liver function
Progressive deterioration in re-
nal function
Abruptio placentae
Persistent severe headaches or
visual changes
Persistent severe epigastric
pain, nausea, or vomiting
Fetal indications Severe fetal growth restriction

Nonreassuring results from fetal
testing
Oligohydramnios
G. Route of delivery. Delivery is usually by the

vaginal route, with cesarean delivery reserved for
obstetrical indications. Cervical ripening agents
may be used if the cervix is not favorable.
H. Anticonvulsant therapy
1. Anticonvulsant therapy is initiated during labor
until 24 to 48 hours postpartum. Magnesium
sulfate is the drug of choice for seizure preven-
tion.
2. Magnesium regimen. A loading dose of 6 g
intravenously is given, followed by 2 g/h as a
continuous infusion.
I. Postpartum course. Hypertension due to
preeclampsia resolves postpartum, often within a
few days, but sometimes takes a few weeks.
V. Management of eclampsia
A. Maintenance of airway patency and prevention of
aspiration are the initial management priorities. The
patient should be rolled onto her left side and a
padded tongue blade placed in her mouth, if possi-
ble.
B. Control of convulsions. Magnesium sulfate, 2 to
4 g IV push repeated every 15 minutes to a maxi-
mum of 6 g. Maintenance dose of magnesium
sulfate: 2 to 3 g/hour by continuous intravenous
infusion. Diazepam may also be given as 5 mg IV
push repeated as needed to a maximum cumula-
tive dose of 20 mg to stop the convulsions; how-
ever, benzodiazepines have profound depressant
effects on the fetus.
VI. Preexistent hypertension
A. Methyldopa (Aldomet) has been most widely used
and long-term safety to the fetus has been clearly
demonstrated. ACE inhibitors should not be contin-
ued in pregnancy. ß-blockers are generally safe,
although they may impair fetal growth when used
early in pregnancy, particularly atenolol. Thiazide
diuretics can be continued as long as volume
depletion is avoided.
Treatment of Hypertension in Pregnancy
Drug Dose
Methyldopa 250 mg BID orally, maximum dose 4

(Aldomet) g/day
Labetalol 100 mg BID orally, maximum dose

(Trandate) 2400 mg/day
B. Risks of chronic hypertension. Chronic hyperten-

sion is associated with a threefold increase in
perinatal mortality, a twofold increase in abruptio
placentae, and an increased rate of impaired fetal
growth. There is also a higher rate of preterm
delivery before 35 weeks of gestation.
C. Indications for treatment. Indications for
antihypertensive therapy are a diastolic pressure
persistently above 100 mm Hg, systolic pressure
>150 to 180 mm Hg or signs of hypertensive end-
organ damage. Severe hypertension (blood pres-
sure of 180/110 mmHg or higher) requires intrave-
nous therapy. Hydralazine and labetalol are the
drugs of choice for intravenous administration.
D. Fetal surveillance is warranted when there is
preeclampsia or intrauterine growth restriction.
Serial sonographic assessment of fetal growth is
indicated, with nonstress testing or biophysical
profile examination weekly starting at 28 weeks,
increasing to twice-weekly at 32 weeks.
E. Delivery. Woman with mild, uncomplicated chronic
hypertension can be allowed to go into spontane-
ous labor and deliver at term. Earlier delivery can
be considered for women with superimposed
preeclampsia or pregnancy complications (eg, fetal
growth restriction, previous stillbirth).
Herpes Simplex Virus Infections in

Pregnancy
Herpes simplex virus (HSV) type 2 is primarily responsi-
ble for genital HSV disease. Maternal-fetal transmission
of HSV is the major consequence of maternal HSV
infection, resulting in encephalitis, disseminated disease,
and skin disease. The most common mode of transmis-
sion is via contact of the fetus with infected vaginal
secretions during delivery.
I. Diagnosis
A. Risk factors. Black or Hispanic race, age, and
years of sexual experience are highly correlated
with HSV-2 infection. Other factors include lower
family income, lower level of education, multiple
sexual partners, and having other sexually transmit-
ted diseases.
B. The gold standard for diagnosis of acute HSV
infection is viral culture, which may become positive
within two to three days after inoculation.
C. Polymerase chain reaction (PCR) is used to rapidly
detect HSV DNA from lesions or genital secretions
and is superior to other tests. PCR has been used
to detect HSV from pregnant women with recurrent
HSV at delivery and their infants in instances in
which HSV cultures were negative.
II. Clinical presentation
A. Primary genital episode genital HSV is character-
ized by multiple painful vesicles in clusters. They
may be associated with pruritus, dysuria, vaginal
discharge, and tender regional adenopathy. Fever,
malaise, and myalgia often occur one to two days
prior to the appearance of lesions. The lesions may
last four to five days prior to crusting. The skin will
reepithelialize in about 10 days. Viral shedding may
last for 10 to 12 days after reepithelialization.
B. Nonprimary first-episode genital HSV refers to
patients with preexisting antibodies to one of the
two types of virus who acquire the other virus and
develop genital lesions. Nonprimary disease is less
severe with fewer systemic symptoms, and less
local pain.
C. Recurrent HSV episodes are characterized by
local pain or paresthesia followed by vesicular
lesions. They are generally fewer in number and
often unilateral but may be painful.
III.Pregnancy
A. Estimated risks of maternal-fetal transmission:
1. Primary or nonprimary first episode with an
active lesion at delivery: 50 percent
2. Asymptomatic first episode: 33 percent
3. Recurrent HSV with active lesion: 3 to 4 percent
4. Asymptomatic recurrence: 0.04 percent
IV. Neonatal effects
A. HSV neonatal infection is most often acquired
through the birth canal. The incidence of neonatal
HSV infection is 1 in 3000. Approximately 60 to 70
percent of infected neonates are infected with HSV-
2.
B. Categories of neonatal disease include localized
disease of the skin, eyes and mouth (SEM), central
nervous system (CNS) disease with or without SEM
involvement, and disseminated disease
C. The mortality rate is 15 percent among children with
CNS disease and 57 percent with disseminated
disease.
V. Treatment
A. Primary infection
1. Acyclovir (Zovirax) therapy (200 mg PO five
times per day or 400 mg PO TID for 7 to 14
days) and analgesia is recommended. Acyclovir
is safe in pregnancy. Acyclovir reduces the
duration of viral shedding.
2. Suppressive therapy (400 mg PO BID) for the
remainder of pregnancy should usually be ad-
ministered because acyclovir may prevent
symptomatic HSV recurrences at term.
B. Recurrent infection. Acyclovir reduces shedding
by 80 percent and may reduce clinical recurrences.
Women with frequent HSV recurrences may benefit
from suppression (acyclovir 400 mg PO BID) near
term.
C. Role of cesarean section
1. Cesarean section should be offered to women
who have active lesions or symptoms of vulvar
pain or burning at the time of delivery and a
history of genital herpes.
2. Prophylactic cesarean section is not recom-
mended for women with recurrent HSV and no
evidence of active lesions at the time of delivery.
Lesions which have crusted fully are considered
healed and not active.
3. Cesarean section is not recommended for
women with recurrent genital herpes and active
nongenital HSV lesions. The lesions should be
covered with an occlusive dressing.
D. Very preterm infants (<30 to 32 weeks) in
preterm labor: If the mother has active HSV, delay
of delivery for betamethasone therapy is appropri-
ate. Cesarean section after either documented
pulmonary maturity or betamethasone would be
appropriate if active lesions are present. The use of
acyclovir during this time may be helpful to shorten
the time of active lesions for the mother.
E. Herpes cultures or the more sensitive PCR test is
often performed on the neonate at delivery to
identify exposed infants.
Dystocia and Augmentation of La-

bor
I. Normal labor
A. First stage of labor
1. The first stage of labor consists of the period from
the onset of labor until complete cervical dilation
(10 cm). This stage is divided into the latent
phase and the active phase.
2. Latent phase
a. During the latent phase, uterine contractions
are infrequent and irregular and result in only
modest discomfort. They result in gradual
effacement and dilation of the cervix.
b. A prolonged latent phase is one that exceeds
20 hours in the nullipara or one that exceeds
14 hours in the multipara.
3. Active phase
a. The active phase of labor occurs when the
cervix reaches 3-4 cm of dilatation.
b. The active phase of labor is characterized by
an increased rate of cervical dilation and by
descent of the presenting fetal part.
B. Second stage of labor
1. The second stage of labor consists of the
period from complete cervical dilation (10 cm)
until delivery of the infant. This stage is usually
brief, averaging 20 minutes for parous women
and 50 minutes for nulliparous women.
2. The duration of the second stage of labor is
unrelated to perinatal outcome in the absence of
a nonreassuring fetal heart rate pattern as long
as progress occurs.
II.Abnormal labor
A. Dystocia is defined as difficult labor or childbirth
resulting from abnormalities of the cervix and uterus,
the fetus, the maternal pelvis, or a combination of
these factors.
B. Cephalopelvic disproportion is a disparity be-
tween the size of the maternal pelvis and the fetal
head that precludes vaginal delivery. This condition
can rarely be diagnosed in advance.
C. Slower-than-normal (protraction disorders) or
complete cessation of progress (arrest disorder)
are disorders that can be diagnosed only after the
parturient has entered the active phase of labor.
III. Assessment of labor abnormalities
A. Labor abnormalities caused by inadequate
uterine contractility (powers). The minimal uterine
contractile pattern of women in spontaneous labor
consists of 3 to 5 contractions in a 10-minute period.
B. Labor abnormalities caused by fetal characteris-
tics (passenger)
1. Assessment of the fetus consists of estimating
fetal weight and position. Estimations of fetal
size, even those obtained by ultrasonography,
are frequently inaccurate.
2. In the first stage of labor, the diagnosis of
dystocia can not be made unless the active
phase of labor and adequate uterine contractile
forces have been present.
3. Fetal anomalies such as hydrocephaly,
encephalocele, and soft tissue tumors may
obstruct labor. Fetal imaging should be consid-
ered when malpresentation or anomalies are
suspected based on vaginal or abdominal exami-
nation or when the presenting fetal part is persis-
tently high.
C. Labor abnormalities due to the pelvic passage
(passage)
1. Inefficient uterine action should be corrected
before attributing dystocia to a pelvic problem.
2. The bony pelvis is very rarely the factor that limits
vaginal delivery of a fetus in cephalic presenta-
tion. Radiographic pelvimetry is of limited value in
managing most cephalic presentations.
3. Clinical pelvimetry can only be useful to qualita-
tively identify the general architectural features of
the pelvis.
IV. Augmentation of labor
A. Uterine hypocontractility should be augmented only
after both the maternal pelvis and fetal presentation
have been assessed.
B. Contraindications to augmentation include placenta
or vasa previa, umbilical cord prolapse, prior classi-
cal uterine incision, pelvic structural deformities, and
invasive cervical cancer.
C. Oxytocin (Pitocin)
1. The goal of oxytocin administration is to stimulate
uterine activity that is sufficient to produce cervi-
cal change and fetal descent while avoiding
uterine hyperstimulation and fetal compromise.
2. Minimally effective uterine activity is 3 contrac-
tions per 10 minutes averaging greater than 25
mm Hg above baseline. A maximum of 5 contrac-
tions in a 10-minute period with resultant cervical
dilatation is considered adequate.
3. Hyperstimulation is characterized by more than
five contractions in 10 minutes, contractions
lasting 2 minutes or more, or contractions of
normal duration occurring within 1 minute of each
other.
4. Oxytocin is administered when a patient is pro-
gressing slowly through the latent phase of labor
or has a protraction or an arrest disorder of labor,
or when a hypotonic uterine contraction pattern is
identified.
5. A pelvic examination should be performed before
initiation of oxytocin infusion.
6. Oxytocin is usually diluted 10 units in 1 liter of
normal saline IVPB.
Labor Stimulation with Oxytocin (Pitocin)
Starting Incremen- Dosage Maximum

Dose tal In- Interval Dose
(mU/min) crease (min) (mU/min)
(mU/min)
6 6 15 40
7. M a n a g e m e n t o f o x y t o c i n - i n d u c e d
hyperstimulation
a. The most common adverse effect of
hyperstimulation is fetal heart rate decelera-
tion associated with uterine
hyperstimulation. Stopping or decreasing
the dose of oxytocin may correct the abnor-
mal pattern.
b. Additional measures may include changing
the patient to the lateral decubitus position
and administering oxygen or more intrave-
nous fluid.
c. If oxytocin-induced uterine hyperstimulation
does not respond to conservative measures,
intravenous terbutaline (0.125-0.25 mg) or
magnesium sulfate (2-6 g in 10-20% dilu-
tion) may be used to stop uterine contrac-
tions.
Shoulder Dystocia
Shoulder dystocia, defined as failure of the shoulders to
deliver following the head, is an obstetric emergency. The
incidence varies from 0.6% to 1.4% of all vaginal deliver-
ies. Up to 30% of shoulder dystocias can result in brachial
plexus injury; many fewer sustain serious asphyxia or
death. Most commonly, size discrepancy secondary to
fetal macrosomia is associated with difficult shoulder
delivery. Causal factors of macrosomia include maternal
diabetes, postdates gestation, and obesity. The fetus of
the diabetic gravida may also have disproportionately
large shoulders and body size compared with the head.
I. Prediction
A. The diagnosis of shoulder dystocia is made after
delivery of the head. The “turtle” sign is the retrac-
tion of the chin against the perineum or retraction of
the head into the birth canal. This sign demon-
strates that the shoulder girdle is resisting entry into
the pelvic inlet, and possibly impaction of the
anterior shoulder.
B. Macrosomia has the strongest association. ACOG
defines macrosomia as an estimated fetal weight
(EFW) greater than 4500 g.
C. Risk factors for macrosomia include maternal birth
weight, prior macrosomia, preexisting diabetes,
obesity, multiparity, advanced maternal age, and a
prior shoulder dystocia. The recurrence rate has
been reported to be 13.8%, nearly seven times the
primary rate. Shoulder dystocia occurs in 5.1% of
obese women. In the antepartum period, risk
factors include gestational diabetes, excessive
weight gain, short stature, macrosomia, and
postterm pregnancy. Intrapartum factors include
prolonged second stage of labor, abnormal first
stage, arrest disorders, and instrumental (especially
midforceps) delivery. Many shoulder dystocias will
occur in the absence of any risk factors.
II. Management
A. Shoulder dystocia is a medical and possibly surgi-
cal emergency. Two assistants should be called for
if not already present, as well as an anesthesiolo-
gist and pediatrician. A generous episiotomy should
be cut. The following sequence is suggested:
1. McRoberts maneuver: The legs are removed
from the lithotomy position and flexed at the
hips, with flexion of the knees against the abdo-
men. Two assistants are required. This maneu-
ver may be performed prophylactically in antici-
pation of a difficult delivery.
2. Suprapubic pressure: An assistant is re-
quested to apply pressure downward, above the
symphysis pubis. This can be done in a lateral
direction to help dislodge the anterior shoulder
from behind the pubic symphysis. It can also be
performed in anticipation of a difficult delivery.
Fundal pressure may increase the likelihood of
uterine rupture and is contraindicated.
3. Rotational maneuvers: The Woods' corkscrew
maneuver consists of placing two fingers against
the anterior aspect of the posterior shoulder.
Gentle upward rotational pressure is applied so
that the posterior shoulder girdle rotates anteri-
orly, allowing it to be delivered first. The Rubin
maneuver is the reverse of Woods's maneuver.
Two fingers are placed against the posterior
aspect of the posterior (or anterior) shoulder and
forward pressure applied. This results in
adduction of the shoulders and displacement of
the anterior shoulder from behind the symphysis
pubis.
4. Posterior arm release: The operator places a
hand into the posterior vagina along the infant's
back. The posterior arm is identified and fol-
lowed to the elbow. The elbow is then swept
across the chest, keeping the elbow flexed. The
fetal forearm or hand is then grasped and the
posterior arm delivered, followed by the anterior
shoulder. If the fetus still remains undelivered,
vaginal delivery should be abandoned and the
Zavanelli maneuver performed followed by
cesarean delivery.
5. Zavanelli maneuver: The fetal head is replaced
into the womb. Tocolysis is recommended to
produce uterine relaxation. The maneuver
consists of rotation of the head to occiput ante-
rior. The head is then flexed and pushed back
into the vagina, followed abdominal delivery.
Immediate preparations should be made for
cesarean delivery.
6. If cephalic replacement fails, an emergency
symphysiotomy should be performed. The ure-
thra should be laterally displaced to minimize the
risk of lower urinary tract injury.
B. The McRoberts maneuver alone will successfully
alleviate the shoulder dystocia in 42% to 79% of
cases. For those requiring additional maneuvers,
vaginal delivery can be expected in more than 90%.
Finally, favorable results have been reported for the
Zavanelli maneuver in up to 90%.
Induction of Labor
Induction of labor refers to stimulation of uterine contrac-
tions prior to the onset of spontaneous labor. Between
1990 and 1998, the rate of labor induction doubled from
10 to 20 percent.
I. Indications for labor induction:
A. Preeclampsia/eclampsia, and other hypertensive
diseases
B. Maternal diabetes mellitus
C. Prelabor rupture of membranes
D. Chorioamnionitis
E. Intrauterine fetal growth restriction (IUGR)
F. Isoimmunization
G. In-utero fetal demise
H. Postterm pregnancy
II. Absolute contraindications to labor induction:
A. Prior classical uterine incision
B. Active genital herpes infection
C. Placenta or vasa previa
D. Umbilical cord prolapse
E. Fetal malpresentation, such as transverse lie
II. Requirements for induction
A. Prior to undertaking labor induction, assessments of
gestational age, fetal size and presentation, clinical
pelvimetry, and cervical examination should be
performed. Fetal maturity should be evaluated, and
amniocentesis for fetal lung maturity may be needed
prior to induction.
B. Clinical criteria that confirm term gestation:
1. Fetal heart tones documented for 30 weeks by
Doppler.
2. Thirty-six weeks have elapsed since a serum or
urine human chorionic gonadotropin (hCG)
pregnancy test was positive.
3. Ultrasound measurement of the crown-rump
length at 6 to 11 weeks of gestation or biparietal
diameter/femur length at 12 to 20 weeks of
gestation support a clinically determined gesta-
tional age equal to or greater than 39 weeks.
C. Assessment of cervical ripeness
1. A cervical examination should be performed
before initiating attempts at labor induction.
2. The modified Bishop scoring system is most
commonly used to assess the cervix. A score is
calculated based upon the station of the present-
ing part and cervical dilatation, effacement,
consistency, and position.
Modified Bishop Scoring System
0 1 2 3
Dilation, cm Closed 1-2 3-4 5-6
Effacement, 0-30 40-50 60-70 >80

percent
Station* -3 -2 -1, 0 +1, +2
Cervical Firm Medium Soft

consistency
Position of Posterior Midposi- Anterior

the cervix tion
* Based on a -3 to +3 scale.
3. The likelihood of a vaginal delivery after labor

induction is similar to that after spontaneous
onset of labor if the Bishop score is >8.
III. Induction of labor with oxytocin
A. The uterine response to exogenous oxytocin
administration is periodic uterine contractions.
B. Oxytocin regimen (Pitocin)
1. Oxytocin is given intravenously. Oxytocin is
diluted by placing 10 units in 1000 mL of normal
saline, yielding an oxytocin concentration of 10
mU/mL. Begin at 6 mU/min and increase by 6
mU/min every 15 minutes.
2. Active management of labor regimens use a
high-dose oxytocin infusion with short incremen-
tal time intervals.
High Dose Oxytocin Regimen
Begin oxytocin 6 mU per minute intravenously

Increase dose by 6 mU per minute every 15 minutes
Maximum dose: 40 mU per minute
Maximum total dose administered-during-labor: 10 U
Maximum duration of administration: six hours
3. The dose of maximum oxytocin is usually 40

mU/min. The dose is typically increased until
contractions occur at two to three minute intervals.
IV. Cervical ripening agents
A. A ripening process should be considered prior to use
of oxytocin use when the cervix is unfavorable.
B. Mechanical methods
1. Membrane stripping is a widely utilized tech-
nique, which causes release of either prostaglan-
din F2-alpha from the decidua and adjacent
membranes or prostaglandin E2 from the cervix.
Weekly membrane stripping beginning at 38
weeks of gestation results in delivery within a
shorter period of time (8.6 versus 15 days).
2. Amniotomy is an effective method of labor induc-
tion when performed in women with partially
dilated and effaced cervices. Caution should be
exercised to ensure that the fetal vertex is well-
applied to the cervix and the umbilical cord or
other fetal part is not presenting.
3. Foley catheter. An uninflated Foley catheter can
be passed through an undilated cervix and then
inflated. This technique is as effective as prosta-
glandin E2 gel. The use of extra-amniotic saline
infusion with a balloon catheter or a double bal-
loon catheter (Atad ripener) also appears to be
effective for cervical ripening.
C. Prostaglandins
1. Local administration of prostaglandins to the
vagina or the endocervix is the route of choice
because of fewer side effects and acceptable
clinical response. Uncommon side effects include
fever, chills, vomiting, and diarrhea.
2. Prepidil contains 0.5 mg of dinoprostone in 2.5
mL of gel for intracervical administration. The dose
can be repeated in 6 to 12 hours if there is inade-
quate cervical change and minimal uterine activity
following the first dose. The maximum cumulative
dose is 1.5 mg (ie, 3 doses) within a 24-hour
period. The time interval between the final dose
and initiation of oxytocin should be 6 to 12 hours
because of the p o t e n t i a l f o r uterine
hyperstimulation with concurrent oxytocin and
prostaglandin administration.
3. Cervidil is a vaginal insert containing 10 mg of
dinoprostone in a timed-release formulation. The
vaginal insert administers the medication at 0.3
mg/h and should be left in place for 12 hours.
Oxytocin may be initiated 30 to 60 minutes after
removal of the insert.
4. An advantage of the vaginal insert over the gel
formulation is that the insert can be removed in
cases of uterine hyperstimulation or abnormalities
of the fetal heart rate tracing.
V. Complications of labor induction
A. Hyperstimulation and tachysystole may occur with
use of prostaglandin compounds or oxytocin.
Hyperstimulation is defined as uterine contractions
lasting at least two minutes or five or more uterine
contractions in 10 minutes. Tachysystole is defined
as six or more contractions in 20 minutes.
B. Prostaglandin E2 (PGE2) preparations have up to
a 5 percent rate of uterine hyperstimulation. Fetal
heart rate abnormalities can occur, but usually
resolve upon removal of the drug. Rarely
hyperstimulation or tachysystole can cause uterine
rupture. Removing the PGE2 vaginal insert will
usually help reverse the effects of the
hyperstimulation and tachysystole. Cervical and
vaginal lavage after local application of prostaglandin
compounds is not helpful.
C. If oxytocin is being infused, it should be discontinued
to achieve a reassuring fetal heart rate pattern.
Placing the woman in the left lateral position, adminis-
tering oxygen, and increasing intravenous fluids may
also be of benefit. Terbutaline 0.25 mg subcutane-
ously (a tocolytic) may be given.
Postpartum Hemorrhage
Obstetric hemorrhage remains a leading causes of maternal
mortality. Postpartum hemorrhage is defined as the loss of
more than 500 mL of blood following delivery. However, the
average blood loss in an uncomplicated vaginal delivery is
about 500 mL, with 5% losing more than 1,000 mL.
I. Clinical evaluation of postpartum hemorrhage
A. Uterine atony is the most common cause of
postpartum hemorrhage. Conditions associated with
uterine atony include an overdistended uterus (eg,
polyhydramnios, multiple gestation), rapid or prolonged
labor, macrosomia, high parity, and chorioamnionitis.
B. Conditions associated with bleeding from trauma
include forceps delivery, macrosomia, precipitous labor
and delivery, and episiotomy.
C. Conditions associated with bleeding from
coagulopathy and thrombocytopenia include
abruptio placentae, amniotic fluid embolism,
preeclampsia, coagulation disorders, autoimmune
thrombocytopenia, and anticoagulants.
D. Uterine rupture is associated with previous uterine
surgery, internal podalic version, breech extraction,
multiple gestation, and abnormal fetal presentation.
High parity is a risk factor for both uterine atony and
rupture.
E. Uterine inversion is detected by abdominal vaginal
examination, which will reveal a uterus with an unusual
shape after delivery.
II. Management of postpartum hemorrhage
A. Following delivery of the placenta, the uterus should
be palpated to determine whether atony is present. If
atony is present, vigorous fundal massage should be
administered. If bleeding continues despite uterine
massage, it can often be controlled with bimanual
uterine compression.
B. Genital tract lacerations should be suspected in
patients who have a firm uterus, but who continue to
bleed. The cervix and vagina should be inspected to
rule out lacerations. If no laceration is found but bleed-
ing is still profuse, the uterus should be manually
examined to exclude rupture.
C. The placenta and uterus should be examined for
retained placental fragments. Placenta accreta is
usually manifest by failure of spontaneous placental
separation.
D. Bleeding from non-genital areas (venous puncture
sites) suggests coagulopathy. Laboratory tests that
confirm coagulopathy include INR, partial
thromboplastin time, platelet count, fibrinogen, fibrin
split products, and a clot retraction test.
E. Medical management of postpartum hemorrhage
1. Oxytocin (Pitocin) is usually given routinely imme-
diately after delivery to stimulate uterine firmness
and diminish blood loss. 20 units of oxytocin in
1,000 mL of normal saline or Ringer's lactate is
administered at 100 drops/minute. Oxytocin should
not be given as a rapid bolus injection because of
the potential for circulatory collapse.
2. Methylergonovine (Methergine) 0.2 mg can be
given IM if uterine massage and oxytocin are not
effective in correcting uterine atony and provided
there is no hypertension.
3. 15-methyl prostaglandin F2-alpha (Hemabate),
one ampule (0.25 mg), can be given IM, with repeat
injections every 20min, up to 4 doses can be given
if hypertension is present; it is contraindicated in
asthma.
Treatment of Postpartum Hemorrhage Secondary

to Uterine Atony
Drug Protocol
Oxytocin 20 U in 1,000 mL of lactated

Ringer's as IV infusion
Methylergonovine 0.2 mg IM
(Methergine)
Prostaglandin (15 methyl 0.25 mg as IM every 15-60 min-

PGF2-alpha [Hemabate, utes as necessary
Prostin/15M])
F. Volume replacement
1. Patients with postpartum hemorrhage that is refrac-
tory to medical therapy require a second large-bore
IV catheter. If the patient has had a major blood
group determination and has a negative indirect
Coombs test, type-specific blood may be given
without waiting for a complete cross-match. Lac-
tated Ringer's solution or normal saline is gener-
ously infused until blood can be replaced. Replace-
ment consists of 3 mL of crystalloid solution per 1
mL of blood lost.
2. A Foley catheter is placed, and urine output is
maintained at greater than 30 mL/h.
G. Surgical management of postpartum hemorrhage.
If medical therapy fails, ligation of the uterine or
uteroovarian artery, infundibulopelvic vessels, or
hypogastric arteries, or hysterectomy may be indi-
cated.
H. Management of uterine inversion
1. The inverted uterus should be immediately reposi-
tioned vaginally. Blood and/or fluids should be
administered. If the placenta is still attached, it
should not be removed until the uterus has been
repositioned.
2. Uterine relaxation can be achieved with a
halogenated anesthetic agent. Terbutaline is also
useful for relaxing the uterus.
3. Following successful uterine repositioning and
placental separation, oxytocin (Pitocin) is given to
contract the uterus.
Acute Endometritis
Acute endometritis is characterized by the presence of
microabscesses or neutrophils within the endometrial glands.
I. Classification of endometritis
A. Acute endometritis in the nonobstetric population is
usually related to pelvic inflammatory disease (PID)
secondary to sexually transmitted infections or
gynecologic procedures. Acute endometritis in the
obstetric population occurs as a postpartum infection,
usually after a labor concluded by cesarean delivery.
B. Chronic endometritis in the nonobstetric population is
due to infections (eg, chlamydia, tuberculosis, and
other organisms related to cervicitis and PID),
intrauterine foreign bodies (eg, intrauterine device,
submucous leiomyoma), or radiation therapy. In the
obstetric population, chronic endometritis is associated
with retained products of conception after a recent
pregnancy.
C. Symptoms in both acute and chronic endometritis
consist of abnormal vaginal bleeding and pelvic pain.
However, patients with acute endometritis frequently
have fevers in contrast to chronic endometritis.
II. Postpartum endometritis
A. Endometritis in the postpartum period refers to infection
of the decidua (ie, pregnancy endometrium), frequently
with extension into the myometrium (endomyometritis)
and parametrial tissues (parametritis).
B. The single most important risk factor for postpartum
endometritis is route of delivery. The incidence of
endometritis after a vaginal birth is less than three
percent, but is 5 to 10 times higher after cesarean
delivery.
C. Other proposed risk factors include prolonged labor,
prolonged rupture of membranes, multiple vaginal
examinations, internal fetal monitoring, maternal
diabetes, presence of meconium, and low socioeco-
nomic status.
D. Microbiology. Postpartum endometritis is usually a
polymicrobial infection, produced by a mixture of
aerobes and anaerobes from the genital tract.
Type and Frequency of Bacterial Isolates in

Postpartum Endometritis*
Isolate Frequency (percent)
Gram positive
Group B streptococci 8
Enterococci 7
S. epidermidis 9
Lactobacilli 4
Diphtheroids 2
S. Aureus 1
Gram negative
G. vaginalis 15
E. Coli 6
Enterobacterium spp. 2
P. mirabilis 2
Others 3
Anaerobic
S. bivius 11
Other Bacteroides spp. 9
Peptococci-peptostreptocc 22
i
Mycoplasma
U. urealyticum 39
M. hominis 11
C. trachomatis 2
E. Vaginal colonization with group B streptococcus (GBS)

is a risk factor for postpartum endometritis; GBS
colonized women at delivery have an 80 percent
greater likelihood of developing postpartum
endometritis.
F. Clinical manifestations and diagnosis. Endometritis
is characterize, by fever, uterine tenderness, foul lochia,
and leukocytosis that develop within five days of
delivery. A temperature greater than or equal to 100.4
ºF (38 ºC) in the absence of other causes of fever, such
as pneumonia, wound cellulitis, and urinary tract
infection is the most common sign.
G. Laboratory studies are not diagnostic since
leukocytosis occurs frequently in all postpartum pa-
tients. However, a rising neutrophil count associated
with elevated numbers of bands is suggestive of
infectious disease. Bacteremia occurs in 10 to 20
percent of patients; usually a single organism is identi-
fied despite polymicrobial infection. Blood cultures
should be obtained in febrile patients following delivery.
H. Treatment
1. Postpartum endometritis is treated with broad
spectrum parenteral antibiotics including coverage
for beta-lactamase producing anaerobes. The
standard treatment of clindamycin (900 mg q8h)
plus gentamicin (1.5 mg/kg q8h) is safe and effec-
tive, with reported cure rates of 90 to 97 percent.
Antibiotic Regimens for Endometritis
Clindamycin (900 mg IV Q 8 hours) plus gentamicin (1.5

mg/kg IV Q 8 hours)
Ampicillin-sulbactam (Unasyn) 3 grams IV Q 6 hours
Ticarcillin-clavulanate (Timentin)3.1 grams IV Q 4 hours
Cefoxitin (Mefoxin) 2 grams IV Q 6 hours
Ceftriaxone (Rocephin) 2 grams IV Q 24 hours plus
metronidazole 500 mg PO or IV Q 8 hours*
Levofloxacin (Levaquin) 500 mg IV Q 24 hours plus
metronidazole 500 mg PO or IV Q 8 hours*
* Should not be given to breastfeeding mothers

If chlamydia infection is suspected, azithromycin 1 gram PO
for one dose should be added to the regimen
2. Treatment should continue until the patient is

clinically improved and afebrile for 24 to 48 hours.
Oral antibiotic therapy is not necessary after suc-
cessful parenteral treatment, unless bacteremia is
present.
3. Modifications in therapy may be necessary if there
is no response to the initial antibiotic regimen after
48 to 72 hours. Approximately 20 percent of treat-
ment failures are due to resistant organisms, such
as enterococci which are not covered by
cephalosporins or clindamycin plus gentamicin. The
addition of ampicillin (2 g q4h) to the regimen can
improve the response rate. Metronidazole (500 mg
PO or IV q8h) may be more effective than
clindamycin against Gram negative anaerobes but
is generally not used in mothers who will be breast-
feeding.
Postpartum Fever Workup

History: Postpartum fever is >100.4 F (38 degrees C) on 2
occasions >6h apart after the first postpartum day (during the
first 10 days postpartum), or >101 on the first postpartum
day. Dysuria, abdominal pain, distention, breast pain, calf
pain.
Predisposing Factors: Cesarean section, prolonged labor,
premature rupture of membranes, internal monitors, multiple
vaginal exams, meconium, manual placenta extraction,
anemia, poor nutrition.
Physical Examination: Temperature, throat, chest, lung
exams; breasts, abdomen. Costovertebral angle tenderness,
uterine tenderness, phlebitis, calf tenderness; wound exam.
Speculum exam.
Differential Diagnosis: UTI, upper respiratory infection,
atelectasis, pneumonia, wound infection, mastitis, episiotomy
abscess; uterine infection, deep vein thrombosis,
pyelonephritis, pelvic abscess.
Labs: CBC, SMA7, blood C&S x 2, catheter UA, C&S.
Gonococcus culture, chlamydia; wound C&S, CXR.
References
References may be obtained at www.ccspublishing.com/ccs.
Commonly Used Formulas
A-a gradient = [(PB-PH2O) FiO2 - PCO2/R] - PO2 arterial
= (713 x FiO2 - pCO2/0.8 ) -pO2 arterial
PB = 760 mmHg; PH2O = 47 mmHg ; R . 0.8

normal Aa gradient <10-15 mmHg (room air)
Arterial oxygen capacity =(Hgb(gm)/100 mL) x 1.36 mL

O2/gm Hgb
Arterial O2 content = 1.36(Hgb)(SaO2)+0.003(PaO2)= NL 20
vol%
O2 delivery = CO x arterial O2 content = NL 640-1000 mL

O2/min
Cardiac output = HR x stroke volume

CO L/min = 125 mL O2/min/M2
x 100
8.5 {(1.36)(Hgb)(SaO2) - (1.36)(Hgb)(Sv-
O2)}
Normal CO = 4-6 L/min

Na (mEq) deficit = 0.6 x (wt kg) x (desired [Na] - actual [Na])
SVR = MAP - CVP x 80 = NL 800-1200 dyne/sec/cm2

COL/min
PVR = PA - PCWP x 80 = NL 45-120 dyne/sec/cm2
CO L/min
GFR mL/min = (140 - age) x wt in kg

72 (males) x serum creatinine (mg/dL)
85 (females) x serum creatinine (mg/dL)
Normal creatinine clearance = 100-125 mL/min(males), 85-

105(females)
Body water deficit (L) = 0.6(weight kg)([measured serum Na]-
140)
140
Serum Osmolality = 2 [Na] + BUN + Glucose = 270-290

2.8 18
Na (mEq) deficit = 0.6 x (wt kg)x(desired [Na] - actual [Na])
Fractional excreted Na = U Na/ Serum Na x 100 = NL<1%

U creatinine/ Serum creatinine
Anion Gap = Na - (Cl + HCO3)
For each 100 mg/dL 8 in glucose, Na+ 9 by 1.6 mEq/L.
Corrected = measured Ca mg/dL + 0.8 x (4 -

albumin g/dL)
serum Ca+ (mg/dL)
Predicted Maximal Heart Rate = 220 - age

Normal ECG Intervals (sec)
PR 0.12-0.20
QRS 0.06-0.08
Heart rate/min Q-T
60 0.33-0.43
70 0.31-0.41
80 0.29-0.38
90 0.28-0.36
100 0.27-0.35
Total Parenteral Nutrition Equations:
Caloric Requirements: (Harris-Benedict Equations)

Basal energy expenditure (BEE)
Females: 655 + (9.6 x wt in kg) + (1.85 x ht in cm) -
(4.7 x age)
Males: 66 + (13.7 x wt in kg) + (5 x ht in cm) - (6.8 x
age)
A. BEE x 1.2 = Caloric requirement for minimally
stressed patient
B. BEE x 1.3 = Caloric requirement for moderately
stressed patient (inflammatory bowel disease, cancer,
surgery)
C. BEE x 1.5 = Caloric requirement for severely stressed
patient (major sepsis, burns, AIDS, liver disease)
D. BEE x 1.7 = Caloric requirement for extremely
stressed patient (traumatic burns >50%, open head
trauma, multiple stress)
Protein Requirements:
A. 0.8 gm protein/kg = Protein requirement for
nonstressed patient.
B. 1.0-1.5 gm protein/kg = Protein requirement for
patients with decreased visceral protein states
(hypoalbumiaemia), recent weight loss, or
hypercatabolic states.
C. >1.5 gm protein/kg = Protein requirement for patients
with negative nitrogen balance receiving 1.5 gm
protein/kg
Estimation of Ideal Body Weight:
A. Females: 5 feet (allow 100 lbs) + 5 lbs for each inch
over 5 feet
B. Males: 5 feet (allow 106 lbs) + 6 lbs for each inch over
5 foot
Drug Levels of Commonly Used Medi-

cations
DRUG THERAPEUTIC RANGE*
Amikacin Peak 25-30; trough <10

mcg/mL
Amitriptyline 100-250 ng/mL
Carbamazepine 4-10 mcg/mL
Chloramphenicol Peak 10-15; trough <5
mcg/mL
Desipramine 150-300 ng/mL
Digitoxin 10-30 ng/mL
Digoxin 0.8-2.0 ng/mL
Disopyramide 2-5 mcg/mL
Doxepin 75-200 ng/mL
Ethosuximide 40-100 mcg/mL
Flecainide 0.2-1.0 mcg/mL
Gentamicin Peak 6.0-8.0; trough <2.0
mcg/mL
Imipramine 150-300 ng/mL
Lidocaine 2-5 mcg/mL
Lithium 0.5-1.4 mEq/L
Nortriptyline 50-150 ng/mL
Phenobarbital 10-30 mEq/mL
Phenytoin** 8-20 mcg/mL
Procainamide 4.0-8.0 mcg/mL
Quinidine 2.5-5.0 mcg/mL
Salicylate 15-25 mg/dL
Streptomycin Peak 10-20; trough <5
mcg/mL
Theophylline 8-20 mcg/mL
Tocainide 4-10 mcg/mL
Valproic acid 50-100 mcg/mL
Vancomycin Peak 30-40; trough <10
mcg/mL
* The therapeutic range of some drugs may vary depending

on the reference lab used.
** Therapeutic range of phenytoin is 4-10 mcg/mL in pres-
ence of significant azotemia and/or hypoalbuminemia.
Pediatric and Obstetric Formulas
Normal urine output = 50 ml/kg/d

Oliguria = 0.5 ml/kg/h
Normal feedings = 5 oz/kg/d
Formula = 20 calories/ounce, 24 cal/oz, 27 cal/oz
Ounce = 30 cc
Caloric Needs = 100 cal/kg/d
Calories/Kg = cc of formula x 30 cc/oz x 20 calories/oz
divided by weight.
Weight in Kg = pounds divided by 2.2

Weight in Kg = [age in years x 2] +10
Blood volume (ml) = 80 ml/kg x weight (kg)

Blood Products:
10 cc/kg RBC will raise Hct 5%
0.1 unit/kg platelets will raise platelet count, 25000/mm3.
1 U/kg of Factor VIII will raise level by 2%.
Naegele's Rule: LMP minus 3 months plus 7 days = Esti-
mated date of confinement.
GFR = (140 - age) x wt in Kg
85 x serum Cr
Normal Cr clearance = 85-105

Family Medicine

Uploaded by

Copyright:

Available Formats

Family Medicine

Uploaded by

Document Information

Copyright

Available Formats

Share this document

Share or Embed Document

Sharing Options

Did you find this document useful?

Is this content inappropriate?

Copyright:

Available Formats

Family Medicine

Uploaded by

Copyright:

Available Formats

Current Clinical Strate-

Current Clinical Strategies

Copyright © 2004 Current Clinical Strategies Publishing.

Current Clinical Strategies Publishing

Printed in USA ISBN 1929622-36-8

Admission Check List

Date and time:

Non-ST Segment Elevation Myocar-

Chronic Obstructive Pulmonary

Deep Venous Thrombosis

Sickle Cell Crisis

Specific Therapy for Pneumonia

Pneumocystis Carinii Pneumonia

Opportunistic Infections in HIV-

Lower Urinary Tract Infection

Active Pulmonary Tuberculosis

Peptic Ulcer Disease

Cirrhotic Ascites and Edema

Cholecystitis and Cholangitis

Specific Treatment of Acute Diar-

Tricyclic Antidepressant Overdose

Transient Ischemic Attack

Seizure and Status Epilepticus

Nonketotic Hyperosmolar Syn-

Thyroid Storm and Hyperthyroid-

Myxedema Coma and Hypothyroid-

Volume of sln (L) = Sodium to be infused (mEq)

Acute Gout Attack

Identifying Data: Patient's name; age, sex. List the

General appearance: Note whether the patient looks “ill,”

Example Progress Note

Date and time:

1 month Raises head slightly when prone; alerts to

2-3 months Smiles, holds head up, coos, reaches for

4-5 months Rolls front to back and back to front; sits

6 months Sits unsupported; passes cube hand to

8-9 months Crawls, cruises; pulls to stand; pincer

12 months Walking, talking a few words; understands

15-18 Comes when called; scribbles; walks back-

24-30 Removes shoes; follows 2 step command;

3 years Dresses and undresses; walks up and

4 years Hops, skips, catches ball; memorizes

5 years Jumps over objects; prints first name;

Birth - 2 HBV If mother is HbsAg positive

1-4 mo HBV The second HBV dose

2 mo DTaP, Hib, DTP and Hib are available

6 mo DTaP, (Hib), Dose 3 of Hib is not indi-

6-18 mo HBV, IPV The third HBV dose

12-15 Hib, PCV, Tuberculin testing may be

15-18 DTaP The 4th dose of DTaP

4-6 yr DTaP, IPV, DTaP and IPV should be

11-12 yr MMR Omit if MMR dose was

14-16 yr Td Repeat every 10 yrs

HBV = Hepatitis B virus vaccine; DTaP = diphtheria and

Recommended Schedule for Children Younger

Age Immuniza- Comments

First visit DTaP, (Hib), If indicated, tuberculin

4-6 years DTaP, IPV, DTaP is not necessary if

11-12 yr MMR MMR should be given at

10 yr later Td Repeat every 10 yrs